·No text on this page.

·17382
(HE KUPOLICIAMISASTRI
RES
UTE
MADRAS 4
ADRAS

·No text on this page.

·॥ ऋक्तन्त्रम् ॥
॥ सामप्रातिशाख्यम् ॥
ऋक्तन्त्रविवृति-सामवेदसर्वानुक्रमणीभ्या-
मुपेतम् ।

·MEHAR CHAND LACHHMAN DAS
Sanskrit and Prakrit Series
VOLUME THREE
Published by
MEHAR CHAND LACHIMAN DAS
Sanskrit Book Depot
Said Mitha Bazar, Lahore
(INDIA)

·RKTANTRAM
A PRATISAKHYA OF THE SAMAVEDA
CRITICALLY EDITED
WITE
An Introduction, Appendices, exhaustive notes,
a Commentary called Rktantravivrti and
Samavedasarvånukramani
BY
Vidyābhāskara, Vedāntaratna, Vyakaranatirtha,
SURYA KANTA SHASTRI MA MOL
Professor, DA V College
LAHORE
First edition
December 1933
150 Copies

·Published by
Printed by
L Tulsi Ram Jain Managing Prop
M/s Mehar Chand Lachhman Das
Booksellers, Lahore
Khazanchi Ram Jain,
at the Manohar Electric Press,
Said Mitha Bazar, Lahore

·No text on this page.

·T
Principal AC WOOLNER MACIE FAS B
Vice Chancellor University of the Panjab

·THE KU PUSWAMI SASTRI
RESH AITITUTE
MADRASA
TO
Principal A C WOOLNER, MA. CIE. F ASB
A GREAT HUMANIST
WHO
th we in his unwearicd services
AS
Us remy Irofesy of Sanskrt Principal, Onental College, Registrar
University * the Puujabs (18320) Honorary Librarian
Vasversity Usbrary (1905-2H1 Dean of L'oiversity Instruction and
Vice-Chancellor
gan
(rsity of the Purjab
inddrater
nadcy Prilly
in grateful acknowledgm-at of his dev tion as a Student and
Interpretor of lodía s Pa and of hus generous patronage
of Ind an Research
the most solemn and memorable occasion
The Silver Jubilee of
the University of the Punjab
December 1983

·Principal AC WOOLNER MACIEF AS B Vice Chancellor University of the Panjab

·THE '(!10CWAM SASTRI
RL.
mia UTE
MADRAS 4
MADA
TO
Principal A C WOOLNER, MA CIE FASB
A GREAT HUMANIST
WHO
through his unwearied services
AS
University Professor of Sanskrit Principal, Onental College, Registrar
University of the Punjab (1903-20) Honorary Librarian
University Library (1903-28) Dean of University Instruction and
Vice Chancellor
has made the University of the Punjab
what it is today
this humble work is dedicated
BY
his devoted pupil
in grateful acknowledgment of his devotion as a Student and
Interpretor of India s Past and of his generous patronage
of Indian Research
ON
the most solemn and memorable occasion
OF
The Silver Jubilee of
the University of the Punjab
December 1933

·No text on this page.

·PREFACE I 1 When I originally conceived the idea of this work, my in tention merely was to offer the Rktantra, along with the com mentary in the Devanagari characters, to the Indian students and at first, I thought that the same might be adequately given within the compass of a very small volume and in a little time But when, after completing my History of Hindi Literature in 1930 I took up the work seriously, I found it otherwise The work has been till now utterly ignored and neglected by Sanskrit grammarians, and the way in which Dr Burnell treated it, left little attraction to a serious study of the same, the only apparent charm which it claimed was, that this was the only available work of Sahatayana, one of the most ancient Indian grammariana, and this charm was rudely shattered by the erudite editor himself But a patient .and sifting enquiry into the matter led me, ultimately, to think otherwise, and the rich store of facts, which this little treatise yielded to me, supplied me with material, rich enough to build a fine bridge of hy pothesis, standing over which we could get a clear glimpse of the glorious region of the rising harvest of Indian grammar, a region till now left quite unlit by my learned predecessors Standing over this bridge, we are enabled to see the mighty figures of Audavraji, Gargya and Śakatayana, casting their stately shadows forward on the rich canvass of Yaska and Panini Nay more than that For ·11 the first time in the history of Indian Grammar, we have been vigorously urged to read in the works of Yīska and Pantai the essence of what Gargya and Śakatāyana had taught centuries before, centuries that were till now supposed quite beyond the range of history And thus it was that in attemp ting to settle one question I raised many more Wider and wider prospects opened out before me and thus step by step, I was lured on into the far spreading field of Indian Grammar that had been but little explored by my worthy predecessors The bridge of Rktantra has led us upto Audavraji whom the Vamśabrihmına mentions among the most illustrious ancients of Samavedic traditions and here we stand up sharp on the edge of yawning chism across which we are quite unable to find any way I know that hypothesis are very often only temporary bridges to connect isolated facts, and no wonder, if my light bridge should sooner or later be superseded by a more solid structure, but my work will still claim its utility and its interest is a repertory of facts II Truth has been my only guiding star ind in the love of truth I have not hesitated to express my views about the origin of the Siman which I im ifraid may not be palatable to my Indian friends and co religionists It is indeed a melancholy and in some respects i thunkless task to strike at the foundations of old religious beliefs beliefs in which as in a strong tower the hopes ind 14pirations of countless devotees through long 1464 hive sought refuge from the stress and storm of life Yet sooner or later it 18 incuitable 74 Frazer has put it that the battery of comparitive rescasch should breich these venerable wally muntled over with the ary and mosses and wild flowers of a thousand tonder and sacred 2550ciations sent the science is only dribbing the buns into position they have hardly yet begun to speak Thc t29k of building up into fairer and more enduring forms the old structures of belicfs i pri ·111 so rudely shattered, is reserved for other hands, more beautiful than mine, perhaps for future and happier ages We cannot foresee, and we have no right even to guess the new forms, which our religious beliefs and dogmas will assume in future Yet this uncertainty must not induce the scientist, from any consideration of expediency or reverential regard for anti quity, to spare the ancient moulds of belief however beautı ful and pious, from the fire of sifting criticism We must follow truth alone, irrespective of what comes of it or where it leads I have also discussed, in a new light, of course, the age long question of the priority of Purvārcika over the Uttararcika The problem has, for a long time, exercised the minds of two of the most brilliant Orientalists of the day ie Oldenberg and Chand Here I have accepted, though only partially, the verdict of H Oldenberg on my own indepen dent ground and have, in parte, rejected both, and that too, on my own account These and miny other things have been touched and discussed in the Introduction, and many more, particularly those, connected with the Pritisak hy a literature proper, wll be found in the notes 111 A word now about the manuscript material The manuscript intel, on which is founded this edition of Rktantra, is as follows -- A 'Thy MS belongs to the Central Library of Buroda No 12912 (1) p 24 of the Catalo, u of MSS in the Central Library, Birudi, Tol I Lillest ninth as 70 Simuat 1682 size 1 1/2x+ 1/2, materul liht coloured paper number of leavey in the full VIS 19, number of lines per page 10, character Dei anigari Contents It gives the text of the Rhtantri and Sama tantra It 14 distinctly and correctly written ·IV *500, 33 E 12 gr? in the B Its number is 12917, leaves 19, granthas 500, Catalogue of the MSS in the Central Library, Baroda р 24 Its size is 9x 4 1/2, materul paper, number of lines per pige 10, characters Devinigari It is a copy of the text together with the commentary, each separate rule being follow ed by its own comment It is distinct ind virtually correct The ?ppearince of the paper and orthography point out that the MS is, in no cive, later than the 15th A D It may be earlier The MS has been of great help to me С This VIS belongs to the idyar Library Its No is 8 1 Catalogue of the Sanskrit MSS Adyar Library, Part I, p 48 It is written in grantha charac ters, the total number of lines in the MS 19 200 It was transcribed into the Derana,uri scupt for me by Mr E Krishna Varnir It gives the text alone and is furly correct As regards the text of the Rhtintrı ill the MSS virtual ly agree As for the first Prapathahz ind the commentary, the MS B seemy decidedly better than the one used by Burnell With regard to the punctuation and cuphonic combina tions in the commentary, I have taken libertics for the sake of inserting references to the tramples Burnell and B are in no slight degree discordant with cach other, inconsistent with themselves ind at placey quite careless of the requirements of the sense In fact, they offer no suri stindırd to follow For the occurrence of vrimas, as printed, I am alone res ponsible But at placey—and these are many-where Bur and B are agreed in matters of punctuation and 'reading, I have followed them in the text but have proposed my emendations in the notes, which one can make the text sensible, and in that plone lies the real test of the ability of the editor In the same method are treated minor orthographical peculiarities, such ay writing a sibilant instead of visarjaniya before an initul sibilant and so on I have not, however, ·thought it advisable to interfere with the practice of writing anusvīra, instead of a nasal before initial dentals, because the practice is a peculiar feature of the Samavedic literature Cp note on 178 Similarly in citing examples on sutras 269-271 I have closely followed the manuscript authority, and have given only one letter, where the sutras require doubling, thereby showing that the phenomenon of doubling, which once formed go prominent a feature of the Vedic cuphony, fell into abeyance at some time, and to this time belong invariably all our Samavedic MSS Cp note on 271 and Macdonell, Vedic Gr p 21 in making references to the SV I have used only two numbers, the first designates the Arcıha ind the second de notes the consecutive number of the stanzas 15 was done by Burnell, and was lately adopted by M Bloomfield in his Concordance The divisions adopted by Benfes,-and those are the real and logical divisions of the SV --would have covered too much space and this would have spoiled the beauty of the printing for the same reason I have dispensed with the use of Indian virim9 in furour of the English full stop after brichets, when they occur in between two examples A MS of Rhtantra muito (Vo 26 G 3+ gra 23 Catalogue No of p 48) was secured from the Adyar Library which was transcribed for me into the Devina, ari script by Mr Variar, and the same has been printed here for the first time Burnell also had a copy of it, which he later on made over to the British Museum It would have then long time to set the same from London and moreover, I know from its specimen printed by Burnell in the Introduction of his Treva brihmana, that would offer me little help in constructing the correct text I therefore foresent the ser of delaying the work on that account A codex contuming numerous works on Samveda, some of them being of intrinsic worth w29 secured from the same ·VI library And I got from it Laghu rhtantra singraha (53D 12 gra 20 Citalogue p 48) Samuveda saptılıksın2 (33 D 12 gra 20 Catalogue p 54) und Simavedasarvanuhrmani by Talzirntui isin (33 D 12 gia 20 Catilo, uc p 54) transcribed into Devinigari for my personal use The first two works hue a direct bearing on the Rkt intra and will therefore be printed with copious comperitive notes and references in a separate volume Important citricts have been given from the third, which seems, to ill intents ind purposes, a modern work In my notes on Rktutri I hic instituted a careful and exhaustre comparison with other Pritisal hy is und Panini, have discussed in detul the peculiariticy of the Simavcdic grammır and have made for that the fullest use of all the eminent Indian and llestern unters on the subject In mihing references to the eximples, catalogued in Laghurhtantr and Samasıptılal sınI have followed the most tedious method ie SV = RV = IT RP = I Pr = rl' = und (1 for cich example, and have thus succeeded in presentin, more or less, a complete picture of the whole leilic cuphony aim has been throughout to follow meticulously the com parative method of studies, in which I hubeen wry liberal, perhaps mort liberal thin seem worthuhuli (sen to German scholars But I preferred to or in this direction than the contrary And it will not be any Cx2560 tion if I say that, having this boohlct of Pritisilny z literature in lus hind, the student of Vedic euphony will not feel the necessity of studying any other Prātisakhya or 2 hundred work In fict, my in! IV I shall have occasion to speak in the Introduction of the extreme brcvity and curtness of the text ind the com mentary Thus, though only imperfectly uded by the commentator, I have yet enjoyed one compensating advantage ·VII over those who have hitherto undertaken the publication of works of this class, in that I have been able to avail myself of the results of their labours Had it not been for their efficient help, more particularly that of Whitney, Benfey, Burnell, Wackernagel and Macdonell, much in the present treatise, of which the explanation has now been satisfactorily made out, might have remuned obscure, and I desire to make a general acknowledgment of my indebtedness to them and a host of other brilliant orientalists of Europe and America, whose authority I have cited very oftcn,ind with a very great regard indeed Much as I one to these big luminaries in their individual cupicity, I owe infinitely more to the collective Western Scholarship, my debt to which it is simply impossible for me to acknowledge here adequatels My interest in this kind of comparative Vedic study was first excited by the worhs of Pischel, Geldner, Oldenberg, Caland, Macdonell and Keith, who opened up i mental vista undreamed of by me befori But it is a long step from a luely interest in a subject to a sistematic study of it and that I took this step is entirely due to my beloved acāry 2 Principal A C Woolner, MA, CIF The debt which I owe to the 17t stores of his know ledge, thu abundance ind futility of his ideas, the unfailing sureness and clearness of his judgment and above all, his unwerricd kindness, can never be over estimated Never did I'fcel happier in my life and I mean it to be taken literally, thun while sitting it his feet and listening to his brilliant exposition of the Vedi and the comparative Indo European Philology Woolner' whit. Florious word' It stands, to me, for an immense volume of hard work, 1 mass of original research touched by the spuhof gemus, and expressed with the fire of the truc teacher Niy more It stands for two things that are inhnituly better than charm and popularity, fuirer than even wisdom uprightness ind honour And if I inspite of etting the privilege of working under such a ripe scholar, have een able, hitherto, onlv to touch, as I am quite aware only the * ·V111 1 fringe of a great subject, to finger only a few of the countless threads, that compose the mighty web of Oriental Studies, it is not because of the teacher's negligence, but merely because neither my time nor my knowledge, little as it is, has hetherto allowed me to do more I am also indebted, in my literary pursuit, to Dr Lakshman Sarup M A, D Phil, Professor of Sanskrit Literature, whose name conjures up many pleasant hours spent in his company, many memories both blissful as well as sad, and many benefits I am obliged, for readily procuring MSS, to my colleague and friend Pt Bhagavaddatta B A , Superintendent, Research Department, DA V College, Pandit Hans Raj, Librarian, Lal Chand Library Lahore and Lala Labhu Ram, Librarian, Punjab University Library I must also record my thanks to Mesare Mehar Chand Lachhman Dus, Lahore, who at my request started, in these days of terrible depression, the Series of Oriental Publi cations and thus, have laid the oriental learning under a deep debt of gratitude But the one person whose name I cannot pass over in silence, and to whom my debt with regard to this volumu is particularly heriy, is my wife Śrimatı Sukhada Dev, for to her has fullen the task-necessarily laborious and exacting-of preparing indices to the RT Nothing has, in deed, encouraged me more in this arduous and fascinating pursuit of research, than the loving and meticulous cire, with which she, my comrade of many hard years, has always helped me in my literary pursuits DA V COLLEGE, LAHORE Śravanı, the day of Raksābandhana 5 8 1933 SORYA KANTA ·CONTENTS I with N American songs 16 () Shamanism as the basis of the SV 17-18 List of Abbreuiations II Corrigenda III III The SV ie the Ar ciha 18-22 (2) The Arcika 19 (b) The Uttararcıka 20 (c) Uha and Lhya,anas 21 IV Chronology of the 22-33 SV 1 3 Introduction 1-101 I(0) Rktantra belongs to the SV 1-11 (6) Rktontra is a Pratisakhya of the sy (c) RI does not belon, to the Jaiminlyasaklı? (dl) Rr belongs to the Kau thumasakha (e) Fifty two treatison of the houthuin sakha (5) The precise scope of Pratisakhya 5-6 L9) The two cintlictin, viows reconciled (h) The origin of the Sakha (1) The two contlicin, vous reconciled 9-11 11 What is Samaicd?? 11 18 (6) The distinction between the kc and the Samay 1 (6) The origin of the Sinan 13 (c) Shamunism (d) Shamanism as the basis of the SV 15 dadaism compared (a) Was the Purvarcika or was the Uttararcika older 1 23 (6) The view of Oldenberg and Caland 24 (c) The viow criticised 25 (rl) Purvarcha is older than the Uttararcıka 26 (e) Uttararuha is older than the Brahinada 27 (1) Dithculties explained 29 (1) The later Canas are piuru Soy 29 (h) tha and Lhya are older than the PS 30 (2) The three tas os of the SV 31-33 V \Vhc was the author of tht RT? 33-46 A (n) The four notoworth points 3+ (b) The tochnical terms of the RT and Sr 35-36 (c) Audavraji tho author of Sr RT and Pps 37 (d) Affinity between RT $1 and Pps 38 (e) SV ·2 (e) The hypothesis 39 ) Anomalies in the SVPp noted 64 (f) The throo stages of the RP 40-41 (9) RT as a whole is prior to (m) Do we find any trace of 65 Papini and Katyayana 42 Sakatayana in the SV Pp ? (h) The three stages of the PpS 43 VIII The Age of the RT 65-68 (2) Pratisakhyas have suffered IY Analysis of the RT 68-71 extensive modifcations X Remarks 71-96 (3) The three sta, os of Virukta 4J (1) Poculiarities of the RT 71-72 VI Do we find any trace of Sahatayına's views (6) RI 19 loss comprehensive than the RPr 73 in the RT ? 46 (c) 1bhinhita sandhan the References to Sakatajana s SV 71-77 treatise on Phonetics 47-49 (II) RPr is entirely free from VII How is it that Panini Illovor inht 78 stands indebted to ( ) longthon, in the RV Śakatiyana ? 49-66 RP 79-96 (n) Punim his closely follow \I The Commentuy 96-99 ed the implications of the Roculiarities if the Com SV Pp 30-31 montary 96-99 (6) SVPp Yaska and Papini VIL Who is the nuthor all the three agree 2 of the Commentiry? 98 9 (c) Differences noted u3-ut VIII Cin we improve the (sl) Panini rojects ST Pp and text of the SV wth Yaska 5) (e) Panini rojects Yaska and the help of the Pri follows ST Pp 16 t15thhy? 99 101 () Papini accopts I 28ka only (1) Benfoy at variance with partly Saursunu 101 (9) Yashx tacitly follows tha () lood of a fresh odation of SVP 58-59 tho SV 101 (h) SVIP Yasks and Papini all the three roo 60 IV (1) Burnell refuted 61 The Pont 1-61 (0) Contrast between the V SV Pp and RVPp 62 (k) Is tho SV Pp in toto he Appendices 1-15 creatus of Gárgya ? 63 (1) Index to the Sutras 14 ·;*; אוסמ !! HE) RE 'IUTE MADEIASA MADIS 3 (8) Iudex to the Ganas refer red to in the Sutras 1) VI (2), Word index to the Sutras 4-8 (3) Referencos to the ro of the SV in the commentary 8-13 (4) References to the verses of the RV in the com mentary Notes 1-69 VII ki tantravirta 1-13 VIII (5) References to other works (6) Index to the melodies ro ferred to in the commen tary (7) Index t the proper names in the Sutras 14 Sīmai edasarzānuhiu mani 1-8 15

·LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
AB Aitareyabrahmana Ed by Haug, Bombay 1863,
Satyavrata Sanaśramin, Calcutta 1895
Altind Gr Altindische Grammatik By J Wachernagel
(Compare with it Bartholomae, ZDMG L 674 735)
Gottingen, 1896
Anc Skt Lit A History of Ancient Sanskrit Literature
By M Muller London, 1860
AP Atharva Pratiśākhy? Ed by Vidyarthi Lahore; 1923
Arbr or Arseyabr Arseyabrāhmana Ed by AC Burnell
Manglore, 1876
AV Atharvaveda Ed by R Roth and WD Whitney
Berlin, 1856
Bergaingn Bergaign et v Henry Manual pour etudier le
Sanscrit Vedique Paris 1891
BKSGW Beitrage der Konige Sachs Geselschaft der Wis
senschaften
BLWGI Beitrage zur Literature wissenschaft und Geistes
Geschichte Indiens Bonn, 1926
BrŲ Brhadaranyakopanısat Poona, 1902
Bur Burnell's Rktantra Manglore, 1879
CA Caturadhyayıla Ed by WD Whitney (JAOS)
New Haven (New yorh), 1862
ChU Chandogyopanısat Poona, 1890
Comp Gr Comparative Grammar By Bopp London, 1885
Critical Studies Critical Studies in the Phonetic Observa
tions of Indian Grammarians By Siddheshvar
Verma London, 1929
Dbr Daivatabrahmana or Devatādhyāyabrahmana Ed by
Jivanand Calcutta, 1881

·11 Dr or Drah Drāhyāyanaśrautasutra Ed by J N Reuter (Incomplete) London, 1904 Ele of South Ind Pal Elements of South Indian Paleogra phy By A C Burnell London, 1878 Einl Einleitung zum Sāmaveda Benfey Leipzig, 1848 Epigr Ind Epigraphica Indica Gesch der Ind Lit Geschichte der Indischen Literature By M Winternitz Leipzig, 1909 GGA Gottingische Geleherte Anzeigen GGKP Gobhılıyagrhyakarmaprakasika Benares 1905 Grundriss d Indonrischen Phil Grundriss der Indoarischen Philologie und Altertumskunde Ed by George Buhler, 1896 ff, F Kielhorn (since 1899) and now by H Luders and J Wackernagel Strassburg Hist of Sht Lit A History of Sanskrit Literature By A 4 Macdonell London, 1917 Ind Ant Indian Antiquary Bombay, 1872 ff Indiens Lit und Cult Indiens Literatur und Cultur in his torischer Entwichlung By von Schroeder Leipzig 1913 Ind Phil Indian Philosophy By S Radha Krishan London, 1923 Ind Stud Indische Studien Ed by 4 Weber Leipzig 1850 ff Int to RP Introduction to the Rh Pratiśikhya By Man gala Deva Oxford, 1922 JAOS Journal of Imerican Oriental Soceity New Haven (New York) 1850 ff JB or Jumbr Das Juminiyabrahman in Auswahl Bi W Calund Imsterdom, 1919 Jainp Beitrage zur Grimmatık des Juna Prahrit By Muller 1876 JGOS Journal of German Oriental Soceity JNMV Jaiminlyanylyamalavistar? Ed by Theodor Gold ·111 stucker London, 1878, M M Śivadatta Poona, 1892 JRAS Journal of Roval Asiatic Society London 1834 ff JS Jumıniyı Sımhiti Ed by W Caland (Indische Forschungen, ed by 4 Hillebrandt) Breslau, 1907 Kathakop? Kithikopiniszt Kithikopiniszt Calcutta edition KS Kath ih 25 mhiti Ed by von Schroeder Leipzig, 1900 KGS Kathakagrhvasutra Ed by W Caland Lahore, 1925 KZ Kuhn's Zeitschrift Luman CR A Statistical account of Noun inflection in the Veda (JAOS 1840) 325 601 Lāty Látyāyanaśr lutasutra Ed by Anunda Chandra Culcuttı, 1872 LŚ Loması śiksī in Siksasangraha LŚĆ or ŚŚ Lighuszbdendusehhırı Benaras, 1911 Mibh Vy 1k trên mnh bhasy Ed by F Kichhorn Bombay, 1892, M M Śivadatta Bombzi, 1917 Modern Eng Gr I Modern English Grammar By Otto Jesperson Heidelberg 1922 MS Vatrā ani Samhiti Ld by von Schroeder Leipzig, 1888 N Nanibhai on Puspisutri NirS or NS Niradi Sihsa in Silsisangrah und burnell's RT Mir Niuhti Ed by R Roth Gottingen 1852, L Sarup Lahorc, 1927, The Nirukt?, its place in Old Indian Liter ture, its etymologies By Mannes Shold Lund, 1926 Out of Eng Phon An Outline of I'nglish Phonttics By Dinicl Jones Cambridge, 1932 P Pánını, Pinuni's Grammatik By Otto Bohtlink 1887 Phil der Upa Paul Dcussen I nglish Translation Edin burgh, 1908 Pp Padapatha PW Petersburger (Sanskrit) Worterbuch By Otto Boht lingk and R Roth 1852-1875 ·IV PSıksa Paniniyasıksa with a gloss Ed by Becana Rama Benares, 1887 PpS Pusprsutra Ed by R Simon Ed by R Simon Munchen, 1908 PVB Pañcavimśabrāhmanı with Sayana Ed by Anand Chandra Calcutta, 1870-74, Translation by W Caland Calcutta, 1932 Pars Paraśarı Siksa in Śıksāsangrah Rel and Phil of the Vedi and Upa Relig on and Philosophy of the Vedi and Upanisads By A B Keith (HOS 31-32) 1925 Rel of the Veda Religion of the Veda By M Bloomfield New York, 1908 RPr RkPratisakhya Ed by M D Snastri Allahabad, 1931 RT Rhtantra RV Rgvedı Ed by M Muller London, 1873 RVPp Rgredupad zpātha Ed by M Muller, 1873 Ś1 Sabdanuśīsın z of the Juna Sahatāyana Ed by Gustav Oppert Madrass 1893, Bombay, 1907 ŚB Śatapathabrahmana Id by 1 Weber Leipzig, 1924 Sabdak Śabdzhaustubha Chowhhamba Sht Series, 1929 SR Śıbdarītna Ed by Rima Shastri Benzres 1888 ŚŚs Sinkhiyannárnut24uti i With the Commentary of Viradattasuta Anartiya Ed by A Hillebrandt Calcuttı 1888 Śs śiksisen raha Benrres Sht Series, 1873 Say Siyan? SBE Sicred Bools of the Fast Ed by M Muller Oxford, 1879 ff Shpbr Samhitopunisadbrahmani Ed by AC Burnell Manglore, 1877 SK Siddhantal rumudi Ed by M M Sıvadatta Bombay, 1909 SRV Sayara on RgvedEd by M Mullar, 1890 SV Samaveda Ed by Theodor Benfey Leipzig, 1848 ·V SVPp Samaveda Padapatha Ed by Satyavrata Sama sramın, Calcutta Systems of Skt Gr Systems of Sanskrit Grammar By Belvalkar Poona, 1918 TA Tzittırıyaranyaka Ed by R L Mitra Calcutta, 1872 TB Taittiriyabrahmana Ed by Shama Sastri Mysore, 1921 TPr Taittiriya Prātiśākhya Ed by W D Whitney (JAOS) New Haven 1871, with Tribhāsyaratna by Shama Sastri, Mysore, 1906 TS Taittırıyasamhita Ed by Mahadeva Sastri, Mysore, 1897 Vakyap Väkyapadıya Ed by Rāma Krsna Shastri Benares, 1884 VBr Vamsabrthman? Ed by Satyavrata Samasramın Calcutta, 1892 Ved Stud Vedische Studien By Pischel and Karl F Geldner Stuttgarter, 1889 Ved Myth Vedische Mythologie By A Hillebrandt Breslau, 1891, 1927 Vedic Chant Vedic Chant Studied in its Textual and Melodic Form By J M von der Hoogt, 1932 Veda of Black Yajus Veda of Black Yajus School Trans lated By A B Keith, (HOS 18 and 19) New Haven, 1914 Vedic Gr Vedic Grammar By A A Macdonell Strassburg, 1910 VPr Vajzsaneyi Pritiśākhya Benares Skt Series 1888, Calcutta, 1893 VS Vajasaneyi Samhita Ed A Weber Berlin, 1852, by Lakshman Shastri Bombay, 1912 W Worterbuch zum Rgveda By Hermann Grassmann Leipzig, 1873 Whitney W D A Sanskrit Grammar Leipzig, 1879

·1738a
VI
WZKM Wiener Zeitschrift fur die Kunde des Morgenlandes
(Ed by Buhler ) Wien, 1887 ff
YV Yajurveda, with the Commentaries of Uvata and Mahı
dhara Chowkhamba Benares, 1912
YVŚ Yajñavalkya Śıkså in Śíksásangraha
ZDMG Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlandischen Gesel
schaft Leipzig 1847 ff

·CORRIGENDA The reader is requested to consult notes, while reading the text, corrections and emendations proposed therein are not repeated her TEXT PL Reid For 14 9 18 14 20 2 24 13 25 9520 26 8 उच्चानुच्चसधि० त्रिरकान्तग्रहणात् । श्रणात्यधिकार 176 23 महादीनि 228 124 1 6 पुरस्कृतो आपद्यते लुबुदेषसस्य 31 1 28 28 उच्चानामुच्चसधि० त्रिरकान्तग्रहणात् । त्यधिकार 177 123 महादानि 128 143 16 पुरुस्कृतो पद्मते बुदेषसस्य 20 पश्यन् तमूषु 31 5 34 8 34 16 36 10 38 13 पश्यन् त्यमूषु . 13 NOTES 1 2 9 P Col L 2 21 Konda o handa 3 2 17 explicit explicito 6 1 6,31 chords cards 6 consonants consononts 11 2 34 phenomenon phenomena 19 2 16 explicitly explicitoly 20 2 phenomenon phenomena 37 2 31 sahah | jah SVPp explanation wrong It is not suha | ojah but sabas ) jah 1 ·INTRODUCTION 2) 70 Thantu leliny i th Yümanacka The toit monly culud lihtutulurlarını, belongs U U SV and not to the RI This is shown by the following - Iuficquently Ulude to sim in stobli ind the like Cp rimms Sutra Ionis Sutras aimsı idi und 11.11 11 stubhi 150 sm211 hun 90 266 In (Sim11) 29 11) lithit 10 slili imey! y dyan 1) 113 (h) Chi teclunc aliumis used in it belong to the Simuvedic lituiture This will lushnin details later on Vive und \udurii the tho Licient icarvis of the SV Jono un cited (d) Ral 337 is quoted on s9 This is not found in the IV, but only in the 51 The bore lucts show that Rhtan ili belongs to the si lud not to the RV It is needless to refer to the commentus in support of this vien Wantana Pitrail hua of the I I Piltisil hvis defined by Goldstuches is 1817 tantrimit tantiam var hyoni pizsantastantavastantramity nyante lyatha tadanshasya tunsunasvad tantoranugrahakan tathedawaphy a nekanya laksyaryotynıthali yasi on ka ika Vol 1 p Guldstuckor Icademy Puls 9 190 p 70 quoted by Burdoll RI p vu Caland PIB Tot pil 2 ·2 RT does not belong to the Jumıniyasabha mmatical treatise which shows how the prday must change in order to become the real hymnıcıl text, and again, how by means of the hrama, the padne become the true representa tives of the Samhiti' The SV has no l12m2 text,' but in other respects, our treatise agrees with this definition and we may safely call it a Pritiśthhy? But because a Piztishhy? is its name implies, must be concerned with ? particular Sikha of 2 Veda out treatise must belong to a particular Sihhi of thc SV und not to all of them Burnell haguen the following Sabhas? of the SV - (1) Kruthumi (2) Jaiminiz? (3) Ruiy iniy (4) Gautami (5) Maigeja To which of these Šahkās does the RI belong (1) It does not primarily belong to the Jammusal ha (a) The prominent feature of the JS in the conversion of d into 1 This is not stated in it (b) Rule 58 prescribes circumflex for 'irdle smin (SV I 239) The JS reads 'vrcht 7-min hence the rule is not applicable to it (c) Rule 114 prescubes rangati z for Tin Ciscs like 'stuia The phenomenon is not found in the JS Cp Benfly 'svarvā asurcbhyah 1 254 = JS 'svarv im turcbhy ih libredastu shanuntul sud juurvode jitantahalı samavedali padantalı stat sau hitautustuathirvanlı Yohipraptılahsan 2 VS work in the varios labiory \o 948 ? Muller Ant Sht It Caran is pp 361 378 l'un RI 2 x 1 1 Yinon, Tedische Schulen PP 27-31 Pripaperhard aan 19 Samaramun TrayIparicaya p 40 3 Caland Jyp 33 l'or a discusgion in-! 1 Turner Middle Indian-d and did in BI WGT 4 35 ·RT belongs to the Kauthumasakha 3 (d) midhva asmabhyam' II 982 = 'midhvamasmabhyam,' ‘agne devaihāvaha' II 142 = 'agne devam ihāvaha' Rule 112 implies 'vasuriha,' 'rudrāx aditya uta' and 40 on JS on the contrary reads 'visumriha,' 'rudram adityam utr' ind so on.' 1 (2) On treatise does not primarily belong to the Sāhhā of Satya mugni anl Rintiyana - Patiñjalı states that the followers of Satyamugri and Rinājana read a half, and o in instances liht 'sujāte eśva su nrte,' 'adhvaryo odrıbhih sutam' According to Bhattoji?, the fict w29 expressly noted in the Prátisīkhy? of this Sahha This is not referred to in our tre itise 13) Rr does not primarily belong to the (runtamāhhā The Glutamisiksa?, 2 treating on the doubling of (SV) consonants, makes in the end the following statement - "htha wipt ihsar umchimudāhrt im prātisīkhye i tra hi 112 hi yımıksu (1 301) itinu 257575217h 1 gautamenoktam i 11 septıksai it pirah samyogo bhuintil This 14gmficint, 14 it shows that there existed a Pra nis ikhyz, presumably of the Gutumas, which recorded this phenomenon Our ticuse doch not even hint at it (4) RT lors not primarily belong to the largıya'ahka On sutri 94, the commentitor cites 'endra Sinasım' (1 129) iu in crimple of the gunsandhi The Samhita of the Vrigeyes han undra 971175m (») Ihr tieutive primaril, bulong to the harithumalaha 5 thes uliantins (land 1 pp? 31 acp poto on 2 3 Bui noll R1 pm 4 Benfo Slinl p x11 In later limnos the flowers of the Sobha spiead in the Gujrat en RL Vitin, Chuni jopani at tr inslation Introduction p 4, 510,11vg Dia Recensionen des Caranavyuh 27 The houthum 19 and Rånavaply as while the Jaimimyas uise six and others only five Cp the 1 ou ses at the beginning of PpS Y 22 and R Simon, Pps p 495 4 USA solen notes in musi ·4 Fifty two treatises of Kruthumaśāhlie The references to the ic, in the stras rru withouť any exception, found in the Kauthuma SV The commentator h24 closely followed the same text Moicover, we meet with explı cit atatements to this effect To quoti only one kauthuman im he grunthi dhieti vārti cedatrahi I uscit * dvipancāsadime grinth ih sihhay th heuthumenhill prohtah samodadhiu yism icchiute smirie suniscitih il tasmädvu sāmasāhh izām granth bhedo mig idynte i Stautasmärtoditu yasminni muhvcta hatham ema || venāiany akumuho tri rihasyim 12muci itt! chandany Tranyahe can am muntah sotturk ih smetih il chandas, iditru un stubhahipidam si iccitustiyum I tāndyah sadumszkam sīm udhiniscy zhe 19th ill devatādhy Tyliamsahhvāh samhitop iniszttithul stimopanisccia bizhm in mudihit th 11 nāradi lom iśı siksī gautimi cuti u tridhil halprsutrum tathi hsudr um lity 11 anal menaill upagranthuh piñcavidho mdinam tinds usunami anupatsth ādınustotram halpinupıdımcvC1 || etaddaszudham sutizm sima,esu c? usiutum I rktantiam sīmatantiam ci stñjñalaks inimesi ull 1 tho Ctland has treated these treatises in delul inlus lolaitun IS pp 1-14 PVT pluu 2 Amording to Turnell (Catalogue tu collection of Sendut lly han don 1970 1 41) the last tw) Puspithal es at Rheinta 110 anlle 1 Sundnapr skal dos Caland bolds (PIT Inti p vi) that this is probably the same as the Sanjualaksana mentioned in the Caranaijului But the last two chapters of the RI 1910 pothin. peculiar to cline in this appellation and a soparito reference in the Carinavyuha le bave on the other hand a Sannikaran ibliassa work in the Library | Ayatı Society of lon, 1 (A Descriptive Catalo,ue of Sht Mss in the (uvern inent Collection The Asiatic Suiets of bongal Vol II p 10:)) which 19 a commentary on Sañilukarını, tre tine in sutra form on the stebhay و\ 1 ·1 The precise scope of a Pratıšakhya 5 dhatulaksanakam' ca syadıtı vyaharanānı ca i anukramanıkä сeti naigeyam ca tatah param || phullam gobhilagrhyam ci mıntralaksanakam tatha i gay itryadıvıdhānım ci tatih stobhānusamharah chandogapuisistam tu grhy? singrah i eva ca 1 śrīddhakalpt tato scdyas idhanam gobhılıvakam II snānuudhirupākuma stāvanena paro vidhihi dvipzñcăsıdına gr antha vrsotsaigāntagāh smrtih 11 iti huthumusikhiyim grunth samkhyā yathahram it! ctanıdhiti nikulam vcdoktım jñitum irhitill GGKP pp 28-29 This makes the position quite cleri But assuming th it tne RT belongs to the Kruthumasikha, how to explain those statements of it that ippuently apply to the tests of other Sākhay und icfucnces to the luthorities, that have their own Śakhas Thi ciplination will be found in the following l'he process op of a Prātisal hya The original ind perhaps more significant term for the Pratisahhya was the piruzda which implied that the treatise in question belonged to { socul group (pusad) in which, amons other things, the general punciples of phonetics llc re adop ted to lodic texts bi oral instruction According to i porticular words put in in chantin, the various semang And this is arutlı what the Carinaisuhe seems to have in you and what the context hors requiros noi trostise i Il santantu edited by Satvarati 111asianın but not menti tedd be and an is oud PIB Not yet dontified Punted tent hos thuasang thu lutip 11. od! W Od rhisisud.r ham nama paar isi8tum nibhilaputrahetam Thue adopted this op! partial Store (ution Studio paused and sell on asthenil, fi open discusulon opposed to 11 msed wluch implied secrot instruction Oldenboi, 19 inclined to believe that the real sense mind 18 worship of 10VOLODCO and that the word oxpressO4 the me meaning as upasana /DVI 1 497 ff 1 is 70 ff Die Lehre der i da nigaden p 37 for the view of Dousson (p Phil of lr 16 ff I the term uf!

·6 The precise scope of a Pratıśakhya Yaska'each Carana of a Veda had its own pārsada, and the term Prātisakhya, which obtained later on to designate these treatises, has been etymologically explained by Madhava” as "pratisakham bhavam pratiśākhy im" and this leaves absolutely no doubt that there existed, at some time, as many Prátisakhyas as there were schools of the Vedas But contrary to this, the author of Vaidihabharana* states, in no less explicit terms, (1) that the word Pritisakhya padaprakıtıpı sarvacar ınanam parsadını N 1 17 for the difference between Caranı and Sakhi cp Vullot, Inu St Lit pp 125-129, 377, 378 Cp also his admuable discussion on Cirupp 304-378 2 Jhanendır Sarasvati on Sk Pamibi IV 3 )9 3 (a) Sıx Pratisakhyag ue available -- (1) TPr belonging to the Auhheya (2) VPr belonging to the Vajasaneying (3) RPr belonging to the Sakalas (4) RT belonging to the hauthum29 (5) CA belonging to the Saunakasakha of the 4 V (6) Apr newly discovered text with 1 cuplus tuipmentary in the piese (b) References are found to three more (1) Satyamuyrı Pratisakhya Cp above (2) Gautama Pratisakhya (3) Carayapiya Pratisahhya Devapalo on hgs ( 11) refers to it lle says "tatha ui cu iyaniyasuti im purukito chvachrayoh iti purusnb dal kıtaśahdaś ca lupyzte yıthas unul hyam cho chre paratalı" | Soo Chland, KGS For kichis = hipsa ip Madonell, Vedic Gr p 31 T owe this information to my fuend Pt Bhannedd atta of the D A V College, Lahore () Phere may have existed a distinct Patisekhya for the ßaskala Sakha of the RV Refaun, to'nuite śiantasya sekliyava dorth the cominon lator on ŚŚs (xu 13 5) states - apadruto nama sandhu haskala! Us prasiddhal I insyodahirapam" | This sandhi has not been noticed by the RPr which is, other irisa, most comprehensive and complete Does it not lunt at a RPr other than the presont one ? On TPr IV 11 dvitri akhnvisayat ve pı tad nadharapatayopapatteh tatha bahwicam kalabaskalıtmahankhadvayavisayam prätasakhyam prasiddham I?

·The two conflicting views reconciled 7 refers to a group of Sakh74, (b) that the RPr pertains both to Sakala and thc Baskıla Śakhas (c) and that the examples quoted by the TPr, but not found in the extant text of the TS must be traced in the extinct Sabhās of the Veda Thiy 19 tacitly confirmed by C'vata' and the commentators of other Pritisakhy 24 How to explain this conflict? The conflut e planned The "wingcd songs of the Vedas, which had been composed it widely separated periods of time and space, were united at some tune in collections and ascribed to famouy rsis of prehistoric times preferably to the earliest ancestors of those fimilics, in which the sono in question were handed down? And, is may be cxpected in a time, when there existed no central authont,3, ind people either did not hnou how to write, or if they did, is I think vers likely, they did not, perhapa Cp wiyamudahan inan RP w 33,' uportyeti sambit ayam na die yato / vrttaudimudaharian distam lvation 1. Pim 33 Cp also 6 Vi 54 2 4 Winternite Gesch der Ind litt lol I (En, trans ) p ji Fven AB VII 11 33 shows how little real omple existed CP also Il Ancient Indiin Polity pp 13 ff Bloomfield The Rel of the lada p 1 Accordin, tu Buhler whose theory has hoon monetalli copited the brahını alphabet was of Somiti origin, and dornved ultimately from a Phonoun cupt Cf Cambridge History of India p 62 l'ubilor Indische Paleo, raphy ((rrundriss d Indo alische Phil) Was Davids preferred pro homiti Fuphratan origin via Draudian traders lor the thoor v of Iption origin up I ohnmann Haupt, ZDVG Irum PP 51--79 In Vaher jodaro and the Indian Civilisation Vol II (h. III (PP +33 432, Prof Lindon mahes out a strong case for derivin, the only liahni alphabol of India frou tho script recently discovored in Indus But au ordin, to su John Varshall (Vol Ip 52) it is no more than it suumme prompted wainly bi rosem blances betworn the two Pum fauc thoio is a strong presumption in favour of the Irahmi alilibot laun loon evolved like othe alphabets frow a pictoginplanu script aspe ially 19 18 19 120w established thnt such & script had actunlly been in lino ( n Indian wol I am however inclined to follow Prof Langdon ·8 The origin of the Sakhas for seciecy's sahe', commit them to wuiting, the variations in the arrangement of contents and text, were inevitable And Since these collections, that presuppose a tolerably elaborate scheme of priestly practices in connection with the hymns addressed to the gods?, were meant mainly for utilitarian purposes, the priest must have shaped and reshaped them according to the requirements of the sacrifict, which nzurally varied with different sets of the priests Again, the hymns were, in no siy, entirely immune from the phonetic law of change I certain number of local varieties in accent and pronunciation, and in the recital of the humnscript in and became sanctioned by the trudition of different families or schools These could not be given up, nor was there any means of determining which was the ancient ud most correct way of reciting the sacred songs of the Vedt Thus there arose Sakhas and upaśikhas We have just noted that sacrifice was the dominant note of the Vedic life, and just 25 ? priest regarded the ritual of Wintei pitz, Gosch der Ind Iitt Tol p 32 Read Chapter on “Dio Schuft und die uberlieferung der Indischen litteratur 35-37 Bloomfield, Rol of the loda p 31 3 (a) Hill zbrandt showed (ZDVIG 705) that stage onllo) than that recorded, the R, verde Wels domitels prutical collection of hymns, ananzed scuording to then with the suficil nu ul 1, u10st this op Oldenberg 676 1 1907 pp 211 ff both IRAS 1908 pp 224-9 The Rel und Plut the lod, lol I plop uso Goldner, Tod Stud Vol 1, Die Vlet ophonische Bedeutun, von vran i 141 et sa Blomfield, Rol of the Voda (hiptor' The Hiera ue Religion The Rolodes in oneral i lymn book for uso at the three fuo ceremonies They iro a horntil literature in a vory oxtiomo senso Not only do they ruflect the less into outs and the class View point of their priestly uuthors, but they devote thomselios exclusively to this ultra hieratic phase of roli,on, the religion contri about the three-fire cult Not only are so ulat matters not prim suly considered at all but oven those more popular Teligious performancos aro ignored, which did not require thus oluborito nitus, and which foi mod the staple religion of the great m 195 f tho Iryan people nearly all of the few 12 L connection ·The two conflicting views reconciled 9 his school as full of magic and mystic power, so also he held the text of his school particularly mystic and all important! And the time the icxt of 2 Sabhā was once fixed, numcrous devices for its puuty ind preservation were invented, the chief among them being Prātısākhyas, which like their basis, the Samhită, must have been distinct for all the ſakhas Rut with thc close of the Brāhmana period, sacrifice receded into the background, and speculations of higher sortphilosophic, cosmic, psycho-physical, and theosophic-grew up, ziving impetus to the tendency for generalisation- The priest now began to look for the unity under the veil of the diverut of his gods , of sacrifice, that 112s no more than a gift to Ryvodic hymns of which this is not true, cle later additions to the collow tion, is it stands, though this does not necessarily imply that the hymds thomselves are lite Cp liauklın 1d,orton, in Religions of the Past und Prosent, p 122 note (palsu Vulloi loc Sht Iit "Earliot indica tions of the eromouinl" PP 751-492 1 ) more moderate and logical Vou op Keith The liel ind Phil of the Veda Vol 1 Popular and Jieratiu Religion Pp jj 7 Webshbası yumutsi jys praysha num tu vah kutumblit duimodha wonim tittisia jutim, harmapradipa Puinell, RI Inti p 1, bloomfield kel of the loda p 25 For the idea of unity in the 1 lip 129 the wost often translated hymn of the 1.V Seo Wutnov, T10psb j3 | Jb JIL 33, 3,9 The hymn ovuhos admnition, not so much for the achieva ment, but for the thinlers who ondeavoured to realize the ultimate principle of life and inlod 10 satisfy himselt Deuss (Gesch der Phil ] 1 121, 121) melines to think that the sa, as were able to dis uummate botween the ultimato punuple it life in the phenomenal world Sou also Radlı kulinan, lud Phil P 101 where he compaios In Utlos doity, the unmurod movar lui dotulsip my article on hinmarijnina i tho Orontal Colla.o 12-azino 1928 See also Koth, Rol and Phil of the Vodlol II Ch YVI PF +33-39 As foi the Bialumnas, these in various plau os aio conscious of higher philosophi cal truths, which they ignoio and turn to ritual purposes Cp Doussen, (osch der Phil I l 17200 heith does not agree with this view and follows Oltmaro who lojots Deusson s viow up l'Histoirie dos idoos theosophiques I 1.27 ·10 The two conflicting views reconciled these gods', and of the text that accompanied the act of the gift At this stage, he earnestly questioned the duality in all phases of life, theoretic as well as practical He no longer felt diffident to receive from rivals- what was wanting in his own, and also preferred to learn their texts besides his own? Slowly and gradually he arrived at that text of a Veda, which seemed to him as the basic one, and this he adopted, leaving others to take their own care For its preservation he did not require 1 1ylor, Primitivo Culture Vol II P 375 Feist Indo germanon p 351, though he profois to trace all worship to the cult of the dead kultur dan I 2 gan namnatam siasahlayam parohtau nurodhı yat | vidvadbhis tadanuştheyam ignihotradı karmavat harmapı adipa I 3 Cp Muller, Anc Sanskrit Lit pp 51 364 65 375 3 vodinadhitra vodou va sodam vapi sathakraman | Madu III 2 Cp Medhatithi on it "odasabdal sahhavacano wahhyatali | tisrah sakha adhısıta dre ekam salhachasmad sedonda trokasmadovo 4 Cp Muller, Anc Sht It p 119 The differencos hetueon the various Sabhas of the SV are hardly of any importance at any rate not more than what are found in the different ms of any ancient nuthor But with regard to the owission of y und v the Sabhas actually differed Alreads Samaśramın pointed out in his Irunthu (p 19) that the hauthumas ging hå u while the Rapayinivas sing has u (cp Calud JS Finl p 11) inay add here that according to RT 108 all Sahlias omity when it is followed by a consonant, Naizi omits it, when it comes in botwoou the two vowels (159) but some prescribe the omission of u also whou it is so pluced (160) The Kauthumas, however, prescribe the half omission of y and » (161), and this may, probably, be the reason for the inconsistency (so ably noted by R Simon, Pps 527) to be found in the XV muss with rogard to the preservation or otherwise of of North India preservo y, while those from the suuth invariably omit it, and this is significant, because we have alieady noted that the hauthumas spread in later times towards Gujrat and south is ret the home of the Kapayapiyas And the rule 159 suggests that south was also the home of the followers of the Naigoyaśá khá In the Brahmanic period, whon sacrifico occupied the centre of the stage those minor differences were made much of the priests justifying thoir own and running down those of others But with the tide of generalisation all and v Thoms ·What is Samaveda ? 11 more than one Pratiśākhya, and the best of the lot he adopted, with minor modifications, recording therein the chief variations found in others, as the views of eke, apare, acāryāh and so on? And this is exactly what seems to have happened in the case of our treatise, and although it primarily belongs to the Kauthama school, yet it records meagerly, of course, the views of others II And the fact that Rktantra is a Prātiśākhya of the SV introduces us to the important question "What is Sāmareda ?” By the SV we generally take a number of unconnerted verses, nearly all of which occur in the RV and which modıfied in several ways, are chanted mostly at the soma sacrifices The words, together with the chant, are supposed to constitute a såman, and when the SV is referred to, only the Samhită, or collection of words are meant But this is erroneous Scholars of old times understood by a saman, a melody or chant, independent of the words The earliest records, available at present, bear out the distinction between melody and words, and treat the first as more important than the latter This will be clear from the following The distinction was clear in the time of the RV Cp - (a) gayatrena prati mimite arkamarhena sama traistubhena vakam vākena vākam dvipada catuspadoksarena mimate sapta vånih 11 RV 1 164 24 was changed, differences which were aliendy nominal were jot minimi till the major ſakha got the better of minor one And just as there remain ed only the major Śåkhá or Sakling of a Voda curiont, so also there remained only the major Pratisakhya of a Veda current For details see Whitney, TPr pp 133-133, Luders, Vyasasıkça The discussion on the nature and scope of Pratıšakhyas held by Muller in Anc Skt Lit pp 116-146 is yet the wost exhaustivo 2 Cp also RV 1 10 1, 5 $ 4 14, 8 3 22, Vuller, Anc Skt Lit p 489 1 mised, pp 21-22 ·12 The distinction between the Rc and the Saman (b) tasmad yajñat sarvahuta rcah sāmāni jajñire i chandamsi jijñire 1 RV 10 4 8 (c) The word 'rcisama' which meinel 'he for whom the sāman is sung upon the rc' occurs eight times in the RV 2 The distinction was clear in thc time of the AV Cpich sâmını chandāmsi puranam y zjusā saha i AV 11 424 3 It was known to Yach who $215- sāmi sammitimica I 741 2tervirci samam meni iti nai danah 11 Nir vil 12 4 It was clear to Jumini who say (a) gitisu gāmākhyā (II 1 36)! (b) In order to press home the distinction Jumini devotes the second pāda of the seventh chapter to a discussion on nathamtara and includes in the end that the word i uthamtara denotes 7 nim in independent of the words on which it is sung (c) The distinction is again stic sed in 211 5 It was hnown to Bhartrhari who states - rco và gitimatram vă sima dravvāntaram ni tu i gıtıbhedād yigrhyrnte tiene uhrt i rcah Il Vāhyapadiya I 109 6 Bhatta bhaskari and Sayina issign different rsis to the rc and the sãman Sung upon it 7 A sãman is sung upon the rk The idiom is old and repeatedly occurs in the Brahmanas Were there no dis tinction between the two, the idiom would have been meaningless 1 Bloomfield, The god ludia and the SV 17h1 1903 y 156 The Rel of the Veda p 38 See also SAOS kr 66 Against this Cp Otto Bohtlink in BKSGW April p 7 ff samoktıbrhadadyuktı gitayamıcı kovalo i gano va gana avoti smarsato saptamoditam XVII 2 ·THE KUPPUSW RESE, CHI, THUTE MADRAS 4 The origin of the Saman 13 'It is W25 1 is thus clear from the above, that since the time of the RV on to that of Sāsana, schol trs knew that there was a distinction between the Rhind the Sāman and that the two were not insepuble The Saman in short, u 25 a tune, a melo dy, sung to the words and the si a collection of the saman The origin of the Same Three things t ind out cle it in the sin is of the SV - The gāns 2 prctic ulli stungs of "didas' naand ha-us' 2 The same words 210 lepoited in them tguin und gan 3 Words art bidly mutilated to suit the melody Bezring these points in our mind, we muy proceed with our enquiry thus - It wi4natural for the il chening hum inity to worship the sun ind the moon the vegetation and other naural forces To them down, sun and moon hy, thunder and lightning, atmosphere and wind, eirth ind fire were all gods und they worshipped them for happiness ind success, health and long life Music in one form on other mi ha accom panied this worship It has been noted that some of the African tubes dance and sing more frequent it the time of the 'palm wine season' and the Bechu nas indulge in singing more specially at the time of ruins and the harvest Music is, thus the natural outlet for the feelings of jou 1 B Iddo con Ritualista Daudi Arti (iontella 1920 177 et son P271 Rivers, Medicine Mail and lollaka!!! 7 Valta Woodburn Hyde the holi,lou of G10018 in "Roli_lons of the Past and Presout' 3 Richard Wallslech Primitive Music 163 With 10,1rd to the native tribos of Central Australın up the romarhalle 1050 111 hou of Prof Baldwin Spencer and MFI (illen ·14 Shamanism When the primitive man saw that the gods (of nature) were withholding their boons from him, he attempted to influence them by shouts, beating of tamtams and other frantic exhortations, and a similar phenomenon may even now be noted in the Indian villages, when crops are about to fail for want of rain This theory, víz, that self-exciting noises produce a corresponding outside effect is termed sharlanism 2 1 The fundamental concept bearing on the religious life of the primitivo unin 18 the belief in the existence of magic power, which may influence the life of man and which in turn might be influenced by human activity This idea of magic power is one of the fundamental concepts which occur among all primitive tribog This sympathetic magic, whereby like is expected to produce lihe hus been discussed in details by Frazer in Golden Bough, Part I where he describes at length the nights for the control of rain in pp 247-311 Cp also Andrew Lang, Myth Ritual and Religion Vol 1, Chapter IV Thit sympathetic magic was at the very root of Roman Religion has been ably shown by George Depuc Had/sits "Religion of the Romans" in Religions of Past and Present p 319, Traces of this kind of magic are detected in the Greoh religion by Gilbert Murray in his Four Stages of Greek Religion p 16 H Oldenberg in his able book Die Religion des Veda suggested that in the evolution of thought, magic, as representing a lower intellectual stratum, has probably everywhere preceded religion Cp Warde Fowler, who insists on the distinction of religion and magic, but seems to believe that magic precedes religion in order of tine Religious Experiences of the Roman People pp 47 9, 188 223 24 Soo N N Law, Ancient Indian Polity Ch JY See also Keith, Rel and Phil of the Voda T pp 46 48 2 (a) The English words shaman and shamanism, soom of Hindu ongio, being the Western reproduction of the Pali Buddhist samana, which is Sanskrit so amana ct Bloomfield, The god India and Samaveda, WZKM xvii p 164, Winternitz, Gesch der Ind Lit I 168 n 2 Comparative study has revealed that shamanismo was "the native religion of the Vial Altaic peoples from Bebring Straits to the borders of Scandinavia" and "probably of the early Mongol Tartar peoples and others akin to them, for example in China and Tibet." Evans (Ivon H N) Studies in Religion, Folk loro and Custom in British North Borneo and the Malaya Peninsula, pp 217–265 For the practices of shamanism cp RO ·Shamanism as the basis of the SV 15 The practice of shamanism must have been current in India, long before the Aryans came and conquered the Dasas Here Indra, the rain-god, that splits at the time of the monsoon the cloud-serpent, that overlays the sky,' has ever been devoutly worshipped and to help such a god with wild exhor tations suits both the underlying event, as well as the primi tive map 3 2 And here waited all the rough material, (if the Aryans had not their own) for the rsifying touch of the Vedic priest, in order to be transformed into the SV That this was so is indicated by Indra's prominence in connection with the chant of the saman Of the 59 decades of the Purvărcika, 36 in the middle of the book are addressed to Indra, 12 at the beginning belong to Agni, and 11 at the end go to Soma Both these divisions are subordinate to the worship of Indra In the primitive vocal music there need not be a union of poetry and music Mr de Montes recording the text of a North Indian American song says -- "At first they sang" "halvet ho ho he" then the general outcry followed "e", then again 'Egrigna han he hu” and at last thc ominous "ta meia allelujah tamera don veni han han he he" Winstedt Shan in Sun11 and Sufi Chuptei III "The Maluva Mngician (b) The similarity of the words shaman and saman is, however, acciden tal Bloomfield WZhM The meaning and the derivation of the word saman ale obscure But for the word gai, we should not be able to guess at its meaning Cp 'piagitam cuantravaksam samosabdenocy ito quoted in Ind Stud IT The myth of Indra, Vrtra and the waters "represents a specialised poolic treatment of a myth of thunderstorm cloud and raid' Bloomfield, Rol of the Veda р 181 For the masterly theory of Hillebrandt "that Vrtra represents the frozen winter while Indra represents the spring or summer sun cp Ved Myth Vol III p 157 ff For Indra's close connection with soma cp E Sieg Indra und der som i isub nach demu Rgreda in BLWGI pp 228-239 2 Primitive Music р 174 3 Primitive Music p 173 X111 P 164 P 141 ·16 SV dadaism compared with N American songs This phenomenon must not be claimed as the monopoly of North Indian American songs, and the similar can easily be noted in Indian village songs even to-day And have we not noted the monotonous string of 'dadas” ha 19 and ha-us in the gānas of the SV ? And do we not find an order for singing, similar to that just noted, prescribed for the five bhaktis' of a saman ? In singing some tribes (N 1m ) use the sounds "he" "ah", no intelligible words being uttered Imong other tribes the songs are monotonous chants, extending over but few notes, varied by occasional honls and whoops in some of the inore spirited melodies Words die often borrowed from other tribes without being understood - The Macusi Indians in Guina amuse themselves for hours with singing a monotonous song whose words "hāi a" hii l' have no further signi hcance? And what significance, on earth, do e find in the so called stobhas of the SV which run evictly parallel to the "hài-as" . hai as" just noted ? Ind is not an attempt, like the one made by CHU to explain these ha is und ha us, hope lessly barren of any positive guin' Divisions of a sawan Cp laty III 14, Diah III 12 Burvell, Hibi Int p xxv, R Simon Pps p 22, luis Panicavidhasutra, The Vediu Chant on the divisions of a samin and my nite in the rulo 39 3 1 2 Joswatt lar p 87 Primitive Music ) 173 р Cp Samnaśramın, li ayısım, tha, where lo muhes in attempt the elucidation of the stanbhekarnia le severely itt eks Sayua for not „ving the 10zl inte piotation of the stobhous ind uusay hm of the ignorance of the Samavedic trudition but the hugo, levelled painst Siynna seems presumptuous and no ingenuity on anth (ansatisfactouly make out any sense of the dad usms, which are nothing but a mystic dince on vowels and consonants and so went to be an einpty idornment to the songs The sense of the words can not possibly have been understood in the mutilated form in which the chants were sung, and this shows that their religious value lny not in the matter, but in the form, and the samins have been rightly compared to the revival hymns beloved by the Afman negro in the new world Cp ·Shamanism as the basis of the SV 17 1 ire It is a striking fcature of the primitive songs that they Korth, The Relind Phil of the Voda Vol I P 16 Besides, the ancient chan logas adopted those senseless syllables in order to obscure the meaning of the Rgverses and thus heighten the sanctity of the same in the mind of the yods, who love the apocryptic Even today children in Holland sing in honour of all the swimwing ducklets" the empty, the riming and alliterating refrain 'falde i ulde une falde ideia' (Bladde,on, Ritualıstıc Dadaism Auta Oriehtalia V 1926, p 192) and 20 serious student has ever worried lumself about the wending of these songs, and I see no reason why the same may not hold ,ood in (ase of the SV son,, more particularly about the Channayurue, where there is no nk it ull but only a sting of the stobhas By this, I do not mean that the SV is whole is ineipingless, all that I want to gross home is this, that the dad usuis' which tuim so prominent a feature of the SV Sanas, meinin, loss, that they, is the berei of the various inelodies, were (uuent in Indit long before the Iryans came here, that the Vodic rsis adopted them, alins with the tunes, that they applied to these waaningless words the R, vei es in general, ind Yujus formulas in a few casos, and thus ultimately built the fine edifice of the extant SV And this is not ut all surprising, when we note th it just is lodiu Indian rice ras, like others sleat in history the product of u blend of populations-conquering liyan tubes from somewheem Central I urope settling 2mong the indigenous stocks, (heith The Rel and Phil of the Vedr Voll pp 12 14 ) so also the religion it the Vodiu India wis i product of u blend of the only Indu kui opean or Aryan beliefs with the older cult, ideus ind practices of the indigenous peoples, and the same process ot blending is not an impossibility in case of the Vediu must These two s Juicos continued inter wovon all through the history of Indian religion and aio discermble in both theulogy and ritual To disent un le thom 19 the first and the nost dithcult problem for the histone of the lodian life and 110.100 l im not competent to undertahe the inquiry into this at this staye Eminent scholars like Elliot Smith (Vigrations of early Culture), Fleure in Slater, (The Dravdian Flement in Indian Culture) Perry, (Children of the Sun), G W Brown (Studies in honour of Bloomfield pp io ff) s Levi (suinal Asiatique cum l-J6) Hoi nell (Vemous of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, VII 1(1920) have tried to asoitun, the mount of prediavidian and draudian influence on Vodic civilisation but many of the gumeuts advanced by these scholars 10 of dubiou, chunon (op hoith, Rol and Phil of the Voda Vol II p 633) and they do not cany us beyond the region of conjec ture In his admirable buok on "Outlines ut a Systematic Authropology of Asia Prof Giuffrida Ruyson has wide x laudable effort to determine the haracteristics of the pie draudians but we must admit that much of at 18 again hased on ingenious conjecturos alone ·18 The SV ie the Aicika pay little ittention to the grammatical structure of the sen tence and the logical order of words, and it h 14 been noted in the Andam inest songs, that in them, the words in their poetic form, irt so mutilated to suit the metie, is to be scarcely recognisable Ind thus is cinctly what we find in the ganas of the ST where the rc ne badly hunessed into the service of the melodı, und words uc mutilated bevond recognition - Such was the rough ground on which the Vedic priests 12ined that stateli mansion of the SV und we may well con clude our mout into the ougn of the Simin in the follow ing void of Bloomfield “The Simicdi icpiesents little more than the secondary cinployment in the service of religion of popular music and other quis musical mones These licie developed and itfined in the count of civilisation ind mothed into the formal ritull of Diīhmunism modo tu dd un clcment of benutt and cmotion! But i 1 TI SI in their Troll It has been shown in details thit the lod simin de notcd z melodi und not the ic which is ut, upon it Tumitio uu ili 171 2 Sowof the 101 es of the lul mot within the si for diveront leading ind it huis baan upposed that i mole in mutta mintho 1010, Esod in them (1 enfer ! I ml | WWW-1W) Tant ll done Aufroubt (in the Preface to lus od of the Humans of the IV 2nd od Tonn I ñ ñ 11 PB xum ff) und Oldenber, (Himmon des II P M ff) have shown dotuls that the si Uuuts munli duo to urbitrull--intentional or accidental alterations -alter tool that also ou olowhere whore words are prepared for music burnell labi Tut haith The Rol and I huil of the valle lolli U slow hoith The Iri and Phul of the lodi llli 10 Accord III, to Wintert/ sunan probably moins "propititori sonin moans for "11819ins gods und denons The word samun also illus in the sense of 'wildness , suothm, words (usch der Ind [itt Vol Ip lff 4 Rol of the lada, p 39 3 - il ·The Arciha 19 2 course of time the idei got reversed, and theologians began to conceive that the melody originated from the rc, giving rise to the expression that "this ot that siman is sung upon a particular stanza" The stinzè thus ultimatcly came to be termed 14 yoni IC thc womb, out of which the melody came forth 1 Ind the SV ie the Arciha (the collection of rc) 19 nifthing but i collection of 585 yons, or single stanzas, which are sung to ibout doublc the number of different tunes It is thus only a kind of text booh,' contuning the stanzas, which are to be mcmorised for maling on them the sim in melodica This collection of verses, tihenis ? Whoic, cime to be regarded as comprising (1) (B) Ginas (song books) Rc (the collection of verses) Grimegey ng ina Purt Ercih 2 Irinyegeyag in? Inny ahı simhita 3 Ūhagāni Uttarārciha + 3 the very 1(2) C Sayans, I lol Ip 21 chandonimula nanthe nanandha num samnim yonibhuti on ele pathuttle (h)o. Sami in his comment us on the PIT ( 6 ) suis 'pra mumusthayo mavati 10 von 11 utpannam som pre mimhisth subdivoat pul mumhisthani taditiatice hortunam 2 Oltonboi, ((1 1906 712 1 3 The fust man to uso the summestive torm librett) for this vras Vuller Cp inc nedut Literature p 473 Loi the relation of R1 with the SV illummm. ato of Oldenberg Roroda samhiti ind Samavedrichit in ZDVI VIWN 4 Phis is also callod ovan 01 10_an, beliuse it records those chants, which constituto on to those that occur in the lhi and Lluvaganas This is also to mod Tovallol lenina -duty ww— because it was taught after the study of lime,olda ini Cp Sam iśı amın Satyavrata, llayıtıha, Foi Avirant and Chinnmap liavtika pr 205, 210 11, 10speu tively 5 This is also called 'vah zeynyana or 'rahasya Cr. Caland, JS Einl. P. 8, PVB Int p xi, R Simon, PpS p 301 p 205 ·20 The Uttırarcıha 1 4 Thyagána? The relation between the Putlārciha and the first two gānas is obvious The Pūrvárciha records single verses With each of these, corresponds a single saman, which bears ? particular name derived from the rsi who is suid to have seen that sämın These sămins tre registered in the Gramegeya gāna and Aranyegey igānı The arrangement of the you.74 is systematic and the Ārcıka is divided into three parts, (1) the first (1 114) 14 addressed to Agni, (2) the second (115.466) belongs to Indra, (3) and the third (467 415) goes to Soma These again art mostly sub-divided according to the metre of the text Uttarãi cha The Uttarārcih z does not register single coses, but is comprised of tripletsa le progāthus In the Uttarāıcık? the rc are arranged for the formation of stomas thus the um of this collection is purels practical On the whole, the first Verse of the triplet occurs in the Purificiha,' which indicates Uhva is an abbreviation of Thuahasia Cp Burnell Catalogue of a collection of Skt lys Part I, Vedic Mss p 40 See also Medhatithi on Manu, II 262 and Sami rin Trautika 10 ? (a) The tuplets are known to the RT li i cam 15 tapadım nano padim' uu 76 12 soo also 'tısı bhırhi sama summitan Ait 111 23 Ayainst this ср RV I 164 24 which states that the sian consists of one verso can reconcile the two contlicting vious boy assuming that RT I 164 ? I record the earlier stage of the Samm whed it did actuallı consist of one corse welurla vm 76 12 registers the later stage when the man had grown into a triplet Of this more later on (b) piagáthi is derived frou a ath ind not from all Sa Sasani harsena yanthanam sutra sa pild, athal si Vip 25 (p Ind Studien vin 25, I udwan Mantralitteratur p 75, and Oldenbor, DMC 1 VA XXXI111 ľ 446 3 Oldenberg, ZDJIG XXXIIII P 46 4() Cp Sesagırı Sastri A Descriptive (italu, un itile inslut My of the Governmental Mus libells in Vidrar Vill lodic Titone ture, first part p 73 ·Ühi and Thyagánas 21 Il uhiti that the melody, which belongs to this verse is to be applied to the whole triplet For example, the first verse of the triplet in the Uttarárcika (1 1 1 2 32) beginning "haya naścitra á bhuvadūti' occurs in thc Pūrvārciha' (2 2 3 5-169) Accor ding to the Gramegcyagāna this rc is sung to thc zāmadevya saman On this mclody then, the three verses of the Uttară rcika (32-34) must be chanted at the sacrifice Tha and Thya These three icrses is used it the sacrifice tre recorded in the Ūhagāna Thus we sec thit like the Uttarārciha the aim of the Uhagāna, is also purelv practical The Ūhagānı runs parallel to the Uttuarcıkı ind Gra megeyagāna, while the Thiagana runs parallel to the Aranye gevagāni The names cle ir nein idapts the Thagāna contains the melodies of the (mesej zgānd, but adapting them ind working them out so as the irc chanted at the sacrifice, and the Thyagina adapting the melodies of the Aranyegeyag ina, to the verses on which they must be chanted at the privite sacrifices (b) There is a great number of voises in the litumche that have 116 Counspondent vorso in the Puriarcho This is expluned by the fact that these serves which belin, to the tool voor i no chant ed on the walio welodi which is allen un y pendix to thin editions of the (rume_01 Inina ("T 601) On the other ni 110 found in the Purrinchi wbuch huo uo Courospoodent verses in the litoralcihi lluis is a pluned by the fact thut suunns are chanted netoli at the Soms ficas but on wany other Occasions is well The numuns were chanted as se lo mostli by the I rastito (p Cound Is Find 5 Pib Int !! I-ul The ditheults was pointed out hi Oldauliol, brilliant article on Riedi smuti and undarule in ZDVO XXXV and wis ropeated by Wirternt in bu Caschi dei Ind Tit I 145 JANIT 1- 2 Cp N on Piss v Tubingit all glame_mina uhitni II LA yavat " Son ilse Caland Is Linu IS in hi р IY ·22 Chronology of the SV 1 The names of the basic ginis are also clear The Gramegeyagānu contuns those sāmens that were studied in the community, while the Irinyegey 1, āna registers those samans that because they were too sacicd ind mysterious, were studied in the forest, outside the community IV Chionology of the St Little can be sud with ceitunty about the chronology of the SV We have rathưi to work on guess id conjecture Scholars uc un unimous in showing th it acutice was the dorninant note of the luclic lifc? The lodic IS TOSC (2v in the morning to i sicrificil da, moming noon und trening were spent in offering gifts to the gods The wom 1125 cier present at the sacrifices The Vedic rs w is strictlı utilitlu in ind practical, and we know from the iese urches of intiquins that in? The poetis ind ioli, 1on of the led display in the fun host de creo the mark of the sacredotulismi I udwin IU 202 Hun trotua te drinslo tion of Al p 36 The Vedic concept of the sontill the law of the Chinos It is lofty ind volyanpun, but in the hands of the lodio priests, it becomes little moro thin an epotheosis of the sustain of swifica, around which the R,redit tolimon centros lor the conception of itap Bloomfield Rol of the lede PP 12 20 limullin Virton ni the Rolinons of Pist and Present p 117, Keith, lho luol und Phil of the lodi Voll p 3, 3, 4 Dette Hominn I 12111 Riikunt in La 207 11 The fact was well I ownt Sinani who utolines the lado lleiding to the requnements of the utuil (plus lokas in the Profue to the same ode where he distinctly accords the luulest jutton to the Yuvadı which arudin, to Vaudonell (11t of SIA Lit p 1) Shus tho orl edin. zowth f utuliin Cp also Il termit laahi dei lui Liti P 21) Schroeder, Indions Lit und (ul p 10 heith The Rel und Pul of the ladie lol I p 34 2 Turnell Irbi Int р TV With the growth of the pers sonn) Lod sprang up the distinctly athic puls of the rood--thuse moral laws which, as Vr Spencei suys, ala subaequent to the banding of worship There is ittle moral toachin, in the works of niture tho thunder and the lightning are not bound by the laws whuch bind us, the wind blowoth whore it listeth, and it is wasted breath to civil at the doings of those things The character 15 1 יזיז ·Was the Pūllārciha or was the Uttarârcika older ? 23 primitive yucic literaturt, the parts most liable to systematisation ire codes of ceremonial law ind rituals and similar practically useful parts This has been so alwys and every where, ind the same miy hive happened in Vedic India, and although in thui rudimentary forms thư two gānas (1c the Grāmegey in ind Ar inyegey ig in) my have existed side by sid, since pichistoric times, yct the Glīmegcy igāna which being more suit ible to an advanced stige in civilisation, came to be associited with the favourite som sacrifices, received the arrangement hint and the Irini egcy isina, that evidently belongs to uncul st244 of Vedic civilisation,' received the little uin, ment it has, comparatively later Tas the Pinimala o nas the [ttma, ila ullen? Ind now we come to a very perplexing question, one which is of the utmost import ince for 1 true perspective of the historic development of the oldu. Si tcxts, and for the Connect interprctition of mu passat in the PIB and \\\\ The pile o of the only lo des Torodd los obrell, what they ne and not be consi daun, what the ishull love I nt when the and her clothed himself in human ,uise hele til en therewith the lo pinschlidior of hum in nature ho must in the end ontoun tono cose of usht me won. lo detul see Charles Tunas horis Putive l mliot pp tw-f9 1 Tunnell Introduction p nature and function of the lima_H11, 1112 seem lot undouded Vo be this af polla tin un niion to those olla be 111150 then werot cinc tibo made in sense of oven by the poliet Wheneuently hold them in mi til ind milial rosenvaltis cham Nilimut metune ind the hummels practices which roqua pusat ind Lillepalli mointii plan i pylo i oppo ed tu tho Somuto vluch von meint tithe uilis TICAL that the primlile luvan u od theo In order control and mun al jou!! du will putin 1-onelt » l 1 lít 1 ult : ( vuld sk) Cont ul while the mi in jo pull pusis ir the ground lies 401.ht to propit ates sacrifice mume i bu lime_pull thus secum, thoir assistance les winnin, thell will no lie thout he had not the power to compel them Thus wlulo thies rame_o111, 1114 is mount to be un. It oma sacrifices the Arioso A11, in 2011 hele leon ,inallı meant to be un, at the charms. It 0011 1 ,יוון i olla ·24 The view of Oldenberg and Caland ? 1 kindred texts The puestion is 'n as the Pureārcika or u as the Uttarārcha the older part Now the fact that Uttararcıha is a collection of verses on which the sāmans had to be chanted, would make it appear older than the Pūrvārcika, which is a collection of verses, that served to register the melodies, on which the triplets had to be chanted, and this was the view, which the late Dr. Caland held, before he wrote Introduction to his monumental work, the PVB , ind to which he, in 1 different form, of course, tenaciously adhered up to the last? But here comes one difficulty, and that is this, that the Uttarārcıka is nowhere quoted in the Samavidhānabrāhmana, ind that Pūrvarcıha alone is mentioned in the datas Start mg on this cluc, Oldenberg- showed that the ( ttarircika was much later than the Purvárcika, the Brāhmana, the Maśahahalpa, and Śrautasutras of Laty īyana and Drāhya yana, and this view has been vitually accepted by Dr Caland, only with one reservation, namely that there existed a fore runner to this Uttarırcıha, which existed cien before the Purs arcika Caland works out this vien in brief as follows - PVB (iv + 1) states that in 1 cut un case a great number of verscs had to be then direct from the Samhita The expression Sambhārya' which denoteca complex of verses to be taken from different parts of the Voda, docs not suit the 1 Purvaluka older than litaravika Wintei niti Gosch der Ind Lit I p 1+2 Against this <p Ciland, JS I m pp + I PVB Int p XIV 2 For the discussion on the prouty of Purvaciki T have mainly drawn? from Caland JS Einl, Janubr Fiol, PVB Int and W/KV Vol p 430 The bulliant paper of Oldenberg in the ICO, Vol 1lvin was not i ulable in any library of I shore and I regret I could not profit by it I have also not had the privilege ut reading his pspor De Woudin, Van der Samaveda in Verse en Veded der hop Ak v Wetensch Abd Jett 4 R Deed 1x and Caland's Over on nit het Jammiyabıahmana in the same jour mal jc Reeks Deel I p J sely, because both are in Dutch for which I have to consult the Diction iry at every step, and the material liay heon 1 epeated ty Caland in PVB with greater cleai nese and precision XX11 ·The view criticised 25 SV,' because in the Uttararcika, the verses are given as a whole, all after one another, and this indicates that the compilers of the Brahmana were not aware of the Uttararcıka, and that the chanters knew the RV from which they used to derive this material Starting on this line Caland concludes - The chanters were acquainted with the RV From this they drew their verses, and on them they chanted the lauds at the Boma sacrifices In order to facilitate the memorisation of this material a double register was composed, one of the melodies, and one of the verses, on which the melodies were chanted The register of melodies was taken up, and the same was consid red as the bearer of the melody The second register, that of Lises, uus the fore runner of the Uttarár. nha To the first collection of songs were added later on, songs of a different kind, that had to be chanted by a single chanter at other occasions Besides these song books, arose, at the same time, the sccond register the Pūrvárcika and the Aranyaka Thereupon ? Brāhmana arose Based on this Brahmana, the Arsey akalpa was composed by Maśaka Based on these two works, the Śrnutasūtras were composed by Lätyāyana and Drāhyāyana Then only the Uttarārcika was compiled, which contained the verses from the RV arranged in their regular order, in which they were used at the Soma sacrifices This is, in brief, the trend of thought followed by Caland But the difficulty, for the solution of which, he took all this labour, remains yet the same We are yet entitled to ask him "why there is not the slightest reference to this forerunner of the Uttararcıka in the Brahmana, Śrautasūtras and the Atharvaparıśısta, and why the SVbr does not anywhere even hint at it" We talk of older Rgvedas,' and for them we have some reason, but such is not the case with the Uttararcika Muller, Anu Skt Lit pp 164, 165, 495-96, Bepfey, SV Ein) pp XX1X-XXX, Burnell, Arbi Int xxxm, Caland, PVB Int p xv 1 ·26 Purvarcika is older than the Uttararcika Caland seems to think, that from the beginning of the Soma sacrifices, the chanters used to sing their lauds not on one verse, but on a triplet, and this is the only reason why, in one form or other, he mahes out the register containing triplets, earlier than the one containing solo-verses? But this is erroneous, and although native scholars are unanimous in prescribing the use of triplets at the Soma sacrifices, yet there seems nothing to prevent us from assuming, that in earlier times, when the sacrifice was yet in its crude form, the priests sang their melodies on solo verses, and that with the growth of the ritualism the idea of using triplets arose, the two stages of development being successively recorded in the Pārvārcih? and Uttarārcika That this actually happened so, will be clear from the RV 1 164 24, which rung - gāyatrena prati mimite arkamarhena sama traistubhena vahami vahena vāham dvipada catuspadahsarena mimate sapta vānih || Sayana raises the following discussion on "arhena sama "arkena sāma | uktalaksanena mantrena sama, gayatraratham tarasañjñaham sama pratimimite nanicham sama tree hriyatu it trsr8veham sama hitamuto'ı huih sāmeti vahtavyam hatha mucyate' rheneti na 1 vastutu pham simarkasyāmrcydmdıūdham | paścădanyonyam taduttavayorgīyanıtı ityatideśah I ata chavana muviruddham II Thus the question of the priority of the Puri arcıha to the Uttararcıka 19 settled once for all, and so far we perfectly agree with Oldenberg But the assumption that Uttararcika is later than the Brahmana, Arseyakalp? and the Srautasutra must not go unchallenged The reasons are as follows la) The assumption militates against the general trend of 1 “That from the oldest lines on the chanters must have had it thou die posal 2 certain collection of tuistichs and prayathas, th it served them at the Soma rites for chanting after their melodies, that this collection might hava been the forerunner of the Uttararcha as it 18 known to us now-a-dosa' Caland, PVB Int p XVII ·Uttararcika is older than the Brahmana 27 the development of Vedic literature ? (6) In the PVB, the terms pentastichs, daśastichs and the like are used? How could we know which verses were intended, unless we assume, that the Uttarârcika existed at the time, when the Brahmana was compiled Caland meets this difficulty by assuming that the authors of the Rrahmana allowed here a free choice, while in later times, the compilers of the Uttarārcika fixed these verses probably in accordance with the Jaiminiyabrāhmana, which states by citing their opening words, which verses had to be employed But taking into account the deep animosity that obtained among the followers of the different sakhas of a Veda in the Brahmanic period, it seems simply unreasonable that the Kauthuma Uttararcika was built on the basis of the Jaiminiya Brahmana (c) We read in tke PVB ? (vui 8 26) that the first verse is a hahup, then comes an usnih, then a pura usnih kakup Now RV vi 98 9 (pura usnih) is not an anustup, while SV II 62 at the end has four syllables more and hence tallies with the Brāhmana This addition of four syllables, as Caland has already shown, seems very old, because the Jaiminiyas also have it in their Uttararcika Must we not infer from this that the authors of the 1 The development of the Vedic literature muy be buefly put thus - (1) Samhitas i o collection of hymos, prayers and sacred formulas, chams for witchcraft, medicine and other homoly practices (2) Exposition of the sacrifice, illustrated by legends (3) Spoculations of the higher sort, grow og up in connection with and out of the simpler beliefs (4) A considerable body of set rules foi conduct in everyday secular life 2 I owe the arguments put as (b) and (c) to Caland's PVB Int p xu 3 Cp Såwaślamu Satyavratn, Tiayiparicaya p 105, Caland, JS kipl p 6 ·28 Difficulties explained Brahmanı were acquainted with the Uttararcıha ? The explanation that the compilers of the Uttararcika chang ed the Rkverse, so 79 to bring it in harmony with the Brahmanı seems flat and docs not get home (d) One thing more Had the Uttararcıkı been 90 very late, tradition must have had assigned its authorship to a definite person, or like the Tha and Dhyagānad must have at least hnown that the same is pamu Seya But nothing of the hind 19 heurd with regard to the Uttarır cika But admitting that the Uttarircika is older than the Brahmana, how to explan the expression "sambharya" found in the Brahmana, and how to solve the difficulty raised by Oldenberg? (u) As for the first, we mai admit that the three portions, referred to, may be later addition to the Arcika, presum ing, of course, that the text of the Brahmana in the three places is reliable and refers to the verses in that very order in which they are found in the Uttarīrcık? (6) The solution of the second difficulty may be something like this The real SV ie the melodies were registered in the Grāmegeyagān? With cach melody of this gani corresponds a single verse in the Pūrvárcıka And bc cause a single melody of a single verse (of the Pūrvar cika) was chanted on a single triplet of the Uttararcika, one verse of the Purvárcıha was virtually equal to onc triplet of the Uttarārciha And thus holding the Purvar cıka as the basis of the Uttarárcika, scholars preferred to mention the first instead of thc latter Oldenberg will himself admit that (1) the Soma siri fices existed long before the Brahmana, (b) that at them the melodies were sung on triplets, (c) that the priest was strictly practical and utilitarian, (d) and that the Brahmana is a mystic exposition of the age long ritual If he once admits ·The later Ganas are pavivšeya 29 these points, he will have, naturally, to assume that the priest forthwith registered these triplets into a register long before he began to think about the mystic details of the rite Thus we have seen that the Uttararcika, which was certainly later than the Purvárcıha was yet older than the Brahmana and the Sutra works Mow remain the Üha and Chyagana It is clear from their very names that they are later than the two Ganas and the Archas - Caland' has shown in detuls that they are later than the Arseyahalpr and Ksudrasutra and the Srauta sūtras of Latyāyana and Dráhyāyana Hcre nis arguments are bached by Indian tradition, which is seen reflected in the statement of Dhanvin, the commentator of Dráhy ay ana srauta sūtra He says on "viśve devā iti vasisthasya nihavamūhet” (Drāh x 1 11 = LÁS 111 9 12) 'Is not the expression 'uhct mcaningless as its reading is known (from the Ohagāna)? It is true, but they say "the üha (ie the Ohagann) is made after the time of the expression (of the Sutralara" That they were made by men is shown by the JNMI (1x 2 1 2) which reads ūhagrantho'pauruseyah paui uscyo'th vägrimahi ved samasamanatınd vidhıs Trthat to'ntimah 11 The Ūhagāna is made by the rsis, so far as it contund the melodies "seen by them, but, on the other hand, it is made by men, so far as it has been adapted by men' The SVbr harmonises with this view, where simans are not cited from these two ganas, but only from the tust to ganes JS kial pp 5 6 ? The text runs "nanu ca uhoditur sumu inaithakun tasındhyayana siddhatrat | satyametat | vacanotturah alamuhal hrtilill Cp (ulood PVB Int p xm, whero odhyapao is a musprut ·30 Üha and Uhya are older than the Pps Caland thinks that the two ganas are later than even the Pps This treatise prescribes rules, for adapting the samans, as they are handed down in the Gramegeyagana and Aranyegeyagana for practical use It is just possible, according to him, that in early times, amongst the Samaveding certain rules were formed and handed down by oral tradition for adapting samans of the earlier gānas, that these rules were it last collected in a treatise called Pusapasūtra, and that at last, for the sake of ready reference, they were all brought into action in the form of these two gānas But this argument alone is not convincing We know that the Prátisakhyas, which teach how to turn the padas into Samhita, are centuries later than the Samhitas, and the same may be said with regard to the Puspasūtra In reality this treatise belongs to the third strata of the Samavedic literature ie the analytic literature, which consisted of Rktantra, Samatantra, Aksaratantra und numerous other works We read in the Puspasutra Landhivatpadavadganamatı umarbhāvimeva ca i praślesa-ścătha vislesā nūhe tveva nibodhata il Here the Puspasutra secms distinctly referring to the Ūhagāna, and this view is supported by Burnell und Simon' The same thing is made quite patent by the colophon in the commentary of Upadhyāya Ajātaś?tru, the commentator on the Puspasutra amahiyavasāmādıśrāyantıyahrtävadhimi ūhasāgaramuddhartum saknumah phullanauhaya il This shows that there existed an ocean of the lihagānas to cross which the bark of the Puspasutra was built Dass dem Verfasser des Puspasutia die Ganas bereits ausgoui boitet vorlagen, beweisen zu den Grunden, die S 496-500-1 zu entnehmen sind, auch noch besonders die zahlreschen (&pa-formen, die der text des Puşpasutia enthalt” R Simon, Pps p 501 nola Caland holds that the Pps 18 older than the gavas Cp JS pp 9-10 PVB Tnt p XII It runs head ·17382 THE KUPPIJSW IMI SHASTRI RES TUTE filipi 434 The three stages of the SV 31 in Thus we have seen, in brief, the three stages in the deve lopment of the Samaveda, and for each of these there was created a separate analytic treatise Thus we have 1 Stobhas These were treated details in Aksaratantra and Sanjñakarana which show the formation of stobhas 2 Reduction of the gānis This was treated in Sama to the RV ve or, n ? re tantra, which prescribes rules verse order, of the verses to for turning the verses into the ganas? sāman, that is, it shows the application of the chant to the verse On the formation it isunan from 10 Saham istom10 (lamini ix ? 1 i 20) szys 1 "samurede sth 191 in gityupayah laha hatame gitrupaya nimi licy ate | yitirnama kriya sabhyant traprayataajiny? svaraviseşapamabhivrañ 111 2 samagabdabhilipva | 92 niyatıpramıniyamru giyate | tatsampadonartho yumrgaksnrıvıkaro visloso charşanamabh: 750 urmal, stobha tyovam asyal sarve sainavode simply into 11 (1) Bhsalavikailchinge of sullible is dealt with in PpS vill 87 sq (2) kşaravisleşi ---dissolution of vowel contraction, is dealt with in Pps vi 153 sqg (3) iksyravikrars in the conant use of somiscuels uhors 101 und som karsana le dealt with in Pps va 549 (4) ahşarn bhy 248-repetition (5) virama -introducing the rests (6) stobha-tho insertion of different sounds and syllables sometimes whole sentonces of voice for the definition of atobha cp ۱۱۲ 1x 2 11 10 To those se mai add- () lopa--dropping of sounds treated in Ppis 111-86 sq4 (9) agama--generalls wondingles4 ayllable is insor ed in any part of the radical word but here the insertion of a stobha in the middle of a word 19 specially understood It 19 dealt with in Pps 111-181 Cp alsu Antasatru who sayº "atha bhavin pravahsyami praganam yui vidhiyate | arcikam staubhik om care pad om vihuvate tu saili ·32 The three stages of the SV the gānas 3 The adaptation of This was treated in details sāman (occurring in the Gra. in the Puspasutra which conmegeyagāna and Aranyegeya. cerns itself with the modifica. gåna) to verses, other than tion of words and prescribes those to which they belong in rules for adapting the samans, ?s they are handed down in the Grāmegeyagāna und Arı nyegeyagāna, for practical use at the sacuifices 4. The turning of paulus This was tiented in RK of the verses (occurring in the tantra, which prescribes rules Arcıkas) into the Samhita for turning the SV padus into the Samhită, and which therefore is a sort of a Prātiśākhya ayti 211 piakrtm calva udih um caviddhameva vi Jatiyatam la stobhan ulu nit im tatha i ca il sandhivat pidav adganam atvama bhavaneva cu ! praślesz Ścatha vślosapuhe trovi nibodhata in samkrıştım ta vikrstim cı vyañjinam luptnmatibitaw 1 abhāvasca vikar a sua bhavanube, bhilaksnyet || stubhı zistu gryantı sirvah , klah prthak pithak pancasveva tu yayantı bhuyışthani svareşu tu i samani şatsu cinyanı saptasu dve tu kauthumali atc R Sunon, PpS 711 but the CHU (1) rendssa ha sılak ıl salavatyaścaikitayanam daldhyamur ict | hanta tva prcchanıtı hovaca i ka sauno gatuniti i svaia iti hrnca ,,' See also BiU (1 3 25) which reads "tasya hutasy i sawn) yalı suam iedt bhavati hagy sram | tasya saja eva svam " Sayada in his Commentary on the SV (Pretace) wutes - suinasabdavā yasya yanasya svarupam gak surefu ki ustadıbhil saptabhill gvarairakşaia vikarădıbbisca piępadyate" svaras are musical notations These are kiusta, prathawa, dvitiya, třtiya, caturtha, pañcama, and şaştha or antya (cp Bur Arbi XLIII) which partly correspond to the sudja rşabha, gandhara, madhyama, pañcama, dhaivata and nişåda of usual music Besides these simple notes (prakrti) there are seven others (vikrtı) vız, prenkha, namapa, karfaņa, vinata, atyutkiama, and sam pragarapa For details see my pote on R 41 ·Who was the author of Rktantra ? 33 And the above shown discussion should make it absolutely clear why our treatise was invariably called "chando gānām vyakaranam" and not a Prátisakhya of the same The real SV consists of the melodies, and with them our treatise has nothing to do These were the subject of the first threc works, which accordingly deserve that appellation? Our treatise, on the other hand, is related to the text of the melodies and was therefore, perhaps for the sake of distinction, called simply a vyäkarana, instead of a Prátisakhya But because the text book of the melodies is also called SV, we can safely give the appellation "Prātiśåkhya" to the Rktantra V Who u as the author of Ratantra ? Tradition assigns Rktantra to a ſakatāyana , and this is supported by the colophons of the Mss and the explicit statements of Samasarvănukramanıand Nagesa 3 But Bhattoji goes against it and emphatically declares – "tatha ca rktantravyākaranakhyasya chandogyalaksa nasya pranetă audavrajirapyasútrayat* 1" He is supported by the author of the gloss on Paniniya śıkså', who quotes from Rktantra in these words "tathi Das Puspasutra ist aloino Irt vou Pratiśakhyz zum Uttaragan. anzusehen' R Simon, Pps 192 The Vs U also calls it Samapratisakbya PpS p 499 icum tantravyakaride parcasamkhya prapathakam | sakatayanaderona dvitrimsat khapdalah smrtah | And so on 3 Cp Footnote on RT p 3, L 13 'tatha naradiyasık fiyamap anantyaốca bbaset purvo hyantaśca parato yadı | tatra mudhyo yamıstışthet snvarp ih purvavarnayoli 11 tathả rktontra Asutrayat 1 "anantyäntynsamyoge madhye yawah puri asya gupal" Śabdaknustubba 1 1 4, 143 Cp RT p 2 L 14 5 (1) Cp Pånmıyasıkşi, Beuares 1887 p { "kun khum gum gbum iti | anantyảntyasamyoge madhye yamah purvaguna itraudavrajirapa || RI p 2 L 14 "påradaudavrajyormatena yamo varnågana iti vidhiyate 11 1 2 4 ·19 34 The four noteworthy points caudavrajih' The author of Śıksapraka, a also quotes one passage from the treatise in the name of Audavrajı How to solve this conflict? Before entering into details, we may note the following points (1) Audavrijı' is quoted on the rule 59 of the RT (2) Śahatāyana is quoted in the first line of the first Prapathaka (3) The first Prapathaha looks out of place It is not counted as an integral part of the treatise by the Ms B (4) The text contains numerous iults, that seem out of place in a Pratisahhya They rather belong to the subject of general grammar (2) tatha caudavrajil "prstim hiriam spir nam duspistimantasth anam il p 5 = RT p 3 L1 (3) "katham pubaranusvaradvay sin huisvadırgh abhedenoti brunnal | tathi caudavrajih "anusvaravam mityanus ir iu hrast ndır,hau dirghndah rasve varpa iti' p 6 = RT p 2 L 15 (4) "nimesakala matra syadityaudwrijil P 10 It ly not fuund 111 the RT (5) "audavrajirapi sparśavarg isyal sparsalahano ca jõoy un / var_asy! hanam / sthanesvityadhikara iti p 12-RT sutra 13 Accordios to this the commentary also was written by Audriraji huuself which is wroni. as will be shown later on (6) "tatha caudavrajih | ayoyavaha oh itu risarjaniyah = heiti jihvamuli yah pa ityupadhmaniyah | am ity anuntari I p 13-RT p2 L 12 Note the difference in tho reading (7) "dvau nadapupradanau ityaudas rajih p 17-RT 3 I 3 Note thus difference in the reading (5) "gvaso ghosapam trtiyat prathamanam ughoşascaturthaniy uzunlı qoşuna Dāmiti' p 18 = RT 3 3 Note the great difference between this and RI It iy very significant that the author of the glogs refers to Audovraji su naka and Pånini alone The close relation betweon the threo h29 boon noted by me in details I Cp also footnote on 60 ·The technical terms of the RT and ST 35 It runs Let us remember these points and read the colophon of the Ms B "iti rktantravyakalanam sākatāyanadıbhih krtam" Does it not clearly show (a) that Śakatāyana was the chief author of the treatise (6) and that, besides him, others too had their share in it? Itos significant that our treatise invariably ends with the sūtra "svaro'nantyah" with which the Samatantra begins, and that the two are generally mentioned together Besides, there runs a remarkable affinity between the technical terms of the two This will be clear from the following The technical terms of the RT and ST may be conveniently divided into three classes' (1) Artificial words (2) Mutilated words (3) Technical words (1) Artificial words Terms RT Sūtras ST sūtras, ad padamardhiya 143 1 101 padadi 71 77 III 7 8 khid= padopantıy? 145 1 97, II 4 10, V 89 dirghibhavati 247, 255 1 10 3 padantiya 148 V 4 1 = samyoga 27, 49, 269 1 8 4, V 4 3 Such words are found in Samatantra in a larger number Cp gi, ji, di, di, bi, as names of the first five notes, ta trimatra, nu samprasarana, in padanta, un parvänta and numerous others Burnell has shown that the remarhable peculiarity of both Rktantra and the Samatantra is that they have no paribhasa, and hence, it is necessary to gather the meaning of these terms from the very scanty commentaries, written upon them - 112, an cu na San 1 I owe the list of words to Bui pell, RT pp LI-LII ·36 The technical terms of the RT and ST ܬr = = gati III 3 9, IV 10 6 A larger class is – (2) Technical terms formed by mutilating real words — Terms RT Sūtras ST sūtras ayuk= ayukta 252 ara = ahsara 256 ud = udatta 51 156 X 2 1 = arcika 154 V 1 2, VII 6 7 hsa - ahsar? 282 grā - grama 113 gha dirgha 50, 93, 103, 112, 173, II 7 6, IV 113, 148 11 1 ghu = laghu 236 237 VII 3 8 63 thya = kanthya 147 V 1 3 ti 29 110 II 5 2 da = pad? 69 272 V 17 bha - stobha 150 ma = virāma 54 mat = prakrtimat 64 masa= samasz 1 125 II 3 1 yuk = y uht? 90 1 8 8, II 9 5, III 3 4 ra 270 1 7 4,8 10 - repha 107 V 4 3 - Svar? 26,68, 93, 119, 169 II 8 3,10 1, V 25 257, 265, 269 rana- harani 181 rga varg2 13 II 5 3,10 1, V 51 lup lopa 83 156 vat = udattavat 52 talavya 241 VI 2 g gandhya= sandhyaksara 95, 6 stha - antastha 169 V 10 3 sya - rahasya C 277 V 21 sva - hrasva 25 150 smin ūsman 245 VO 3 = para vya = ·Audavrajı, the author of ST, RT, and Pps 37 Tradition and Samasarvānukramani' assign Samatantra to Audavraji, and the name Puspayaśas Audavraji occurs in the Vamsa brahmana? in the list of the illustrious ancients of the SV literature This Audavraji, the author of the Samatantra may be identical with Audavrajı, the originator of the Rk tantra Now there goes another, very important analytical treatise on the SV by the name Puspasūtra, where the word 'puspa' is strongly suggestive of Puspayaśas (Puspayasas Auda viajı), and the suggestion is strengthened by the colophon of 2 Ms which reads "audavrajıkſtam puspasūtram One thing more Connected with the system of techni cal terms and symbols, just noted above, there is the way of quoting or reproducing samins, which is distinctive of the SV analytical literature In this respect we find a very close resemblance between the RT, ST, and Pps To illustrate the point I append hercaith list of abbreviations from the Pps chidra achidrz patya apaty? sitz asita rupa vairup? leya aleya tani samtani hranda abhikrında varta 2bhivarta gostha angirasam so<th : 1 Sanitantral pr 1 1 1 8ùi sukhi tham qua1 8dntu nudavrajıkftrni sukşın sm sami,2n2m sulharshan Sawisiri nukrimini But cp "Sowaśramın in the Perfice tu Ahşulatintru "grantho yamrktantrapr welul sihitayanussi simahalıbona unahamudina åpısalınå proktah / samatanto um tu garusedotsentity imupadıştah pramı pikaih" 2 Puşpayaśasa audavrnjeli puşpayasa sud u rajih 1 Br р 11 ·38 Affinity between RT, ST, and PpS rūpa ārsabha sistha anjovairūpa sakvarsabha ihavadvasistha Here the beginning of the word has been dropped There are terms in which the middle portion is dropped Such are janavarta = jamadagnerabhivarta ksustambha = ksullakavaistambha dvihımkādevya = dvihimh Travāmadevya There are words of which the beginning and end both are dropped cineda = praticinedahasıta tamasa dirghatamaso'rka mahi = âmahiyava There are words of which sometimes the beginning is dropped and sometimes end – anūpa or vadhryaśva = anūpavadhryaśva andhi, ndhigava or gava = andhigava 1 (a) For details cp R Simon, PpS 503-506, Burnell Arbr p YXY IV , RI pp LI, LIII That Pps also belons to the pie Padidiyad school of Sanskrit grammar has been shown by Burbell in On the Aindru School of Sanskrit Grammarians pp 27-48, Arbr p VXIII R Simon holds the same vion Cp Pps p 303 See also Belvelkar, Syst Skt Gr p 11 (b) Just as in RT ra represents para, svara, and repha, so in the Pps gava = apdhigava, but also gaun,java , tamasa = dirghatamaso rka, but also darghatamasa and so op It is notewor It is nitoworthy that in the three treatises the use of such clipped words 19 not very consistent, the full word is often used, and we also have more than one abbreviation of the same word The RT and the commentary also present a number of technical terms, which are, more or loss, common to it, the Siwatantra, the Pratiſakhyas and some grawwars Such are akşara, ango, abhyasta, abhinidhava, upasarya, ekavacana, nimin, Diptha, pada, pratyaya, matra, lopa, varpa, vibbaktı, sandhyakpara, samása, sparsa, svara and vyañjana According to Burnell these words belong to the Aindra School of grammar and these coupled with the evidence, shown later ou point to an errly origio of our treatise ·The hypothesis 39 aśu or bhargava = āśubhargava idānam or samksāra = idanam samksarı gauri, rivita or vita = gaurivita satra or sahiya = sztrāsāhıya Thus the close similarity of technical terms, occuring in the three treatises, and the identity of the names of their authors, coupled with the statement of VBr lead us to assume that the three analytical works were composed, in their original form, by Puspayaśas Audzvrajı Starting on this clue, we may formulate our hypothesis, regarding the authorship of the RT as follows The original Rhtantra was composed by Audavrajı who also wrote Samatantra, Puspasūtra and 1 grammar on bhasa, which had a distinct set of Pratyahārast as is shown by the first Prapathaha of the RT 1 1 Cp "gamoiveşouyah pratyahararthah RT p 3 1 4 On Mahabha sya (1 1 2 110) Nagośa mabes an important statement "pare tu parahakarabh : vepz "e' ityov i sutram haryam pritisakhyadiprasıddhahaladıpratyaharasiddh şartham' There are no Pratyaharas in any of the Pratıšakhya excepting ours, that refers to the Pratyahara of "ra and "ba Cp "pratyahare rahagor vargasañjija p 3 L 10 But in the mun body of the text we do not find 209 pratyahara even in the RT This indicates that the original text was diff erent from the present one, and the simo w is based more or less, on the system of Pratyaharus This Prapathaka also refers to the Brahmarası, which 19 supposed to be prehistoric Cp Nageća (Ní Bh 1 111 2 132) - Isyahşarısa wamnayasya vagvyavaharijanokusyr na kaścit hartastyev imova voda parampar jopa smaryamadam Hari quoted by Maneca According to the tradition these were revealed by God Śiva himself by gounding his tabor The device of anubandhas or signification endings, so ndi ntageously used by Paolon is also found here which shows that the devicelrouds oristed and Panu only utilised it to its utmost limits Cp Pat on VII i 19 Athar a purvisu trapirdesu yam purvasutre se aubandha na tairihetkirgai kriyante Cp Belvelkar, Systems of Sanskrit Grammar p 23 Ajześatru the commentator on Pps (Beqares 1922 y 170) attributes a statement to Audariaji which is not found in the RT "evam hi smarnts audavrajih nåmyantadupasargaccetye kárab 1' the quotation may be from Audavrajis gramm ir on bhisi which is not available at present ·40 The three stages of the RT 2 ſakatāyana, who may have been a follower of Audavraji, revised Audavraji's work, both in RT, where he quotes him by the name (53), as well as in grammar, where the former's work was superseded by that of the latter The main sphere of Śakatāyana's activity lay in grammar, hence it is futile to hunt all his doctrines in the RT 3 Yaska refers to Śakatāyana, and traces of Śakatayana's analytic grammar are detected in Yaska's Nirukta To this we shall come later on 4 Panını drew from Śaktāyana , and it unfortunately happened that his work acquired by its great merits such a celebrity as to supersede almost all that had been written on grammar before him, so that except the names and some particular rules of former grammarians, we have little left of this branch of literature, except what occurs occasionally in the Prátisakhyas That Pånını knew Prátisakhyas had been indicated long ago by Bohtlink and Muller , and it has been proved now by a comparison of Panini's sūtras with those of the Prátisakhyas, that Pånını largely availed himself of the works of his predecessors, frequently adopting their very expressions, though he quotes their names only in cases, where these have to serve as authorities for certain rules In all the sūtras, that are found parallel in RT and Panini, the latter may owe a debt to the former 5 Simultaneously with Panini' or a bit later than him, there occured the third and the final redaction of our treatise For details cp Vuller, Anc Skt Lit p 150-51 2 For the date of Padidi cp Colebrook, Asiatic Researches VII (1001, Essays ed Cowell II p 4), Buhtlink II p XIII, Roth, zur Literatur und Gesch des Veda p 16, Reinaud, Vemoires de l instituto de France XVIII P 88, Weber, Indischen Literatur Geschichte p 199, witb Weber agreed Jalion and Muller , Westgaard, L ber den altesten Zeitraum der Indischen Geschi chto p 72 , Goldstucker, Pápidi pp 225-227, Bepfoy Geschichte der Sprach Wissenschaft 48 , Bhandarkar, Ind Ant Ip 16 , Burnell, Aindra School p 44, Peschel, ZDMG XXXIX p 95 Poterson, Detailed Report (1883 and his ܚܙ P ) ·The third stage of the RT 41 and the authors of this stage expressly quote Śakatāyana? It was probably at this juncture, that a good many rules, rules that have little to do with the SV or any other Veda, were showed into the text? These are not referred to by Śaurisūnu in his Laghurktantra sangraha 6 The authors of the third stage drew their new material, possibly from Panını, who had borrowed this from Śakatāyana and other predecessors?, or more probably from Sakatāyana himself, whose work may have been partly known to them This becomes clear from a minute comparison of RT 189–211 with Panini VI 1 135—157, the latter being much more systematic and comprehensive To cite only some RT 209 provides for "rathasva” alone, while the corresponding rule in Panini (VI 1 15 7) covers as many as five examples, the word "rathasya" being included in them Panını VIII 3 48 is a clear improvement on RT 128 RT 156.157 have been reduced to one sūtra (VI 1 138) by Pānını The results of such a testing will be found scattered through the notes, and these need not be summed up here There also occur a few rules in the RT which are clearly meant for bhasă, and for which Panını has no corresponding rules, while Katyayana has Cp 96, 97, 98, 99, 103, 106 with their notes Some of them seem to be an improvement upon Katyāyana, but can be explained otherwise as well Take, for instance 96, which reads "bhasayam niparayoh " paper on Aucityalankara of Kşomendia (1885), up also Bombay Sanskrit Series 31 p 31, Sylvain Lovi, Journal Asiatique 1890 FP 234-240, Liebich, Panini p 108, Winternitz, Gesch der Ind Litt III p 383 , Belvalkar, Syst of Skt Gr PP 13-18 Intermediate Prose Selections 1924 vn Nır 29, Schroeder, ZDMG 33 p 177 ff, 49 p 145 ff (169), Hillebrandt, Die Anschaungen uber das Alter des Rgvoda ZDMG 1927 pp 67-68 In the beginning of the text "svaso nāda iti sakatayanal" 2 Cp RT 189-211 and others with my notes Cp 107-109 3 Generations of grammarions must have precedod Pápida Cp Kiel horn, Der Grammatiker PåpıdI NGGW 1885 p 189, Liebicb, Päpid: p 16 1 ·42 RT as a whole is prior to Panini and Katyayana 6 was This would apparently imply that there are many instances, where the a is followed by 'ni' and that the rule prescribes urddh for them Katyayana, on the other hand, limits the scope of the sūtra to three words i e "svairi", "svairini", and "aksauhini", because these may have been the only words to which the urddhu phenomenon was applied A similar explanation can be offered for 106, which reads "vatsataradinamrni" This also would, prima facie, imply that there are many instances to be covered by the rule There may have been many, but since in Katyāyana's time these were only six, he incorpo rated them into a vārtika, and thus made the scope of the gūtra precise And the comparison of the sūtra with the vārtika strongly suggests that the author of the former not at all acquainted with the vārtika Had he known it, he would have, for brevity's sake, begun the sútra with pra, which comes first in the vārtika, and not with vatsatara, which stands second in the vārtika, and is also a larger word In fact, this kind of comparison seems no safe founda tion for any chronological edifice, and we must accept its results with the utmost caution Such similarities are bound to occur in any class of works, and they need not be more than an ancillary to the chief argument, otherwise corroborated Were we to rely solely on them, we shall be forced to admit that Yaska was later than Panini and even Katyayanı! The sútras of Panını nowhere make any provision for the formation of words like "apārna", which occurs in Nırukta (III 2), nor did Panını know Yaska's explanation of "súrya" (RV X 85 20) by "süryasya patnı" Panini, must therefore, have preceded Yaska, else how to account for such an omission in Panını ? Katyayana removes the last defect by prescribing the vārtika "süryaddevatayam cab vacyah" (IV 1 48) We shall have to Yaska was prior to Papini Cp Liebicb, Paniai p 19, Zur Einfuh ruog in die lodische einheimische Sprachwissenschaft II p 28 ff For details 500 Roth, Nir, 1 17 p 38, Hillebrandt, Die Anschaungen uber das Alter des Rgveda ZDVG Vol 81 pp 68 69 ·The three stages of the Pps 43 presume that the author of the vārtikas came after Yaska and utilized his material But the first omission is not rectified even by Katyāyana, who explained "prärna" and "rnārna" etc, but not "aparna" of Yaska This would lead us to assume that Yaska came after Katyāyana' But this 18 all fallacious, and none would entertain this even for a moment The utmost, that we can conclude from such similarities, is this, that these rules may have been taken from Panini, and Katyāyana into the Rktantra, but the former too borrowed them from Sakatāyana and others Thus the process is reduced to this Śakatayana Panini and Katyayana Rktantra and although Rktantra may owe some rules to Panini and even to Katyāyana, yet both of them stand indebted to Sakatayana, and Śakatayana was the author of Rktantra The hypothesis does not cause surprise, when we note, that exactly the same thing happened with regard to the authorship of the Puspasūtra Nothing was definitely known about the authorship of the PpS The Ms C, used by R Simon ascribes it in the end of its fifth and sixth chapters, to a Gobhila”, while the S Indian Mss distinctly attribute it to Vararucis One Ms however, connects the treatise with Audavraji and this 18 significant Weber- threw out a suggestion that the extant Pps is not the work of one man, but is a sort of collection done by 1 Cp Bolvalkar, Systems of Sanskrit Grammar p 7 2 Muller, Anc Sanskrit Literature p 210, R Simon, PpS p 19, 3 Burnell, Arbr XXIII, R Simon, PpS p 495 4 Cp A Catalogue of the Sanskrit Mapuscripts in the Adyar Library Vol I p 51 23 c 11 Grantha charactor 5 Akad Vorlosungen uber Ind literaturgeschichte 1876 p 91 ·44 Prātisakhyas have suffered extensive modifications several hands R Simon, has beautifully shown the successive stages, through which the work has passed' Now the name Puspayaśasa seems strongly suggestive that the work originated with Puspayaśas, a renowned acārya of the Samavedins, and was successively revised by Vararuci, Gobhila and others The same thing is told about Simatıntra, of which thirteen Prapathakas are commonly known But one' Ms has two additional chapters called Sanjñāprakarana, and Burnell reports that two more, called Parvaprakarana are known in the Gujrat? And it is very doubtful whether any one of the Prátisa khyas has escaped extensive modifications, by alteration, insertion, and addition, since its first substantial construction The fact that in the RPr, all that is essential to make out such 7 treatise, is contained in the first half, or chapters I IX, is strong ly suggestive of the accretion of the later chapters, and the character of more than one of them lends substantial sup port to this suggestion That the VPr has suffered interpo lation and addition is the opinion of Whitney, and the same may be held with regard to the TPr and CA It has been suggested that some of the many citations of authorities found in the TPr' have been interpolated in thc Pratisakhya, 1 R Simou, PpS 499 2 unadisphutihar ipaja virarucior prthagava sutran prapitanı ladyatha "krvapazio Vimalasarasvati, the author of Rupimili quotod by Belvalhar Systems of Sanskrit Grammar p 27 The practice of using half armes is conuiuon 4 Burnell, Arbr . YIV 5 Whitney, CA p 580 For the list cp Whitney 1 Pr p 430 According to Whitney all the wetrical rules (TPr XVII 8, XXII 11 15, \XII 2, 14 15 20 XLIV 5, 67) are to be taken as unauthentic They are found in other parts of the Pratiśakhya literature in the same category may also be included the seventeenth and eighteenth chapter and all that follows the twentyfirst on the score of the content alone For details 800 Whitney, TPr pp 432-433 3 6 ·The three stages of Nirukta 45 after the latter ceased to be a mere body of practical rules for the guidance of a school, and in virtue of its thoroughness and comprehensiveness, gained more the character of a phone tic treatise on the Black Yajurveda and was used in other schools than that which originated it And a similar story is told about Yaska's Nirukta Dr Lakshman Sarup, who has based his editior of Nirukta direct. ly or indirectly, on the evidence of sixty five manuscripts?, has beautifully shown the three stages of interpolations in the Nirukta, where the successive interpolations from one family to another, are invariably the amplifications of the text of a shorter recension, and are thrust between sentences, wherever the text could be so enlarged with impunity, as, for instance, in multiplying the number of etymologies and attri buting them all to Yasha?" The same thing was suggested by Goldstucker* with regard to the Unadis of Panını The list of Unādis was first drawn up by Panını on the basis of Śahatāyana," and was afterwards modified and corrected by Katyayana The extent of the 1 Sarup, Mirubta, Introduction 23 2 Sarup Niruhta, Introduction IP 19-20 The three stages are (a) Dietho commentary of Dur, i written before the addition of Pariistas and embodyin, the whole text of the Nirukta represents the oarliest period, i o about the thirteenth century A D (6) Bio the Mss of the shorter recension represents a period later than D, when the Pinsistas, were added but not divided as yet into different chapters and when the oli orthorphs was still prevalent (c) Ain the larger rocousjon represents i still liter period whon the Parigistas had been divided into chapters and old orthography had gone out of use 3 Sarup Mirukta p 2. Au analı,ous example is furnished by I atın literature, the toxt of Servius the comwontatou of Virgil, sleng ? similar threefold amplification 4 Påşını, his place and c pp 170, 181 (roprint 130 139) 5 Cp "nimångåkhyatajanitsåkatay ano bairuktasamayaścı Air I 13 Cp Någeda, Śs on P II 3 I Goldstucher does not notice this ·46 Do we find any trace of Sakatayana's views in the RT ? changes introduced by Katyayana into the text, was so great, that ultimately popular tradition came to credit him with its sole authorship? And this is exactly what we have noticed with regard to RT Here also the tradition has practically forgotton all about the real author of the text, and has consequently credited Śakatayana with its sole authorship VI But assuming that Sakatāyana was the chief author of the RT the question arises "do ue find any trace of his opinions in at 23 Before we attempt an answer to this, let us see, what works Śakatāyana wrote besides the RT 1 Sakatayana wrote a treatise on the pada text, presumably of the SV This is shown by the remark of the commentator on CA (preface to the IV chapter) which runs "samasāvagrahavigrahın yathovaca chandası sakatāyanahi tathā vaksyamı catustayam padam nāmākhyātopasarganipa tanam il 2 Śakatāyana wrote an analytic grammar This is shown by the following (a) Yaska: says "namanyakhyātajānıtı sākatāyanahi" (6) Katyāyanat puts the same thing as - "nama ca dhatujamaha nirukte vyākarane sakatasya ca tokami" 1 "upadisphatikarapaya vararucina prtha,eva sutrapi prapitán tady atha krvapajo" Vimalasarasvati, the author of Rupamali, quoted by Belval kar, Systems of Sanskrit Grammar p 27 2 “As Sakatayada has set forth for Veda, the combination, division, and disjunction of words in parla, so will I set forth the quadruple word, noun, verb, preposition and particle" Whitney in the preface to the IV Ch 3 Nur 1 12 4 Op Pápidi III 3 1, while discussing that every word is derivod from a verbal root ·References to Śakatāyana's treatise on Phonetics 47 (c) Patanjali' says "Sakatayana was an analytic grammarian, as opposed to the etymologist 3 Śakatayana wrote a treatise on phonetics The following are the references to it (a) CA II 22 states that according to Sakatayana final y and v, are uttered with a slighter effort? The same thing is ascribed to him by Panini3 Now Rktantra, while treating the loss of y and v, re cords the view of Naigi in 159, of other teachers in 160, and at the end states, that the half of y and v is omitted, which 18 another way of saying the same thing This view is not attributed to any particular teacher Does it not show that the treatise represents, in the main, the doctrines of Sakata yana, and belongs to a school, which derives its name from him? (6) RPr (VIII 16) states that according to ſakatayana, in the diphthongs, e and ai, a forms the first half, and a the second, in o and au, u forms the second half The view is implied in 15 Cp note on it (c) VPr III 9 states that according to Śakatayana, usarja niya becomes a sibilant before a sibilant The pheno menon is prescribed by 177 (d) VPr III 12 states that according to Śahatayana, visar janiya becomes jihvamülıya before gutturals and apadhmaniya before labials This is, in a way, covered by 177 (e) Panını VIII 4 50 attributes to Śabatayana the view, that duplication does not take place in a group of more On Pápinı III 3 115 Cp Nagesa ŚŚ on Papiai III 3 1 "lesavrttırad hisparsamn såkatiyagal CA II 24 3 "vyorlaghuprayatnatarali såkatayannsy Papin VIII 3 13 4 "sandhyesvakiro'rdhamikára uttarun sujorukara iti fakatåsanal RPXIII 39 6 "prats ayasa varpum mudi sakatnyagal V Pc 110 4 6 "Jbvimuliyopadhuánly nu tähatajanab Pr III 12 2 - 1 2 ·48 References to Śakatāyana's treatise on Phonetics than two consonants? The phenomenon is indirectly prescribed by 169 Cp note on it (1) VPr III 86 states that according to Śakatāyana’ the n of “pari nah” becomes “n" In SV "parı” is followed by "nah" only twice (SV II 560, II 247) The former is cover. ed by 274, but the latter is not, and this seems exactly the reason why Saurisūnu specially cites “pari nah sarmayantya" as an example of cerebralisation in his Laghu. rktantra sangraha3 It is just possible, that a rule to that effect existed in the RT, which somehow or other fell out of it VPr IV 5 states that according to Kiśyapa and Sakatāyana, m and n are dropped, when they are followed by r and a sıbılant' In the note on 112, I have shown in details that n, when preceded by a long vowel, 19 reduced to lisurjanıya, and the same, when preceded by a, becomes y by 117, only to be dropped by 158, but when preceded by other long vowels, it is reduced to r by 115, and an anu svara is inserted by 185 between the vowel and r The VPr seems to refer to this phenomenon (h) RPr 1 16 states that according to Śakalāyana, the first of a class can only be a final Rule 172 moves against it and the reason is shown later on (eThe commentator on CA (IV 30) cites a verse" which according to Whitney means "Śakatayana mentions five cases in which yā suffers separation by aragraha , it is 1 6 triprabhrtışu sakatayanasya' Papp VIII 4 30 2 “pari pa iti sakatayanah' V Pr III 86 3 Bedfoy bas in both the places 'paul pal," Put RV od J9 read 'pari pah' Cp Caland J9 Einl p 34 4 “lopam kasyapa sakata yadau" V Pr IV 5 5 "prathamain såkatåyapah" RPr I 16 6 paſcaivavagrahanaha på sabde såkatāyanah antodattah padatvam ca vibhaktgarthe bbavettu jå ·How is it that Pânını stands indebted to Sakatāyana 49 accented as final, and stands as an independent element, when used as a case ending The examples cited by the commentator are not found in the SV, and there being close affinity between Śakatāyana and Saunaka’, ſakatayana may have laid down such a rule in his treatise on pada text, more or less, applicable to both the SVPp and AVPP Thús barring one or two cases, all the views, attributed to Śakatāyana, that concern phonetics are easily traced in the RT And it was rather presumptuous on Burnell's part that he, without instituting a searching enquiry into the matter, hastily pronounced' - "But of all his (Šakatayana's) distinct and peculiar opinions, there is no clear trace in the text The text is attributed to Śakatāyana, but so far as we know the teachings of that old grammarian, there is no adequate reason for supposing this ascription to be correct VII Hou is it that Panın stands indebted to śahatāyana ? While discussing the authorship of the RT I stated that, with regard to the statements which are similar in RT and Pánını, the latter may owe a debt to the former It has been shown in the notes, that the rules 189-211 of the RT, are found virtually in the same form in Panin, VI I 135-157 These rules have no bearing on the SV, and this suggests, that the same were added to the text later on Here one would argue that the followers of Śakatāyana borrowed these sūtras from Panini and not vice versa This may be true, but the ques. tion in that case would amount to this "Are these sutras of Panini, his ou n, o, has he burroued them from an earlier grammarian qui Barnell, RT p X ·50 Panını has closely followed the implications of the SVPp 1 In the note on 210, I have shown in details, that it was beyond the ken of Panını to show the formation of those words, which he regarded as undervative, and that, wherever, he, in order to make his work encyclopædiac, has introduced their formation into it, he has obviously followed Śakatayana, and this view is emphatically endorsed by Katyayana, Pata ñjalı, Kaiyata and Nageśa' And if we once assume that Panini borrowed 210 from Śakatayana, there is nothing to prevent us from 199uming that, in all the statements, that concern underwatives, and are found similar in Śakatayana and Panını, the latter owes a debt to the former And this is not at all surprising We have just noted that Sakatāyana wrote a work on the padu text, presumably of the SV, gave etymologies, that sounded peculiar to others, and also wrote a work on phonetics The first two works are not available, and the extant parla text of the SV 19 generally ascribed to Gargya Inspite of that, the same forms the basis of the RT and exhibits unmistahable traces of Sakatayana's system Now if we could only show that Panını in his Unadısūtras has closely followed the implications of the SVPp, we shall have automatically demonstrated the Inter's indebtedness to the former It 19 a rulc in SVPp that it does not dimide the rout and the suffin, and dues iniarably separate the prope fiom the body of the word Panını has closely followed in his Unidi' 1 On Panini III 31 For details cp Magesa, SS on this sutra 2 Cp Durga ou Yaska (IV 4) "bahvrcain mebanetyekam padanı | chandoganan trlayetà di paduur "ma jha na' itu tadubhayam paśyata bhåşyakaronobhayol såkalyayargyago rabiprāyaratranuvihitau'l Durga lived about the beginning of the 14th century (L Sarup, Mir 29) and as he quotes here the old commoutator 10 Skandasvimin ag bis authority, his statement is entitled to consideration Cp alsø Såmajramin, Preface to the Akşaratantra 3 I have already pointed out that ſākatāyana was the chief founder of the Unådiprakriya Unådis may have existod ovou before him, but it was ·Panını has closely followed the implications of the SVPp 51 the implications of this practice This will be clear from the following SVPP Panini panthah patastha ca' (656) anikah anıhrsıbhyam kicca (626) isirah isimadio (595) sthavirah (but stha i virih) ajirasiº (595) vidathanı? rudivıdıbhyam nit (622) patangah paterangac (600) uktham patrnudivacıº (604) no doubt, he, who at first put them into a systematic form, as is shown by the clear statements of Yaska, Katyayana and Patañjalı Padini, who came some centuries later, overhauled this list and made definito improvement upon Sakatayana The extapt Upadis exhibit unwistakable marks of Papini apon them They use sanjñas such as hrasva, dirgh, pluta, udatta, upadha, lopa, samprasarana and abhyasa in the same sense in which Papini uses them The elliptical words 18 anubandhas of the Voadıs are also similar to Padidi's Katyayana, who came later than Padidi, improved bis work, and the extent of the changes introduced by Katyayanı into the text was so great, that altimately be came to be regarded as the sole anthor of tbe Unadis Cp Belvalkar, Syst of Skt Gr p 27 All the lists of Udadis have not yet been published We have only Panchapadi in the Siddhanta haumudi A Daśapadı has been edited by my triend Pt Brabwadatta and is now in the press at Benares The publication of the complete list of Upadisutras will open a now and fascinating field for researches on Indian Grammar The reference 18 to Sk of MM Śivadatta ? Op vrlatha cp Muller, SBE 32, 350, Bloomfield, JAOS 19, 2, 12 #f, Gelddei, ZDMG 3 52 733-C1, Wackerbogel, Altid Gr I 108 and Macdonell, Vodic Gr P 23 I do not see any reason why "patanga' has been included in the list "amudrndı" (C4 IV 10) which negatives the division Note that "samudra" 18 divided into sam i zodra in the SVPp The Padapātba of tbe AV has been edited in full by Shankara P Paddit in bis 4V Tbo Padapātha contains serious errors both in regard to accoptuation and tho division of compound verbal forws, as well as in other respects Macdopoll, Vedic Gr p 4 Cf also Luders, op hrdyota, Vyásagikpå p 56 co ·52 SVPp Yaska and Panını, all the three agree SVPp Panini haryatah bhrmrdrsio (621) vrsabhah [sivrsibhyam kit (622) ojah ubjerbale balopasca (639) aksarah aśeh sarah (619) parvatah bhrmrdrsio (621) kumarah hameh kıdıccopadhayah (623) eta sah inastasan taśasunau (624) These words are not separated in the SVPp, and ac cording to Panını, they consist of only two elements ie the root and the suffix Now let us see some specimens, where SVPp, Yaska, and Panını all the three agree – SVPp Pānını Yãska atithih rtanyancıo (607) "abhyatito grhan bha vatil abhyeti tithisu parakulanıtı va pls (nir 4 5), The first derivation accords with the SVPP atma sätibhyāmanınmanı "atmataterva i apter nau (637) va i api vapta iva syat I yavadvyaptı. bhūta itu'(nır 13 15) parsuh spršeh svansunau pr "parsuh sprśateh" ca (642) ( 43) parjanyah parjanyah (prsu seca "parjanyastrpehiad ne) (621) yantaviparıtasya tarpayıta janyahı paro jetā vai paro janayıta vai prar jayıta va rasanami 1 Lor the discussion on Iman - átman cp Wackernagel, Altiad Gr 1 61, Macdonell, edic Gr p 11 Muller Anc Sanskrit Lit p 23 dote ·THE KUPPUSWA SASTRI RES TIIUTE MAO ANA Differences noted 53 SVPp Pānını Yaska (10 10) The first derivation accords with the SVPp naksatram amınaksıyajivadhipa "naksatrani naksater- (yajatram) tıbhyo 'tran (621 ) gatıkarmanah 1 (III (vadhatram) 20) amum sa lokam naksate tannaksat. ranam naksatratvam." (TB 1 5 2 5 6) But the derivations'nemanı ksatra niti ca brahmanam" (SRV 1 50 2) and "na vă imanı ksatra. nyabhuvannıtı"(TB II 7 18 3) are not favoured by SVPp, and hence are not followed by Panını ahib thantiti! "ahirayanat etyanta riksei ayamapita ro' hiretasmadeva i nirhrasıtopasargahı" (11 17) The der viation from Vhan+ a is not favoured by the SVPp Were it acceptable to Pp, the prefix a would have been separated There are instances, where Yaska has deviated from the SVPp, and Panını has followed him instead of the former 1 Macdonoll, Vedic Gr pp 38 74 ·54 Differences noted To cite only a few instances SVPp Panini Yaska aksı (= a 1 ksi) aśernit (624) "aksi casteh anakteri tyagrāyanahi" (19) Both the derivations move against the SVPP aksa (=a i ksa) aśerdevane (616) "aksah aśnuvata enaniti vā labhyaśnuvata ebhırıtı vai"(IX 7) asurasya? "asurah i asuratah" (=a surasya) aseruran (594) (na+su+ra+tah) This accords with the SVPp But "stha. nesvastah i sthanebhya iti vai api väsuriti prananama i astah sarire bhavati i tena tadvantah." go against the SVPp, because in that case a will not represent negation, and hence would not be separated viprah (vi i prah) rjrendrägra• (607) Pånını dırıves the word from Vvip putrah "putrahi puru trayatel ( = put i trah) puvo hrasvasca (637) punnarakam Itatas. trāyata iti var" This accords with the SVPp But "nipa- I The word cannot reasonably be connected with assur, either as source or result Cp Thomas JRA8 1916 p 364 ·Panını rejects SVPp and Yaska 55 SVPp Panini Yaska ranadva " militates against it, and the same has been followed by Panini Instances are not wholly wanting, where Panini wavers between SVPp and Yaska To cite only one SVPp Panini Yaska mitram amıcımıdışıbhyah It "medayaterva" (X 21) ( = mi i tram ) rah (637) But "mitrahi prami. tes trayateh i samminvano dravatiti val"accords with the SVPp amitram amerdvisatı cet (638) (ai mitram) Here Panını derives the word from y mi with "tra" as suffix and not a second word Thus Panini's inconsistency in the derivation of minia and amitra 19 ob vious Instances are not wanting, where Panını has rejected both the SVPp and Yasha, and has offered his own derivation To quote only one SVPp Panini Yaska usra (u i sra) Paninı derives the "utsråvino syam bho word from V vasand gah" Nir IV 9 thus the word is in This reading 18 adop divisible Cp "spha ted by Sayana on yı tancıo" (605) RV III 31 11, but ·56 Pånını rejects Yaska and follows SVPP SVPP Pånini Yaska Dr Sarup adopts "usravino' syam Instances may be found, where Panini has rejected the SVPp and has accepted one (which is inferior) of the many derivations, given by Yasha To quote only one - SVPP Panini Yaska utsam (ut i sam) udigranthikuśibhyaś. "utsahi utsaranadva i ca (618) Panini pre utsadanadva utsya. fers to derive the ndanadva." These word from v ud, well accord with which he does not SVPp But "unat. consider as prefix ter va" (X 9) goes against it, and the same has been ac. cepted by Panini Instances are not wholly wanting, where Panini has rejected Yaska and the authorities quoted by him, and has accepted the view of the SVPp The following is most significant - Panini Yaska SVPp "agnim" this is not divided by the pada text Panini derives the Yaska offers five word from vanj Cp derivations of the "anger nalopasca" word (608) "agnih kasmati agranir bhavati i agram yajnesu praniyate ! angam nayati samnamamanahi ak nopano bhavatiti sthaulaşthivih i na knopayati i na sne. hayati tribhya akh.

·Pánını accepts Yaska only partly 57 SPP Panini Yaska yātebhyo jāyata iti sāka pūnih itat i uktaddagdhādvā initat" Nir VII 14 Now in all these derivations, the word must be divided Prathamah prathermaśca (645) "prathamah prata- (Not separated in the Pp) mo bhavatı" II 22 There are instances, where Pānını accepts Yaska only partly To cite only one SVPp Panini Yaska ahah (a ihan) nani jahäteh (603) "ahah kasmāti upaha- Pânını regards a as rantyasmin karmarepresenting nega ni (II 20) Yaska de. tion and not as a rives the word from prefix ( = na hiyate, Vhrta which is retyajyata ityahah) jected by Panini The derivation according to the SVPp would be, perhaps, "na hanyata ityahah", which seems better, as it reflects the popular continuity of the cycle of day and night Thus the difference between the three grammarians, with regard to this word, seems to have been great ·58 Yaska tacıtly follows the SVP C 1) There are instances, where Yaska offers numerous derivations for a word, but Panını accepts only one, which accords with the SVPp To cite only one Yaska offers the following derivations for the word indra' "indrahiram drnatiti vá i tram dadatiti vīlirām dadha titi vai irām dārayata iti va i irām dhārayata iti va i indave dravatiti va i indau ramata iti va i indhe bhūtanit vd i tadyu denam prinarh samaindhamstadındrasyendratvamıtı vihdyute idam karanadıtyágrāyanah i idam darśanadityaupamanyavah i endaterialsoargakamanai Lindaichatrũnăm darayita và Lada rayıtā vā yajvanām li' Nir X 8 Of all these derivations only two, (a) "indhe bhutanı (6) "indatervaišvaryaharmanah” accord with the SVPp, which does not divide the word, and the latter of the two has been actually accepted by Panini, who forms the word with the Vidi+ra Cp "rprendragravajra• (607) That Yasha tacitly follows the SVP'y need no longer be doubted, and I cite here only one or two specimen instances to illustrate the point SVP Panint Yayka purusa? Yasha offer4 thrcc (Not divided in the SVPp) derivations for the word "puri sādah ! puri sayahi pürayater vai pūrayatyantah" (1 23) The last derivation accords with the SVPp,and has been accepted by Panını I Cp Wackernagel Altind Gr I 157 note purusa - pūrusa = purfa Cp Wackernagel, Altınd Or I 51 52 2 ·17382 Yaska tacıtly follows the SVPP 59 SVPp sūryah (Divided only once) Yaska Cp "purah kusan" (630) Yaska offers three derivations "sarterva i suvatervă I svirayatervā 1" (XII 14) The last ( Virtsu ) derivation accords with the division adri (Not divided in the SVPp) Yaska derives the word hiranya (Not divided in the SVPp) “adriradặnätyeva i api vatteh syat" (IV 4) The latter harmonises with the SVPP and has been followed by Panini Cp "adı Sadı bhū subhi. bhyah krin" (629) Yasha states "hiranyam kasmati hriyata a yamyama. namiti va i hriyate janajjanamitiva hitaramanam bhavatiti va i hrdayaramanam Bhavatiti väl haryatervā syat prepsakarmanah " (II 10) ·60 SVPp Yaska and Panini, all the thrce agree SVPp Yaska The first two and the last one accord with the SVPp Now, let us see some words, which are separated by the SVPp and have been accordingly derived by Yaska and Panini Such are SVPp Panini Yasha svastı (su asti) savaseh (638) "svasti su astitu (III 21) 13 candramah candre mo dit (641) "cayın dramati I can (candra i mah) dro matā ichandram manamasyet và ” (XI 5) adbhutam adı bhuro dutac (642) "ad bhutami idama (ad i bhutam) pitaradadbhutama bhůtamivanyasya." (1 67) The word omitted in the Index by Dr Sarup durat (duh i at) durino lopasca (606) "dúram hasmati dru tam bhavati i duri yam vā." (III 9, ucca' (ud i ca) udi cerdaisih (642) "uccairuccitam bhi (for ucсaih) vatı” (IV 24) vātapyaya vātapramih ( 625 ) vātapyamudakam (vāta i apyaya) (which is similar) bhavati i våta eta 1 Cp avyayanam CA (IV 71) which negative, the division of indeclı Qables The commentator cites "ucca picat But cp Macdonell Vodic Gr In other respects there is a close resemblance betwoon the Padapathas of SV and AV For instance "prtadaşat' is not divided in SVP, it is also indivisible in AVPp Cp "anivådante 'CA IV-70 "vispatım' 19 pot divided in SVPP p 196 It 19 also not separated 19 AV Pp Cp CA IV 60 Cf also Whitney 1084 a P 30 ·Burnell reputed 61 SVPp Panini Yãska dapyāyayatı 1" (VI 28) durona (duh i ona) "durona iti i grhanama i duhkha bhavanti i dustarpāh," (IV 5) osadhı (osa dhi) "osaddhayantiti vai osatyena dhayantiti va i osam dhayantiti va" (IX 27) upama (upa i ma) (upamımıte'naya) "upamimite"(III 13) gavyűtı' (go 1 yūtı) "goryūtau chandasyupasamkhyānam" a vārtika on Panını VI 1 79 wahhı (sa ikhi) "samane khyah sa codattah" (635) See how closely Panını follows the Pp udaram (u i daram) "udi drnaterajalau purvapadántyalopéca" (642) This is most significant, and makes it unmistakably clear that Panini has closely followed the SVPp These are some of the typical instances which provoked Dr Burnell to remark "These specimens of the Padapātha of the Kauthumas are not calculated to give a high opinion of its author or outhors, who were not even consistent in their treatment of the words" But how beautifully cogent and charming does it all look, when read in the light of the comparison with Yaska and Panini ? It is clear, at any rate, from the above shown compari son, that there is a remarkable affinity between the deriva 1 Bohtlink and Roth analyse gavi-uti Cy also Mac Dell Vedic Gr p 65 ·62 Contrast between the SVPp and RVPP tions implied by the SVPp and those given by Yaska and Panini Granting this, let us now proceed with the authorship of the SVPp Now, the most glaring feature of contrast between the SVPp and RVPp is this, that, while the formo ini anably separates the prefir from the uond, the latte, as a principle, does not do so This will be clear frown the following SVPP RVIP pari i n751 duh i 10 duh i one utisah sami uurim parinasi durit durone utszh samudram - parinis durat durone utsch samudram 43 matsu samidbhih vibūvatah Sunrtávati samanam prānah duronayuh upamam samicine Sam 1 atsu hamidbhih VI Luvatah camatsu cimidbhih vsusy atah 11 su instiviti Sunrtasyati sam i anam pri lānih caminain jiinh duronasyuh upamim 11 duh i onayuh up? I mim vam i icinc Samicine This shows that the SVPp regards the proper 15 1 virtually independent element, and hence invariably separates it from the word, while the RVPp holds the prepir as a mere wellary to the u09d, and so, nowhere makes the like separ i tion Bearing this in our mind, when we read in Yaska "na nirbaddha upasargă arthannirthuriti sahatiyanahi uccāvacāh padartha bhavantiti gárgyah i tady? esu padarthah prahurime tam 1" (1 3) we are irresistibly driven to the only conclusion that the author of the SVPp was none else, but Gargya, who was the chief exponent of this peculiar doctrine And this assump ·I the SVPp m toto the creation of Gargya ? 63 tion is confirmed by the tradition, recorded by Durga in his commcntuy on Niruhta IV 4 These indications ought to have made Burnell pause befort he wrotu down his dictum "Were it possible to conclude that we have in it (SVPp) the work of one of the earliest of the grammarians, such as Girgya, it would descrve the minutest consideration, but thcre is not the slightest rc24on to give credit to the tradition is reported by Durg icíry?, nor 14 thuro sufficient reason to suppose that this and tot 14 cten an old work of the hind" (RT III) What ? terrible elisregard for the tradition ? All that was based on tradition wis torn to tattcrs, so much so that the longer words of the Vidi, Epics and Purānas were shou ons no more than 1 poctic myth Little did the carly Indologistu know that i carcful comparison of these literary remuns of our forefathers with their monumental inscriptiors would one day help n placing the universal history on? firmer foundation than before By this I do not imply that 211 Indian traditions it correct and trustworthy, nor do I think that that claim can be made on behalf of the traditions of any other country in particular All what I want to press home is that the traditions of a country, despite the embel 114hments which they may riably receive it the hands of the mythinongering birds irc thc bener of its history ind there fort must not be, in toto rejected unless there be sure grounds 75 linst them But admitting that the citint SVPp did originate with Gary 1, ci me emphitically say “It is u toto the creation of (orgy' Wanddol Moon of Civilization a Rolo and Histori Profalo OP Yr I though he vony often makes swoopi, romarks and 19 Dot reliablo othoi w 199 livell ·64 Anomalies in the SVPp noted The answer will be No And the reasons are patent The word "sürya" occurs, in its different forms, 38 times in the SVPp Out of 38, 37 times it is not divided, but on p 80 we find "süryasya" split up into "su Iūryasya' The fact seems significant, because this division occurs in the commentary on the rule 93, and it may indicate that this solitary "su i üryasya" is an intrusion in the SVPp from the side of Śahatāyana "samatsu” is not divided on pp 12 36, but it has been split up into "sa i matsu (on pp 47, 177, 199, 222) which militates against the usual way of analysing prefixes, and Benfey actually notes "sam i atsu!" "aditya" has not been divided in the pada text but the derivation offered by Yisha' requires separation, and Burnell has actually noted one case, where the word has been rightly split up into "aditya3" "pari srava" is not divided (on p 154), and so is "upamanām''on p 159 "svastyayanih”ıs not split up, but "svastıbhıh” has been rightly divided into “sulasti. bhih " "ucca" is divided into "utica", a division accepted by Yaska and Panını, but "nica" 19 not split up, though Yaska and Pånını require itº "avadyat" is not analysed, though a here represents negation, and Panini accordingly analyses it as "a-vad.yas" "asıkni" is not analysed, though Yaska's derivation? Bedfey SV Ein) LIX 2 "adityab kasmat | adatte iasan I adatte bbasam jyotışam adipto bbaseti va | aditeh putra iti va " Nir II 13 3 RI XVII 4 Whitney (CA IV 33) has given quite a list of coinpounds and denvatives, the division of which may plausibly be supposed to have been noglected by the authors of the AVPp, from uncertainty of etymology, ano maly of forins, difficulty of restoring the original constituents, or the like He has also noted the discordance among the parla texts of the Vedas in details Significant, however, is the difference in noting "sam vatsara" The RV Pp never divides the word, wbile the AVPp invariably writos sam | vatsara 5 "nicairnicitam bhavatı” Nır, IV 24, "nau dirgbasca" SK р 642 6 ' kutsite vaderpaſli yat" SK P 644 7 "asıta | sitamıtı varnanama | tat pratışod ho' sitam ," Nir IV 26 ·Do we find any trace of Sakatayana in the SVPp ? 65 favours it "sambaram" has been split up into "sam i baram”, though the later authorities regard "śmba" as one word? "nijaghnih i nijaghnih" may be, obviously, explained as a slip of printing? Such are the many anomalies in which the Pada text abounds Some of them may be the whims of the original author, some may be attributed to the ignorant scribes and yet others to the printers But the question of vital concern to us, here, is - Do we find any trace of Sahatāyana in it? The answer is Yus We have already suspected Sakatayana's hand in the solitary "su i ūryasya" in the SVPp RPr I 3 states that according to Gārgya, the third consonant of each class is to be used as a final Instead of following this rule, the Pada text, adopts the contrary, viz that of Sakatayana, that the first of a class can only be a final+ Some of the derivations, which are found alike in the SVPp and the RT, may also be attributed to Śákatāyana One thing more Yaska states that Śākatāyana' did not 1 śamba iti rajanaw. samyatei va satay aterva | Wir V 24 $3mperban Sk 631 See also saior buk ci (sambukah 628 and 'jaberbuk Jumbukah 628) In such words tho origin of b is obscure Vost of these pro bably come froin a foreign source Cp Vodonell, Vodic Gr P 36 2 Owing to the ignorance of scribes mistakes crept in the RV Pp Ct Macdonell, Vedic Grammar p 67 (74a) 3 A stuking instance of such a slip occurs in the commentary of Pps VII 288, where the MS roads modhyamuyavarum for sandhyamayavaya vam (RT 111), where R Simon puts a query mark Cp R Simon, PpS p 676 RT 117 18 also quoted on this sutra of the Pps tasmadantyamavasane tştıysin gargyab sparsam 'RPr 1 15 "prath mam sakațāyanah RPr I 16 But up 172, which presumes the finals in the SV Pp as third of the series, and not the first The rule came into Sakata yana's treatise from the side of Gargya This will show how difficult it is to ascertain the value of the discordant facts recorded pellwell 5 "na pirbaddha upasargā aitbapdrabuuti sakatiyanab" Nr I 3 > 4 ·66 The Age of the RT consider the prefix as an independent element, but the RT, based as it is on the extant SVPp, regards it as an indepen dent element Thus, we find a Pada text, attributed to Gargya and a Pratiśākhya attributed to Śahatāyana, but in neither case, the peculiar doctrines, attributed to them, are fully found How to erplain this? While discussing the precise scope of a Prátiśākhya, we noted, that, towards the close of the Brahmanı periud, the tendency for generalisation arose, which slowly and gradually reduced the numerous Sabhas of a Veda to the minimum, and subsequently led to the unification of the different Pritisakhyas of a Veda into one Stretching this argument a little further, we may assume, that, both the SVPp and the RT were much modified in later times, to suit the then current views of the Sanskrit grammarians, particularly Samavedins, and it was, probably, during that process of give and take, that the fol lowers of Sakatāyana sacrificed their distinct treatise on the Pada text', and the followers of Gargya forwent their Pratiśá khya, thus ultimately effecting the virtual unity of the rival schools VIII The Age of the RI The above-shown arguments make the question of the age of the RT a little easy To start with, the author of Gobhılıyagrhyakarmaprakaśıka; and the commentator on Puspasūtra quote its* sútras, and Kaiyata , though not quite The followers of Śakatågana went go far as to actually incorporate one of Gargya's rules into their treatise Cp rule 172 2 That such a thing happened in the case of the AVPP was suspected by Whitney Cp CA IV 74 3 Cp "atha vaco vrttım vyakhyasyimal, idam viisakaranıya GGKP 1 P 122 On PpS 787 5 On Pipini IV 2 60 "uktharthawiti gamalıks 10am prātıšakhiyanı sastramitgarthab " The reference is not explicit to justify the identification Cp Weber, Ind Lit Gesch p 91 note Burnell, Arbr Tot XX ·RT 19 not later than other Prātisakhyas 67 explicit, refers to it Caranavyūha? mentions Rktantra and Samatantra The Śıksa, which is supposed to be the forerunner to the Prätıśakhya?, quotes it, (in the name of Audavrajı), and the author of Rktantravivrtı", a comparatively late work, of course, explains the word "smrtäh" occuring in the Naradaśıksā as "rktantraharadıbhih smrti ityarthah " Coupled with these indications, the assumption, that the author of the above-named treatises, together with the Puspasūtra, whose authorship has been till now quite uncertain, was Puspayasas Audavraji, who is mentioned by the Vamsa-brahmana among the illustrious ancients of the SV, (backed by Caland's hypothesis that Puspasūtra is earlier than the Ūha and Uhyaganas), makes out our treatise, in its original form, older than other Pratiśakhyas And this does not cause any surprise, when we note, that, while the Prātisakhyas are devised to preserve the text of the Samhitas, and are, therefore, in a way, theoretic, the Sāmatantra and Puspasūtra were created to turn the rc into sãmans, that were sung at the Soma-sacrifices, which existed long before the Prátisakhya literature arose Thus, Rktantra, in its original form, is not later than other Prātisakhyas 1 "tatra kecit punarıktantiam samatantram sanjñadhatulak adamıtı vidhiyante / " Śwunakıyacırnoavyuba II On Sanjuadhatulakpapa cp Caland PVB Introduction p VII On the Carapavyuhas op Weber Iod Lit Gesch 105, 157, Burnell, RT p XIII pote, Muller places these Pariśıştas later than the sūtra period Cp Adc Skt Init P 249 2 Cp footnote on 60 3 The Śikṣas are primitive Haug, Uber den Wessen pp 53, 63-4 They belong to Padınıyan school of Sanskrit grammar Burnell, Arbr p XX Sık sas are modrn Kılhorn, Ind Ant V pp 1 41 et seq, The TPr 18 oldr than the Vyasa 6ıkşi Luders, Vyasasıksa, E.nl p 3-4, 16 Śıkşas are fore runner to the Pratiśåkbyas S Varma, Critical Studies pp 13-14 4 Printed in the ond, the author refers to Sayapa Cp notes on Vivştı 5 "pumpayasasa audavrajeh puşpayaga avdavrajih" Vamsabrāhmana Pll 6 I bave questioned its arcuracy ·68 Analysis of the RT In its second stage, ie as the work of ſakatāyana, it is not later than other Prātisáh hyas Śahatāyana is quoted by RPr VPr, and CA In its third stage, the work may be later than Panını and even Katyayını IX Analysis of the RT 1 Introductory ind explanatory (1) The origin and general mode of production of articulate sounds (2) Enumeration of vowels and consonants , definition of terms (visarjanıya, jihvimūliya, uprdhmāniya, ananā sika, yıma and anusıāra) And this is exactly what Westergaard concluded about other Pra tisakhy as Cp Uber den ultøsten Zeitraum p 67 Burnell egrees with it Cp IT p LVI But Burnell unhtly adds that all the Pratıśakhyas, in their original form, existed before Pani In hus ossily on the Aindra School of Grammarians he concludes 'Aindri vis the oldost school of Sanskrit gra mmar and thrt Aindri treatises were actually hnown and quoted by Paniui and others, and that Aindra treatisos still exist in the Pastı-akhyag, in the Katıntra and in sumlar works though they have been partly rocist or correc tod” And again "The Aindra tro atisos belong to a system older than Paninis though here is perhaps reason to believe that not one of them 19 as a whole older than the grammar of the last' I may add that Audavrnji * As perhaps one of the greitost exponents of Aindra School of yramm who had the three analytic works of the SV to his credit, and it seous significant, that the wajority of the waryas, quoted by TPr, belong to the Samaveda because their names occur in the Srauti qutras of Latyayana ud Drahyay ida It seems that grammar was the favourite subject of the Samavedins, and thoy, in this sphere, commanded the respect of the followers of other Vedas 18 18 evident from the close relationship, in which CA stands to it, and the fact was apparently known to the authors of the gloss on Papiulyasıkşa, who very often cites the authority of Audavraji, Naradisiksa and other Samavedic works, to the virtual exclusion of others ·Analysis of the RT 69 (3) kära forms names of letters, a forms name of consonants, epha forms name of r, mode of formation of alphabetic sounds Different order of letters for the sake of pratyaharas (1) General provision for the irregular sandhis in compounds (2) Mode of utterance of vowels and consonants 2-10, samsvāda and nigãra have no particular sthāna 11, mode of utterance of nāsihyas 12, vurga, with first mute, forms names of series 13, sonants 14-16, the last of the series 19 nasal 17, final simple vowels nasalısed 18, long i nasa lised 19 (3) Division of syllables 20-26 (4) samyog?saññi (5) Quantity of consonants, 28, qatı 29, ( and o 30 (6) vrttis ie drută, mudhyamii and vrlambıtā 31-33 (7) Pause between two individual sounds 34, between two vowels 35, in the pause 30, at the end of the half of a verse 37, in gātha 38, in iman 39 (9) The length of 1 short vowel 40, definition of anu 41, standard of 2 long vowel 43, of irddhu 44, in V1125 vanya 45 (10) Definition of Sura 46, a consonant 2140 is ahsara 47-48, a short vowel in equal to 1 long one, if followed by con junct consonants 49, 2 long vowel is called quru 50 (11) Accentuation 51-60 211 (1) Prescription of chusruti after a circumflex 61, there is only one main accent (udatta) in 2 pudu 62, padas are the basis of samhita 63, euphonic alteration takes place in the padus 64, 65 there 14 only one main accent ·70 Analysis of the RT (udatta) in a compound 65, vrbhaktıs are omitted in a compound 66 (2) Euphonic combination (3) Definition of samhıtā (4) Final vowels, not liable to combination 68-77, (with exceptions) (5) Final a elided after e and o 83-84 , final a not liable to combination 85-87, final , and i not liable to combination 88, final n and m not liable to alteration 89-90 (6) sandhıs, dirghatva 93 , guna 94, arddhı 95-97, parar upa 98-100, euphonic combination of initial r with exceptions 100-106 , yan 107-110, euphonic combination of final diphthongs 111 Final consonants Final n is changed to risanjaniya 112-113, nasalısation of a 114 , visarjaniya is changed to , before sonants 115, usamaniya of rephrta words changed to r 116, preceded by à it becomes y 117, ah is turned into o 118-119, exceptional cases 121-124, visarjaniya is reduced to s 125-152, final n is changed into s 153-155 Final s omitted 156-167, y omitted 158-161, v omitted 162-163, at omitted 164, d omitted 165, s of v stha and V stambh omitted 167, a consonant arising of doubling omitted 168-169, r omitted 170, išmatva omitted 171, the third of the series assimilated to the following 172-173 Initial s becomes rh 174-175, h is changed into the fourth of the series 176 Visarjaniya assimilated to the following 177, dentals assimilated 178-79, m assimilated 180-181, m is changed into anuszāra 182-83, it is reduced to mand n 184 Insertion of anuszāra 185, of the first of the series 186, of t 187, of $ 188, of s 189-211 ·Peculiarities of the RT 71 Lengthening Lengthening of final vowel of the first member of a compound and other words 214-255, exceptions 256-260, lengthening of the first vowel of words 201-263 Doubling 264-271 n is changed into n 272-274 , exceptions 275 s is changed into s 276-285 Resulting cerebralisation of the initial dentaly X Remarks The first Prapathaha, which has been quoted by the later grammarians in the name of Audavraji, has been clumsily tagged on to the real text, because, some of the points embraced in it, are agun briefly mentioned in the second Prapa thaka, and some, like the one referring to pratyaharas, have no bearing on the subject Saurisúnu does not very much touch upon this chapter In regard to the matters embraced by the second Pra pathaka, our treatise is clearly much more curt and concise, and more ready to pass without notice what may be assumed as already known, than the RPr TPr and VPr Definitions of terms are far from numerous, and the department of par bhasās is remarkably meagre The treatment of phonetics is unusually meagre The three Prātiśābh jas imply a list and enumeration of the sounds of the spoken alphabet which is wanting in our own All, also, after treating the subject of the formation of articulate sounds at the beginning in greater details than in the Rt , revert to it in the later and less genuine chapters, and discuss it anew with a desire for greater theoretic profundity This is not found in our treatise and CA, the real text does not even notice the svarabhakti, yamas, and similar other niceties, which play so prominent a part in other Pratisakhyas, including the CA ·72 Peculiarities of the RT Under the head of the conversion of Pada text into the Samhita, the Prátisakhyas differ only on minor points, or in the treatment of special cases, pertuning to the text, with which each of them has to deal These are the subjects, which every Prātisakhya must tackle, and these are the only ones that are found in our treatise In these matters our Prátiśākhya bears a close affinity towards the CA and Whitney has rightly observed the close relationship between the two Both the treatises make extensive use of the games in the construction of their rules The three Prātiśākhyas, in order to show the precise ken of a particular sandh, register long series of cxamples, while these two Prātiśākhyas catch hold of the minute principle underlying them all, and with its help, cover in ont rule, what takes so much space in others It is this, which has enabled them, while including so much, to be at the same time, so much the briefest These, and the like things approaximate them to the character of the general Sanskrit grammar, as principally and finally represented by Panini Whether these peculiarities, will help in any way, to determine the chronological relation of our treatise to the other Prātiśākhyas, 19 very doubtful The discussions held by Burnell, on this point, have yielded nothing positive Those were based, more or less, upon the assumption, that the appearance in a Prātıśākhya, of a phase of grammatical treatment, or its phraseology, is an evidence of its later composition But the fallacious nature of this argument was long ago shown by Whitney, and it carries, indeed, absolutely no weight, so far as our treatise is concerned, in which, composed as it 18, by an acārya, who was himself a great grammarian, the introduction of such characteristics was quite unavoidable Other Pratiśākhyas, including, of course, CA, treat the construction of pada text, krama text, and sundry other ·IL A CHRIST RESI'' MADOR -02 i. UIE RT is less comprehensive then the RPr 73 things: The SV has no Krama text, there may have been supplementary treatise on the SV Pada text, and tradition actually ascribes such a one to the author of the RT himself The construction of Krama text is not touched upon in TPr , and the portions of RPr and CA which concern it, may be later accretions in the text The construction of the Pada text, receives still more scanty notice, being entirely passed over in the TPr, and represented in the VP only by a few scattering rules, relating to the special cases, analogous with those, found in the earlier chapters of the CA The VPI alone, treats the subject at large Of matters, that are more or less, akin to the substance of the Prātisakhyas, yet omissible without detriment to their completeness as Pratisākhyas, Whitney has given a detailed comparison, and the same need not be recounted here It is, thus, seen that the Rktantra does not materially differ in its range of subjects from the other treatises of its class That it often oversteps the limits of the subject, which It is treating, or of the sphere of such a work, as we claim it to be, or in which it contemplates euphonic combinations for words, that are not found in the SV, has been shown at large in notes I have also shown in details in the notes, that this treatise, like the CA, is less comprehensive than the RPr I would, however, refer to the phenomenon of the elision of a after e and o, which I particularly reserved for this place In the Benfeyin text of the SV this sandhi this sandh may be tabulated as follows A B ar retained after e oro a elided after e oro 463 145 Total 608 1 For detuls seo Whitney, TPr 129 ff, Luders, Vyasaſıkça 23 ff , Rangacārya and Shama Sastrı TPr Int p 35 ff As for the Krama patha in TIr cp Luders, Vyasasıkşap 35 ff, Whitney, TPr p 429 ·74 abhinchita sandhi in the SV For (a) cf I 5, 6, 11, 13, 24, 29, 35, 36, 37, 38, 40, 43, 45, 51, 52, 53, 58, 61, 67, 75 (3), 82, 87, 93, 100, 104, 107, 108, 111 (2), 133, 142, 143, 148, 151, 155, 159, 174 (2), 179, 185, 194, 200, 203, 230, 237, 252, 259, 263, 274, 279, 283, 284, 290, 296, 298 (2), 304, 306, 320, 323, 324, 326, 339 (2), 341, 348, 353, 357, 358, 362, 365, 367, 376, 378, 385, 389 (2), 397, 399, 417, 419, 421 (3), 422, 426 (2), 435, 439, 448, 449, 461, 463, 475, 482, 484, 485, 488, 491, 496 (2), 499, 502, 510, 511, 512, 513, 514, 522, 525, 526, 529 (3), 531, 532 (2), 533 (2), 534 (2), 538, 543 (2), 545, 546, 547, 554, 555, 557, 558, 559, 562, 565, 577, II 8, 25, 27, 37, 43, 47, 50, 51, 53, 64, 75, 85, 88, 89, 98, 99, 100, 103, 105, 108, 117, 118 (3), 125, 150, 156, 158, 160, 168, 171, 173 (2), 181, 188, 196, 200, 210, 222, 223, 225, 227, 228, 229, 231, 236, 237, 239, 24', 252 (2), 258, 262, 263, 270, 274, 279, 281, 282, 286, 287, 288, 303, 305, 311, 312, 315, 316, 324, 330, 331, 333, 338, 365, 367, 370, 371, 372, 373, 383 (2), 384, 385, 390, 391 (2), 393, 412, 428, 430, (3), 439 (2), 442, 443, 449, 456 (2), 457, 464, 467, 470, 477, 478 (3), 479, 480, 482, 490, 491, 497, 500, 504, 510, 511, 512, 526, 535 (2), 543, 557, 560, 561, 566, 568, 569, 572 (2), 573, 574, 576, 577, 579, 581, 587 (2), 588 (2), 592, 601 (3), 604, 609, 612, 627, 629, 632, 633, 634, 639, 640, 643, 647, 649, 654, 661, 662, 664, 665 (2), 666, 668, 669, 671, 673, 675, 678, 686, 689, 690, 691, 693, 699, 700, 701, 702, 705, 706, 707, 711, 716, 719, 720, 723, 727, 729, 735, 736, 737, 740, 745, 749 (2), 758, 760, 762, 764, 766, 767, 772, 773, (2), 776, 778, 787, 795, 801, 803, 805, 806, 825, 826, 831, 848, 852, 853, 857, 859, 861, 866, 873, 874, 875, 885, 888, 890, 893, 894, 897, 898 (2), 902, 908 (2), 909, 913, 916, 917, 919, 928 937 938, 953 954, 956, 957, 958, 961, 963, 964 (2), 965, 967, 970, 973 (2), 974, 976 (2), 996, 998 (2), 1007, 1022, 1032, 1042 1043, 1067 (2), 1072, 1074, 1078, 1085, 1092, 1093 (3), 1094 (2), 1095 (2), 1100, 1101, 1102, 1104, 1105, 1108 1109, 1111, 1113 1115 1119, 1128 (2), 1129, 1132 (2), 1133, 1134, 1136, 1138 (2), 1139, 1152, 1153, 1155, 1160, ·abhinahita sandhi in the SV 75 1161, 1162, 1172, 1175, 1177, 1197, 1199 1200 (3), 1206, 1207, 1213, 1221 1224 and 1228 1 For (b) cf I 7,49 84, 88, 97, 98, 132, 146, 219, 233, 239, 246, 250, 263, 272, 279, 302, 304, 305, 314, 326, 342, 351, 352, 371, 402 408, 411, 412, 413, 414, 425, 466, 478, 503, 510, 519, 521, 523 542 (2), 548, 555, 563, 584, II 2, 9, 27, 30, 43 (2), 55, 58, 103, 114, 126, 138 148, 163, 182, 221, 226, 232, 243 271, 276, 281, 298, 318, 329, 332, 341, 344, 352, 353, 380, 382, 415, 450, 451 463, 501, 541, 547, 549, 568, 569, 599, 603 (2), 605, 609, 617, 622, 625 630, 645, 662, 692 699 700, 723, 769, 773, 774, 783 788, 791 (2) 792 805 (2) 827, 839, 888, 894, 902, 919, 920, 922 930, 949, 955, 958, 972, 997, 1044, 1065, 1071, 1077, 1090, 1106 1108, 1134 1155, 1156, 1177, 1180, 1195, 1202, 1208 (2), 1215, 1224 and 1225 It will be clear from the above-table that the common custom with regard to this sandh in our Samhita is to retain a, the retention being to the omission as 3-1 In the interior of a pâda, it is practically always retained, excepting of course, passages, where a is followed by v (not joined with consonants that make it liable to doubling), in which case the omission in inevitable, so much so, that, while in the RV 7 32 27 we read 'ma sıvāso avakramuh' noted as a counter example on RPT II 40, the text in the SV has 'ma sıvāso' vakramuh' (II 105), thus showing that the tendency of omitting a before v, which had stray exceptions in the RV, became a universal law in the SV This kind of elision occurs 19 times in SV , though in all the passages the metre requires retention of a In SV I 584, II 318, 447, 622 the a is elided, not because it is fol. lowed by v, but because here it stands at the beginning of a pada in which situation omission is certain, barring, of course, a few cases noted in 77 and 82 According to Whitney's counting the proportion of omissions to retentions in such a situation in the AV (cf ·76 abhinihita sandhi in the SV CA II 54) is 5 to 1, and in the Rgveda it is still larger', and there may be very few instances in the earlier portions of that text, where the custom of omission of a at the beginning of a pāda is not followed The practice is scrupulously observed in SV, and our treatise notes only I 450 "citro agnirmarutah', where the a, standing at the beginning of a pada, is not elided As for the instances, where a standing in the ilterior of a pada is elided, it notes (a) SV I 466 = RV 2 22 4, noted by RPr II 42, (b) SV I 519 = RV 9 107 6 not noted by Uvata, but covered by RPr II 37 But here comes one difficulty, and it is this, that, if we interpret, the word “nyūne” (RT S 76) in the way, we have already done, this rule (RT 78) becomes super fluous, because in both cases the metre requires omission, as in ‘pado 'sya' (ArS 34,35), and if we understand by the word only "antahpadam" and no more, then we have no provision in our treatise for several omissions Leaving aside SV I 413, 414, 425, II 1090, 1108, which seem of one and the same metre, and where a stands at the beginning of the second or third pada, we take SV II 773, which reads "te asya santu ketavo' mrtyavo,' dabhyaso jinusi ubhe anu 1 = RV 9 70 3 I (a) In the RV It is elided in about 75 percent in the AV 10 about 66 percent of its occurences in the RV it must be pronounced in 99 percent in the AV und the metrical parts of the YV in about 80 percent of its occu rences Cp Macdonell Vedic Gr for Students р 23 (6) The few instances (70 out of 4500) of the eligion of a in the RV dra the forerunners of the invariable practice of post Vedic Sanskrit Cp Mac donell, Vedic Gr p 66 The frequeat elision of the a in the written text com pared with its almost invariable rotontion in the original text of the RV indicates a period of trnasituin between the latter and the total olision of the post Vedic period 2 Cp Arnold, (Vedic Metre) who divides the collection into five lay ors Against thu cy Keith JRAS, 1906 pp 486-90, 1912 pp 726-9, the Rel and Phil of the Vedi Vol I pp 3-4 ·abhinchata sandhr in the SV 77 It is a tristubh stanza, the commonest in the RV, consisting of four verses of eleven syllables, divided into two hemistichs, and as the a of "amſtyavo" does not stand at the beginning of a pāda, it should not be elıded in RV ac cording to RPr II 35 and in SV according to 76 But while RPr II 37 (Uvata does not note this example there) provides for the usage in RV, our treatise leaves it entirely unnoticed Similar us "ye no amho'tıpıpratı” II 700 = RV 7 66 5 (noted by RPr II 42) and "samkrandano' nimisa ekavırah" II 1202 =RV 10 103 1 (RPr II 41) Then, there is II 462, which is incomplete and reads "pravo'rcopa." The full mantra must be anything but "pra vo mahe matayo yantu visnave” I 462, and "pra vo mahe mahe vrdhe" I 328 = II 1146 It is not "pra vo mahe mandamānāyāndhaso" RV 10 50 1, because here we have "upa", while the third pada in RV runs "ındra sya yasya sumukham" At any rate, the a in 'pravo'rcopa" is not a padadı one, and its elision is not noted by our treatise Again SV II 1224 runs – andha amitra bhavatasirsano' haya iva tesām vo agninunnanamındro hantu varam varam il The stanza is wanting in RV, but is found in AV in the following form mudha amitrāścarata śırsāņa ivahayahi tesám vo agnimūdhānámındro hantu varam varam it Well, if the reading of the text be correct, the example is not noted by our treatise Then, there is SV II 1225, which runs yo nah svo 'rano yaśca nistyo jighamsati il This occurs in the RV (VI 75 19) with a yo nah svo arano yaśca 11 "svo'rano" has been noted by Saurisūnu in his Rktantrasangraha, and this leaves for us no option but to assume that the example is not noted by our Prátisakhya ·78 RPr is entirely free from all over sights With regard to this phenomenon, the RPr seems thorough, and as far as I have been able to examine the text of the RV I have found that the Prátiſakhya covers almost all the cases of retention and omission The following examples are not noted by Panını, but are covered by the RPr yo'tı 8 2 34 = RPII 47, dipsavo'dao 7 104 12 = 37, yo' dhvanah 1 71 9=47, manaso'dhi 7 33 11-47, no'dhı 8 96 20= 46 samkrandano nimisah 10 103 1 =41 , yo'nayat 7 = 18 7 = 47, agne'pao 7 1 7 = 47, agne'bhio 1 71 11 = 42 , gave 'Svao 8 30 4= 37, abodhayo' him 1 103 7 = 37 and so on Cp Benfey, SV Einl XXXI Thus, there are, to be sure, here and there, points, in the text of the SV which are not coverd by the rules of our treatise, but we have reason only to wonder, that in executing so immense and intricate a task, as that undertaken by our treatise, which has strictly boycotted the device of enumerat. ing individual examples, so frequently used by the RPr VPr and TPr, there should have been so few oversights Such oversights have been noted by Whitney in TPr and CA, and the same may be found in the VPr , if a thorough examination of the same is carried out The only Prátisakhya which seems free from this defect is RPr, which from the point of view of dignified style, and the mastery of the material with which it deals, occupies undoubtedly the first rank in the Prátisakhya literature The results of such a testing with regard to the RV and RPr will be found scattered in the notes on the RT, and they need not be recapitulated here example I would however, refer here to the phenomenon of lengthening of the final vowels in the RV, which has been treated in the VII and VIII chapters of the RPr, and which, upon a minute examination, has been found entirely free from all oversights I append herewith, the full list of the cases of lengthening in the RV, putting against each example, the rule of the Prātisakhya, which covers it 1 Cp Whitney, TPr p 426 and CA 580 581 As an ·Lengthening in the RV=RPr 79 RV RP I' S = M 9 1 10 2 1 11 2 2 4 3 - 6 4 4 ! 5 1 RV S M 18 4 21 2 22 4 22 15 23 8 23 11 23 13 24 15 25 7 25 8 25 25 19 25 19 26 26 5 26 9 5 8 10 6 6 11 6 7 8 7 11 9 9 2 9 9 3 7 11 سا 11 PS 7 56 8 49 7 6 7 33 8 38 8 32 8 39 6 7 55 7 33 8 39 33 7 12 7 33 7 12 8 16 8 4 7 35 7 33 7 31 7 33 7 12 8 15 7 33 7 33 8 15 7 33 8 39 7 33 10 3 10 9 10 10 10 11 10 RPr PS 8 15 8 39 7 45 7 33 8 39 8 39 7, 31 7 33 7 41 7 41 7 41 8 49 7 22 8 15 8 39 7 33 8 15 8 1 7 33 7 50 8 16 8 31 7 33 7 30 8 15 8 36 7 24 7 33 8 15 8 36 RV RPr S M PS 32 5 8 36 33 13 8 36 34 7 22 35 22 = 8 36 35 4 9 35 11 7 33 36 2 7 33 36 13 36 13 7 33 36 14 7 10 37 4 7 31 37 11 8 15 37 15 8 15 38 2 7 33 38 13 7 6 38 13 7 31 39 3 8 39 39 4 = 7 26 39 7 7 39 7 7 33 39 9 7 33 39 10 8 36 40 8 39 40 3 7 6 40 6 = 8 32 41 6 8 38 41 7 26 41 5 8 39 41 6 7 6 42 7 33 11 10 in un 3 11 11 11 13 14 14 15 11 = 11 10 12 2 1 10 27 2 27 4 27 27 7 29 1-6 29 3 29 7 30 6 30 3 31 5 31 17 31 18 31 18 32 4 11 15 - 4 5 o in 11 01 ܢܚ 15 15 16 17 18 10 7 8 3 11 This stands for Maodala S=Sutra , M = Mantra , P=Patala, 1 S=Sutra 2 For reasons cp Macdowell Vodic Gr p 63 01 ·RP 80 Lungo v RV S M 42 6 44 44 44 8 RPI PS 8 40 7 33 7 5 7 46 7 33 7 5 7 27 3 11 4 1 1 6 1 1 1 ол in = 11 11 - 1 44 45 45 3 45 5 45 9 48 18 5 18 16 19 50 6 51 1 7 7 8 39 9 38 8 15 7 26 7 33 11 11 2 N 5 11 oo 1 8 8 29 8 29 8 48 2 RV RP S M PS 81 3 7 33 81 6 8 35 81 7 12 81 8 7 33 82 8 39 82 1-5 7 18 82 4 8 15 84 8 39 84 20 8 36 86 7 53 86 2 8 39 89 8 7 33 86 9 7 33 86 01 7 33 86 10 7 30 87 8 15 87 4 7 33 88 8 15 89 2 8 38 89 9 8 34 90 7 33 91 8 733 91 15 7 33 91 16 7 33 91 17 7 33 91 19 8 9 92 8 36 92 15 7 33(2) 93 733 94 8 36 94 2-14 = 8 36(2) 94 4 8 36 94 8 8 38 RP RV PS S M 7 33 61 12 7 24 61 16 7 33 61 16 7 6 62 2 7 33 62 12 7 14 62 13 8 39 63 9 8 40 63 9 8 39 64 33 64 8 15 64 9 7 33 64 13 7 37 64 15 7 46 64 15 15 65 4 8 11 69 2 8 15 70 3 13 71 3 726 72 7 33 73 4 7 22 73 9 8 15 75 2 8 33 75 5 7 33 76 2 7 33 76 3 7 33 76 8 38 76 8 36 77 2 7 26 77 2 7 33(3) 79 7 7 26 80 2 7 5 80 7 27 80 4 11 1 12 7 6 1 1 8 11 11 8 11 w 5 un = 51 51 52 53 54 54 54 7 54 9 54 9 54 9 55 5 5 = 56 2* = 57 58 58 9 59 6 60 61 12 11 7 46 7 33 8 28 7 33 7 33 8 40 7 33 8 15 = 7 33 8 1 8 32 11 س un 3 3 V ܝܝܙ 1 11 11 7 51 7 45 8 39 7 33 11 3 in ·Con ng in the RV = RPr 81 Ily 3 - RP PS 7 7 8 34 733 7 7 8 36 8 31 il 8 8 1 co 5 6 8 7 7 ܝܙ 14 33 7 ܝܝܙ 11 7 سا 01 1 RV S M 108 3 109 2 109 2 109 5 110 3 110 8 112 1.23 = 111 2 113 113 4 113 11 113 17 113 19 114 2 114 6 114 9 114 10 115 2 115 6 115 6 116 24 117 19 117 21 119 9 8 7 33 7 33 RP SM PS 94 9 7 33 94 12 7 33 95 11 7 33 96 9 7 33 96 7 7 33 97 8 14 101 8 36 101 8 7 6 101 8 15 101 9 8 36 101 11 7 31 101 11 7 33 102 3 8 15 102 4 8 36 102 5 8 15 102 6 7 33 102 7 33 102 10 7 33 103 7 25 103 5 8 15 103 7 104 7 7 104 2 7 26 104 104 8 15 104 7 7 33 104 9 8 36 105 9 7 49 105 15 742 105 18 7 7 106 2 8 31 107 8 34 108 1,6-12= 7 33 5 RV RP S M PS 129 8 15 129 4 7 50 129 5 8 4 129 7 55 130 7 6 130 2 7 33 130 7 132 8 34 132 8 36 132 8 15 132 4 7 33 132 4 8 u 132 7 6 133 2 7 7 133 6 8 35 133 7 8 15 1347 3 8 29 136 7 19 136 7 26 136 2 7 33 138 8 139 8 + 139 7 6 139 7 = 8 5 139 8 7 33 139 10 7 33 140 7 27 140 8 28 140 140 13 142 4 7 6 142 13 8 39 145 8 15 7 11 1 3 11 7 33 7 53 7 52 7 33 7 45 8 15 8 15 8 36 7 33 8 26 7 33 8 15 7 6 8 30 7 6 7 7 6 1 1 4 1 11 7 5 5 = 5 S 120 122 11 5 = 122 11 123 4 125 1 1 8 سا 7 44 9 127 127 128 129 7 23 8 15 8 15 8 15 11 5 2 I 11 ·82 Lengthening in the RV = RPr 7 co S 8 = w ܠܛ 13 11 5 5 7 11 11 سيا 11 6 = 11 11 RV S M 147 2 148 3 151 7 156 161 161 161 11 161 11 161 13 162 4 = 162 162 18 162 19 162 20 163 4 163 5 163 7 163 13 163 13 164 21 164 38 164 33 165 7 165 12 165 12 165 13 166 6 166 8 166 8 166 13 167 2 167 168 8 RPr RV PS S M 7 33 169 4 8 4 169 5 6 169 8 7 33(2) 170 3 8 32 171 2 8 15(2) 171 4 8 40 171 6 6 40 173 6 7 16 173 11 7 33 173 12 8 39 173 12 7 7 174 640 174 9 8 38 174 7 45 177 4 7 33 178 2 7 33 175 4 6 178 4 7 33 179 7 45 179 8 40 180 7 7 33 180 10 8 36 182 7 182 8 30 184 2 6 185 6 745 186 7 33 186 10 8 15 187 8 8 48 189 2 7 6 189 2 752 190 7 33 190 8 RP RV RP PS S M PS 8 16 191 6 8 39 = S 15 7 33 II 7 12 8 15 2 9 7 33 8 15 2 10 = 6 36 7 33 9 7 33 8 48 8 7 26 7 7 5 6 7 33 8 5 7 7 54 S 15 5 S 6 15 7 33 6 6 39 7 33 8 8 39 7 33 11 7 52 S 15 11 7 33 8 15 11 18 7 56 7 33 11 21 7 32 Ó 38 12 5 8 15 8 15 13 8 14 6 15 ŏ 15(2) 14 6,7 7 19 7 22 14 8 36 6 50 14 9 6 33 7 33 14 10 6 15 6 1 15 7 18 15 15 4 7 7 8 38 15 7 7 7 6 15 10 7 33 169, 7 30 179, 7 33 189, 7 25 199, 7 33 20 9 = 7 33 11 7 11 5 in 11 1 2 - = 8 11 7 5 1 1 = 11 8 7 11 11 O 1 9 11 = Il 9 1 - ·Lengthening in the RV = RPr 83 RP PS 8 38 11 8 w 1 ᏂᏙ S M 34 9 35 35 10 36 2 36 2 36 4 RV S M 13 6 14 4 14 15 3 15 5 7 = 5 11 u N 7 7 7' 7 8 36 8 36 7 33 6 - 2 11 16 17 36 4 11 = 7 8 w 3 11 U 7 17 17 17 6 5 11 8 38 in = 7 7 1 11 11 4 36 4 30 6 37 3 37 3 37 5 37 6 41 7 41 10 41 13 11 15 18 1S 18 7 33 8 38 7 3 11 1 11 RV RPr S M PS 17 4 7 33 17 6 7 46 18 7 6 18 7 = 8 8 36 19 7 6 20 5 7 42 19 7 33 19 8 33 23 7 8 38 23 9 7 31 23 13 8 36 27 6 8 38 27 6 33 27 14 8 15 28 7 8 4 29 2 7 33 29 2 8 36 29 3 29 36 29 6 7 22 30 3 7 33 30 6 4 30 4 7 33 30 10 27 31 2 8 15 31 4 39 33 2 36 33 4 8 36 33 7 43 33 11 7 33 33 8 7 33 33 15 33 34 9 39 11 = RP PS 7 32 7 33 8 36 7 10 7 6 8 38 8 50 7 33 8 38 7 33 7 33 7 33 7 33 7 6 7 6(2) 7 33 8 5 39 33 7 7 15 7 33 36 7 33 8 36 7 33 7 33 8 36 8 30 8 7 43 7 33 8 39 1 - co 1 11 8 7 8 w III 1 1 1 7 6 19 2 22 3 23 1 24 2 24 4 25 26 28 2 28 5 29 29 29 5 29 6 29 29 10 30 co 8 6 un N 11 8 1 15 3 3 5 Il 7 1 4 2 4 3 8 8 6 co w 7 33 7 33 7 33 S 38 7 6 7 33 7 33 7 17 8 15 8 39 7 29 7 33 00 1 Il 7 8 4 9 10 11 سا 11 8 5 10 10 10 5 8 30 6 30 16 30 16 30 17 7 8 7 36 33 - co 13 3 11 7 ·84 Lengthening in the RV = RPr 6 11 RP PS 8 33 7 33 8 8 8 36 7 5 7 7(2) 33 8 35 8 36 7 33 7 33 6 RV SM 30 20 31 2 31 6 31 12 31 20 32 32 2 32 2 32 2 32 3 32 5 33 2 33 33 5 33 9 RV S M 56 6 57 3 57 4 57 5 58 2 58 5 58 6 60 4 60 5 60 5 61 RP PS 8 36 7 6 7 6 8 33 8 15 7 23 8 40 8 36 8 38 7 33 7 band 11 7 1 11 11 11 1 II 7 = 5 6 سم 62 62 8 15 8 39 7 6 4 8 w 11 7 6 4 8 Il 7 IV 7 11 RV RP S M Р S 12 6 7 12 42 7 33 42 7 - 7 7 45 5 7 33 16 2 8 33 46 2 8 36 47 7 33 18 4 = 7 7 49 7 33 50 7 50 2 7 33 50 4 8 33 50 4 8 36 51 5 7 33 51 10 13 52 8 15 53 3 7 33 53 5 8 35 53 5 7 45 53 6 7 45 53 11 8 36 53 11 7 33 53 14 8 39 5+ 8 36 54 8 10 54 6 54 13 7 53 54 15 7 7 54 15 7 27 54 17 8 38 54 22 8 38 55 8 55 3 = 7 7 6 11 1 - 11 11 1 1 8 1 10 1 19 2 14 2 11 11 Al 6 11 - 8 7 ܝܙ ܝܙ 2 15 11 3 2 33 10 35 35 35 35 6 35 36 36 2 36 36 3 36 9 36 38 39 40 40 41 41 6 = سا 8 36 7 33 7 7 8 35 7 7 7 8 8 36 7 33 7 33 7 12 8 16 8 36 7 6 7 33 7 33 8 16 7 12 8 50 8 16 7 7 33 8 15 7 33 8 15 7 33 8 15 7 33 7 33 8 36 7 6 7 33 8 1 8 15 = 7 33 = 11 7 IL 11 = + 9 1 11 3 8 3 10 3 14 3 5 5 13 5 14 6 6 6 6 7 = u un 1 11 u 1 ол IT w N ·Lengthening in the RV = RPr 85 RV S M 6 7 6 11 RP PS 7 33 7 33 7 6 7' 33 7 27 7 2 in 7 8 2 7 RV SM 18 13 19 20 5 20 9 20 10 21 3 21 10 22 RP PS 7 26 8 7 15 8 29 7 55 7 55 7 15 7 33 8 50 8 15 7 10 7 16 8 15 RV S M 32 15 33 6 34 3 34 8 35 4 35 36 4 36 9 Il 10 10 10 8 2 3 ur 5 5 II 10 6 7 4 22 22 1) 12 12 6 7 8 4 36 36 36 36 38 9 12 15 15 6 5 9 5 7 7 1 8 16 16 6 36 6 8 3 9 - 7 3 7 5 9 RP PS 8 39 8 36 6 8 36 7 33 8 36 7 33 8 30 8 15 8 39 8 38 8 38 7 6 8 15 8 36 7 33 7 33 7 5 8 15 8 1 7 22 7 22 7 6 7 32 7 52 7 33 8 36 8 1 7 46 8 15 8 15 7 33 7 33 UT 16 16 16 17 16 20 16 21 8 - 15 26 3 5 7 4 1 7 5 7 33 8 16 8 16 7 33 7 6 7 22 8 36 7 33 8 15 7 23 7 33 8 15 7 6 7 30 8 15 7 33 7 43 7 43 8 33 8 15 15 7 26 15 29 7 55 16 36 38 39 41 42 43 43 43 44 44 44 46 3 24 8 25 3 26 26 7 27 2 28 3 28 5 29 2 29 30 30 9 30 23 31 3 31 4 31 5 31 6 31 8 31 8 31 8 31 11 31 13 32 6 0) 17 21, 1911, 2011, 11 3 5 11 11 1 46 50 50 2 6 11 11 11 8 8 21 11, 23 11= 726 16 17 8 15 16 18 8 15 16 20 7 33 18 2 8 15 18 3 8 36 18 4 7 10 18 5 7 10 18 9 7 33 2 4 11 II 8 8 51 51 51 54 55 7 3 1 8 8 6 32 10 11 56 3 ·86 Lengthening in the RV = RPr RV S M 58 58 RP PS 8 36 8 36 2 2 = RV S M 26 7 26 8 27 3 28 3 28 6 w in un 7 1 7 11 5 29 30 30 8 7 - = 7 31 13 6 32 11 5 7 in 11 11 = - 11 8 un 32 12 33 3 33 7 35 7 35 8 38 38 41 7 11 1 RPr RV PS S M 7 38 49 7 33 51 7 33 51 13 8 36 52 8 15 52 3 7 33 52 8 4 52 11 7 33 52 13 7 26 52 15 7 7 52 16 7 33 53 7 33 54 7 33 54 8 39 54 6 8 28 54 6 7 33 54 10 = 7 26 54 15 8 28 54 15 7 33 55 7 6 55 7 7 33 55 8 8 36 55 10 7 56 57 2 8 4 57 7 7 6 57 8 8 35 58 4 7 58 8 7 45(2) 59 8 15 59 3 8 36 59 6 8 32 61 8 36 61 8 7 6 61 14 RP PS 8 40 7 33 22 7 33 31 7 30 7 33(3 7 33 7 33 7 33 8 15 8 15 8 36 7 33 8 31 36 7 46 8 38 8 31 8 38 8 36 7 6 8 40 8 38 8 38 8 36 8 38 7 33 8 38 7 6 8 15 8 15 7 45 8 5 - 11 7 1 4 = 8 8 15 5 8 36 2 7 8 16 3 7 7 54 4 5 7 7 4 27 7 2 7 33 7 4 15 7 5 7 33 7 7 8 15 9 7 8 39 10 6 = 7 7 33 12 13 7 40 16 33 16 4 7 33 16 5 7 33 17 4 7 33 17 5 7 33 22 7 33 22 2 7 38 22 2 7 23 8 39 23 4 8 15 24 8 36 24 7 6 24 3 8 39 24 3 33 25 7 6 5 II 41 13 41 14 41 17 1 11 11 11 1 42 6 42 11 42 13 42 15 43 3 43 8 = 33 11 II 1 11 6 10 11 1 11 9 4 10 1 1 u A 5 44 45 45 45 45 45 11 1 11 6 6 7 = 9 ·11.II 17300 Inchirm NE ! TE Lengthening in the RV = RP 87 M 4 1 1 ܝܝܕ 1) 11 1 NNN 1 = un ww 1 11 U A 18 = = 1 1 11 II RV RP RV S M PS S M 66 7 33 6 73 1 7 23 9 73 4 8 2 9 70 4 8 28 2 2 73 8 8 2 7 74 7 33 2 11 74 3 7 6 3 2 74 5 8 8 3 3 74 6 7 33 4 74 9 7 17 8 78 8 7 33 5 4 79 3 7 33 6 79 8 7 24 8 79 9 7 33 8 7 82 4 7 33 9 6 82 7 7 22 10 5 83 7 6 11 6 83 7 8 36 12 5 83 8 36 14 6 83 10 8 15 85 1 8 36 15 5 85 5 7 17 15 9 85 6 7 17 15 13 85 7 8 15 15 15 85 8 8 15 15 18 87 5 7 46 16 2 87 8 7 33 16 3 87 6 8 39 16 43 87 9 7 33(2) 16 6 16 11 VI 16 12 16 16 1 2 = 7 33 16 17 = RP PS 8 36 8 36 7 55 8 15 7 33 7 6 8 35 7 33 7 33 7 33 7 33 7 6 8 40 7 33 8 31 7 33 7 33 8 7 7 6 7 17 8 39 8 15 8 10 7 51 7 56 8 40 7 54 7 31 7 24 7 30 7 6 7 17 7 49 RV S 16 18 16 30 16 41 16 43 16 44 16 44 16 45 16 48 17 1 17 3 17 13 8 18 8 18 11 18 13 18 13 18 15 19 12 19 12 20 8 20 12 21 10 22 22 8 23 7 23 8 23 9 24 2 24 9 25 25 2 25 3 25 7 RP PS 7 33 7 33 7 19 7 33 7 6 8 40 7 33 7 46 7 33 7 33 7 33 8 36 7 26 7 26 7 22 7 23 7 33 8 11 7 15 8 36 8 33 8 49 7 25 7 33 7 33 7 52 8 15 7 33 7 17 7 17 8 34 8 36 8 15 1 8 11 11 11 1 1 11 Il 1 11 an = = 1 11 11 11 1 = 11 ·88 Lengthening in the RV = RP RV S M 25 7 25 9 25 9 26 27 7 28 6 29 6 30 2 1 - RP PS 8 36 8 36 7 33 7 5 7 26 7 33 7 49 7 45 7 36 7 16 11 3 - 3 4 30 30 32 32 33 2 VII 4 11 5 11 1 11 1 25 11 RPr RV PS S M 8 36 45 27 7 33 46 3 8 36 46 9 7 39 46 10 17 46 11 8 36 46 12 7 33(2) 47 7 7 33 47 14 7 26 48 17 7 6 48 19 8 36 49 4 7 6 49 10 7 33 49 11 8 36 49 15 8 36 50 7 7 26 50 9 7 42 50 11 7 33 50 15 7 33 50 15 8 36 51 3 7 33 51 5 7 33 33 51 6 8 36 51 6 7 33 51 13 7 40 51 14 8 39 51 15 7 33 51 15 7 6 52 7 10 56 8 15(2) 56 6 8 49 59 8 39 61 6 8 15 61 6 RP RV PS S M 7 52 63 10 7 33 65 4 7 33 65 6 8 15 66 5 8 15 66 5 8 15 71 7 33(2) 75 8 7 53 75 11 8 35 75 17 7 50 7 6 7 25 8 36 + 7 33 1 20 8 15 7 33 1 24 8 36 2 7 33 3 3 8 40 3 8 7 6 6 5 8 38 7 8 36 7 7 8 15 8 7 7 10 9 5 7 10 10 3 8 15 10 4 7 33 11 3 7 33 11 4 8 15 15 7 33 15 13 8 29 15 14 7 50 16 8 7 33 18 17 1 = 11 5 1 1 36 36 37 3 38 3 38 5 39 5 40 40 40 4 41 5 42 2 42 2 42 4 44 9 44 15 44 17 44 18 45 11 45 14 45 23 Il ܝܝܙ 7 45 7 33 7 33 8 36 7 33 7 6 7 33 7 7 7 33 7 33 7 33 7 6 7 6 8 39 7 33 7 33 8 39 7 32 7 29 7 33 8 36 10 11 = 11 3 inn 13 11 mond 11 ·Lengthening in the RV = RP 89 7 8 7 6 I 7 8 RV SM 18 21 18 24 18 25 20 3 20 6 20 7 21 1 e 21 6 21 9 22 22 22 4 22 4 22 4 22 8 23 23 4 24 3 11 8 1 3 11 11 8 7 8 7 -- 11 1 RP PS 7 33 8 36 7 33 7 33 7 26 8 40 7 33 7 54 8 15 7 33 7 33 8 59 7 33 7 33 7 26 8 36 7 6 7 6 7 33 7 33 7 33 8 35 7 55 7 33 7 26 7 42 8 38 7 33 7 17 7 33 8 15 7 33 8 40 11 RV RP ᎡᏙ RPI S M PS S M PS 30 4 7 33 56 15 5 31 2 8 15 56 21 8 36 31 2 8 10 56 22 8 15 31 4 7° 13 57 4 8 36 31 10 9 57 7 31 12 = 10 40 58 8 36 32 7 7 33 60 3 8 15 32 39 60 10 8 38 32 8 7 33 61 4 7 33 32 7 33 62 6 = 7 33 32 9 38 63 5 = 7 45 32 24 43 63 6 7 33 32 25 39 67 7 6 32 25 33 67 10 7 33 32 26 7 33 69 2 7 32 33 2 8 36 69 2 7 33 34 19 8 48 69 8 7 33 33 4 8 36(2) 72 6 36 9 6 74 4 37 7 33 74 5 7 33 39 7 33 75 8 7 33 40 7 33 77 4 7 10 42 2 7 33 77 4 8 36 42 5 10 79 4 8 36 43 7 33 83 2 7 45 45 3 8 15 83 8 15 46 36 83 7 33(3) 48 7 33 88 2 7 15 48 4 7 38 88 5 8 36 54 8 38 88 6 8 15 55 7 7 = 7 37 89 1-4 7 33 56 7 15 89 3 8 39 56 7 33 90 7 6 I w 7 6 7 = 7. 5 4 11 5 u 11 7 7 24 26 26 27 27 27 27 28 28 2 2 7 4 Сл 11 5 1 8 ur 1 29 29 2 4 4 1 01 3 4 29 29 30 30 ܝܙ 2 N 1 ·90 Lengthening in the RV = RPr ᎡᏙ S M 1 = 11 RV S M 2 23 2 41 2 32 2 42 3 12 3 12 17 Il 11 NN 12 19 12 22 13 11 1 1 II 3 3 11 ол - RV SM 90 92 3 93 6 93 7 96 97 7 97 8 98 4 100 102 103 103 103 15 103 15 RP PS 7 33 7 6 7 26 7 6 8 36 7 33 8 36 7 33 7 33 7 35 8 36 7 33 7 33 8 36 13 13 3 ul 8 9 7 7 11 3 11 13 1 3 11 10 11 13 7 13 14 = 3 II 1 11 II u uw NW 11 3 12 13 17 3 18 3 3 0 4 RP PS 7 46 8 36 7 33 8 36 7 33 8 13 8 39 7 33 8 36 8 7 33 8 32 7 52 8 36 7 22 8 36 8 13 8 36 8 15 7 6 8 33 6 8 39 8 39 7 33 7 46 8 39 8 36 7 54 8 11 VIII 4 RP PS 7 6 7 33 7 23 7 33 7 33 7 33 7 33 7 46 7 46 7 53 7 53 7 10 7 33 8 39 7 33 7 23 7 7 8 40 7 33 8 32 745 7 6 8 39 8 39 7 52 7 33 8 39 8 16 8 15 7 33 7 33 46 46 11 11 4 4 8 1 1 4 1 12 IO 1 1 16 1 17 11 8 15 7 33 7 33 7 33 7 32 8 15 7 13 12 11 1 19 13 14 13 20 13 25 13 25 15 6 15 6 15 12 15 13 16 16 10 16 12 16 12 17 1 17 17 4 17 10 17 11 18 10 18 11 18 22 19 19 20 19 20 7 1 21 1 25 1 30 1 II 11 4 10 4 11 4 5 33 6 18 6 32 6 39 6 39 7 9 7 11 7 12 7 13 7 20 12 1 = 11 NN 11 Il 11 8 15 7 33(2) 7 33 7 12 7 33 8 15 8 7 33 8 15 2 15 2 21 2 23 2 22 2 22 2 23 2 26 - 11 5 1 11 1 7 7 11 7 7 7 46 7 52 12 2 11 ·Lengthening in the RV = RPr 91 RV S M II 11 1 1 - 1 RP PS 7 33 8 40 7 31 8 36 7 12 745 7 17 8 15 8 36 8 32 8 36 7 37 7 33 7 6 = RP PS 7 46 8 15 8 36 8 7 12 7 52 8 5 7 33 8 15 7 33 7 26 7 5 8 15 7 10 8 36 Il 11 13 II ᎡᏙ SM 19 23 19 24 20 20 20 3 20 6 20 19 20 21 20 23 20 24 20 26 20 26 20 26 21 6 21 7 21 7 21 8 21 10 22 22 94 22 10 22 13 23 23 10 26 23 27 24 11 24 25 25 15 25 21 26 26 20 26 23 27 3 27 4 27 4 27 5 27 9 27 10 27 14 27 18 30 2 31 15 32 7 32 17 32 19 32 23 32 27 33 3 Il 11 RV S M 41 2 42 2 42 6 44 23 45 45 8 45 13 45 20 45 22 45 22 45 35 45 38 45 38 45 40 46 4 46 11 46 11 46 25 47 47 2 47 11 47 15 47 17 48 6 48 8 48 9 48 14 50 51 3 II 7 26 10 7 in RPr PS 7 17 7 33 7 33 8 32 8 15 7 33 7 12 7 33 8 39 7 16 7 33 7 33 8 39 8 39 8 15 7 33 7 26 8 15 7 54 7 33 8 31 8 15 7 33 9 8 35 8 36 8 38 7 33 7 6 7 12 8 49 7 45 8 4 7 33 7 33 8 15 7 33 7 6 7 5 II 1 8 1 II 8 15 7 42 4 7 33 7 33 7 5 Il 10 = II U = 1 = 7 6 11 8 8 1 = 8 8 7 33 7 5 8 31 7 39 7 17 8 15 8 - 11 II 1 11 co 6 11 33 13 33 17 33 13 34 3 34 11 36 1-6 37 1-6 = 37 38 9 41 1 40 10 24 24 ܝܕ 11 7 15 8 15 7 33 39 7 33 7 33 7 33 7 33 7 17 8 15 1 ur 51 24 11 24 16 24 23 24 24 8 32 7 33 7 33 7 54 = 52 53 53 5 8 4 6 11 1 - ·92 Lengthening in the RV = RP RV S M 6 53 11 RV SM 75 13 75 16 75 16 76 7 11 Il IT 11 w 1) 11 in 1 11 in Il 79 7 80 6 80 10 81 81 2 81 9 82 2 83 7 83 9 11 11 8 7 11 11 83 9 7 3 RP PS 8 30 7 6 7 33 753 7 33 7 39 7 12 7 7 17 7 23 7 40 7 56 7 19 7 17 8 39 8 39 7 7 33 7 17 7 17 8 15 8 15 7 33 7 37 8 7 32 7 17 7 7 7 33 7 6 8 39 7 12 7 6 3 11 RPr RV RPr PS S M PS 7 33 93 21 7 43 7 12 95 2 7 13 7 33 95 7 33 7 33 95 4 8 49 7 33 96 2 8 36 7 50 96 12 7 33 7 5 97 7 7 33 8 16 97 8 8 6 7 12 97 8 7 35 5 98 7 7 33 7 33 98 11 7 33 7 33 99 2 7 33 8 15 100 2 7 33 7 33 100 8 39 8 39 101 10 7 33 7 33 102 7 6 7 56 102 14 8 39 733 103 2 7 6 8 15 103 6 7 5 8 13 IX 8 36 7 7 1 5 7 6 7 42 4 1 10 = 7 33 7 33 4 1 7 33 7 51 4 2 7 30 7 12 6 9 7 33 8 15 7 7 7 33 7 33(3) 9 7 750 7 33 9 8 7 33 7 33 9 8 8 39 = 7 26 9 8 39 7 33 10 8 39 7 84 84 84 85 60 2 60 6 60 11 60 12 60 14 61 3 61 4 61 61 61 12 61 17 62 63 5 64 10 64 11 66 2 66 7 66 9 66 10 66 11 66 13 66 14 67 6 69 16 69 16 70 9 70 15 71 7 71 10 74 11 75 75 7 6 11 11 9 NO 3 7 2 86 88 89 89 4 7 90 11 2 w 1 Il 11 = 90 92 9 92 9 92 18 92 26 92 28 92 29 92 30 93 11 93 12 1 8 11 N 1 ·Lengthening in the RV = RPr 93 RP PS 7 33 RV SM 10 5 14 2 14 4 15 2 15 RPr PS 7 6 7 33 7 33 7 22 Il 8 8 7 5 11 11 س 19 1 2 7 5 20 21 29 29 3 11 ur RP RV PS S M 8 39 64 16 65 17 7 33 65 19 7 23 65 28 7 33 66 11 8 13 66 12 8 15 67 6 7 38 68 7 33 68 10 7 33 10 7 33 70 2 7 33 70 2 7 33 71 10 7 33 72 2 7 33 72 8 8 39 72 9 7 33 75 5 8 1 79 5 8 29 80 7 33 80 7 33 81 2 69 = 6 11 30 31 2 NN Il 7 6 7 6 7 33 7 6 7 33 7 33 8 40 7 33 8 36 7 33 8 8 16 8 14 7 33 8 36 8 36 7 6 - 00 1 5 Il 11 RV S M 87 9 88 7 90 4 90 6 91 4 91 6 92 2 93 5 93 5 96 2 96 11 96 12 96 17 97 3 97 3 97 12 97 15 97 20 97 21 97 22 97 25 97 27 97 36 97 38 97 39 97 44 97 44 97 48 97 49 97 49 97 51 100 1 100 3 11 4 11 11 8 36 7 33 7 33 7 33 6 7 5 8 40 8 34 8 40 7 33 8 40 8 7 7 8 36 7 33 8 36 7 33 8 8 7 33 7 33 7 33(2) 8 1 7 46 8 36 8 36 7 33 7 43 7 33 7 44 7 43 7 33 ܝܛ 11 in 11 31 4 35 3 40 3 40 41 6 45 46 4 47 4 48 50 51 2 53 2 57 61 3 61 15 61 15 61 19 61 26 61 28 61 30 62 21 ܝܚܙ 2 81 81 3 81 3 7 1 82 82 4 5 il ܝܝܙ 8 39 7 33 8 15 7 6 7 33 7 33 7 33 7 37 8 39 7 10 7 33 7 53 7 33 8 32 33 8 36 7 33 7 10 8 13 8 39 8 40 7 33 7 6 8 15 84 84 85 85 5 11 4 8 11 11 86 6 = 1 87 87 6 11 ·94 Lengthening in the RV = RPr RV S M 101 RV S M 9 14 9 14 3 11 = = 8 1 11 1 RPr PS 7 43 7 57 7 27 7 53 7 33 8 7 8 36 8 39 - 101 13 103 104 2 104 104 4 104 7 = سا 9 11 33 9 14 11 11 11 9 12 2 12 3 12 5 12 9 11 8 co 1 11 S 39 7 6 8 1 10+ 4 107 107 12 1C7 24 103 2 108 4 108 7 108 10 110 110 4 111 11 8 7 6 7 46 7 32 7 33 7 17 11 11 14 2 14 7 14 10 14 13 15 4 15 15 6 15 11 Il 1 4 11 RP RV PS S M 7 17 25 4 36 25 7 7 33 26 7 33 27 8 35 28 7 7 28 8 7 33 29 8 30 & 15(2) 30 3 35 30 5 7 45 30 8 7 45 30 11 7 33 30 12 8 39 30 14 S 15 32 5 33 32 5 7 7 33 3 7 33(2) 34 4 8 36 34 8 8 39 34 14 7 33 35 8 33 35 2 7 33 35 10 8 36 35 11 5 8 35 11 7 36 2 12 = 7 10 36 10 7 33 42 12 42 7 12 42 3 7 33 42 3 7 33 42 4 7 33(2) 42 6 7. RPr PS 7 33 8 39 7 6 7 33 7 33 7 45 8 15 8 36 7 33 7 6 7 33 7 33 8 36 8 36 7 6 8 39 7 33 8 31 8 36 8 38 7 33 7 22 7 30 8 40 8 36 7 33 8 15 7 27 8 36 8 36 8 38 7 33 8 15 7 O 7 45 11 N - 11 16 16 13 16 18 14 20 10 1 2 6 4 7 21 4 11 4 5 8 36 7 33 7 33 8 36 7 6 7 33 5 6 4 18 in 6 11 7 7 22 10 22 11 22 15 23 3 23 6 23 7 6 7 7 Il 7 11 7 11 N 7 6 8 6 7 33 7 33 7 45 8 15 8 15 1 9 25 25 25 2 11 11 9 4 3 11 11 ·Lengthening in the RV = RPr 95 13 II سا 0 RP PS 7 45 7 27 7 29 7 33 7 33 7 33 8 39 11 RP PS 7 35 8 36 7 6 8 15 7 33 8 28 7 33 7 33 7 33 7 12 5 - RV SM 61 21 61 22 61 24 61 27 61 27 63 2 63 3 63 4 63 8 63 8 63 10 63 13 63 14 63 17 64 16 11 11 8 1 1 RV SM 42 3 43 10 43 43 6 43 2 43 2 44 45 2 47 47 47 6 48 5 48 7 49 11 49 5 51 7 52 53 2 53 6 53 8 55 5 7 6 ܝܕ 11 RPr PS 7 33 7 33 7 33 7 17 8 30 8 39 8 14 7 33 7 33 8 14 S 14 8 36 8 14 7 33 7 33 7 33 8 36 7 7 8 36 6 36 7 7 11 7 1 6 6 38 RV SM 82 2 83 83 7 83 7 84 84 27 84 29 88 6 88 14 88 17 89 89 17 93 93 9 94 94 14 94 14 95 2 13 95 14 96 12 97 2 96 8 99 12 101 2 101 7 ܝܛ 5 11 Il 11 3 11 5 Il ол 8 64 17 66 14 67 67 6 67 11 68 11 7 43 7 33 7 50 7 33 7 33 8 36 8 28 8 36 7 33 7 10 6 37 8 36 8 35 7 33 7 33 7 95 5 1) w = 7 45 8 15 7 33 8 15 7 10 8 36 8 29 8 4 36 8 15 7 33 7 33 7 33 8 30 7 33 8 36 8 36 8 36 8 8 4 8 39 8 15 8 36 8 36 3 5 11 11 4 11 59 59 59 59 60 7 7 6 36 8 36 = 5 4 6 11 7 29 = 68 68 6 69 69 5 70 70 10 72 72 8 S 15 11 11 6 36 11 ogon 5 7 33 11 1 7 5 7 33 1 60 9 61 9 61 10 61 11 61 13 61 14 61 20 = 7 ur 77 1 8 15 101 8 101 10 101 11 102 3 102 6 103 4 103 11 8 11 7 33 78 8 35 81 7 5 81 5 8 30 7 33 7 33 7 ·96 The Commentary ол U 1 = 11 u N 11 10 Il 7 un 11 1 N 11 u ܝܙ 11 11 11 1 = 7 1 1 1 1 11 RV RP RV RP RV RP S M PS S M PS S M PS 103 13 8 40 126 8 8 36 147 5 7 5 103 13 8 31 126 8 8 40 148 8 49 104 8 36 127 6 7 33 149 2 7 45 107 3 7 33 128 4 8 36 149 7 33 107 11 8 40 129 4 7 152 4 8 39 108 3 7 33 129 6 7 33 152 8 39 108 9 7 33 130 2 8 156 3 8 39 111 8 36 132 3 7 33 156 7 31 111 4 8 36 135 7 33 158 2 7 33 112 3 8 36 136 3 8 39 166 3 7 33 112 6 7 33 136 7 = 8 15 176 7 33 112 10 8 35 137 8 39 176 2 7 19 113 10 8 39 137 8 39 178 17 115 7 33 138 745 178 8 40 116 7 33 139 4 7 16 180 8 36 116 5 7 139 5 8 15 180 2 8 36 120 3 8 38 140 7 6 181 8 36 120 9 7 33 143 8 39 182 7 33 126 2 7 46 143 7 33 182 2 33 126 2 8 34 143 5 7 6 182 3 7 33 126 6 7 17 145 7 33 XI The Commentary Turning now to the special consideration of the com mentary on the text we may note the following points It is extremely curt and concise and 19 written virtu ally in a sütra style At places, it leaves us entirely at the mercy of guess and conjecture Cp 73 76, 168, 246 and 280, where the commentator, in some respects, is more obscure and concise than the text Cp notes ou thse sutrus On 116 he says 'trırakıantagrahapat' Here trib" means trivaram=three times Similar "trırd vib" on 280 It was only by a stroke of good fortune that I hit at the right meaning of these mystic atterances 7 1 11 سر 7 w 1 1 ·Peculiarities of the Commentary 97 2 The text has not come down to him as perfectly authoritative and sacred and he rightly questions the validity of some sūtras', prescribes vārtikas”, and finally provides for its deficiencies 3 He makes extensive use of the adhihāras and this shows that he knew the tradition of the Samavedic grammar exceptionally well These adhikaras are of two kinds, ie adhyaharas, where the thing is not said in the text, but has to be implied, as in 1 133, 116, 146, and 236, and the adhikaras, which are supplied by the text, as in 20, 22, 28, 46, 54, 56, 59, 61, 67, 86, 96, 107, 109, 110 115, 146, 185, 237, 238, 242, 243, (2), 244, (2) 247, 255, 264, 281, 282 and 284 4 He seems to be well acquainted with the Ganapatha of Panini Cp 128 with note 5 Here and there he oversteps the limits of a Prati sakhya Cp 225 where he cites examples from Samavedic literature and then draws one from RV and another from Aitaraya brāhamana 5 In citing examples he uses the following methods (1) He cites the opening of the verses, though the real example lies somewhere on in the stanza Cp note on 279 (11) He names the melodies Cp 112, 113, 150, 162, 181, 260, 283, 284 (111) He names the verses Cp note on I (iv) He cites the neighbouring word in a verse Cp 76, 116 (v) At places he gives the half of a word as an example Cp 148 - I Cp 167 and 280 2 Cp 143, 229, 243 245 3 Cp 159, 226, 256, 238, 272 ·98 Who was the author of the Commentary ? 9 7 At places the commentary scems incomplete Cp 141, 150 and 239 The last portion of the commentary on these sūtras scems to be lacking in something That there was another, and possibly a larger recension of the commentary, is indicated by the Ms B on the 116, where the extra reading, not found in Burnell, has been given in the footnotes The fact is confirmed by the author of the gloss on the Vivștı', who on the rule 56, clearly draws from a recension of the commentary, larger than that available to us XII Il'ho uas the author of the Commentary ? For determining the personality of the commentator, we have no dat? whatever, except that the author of the gloss on Paniniyaśiksă once quotes from the commentary in the name of Audavrajia, which is clearly wrong, as has been already shown About his place we know absolutely nothing and for his period we have only references, which though too few and indefinite to yeıld any unchallengible result need to be put here Our commentator cites on the rule 90 Nakulam khacārya, who is unfortunately nowhere mentioned in the Sanskrit literature, nor in any Worterbuch or list of Msg, and he is the only authority whom our commentator cites and that two only once But there is a ray of hope Simona has shown that Upadhyayajatasatru, the commentator on Puspasūtra, lived about 950 AD, and we know from his work that he utilised the ancient commentary of Bahūhācārya or Bahūka bhasya. kara', who must have been a fairly ancient scholar This 1 Cp Rktantravivrti on rule 56 2 "Audavrajirapi "sparsavargasya sparśagrababe ca piegam" p 11 Cp it with RT 13 3 Simon, Pps p 499 4 Sinon, PpS p 498 ·Can we improve the text of the SV ? 99 Bahūka, on PpS 7 288 quotes from our commentary? and this makes so much certain, that our commentator is older than Bahūka and may have flourished about the beginning of the Christian era One thing more Our commentator cites exmples from the two Arcikas, the two Ganas, Mahānāmnis, the two Śrautasūtras, the Brāhamanas, but nowhere from the later Gānas i e the Ūha and Ūhya ginas, which are supposed "pauruseya This may be significant, but we cannot infer any statable result from this XIII . Can we improve the tert of the SV urth the help of the Prðtrśāhhya ? The question is of the utmost importance, but the RT and the Commentary offer little help in this matter? Saurisünu, the author of Laghurktantrasangraha, who is more exhaustive than either, registers some cases, where the text of Benfey is at variance I shall concern myself here only with one rule, which prescribes the omission of visarjaniya, when followed by s in conjunction with a consonant Śaurisūnu registers the following examples of this rule Śaurisūnu SV Benfey vaca stuse 87 The same visa stavetatithih 85 do parā dusvapnyam 141 do sakhāya stoma. 164 do ya sma śrutavarman I 89 do jagata svardrsam 233 jagatah svardrśam It runs "atra hı" gatiscantasthamápadyate (cp RT 110) iti yakars pattıb | "ramadhye' (RT 159) iti lopah panaranena vacanena bhogapalaram bhavatıtı eşam bahuka bhagyakaroņa vyakhyanam krtam | asmadguravastu bruvate " Simon has confused here the sutras of Rt Cp PpS p 676 n 2 2 Cp however, "udag nya, va" Benfey SV 1 279, wbile the rule 173 and the Commentary require "udan nyag va" I I I 1 ·100 Benfey at variance with Saurisūnu a bhara svarian I 254 255 band I I vaca stotram bodha na stomam mataya svaryuvah' vira stavate I sakhaya stomyam tamu va stuse sacetasi svasare svădhy ? svarvıdah gomata stotrbhyo II indavi sviru dah II esa sya dharaya II naki svasva NI prthu svaruh IT hi stha svah pati II yukta stotrbhyah II pavamāna svardrśam II 313 375 385 387 410 457 508 179 566 584 300 687 351 735 134 á bharah svarvan vacah stotram The same matayah svaryuvah The same do do sicetisah suasare Svadhyah svarvıdah The same indavah svarvidah The same nahih svasva prthuh svaruh hı sthah svah pati The same pavamanah svadh. varah in II 611 rity apah svarvidah yah shihitisu maghonah smd usa sah sva 3 rgah The same svadiyah svaduna The same svadoh svadiyah The same balavijnayah sthavirah ritya pa gvarvidah II ya snihitisu? II maghona sma II usasa sva 3 rgah II má na starabhimataye II svadıya svaduna II radha stuvate II svado svadıyah II revata stota II balavijnaya sthavirah II 676 728 1030 1225 770 835 836 834 1157 1206 1 The M99 A and B both road "matayarvidal" (= mataga svarvidal) which is not found in the SV It howover, occurs in RV 10 43 1 which roads "acca ma indram matagal syarvidal", for which SV has "acca va indram mataya gvaryuvah 2 Mark "gpihiteşu" in A and B, where Benfey has "gnihitiņu" ·Need of a fresh edition of the SV 101 II yo na svo'rano II 1225 The same arepasa svadhya svarvidah (2) 451 arepasah svadhyah gvarvidah It will be clear from the above-shown table that, out of 37 times, Benfey observes the rule of the Såmavedic grammar only 17 times and violates it 20 times, without showing any reason whatsoever Other anomalies may be found upon a minute examination of the text, and the same will be treated in detail in the introduction of the Laghurktantrasangraha and Samasaptalaksana, the publication of which may necessitate a fresh edition of the Samaveda I Cp also "pari nal' Benfey SV II 247 and 560, where Laghurk tantrı sangraha and V Pr III 88 (pari pa iti sakatayanah) require "pari dub" Cp RV 8 47 5,9 54 5,9 64 18 etc, JS and my note on RT 274

·No text on this page.

·॥ ऋक्तन्त्रम् ॥

·No text on this page.

·अथ ऋक्तन्त्रम् ओं नमः श्रीसामवेदाय । [अथ प्रथमः प्रपाठकः अथ वाचो वृत्तिं व्याख्यास्याम । वायु प्रकृतिमाचार्या । वायुद्भवासी भवति । श्वासो नाद इति शाकटायन । वायुरयमस्मिन् काये मूर्छत्यटतीत्ये षोऽर्थ । स खलु खविशेष प्रतिपन्न करठ प्रतिपन्न श्वसितिर्भवति।सै श्वसिति शिर. प्रतिपन्न आकाशमद्वारक नदतिर्भवति । तस्येदानी नदतेर्जिह्वाग्रेणेर्य- माणस्य व्यक्तय प्रादुर्भवन्ति वर्णानामोष्ठया कण्ठ्यास्तालव्या मूर्धन्या दन्त्या नासिक्या जिह्वामूलीया इति । तद्यथा त्रपुकारनपु विलाप्य बिंबे निषिञ्चेद्य य बिम्बंदेश तत्त्रपु निषिच्यते ततस्ततो द्रव्याणा व्यक्तिर्भवति काश्चिमणिके रुचक स्वस्तिक इत्येव य यमय खविशेष जिह्वाग्रेण स्पृशति ततस्ततो वर्णाना 1 Is wanting in A B C Bur has ऋकतन्त्रव्याकरणम् । 2 श्री 1s wanting m Bur श्रो नम ऋग्वे दाय D 3 श्री गुरुभ्यो नम । अथ वाचो वृत्तिं व्या ख्यास्याम 4 C and Bur add to छ, while A B Domit it 5 is wanting in A B 6 कण्ठति B 7 श्वसिति भवति D is wanting in D १ विपुलाप्य B विलाष्य D 10 निंब. B 11 काम्चीमणि के A काचीमणिके B कात्री- मणिको D 1) रुचिक Bur 13 अर is wanting in Bur .

·ऋक्तन्त्रम् [१,१-३ 5 व्यक्तिर्भवत्योष्ठयानां कण्ठयानां तालव्यानां मूर्धन्यानां दन्त्यानां नासिक्यानां जिह्वामूलीयानामिति । एवमुत्पन्नाना वर्णानामुपदेशोदेशा । उद्देशे सक्षाकरणम् । उपदेशे प्रत्याहार सिद्धस्तद्यथाध्वोरुपदेश वक्ष्याम । अथ वर्णी सक्षा- प्रेत्याहारसैमा ॥१॥ श्र इति श्रा इति इ इति ई इति उ इति ऊ इति ऋ इति इति ल इति ल इति समानानि । ए इति ऐ इति श्रो इति श्री इति सन्ध्यक्षराणि । आयाहीवोयीनाम् (११ a) गतिरन्त इति स्वरा । अथ व्यञ्जनानि । किति खिति गिति घिति डिति कर्वर्ग । चिति छिति जिति झिति मिति चवर्ग । टिति ठिति डिति ढिति णिति टवर्ग । तिति थिति दिति धिति निति तवर्ग । 10 पिति फिति बिति भिति मिति पवर्ग । इति स्पर्शा । अथान्तस्था । यिति रिति लिति वित्यन्तस्था ।अथोष्माणो हिति शिति' षिति सिति योगवाही । अथायोगवाहा ।श्र इति विसर्जनीय । के इति जिह्वामूलीय । प इत्युपध्मा- नीय । हुमित्यनुनासिके । अथ यमा । कु इति खु इति गु" इति घुमिति" यमा । अनन्त्यान्त्यसयोगे मध्ये यम पूर्वगुण । अथानुस्खारौ । अ श्रा 10 इत्यनुसारौ ॥२॥ हखा!ि दीर्घाभूस्व । वर्ण इति पूर्व कारादाख्यायाम् । व्यञ्जनमकार- 1 उद्देश स० CD 9 to wantın, in 1 2 उपदेश प्र. C 10 हिनि is the last in Bur 3 सिद्धवद्वा । यथावयुरु० Bur C D 11 योगवाहा 1s winting in Bur 4 Visarga om in A वर्णाना B 1) प इति । D क इति ८ 5 सज्ञा प्रत्याहार समा D Aitor this C 13 प इति ALD प इति C has-प्रथम खराड । 14 नासिक्य A B D हिमित्यनुनासिकम् C 6 A and C read-अइति श्रा इति इ इति ई 15 गुमिति 1s wanting in Bur इति उ इति ऊ इति ऋ इति ऋ इति ल इनि तृ 16 Atton घुमिति Chas कुमिति यमा । घुमि- इति BC omit ल इति लु इति ॥ इति त्यनन्त्यान्त्य Bur ऐ इति ओ इति श्री इति इत्याइत्य श्र इति 17 यमा 1s wanting in A and Bur श्रा इति ऋ इति ऋ इति ई इति ऊ इति 18 पूर्वगुणो वा Bur and C, porhaps इत्य इति ईती ईन्यु इत्यु इति D mistake for पूर्वगुणो ऽथान० A 7 प्रायाहिवोयिनाम् A आयाहीवोईनाम् Bur 19 अनु० 1 wenting In A B पायावोयीनाम् C आयायि वोयीनि D 20 • पूर्वकारा. A 8 कवर्गा चवर्गा and so on D ·१, ३-४] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [३ 5 पूर्वात् । रिति रेफात् । स्पृष्टं करणं स्पर्शानाम् । दुस्पृष्टमन्तस्थानाम् । विवृत स्वरोष्मणाम् । विवृततरमकारकारौकाराणाम् । सतृतो घोषवान् । विवृतो ऽघोषो नादानप्रदाना खरघोषवन्त । श्वासोऽघोषाणाम् । तनीयान् प्रथमानामुभौ ह चतुर्थाना सनिवेशोऽन्य । प्रत्याहाराऽर्थो वर्णोऽनुबन्धो व्यञ्जन यावतिथविता तदादीना तत पराणाम् ॥ ३ ॥ एं श्रो ऐौ श्राऋ ल ई ऊ ऋल इ उ बा ।र यवला । ड अ ण न मा । घमढधभा ।ग ज ड द बा । ख छठ थ फा । क च ट त पा । हशष सा । अ.- क पा । हु कु खु गु घु अ भा एवमुपदेशे स्वराणा सन्ध्यक्षराणा दीर्घाणा हस्वाना समानानामर्तस्थानामुत्तमाना स्वरान्तस्थोत्तमानामकार- घोषाणा हकारस्तु घोषवतामघोषाणा सोष्मणामूष्मणा च । प्रत्याहारे रहयो- 10 वर्गसमानुस्थानानामसिद्धिरिति चेद्धस्वतरैनासिक्यस्थानेषु मात्राकरण विशिष्टानामपि प्राप्तिस्तथा सिद्धमिति । इदमतर छन्दोवर्णश समनुक्रान्तम् । यथाचार्या ऊचुर्ब्रह्मा बृहस्पतये प्रोवाच बृहस्पतिरिन्द्रायेन्द्रो भरद्वाजाय भरद्वाज ऋषिभ्य ऋषयो ब्राह्मणेभ्यस्त खल्विममक्षरसमानायमित्याचक्षते । न भुक्त्वा न नक्त प्रब्रूयाद् ब्रह्मराशिरिति" च ब्रह्मराशिरिति च ॥४॥ इति प्रथम प्रपाठक । 15 1 • पूर्वादकाराद्वा रेफात् A •पूर्वादकाराद्वा । अन्तस्थाना is wanting in A रिति रेफाद्वा B मकारश्च पूर्वाद्वा रेफात् C १ प्रत्याहारो A B 2 So B वित्रतो घोषो AC D and Bur 10 •नुस्थानाम• D 3 So A B C नुप्रदानात् D नादानप्रदानाम् 11 ह्रस्वतर B D Bur 12 विवताना. AC 4 श्वासो घोषाणाम् AC D Bur 13 Is not repeated in B and Bur cf 5 वर्णेऽनु० A B Bui puts fullstop Nagess LSS Sanjap p 7-"ऋक्तन्त्रafter anubandhala व्याकरणे शाकटायनोऽपि प्रब्रूयाद्ब्रह्म 6 यावतावता राशिरिति" ॥ 7 ए ओ ऐ अश्रा ऋलू ई ऊ ऋल इ उ 11 B roadg-इति ब्रह्मराशिप्रथम समाप्त । अला य अ वा A ए ओ औ आ ऋ लू Bur has-इति ब्रह्मराशि प्रथम प्रपाठक ईऊल इ उ म र य ल व retc c समाप्त | Ahas-प्रथम प्रपाठक IC gives ए भी ऐ भी पा ऋलु ई ऊ ऋ ल इस इति तृतीय खण्ड । इति शक्तन्त्रे प्रथम TOTT Foto Bur प्रपाठक ॥

·[अथ द्वितीयः प्रपाठकः] मासे यथा दृष्टः॥१॥ वर्णाधिकृत । समासे यथा दृष्टस्तथा विज्ञेय । सहर्षभा (श्रा स ४२) गो ऋजीकम् (१ ३१३) अनापत्ति । गन्यूतिम् (१ २२०) अवापत्ति । उषर्बुध (१ ४०) सबर्दघाम् (१ २६५) रेफत्वम् । सम्राजम् (१ १७) अनुस्वारप्र ; तिषेध । दीर्घत्वमृतीपहम् (१ ३५५) तुविकृर्मिम् (२ १७६) प्रतीव्य(११०३) परी णसि (१३४) ऋतावृध (१२५८) तुनियावृधम् (१ २८३) ऋतावसो (१ २५५) प्रभूवसो (१ ३७३) सूनरी (१ ३०३) सूनृतावते (२ १०४) दूगत् (१ २१६) दूरे (१५३) चर्षणीधृतम् (१ ३७४) प्रतिषेध । श्रुतकारम् (१ ११८) अश्वपते (१४०२) मूर्धन्यापत्ति । दुष्वप्न्यम् (११४१) परीणसि (१ ३४) दुरखमा, (१ 10 ३६) स्वर्णरम् (१ १०६) गिर्वण (१९६५) यहुलम । पुरणामन (१९८८) प्रणेत (११६३) अतीहिमायाम् (१ २२३ मन्युषाविणम्) नृमणा (१ ३२३) सत्राहणम् (१३३५) वृत्रहणा (२१०५० (tc) वृपमण (१ ३३६) निर्णिज' हर्यताय त्रिरस्मे प्रदेवमछासु च (१ ५५१ ५६० ३.३) प्राणा सिन्धूनाम् (१ ५५६) प्राणा । 1 सहस्रषभा अर्चन्ति । whilo buth Pond Bw have faire 2 गव्यूतिरवा० B मायाम 3 Is wanting in Bur ४ यत्रहणम् । 4 या 19 wanting in B " निर्णिजम् ।। Inv 13 (प्रदेवम 5 After ऋतावमो B reads रनहावमो 310) occurs farty 24, while in ) which is wanting in Bur and 560 occurs निर्णिजे 6 कक्षाश्वपते B 10 आहर्यता । 7 SV 1 223 reads-अताहि मन्युषाविणम्, 11 प्रदेवासु ।

·THE KIIPPUSW*** SASIT HL..' TUTE MADARA २,१ २-४] नामन्त्रम् [५ शिशु. (१ ५७०) प्रणपात् (२ ७७) सार्परोक्षीषु च । गोषाना (१ ३४) सुष्टुतिम (१ ३४८) । उपकरवादौ च। नृपमा (१७७) नृपाहम् (१ १४४) ऋषत (१ २७६) नृषाता (१ ३१८) हव्यमानुपक् (१८२) श्राघाये। पवस्व देवाया च । (११३३ १४८३ आयुषक्) इत् सुभृ (१ ७६) दुष्वप्न्यम् (११४१) स्तोभे । रयिष्ठा (स्तोभ १ १५०) पुरुणामन् पुरुष्टुन (१ १८८) धर्ता-इमेते पुरुहूतादिषु च । (१५५८,३७३,२ ६४-पुरुष्टुतम्) मन्युपाविणम् (१२२:) ऋतीपहम् (१ २३६) तुव्यादौ च (१ ३५४-ऋतीपहम्) उपमा अस्य विष्ठा (१३.१) चक्र यदा याम् । (१ ३३१-निषत्तम्) इन्द्राय गिरायाम् (१ ३३६) विष्वगभिप्रियायाम् । (१ ५५४-विष्वञ्चम्) पुरपवते च । (श्रा स ३४-विप्वड) श्रा नो वयायाम् । (१ ३५३–नेष्ठाम्) प्रप्र वस्त्रिष्टुभमिषम् (१ ३६०) श्रानुष्टुभस्य (श्रा स –१५) 10 विष्काभिते (१३७८) विषूवत (१४०६) अनुष्वधम् (१४२३) अप्सु दक्षो गिरिष्ठा (१ ४७३) परिस्वानाया च । (१४७५-गिरिष्टा) सुष्टुत (२८५०) बर्हिषद (१५६३) परमेष्ठी (श्रा स ८) अभिमातिषाई (श्रा स १६) दिक्षु सदा (स्तोभ) इन्द्राग्नी (१२८१) इन्द्रपान (१५३२) सोमे सोमे (११८८) सुते सुते (१ २०१) गोसखा (१ १२२) स्त्रिया (सामवि०२५१ ) हृदिस्पृशम् 15 (१४३४) पुरुस्पृहम् (१४८६) ॥ हाः कण्ठे ॥२॥ हकार प्रकार प्राकार विसर्जनीया कण्ठस्थाना । उरसि विसर्जनीयो वा ॥३॥ उरसिं विसर्जनीयस्तिष्ठति । जिह्वामूले' - कृ॥४॥ जिह्वामूलीयस्था जिह्वामूलस्थाना ककार ऋकार ऋकारा । 1 To Ars 46-8 (=RV \ 149), 17 6 }} rouds ० षाहो । देवव्रते । दिक्षु मचत्वि- Eroti occurs Cf Sayans on it न्द्रामा। , ०त Bur सुष्टुतय B 70 correct गोसखो B 3 Bur sayg'what 19 intended by this S After the \uiti, lepeats every is not clean But of SV 1311, where उपक्ण्वस्य सुष्टुतिम् ours 9 B roads उरसि वा विस. 4 I wanting in B 10 जिह्वामूलीयेष्कृ B जिह्वामूलष्कृ .c 5 विषुवत B 20 Sutra ·६] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [२,२१-२-१२ तालुनि श्च्ये ॥५॥ तालुस्थाना शकार चकार-यकार इकार ईकार एकारा । मूर्धनि' पटौ ॥६॥ मूर्धनि षटौ तिष्ठत ॥ दन्ते स्लाः ॥७॥ 5 दन्तस्थानास्तकार-सकार लकारा । 10 रेफो मूले वा ॥८॥ रेफस्तु दन्त्यो दन्तमूले वा ॥ ओष्ठये वो पू॥६॥ ओष्ठ्यस्थाना वकार श्रोकार औकार उपध्मानीय पकार उकार ऊकारा । किकिडाकारो हन्वाम् ॥ १० ॥ किदकिडाकारों हन्वा तिष्ठति । इति प्रथमो दशक ॥१॥ [अथ द्वितीयो दशकः] ॥११॥ अविशेषस्थानी संस्वादनिगारों ॥१॥ अविशेषस्थानौ भवत सर्वस्थानप्राप्तौ सस्वादनिगारी । पकारन र 15 यकारा वा सस्वादे । हकार मकार नासिक्या वा निगारे" । ॥१२॥ नासिकायां यमानुस्वारनासिक्याः॥२॥ नासिकास्थाना भवन्ति यमानुस्वारनासिक्यो । 150 A B C मूनि Bur 2 मूर्ध्नि Bur 3 श्रोष्टयो A B 4 वकारीकारउपध्मानायपकारा B 5 °कारी A B C (कारी च A ) 6 •कारी B (In Ar G III, 4, 10) 750 AC and Bur द्वितीयो दशक B, 8 oferort Bur 9 निगरौ Bur 10 See8 Samsvadanigur=Somawrata saman or Ār G III,1,9-10 = (SV II, 229 of Sayana SV vol II, PP 264-265, Bur Arbr p72)and Are III, 5, 11 (cf Ar S III 2, Sayada SV. II p 284, Bur Arbr p 74, RV 191 18) 11 Is wanting in Bur ·n २,२ ३-६-१९] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [७ ॥१३॥ स्पर्शे र्गस्य ॥३॥ स्पर्शग्रहणे वर्गस्य ग्रहण विशेयम् । स्थानेष्वित्यधिकार । यत्र ककार सर्व कवर्ग । यत्र चकार सर्वश्चवर्ग । यत्र टकार सर्वष्टवर्ग । यत्र तकार सर्वस्तवर्ग । यत्र पकार सर्व पवर्ग । ॥१४॥ उत्तमा घोषाः॥४॥ यत्रोत्तमा घोषा भवन्ति तत्र वर्गस्येत्यधिकार । ते ग ज ड द बा, घ झ ढधभा, छत्रण न माश्च । ॥१५॥ हान्तस्थाः ॥ ५॥ हकारोऽन्तस्थाश्च घोषसक्षा भवन्ति । ते ह य र ल वा । ॥ १६ ॥ युग्माः सोष्माणः॥६॥ युग्मा सोष्माणो भवन्ति । वर्गस्येत्यधिकार । ते ख छ ठ थ फा, घ 10 भढघभाश्च । 15 ? ॥ १७ ॥ अन्त्योऽनुनासिकः ॥ ७ ॥ वर्गाणामन्त्यो वर्णोऽनुनासिको भवति । ते ड अ ण न मा । ॥ १८॥ साक्षरः पदान्तोऽवसितः ॥ ८॥ म्मतर समानाक्षर पदान्तोऽघसितोऽनुनासिको भवति। दधि मधु त्रपु गुरु लघु पटु मृदु । मन्त्रे। अग्नं श्रा याहि (११) साक्षर इति । अग्ने (११) पदान्तोऽवसित ? सहितायाम् । ॥१६॥ येकवचने ॥६॥ ईकारस्य वेधमेकवचनेऽनुनासिको भवति । स्त्री ब्राह्मणी वृषलीप्रभृ. 20 तीनि । निवृत्तानि इन्द्राग्नी (१२८१) द्यावापृथिवी (१ ३२६) रोदसी (१२७८) न जातम् । एकवचने ? गच्छन्त्यमी । धावन्त्यमी । भुञ्जन्त्यमी । साती। दाती। काकी । पौष्णी । स्त्री चेदनुनासिकम् । इन्द्राणी शाकटायनी व । तत्र 1 त्यविकार Bur A mmsprint 2 B 3 Is wanting in B साक्षर B 3,5 Is wanting in B 6 मृदु श्रा याहि B 7 साक्षरमिति B 8 इकारस्य B 9 प्राक्षा B ·८] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [२,३ १-३-२३ ॥ २०॥ व्यञ्जन पूर्वस्वान्तस्वरम् ॥ १० ॥ व्यञ्जन खलु पूर्वस्य स्वरस्यान्तस्वर भवति । अवसितमित्यधिकार । यदिन्द्र प्राक् (१२७६) वण म० (१ २७६) यदद्य कत् (१ १२६) तदावृणी. (१ १३८) प्रत्यड् ( पा स ५२ ) महा इन्द्रो य (२ ६५५ ) समन्या यन्ति 5 (श्रा स २३) व्यञ्जनम् ? अवसाने सहितायाम् ॥ इति द्वितीयो दशक ॥२॥ [ अथ तृतीयो दशकः ] 10 ॥२१॥ अभिनिधानः ॥१॥ क्रमज च पूर्वान्तसस्वर भवति । अर्कम् (१ १५८) नय॑म् (१ ५६ ) प्र हो। पूर्य्यम् (१ ६८) यंते (१ २२८ ) पवते हर्य० (१ ५७६) महस्य (१ ६७) एवमादीनि विरामे । ॥ २२ ॥ व्यञ्जने ॥ २॥ व्यञ्जने च प्रत्यये पूर्वान्त सखर भवति । पदान्ते व्यञ्जनमित्यधिकार । य कृचरन् (१) यस्ते (१ ४७०) य पात्रम् (१ ४२४) यद् भूमिम् (१ १२१) पन्यम् (१ १२३) त व (१ २३६) व्यञ्जनमिति ? तमिन्द्रादीनि (र.) पदोन्ते ' अपघ्नन् (१ ५१०) ॥ २३ ॥ अनुस्वारी च ॥३॥ अनुस्वारौ च पूर्वान्तसखरौ भवत । त्रिशत्पदा (१ २८१) असत्रम् (१ २७५) त्रिंशद्धाम (२ ७२६) अपा रेतासि (१ २७) नव्यासम् (१२८) हखाद्दी? दीर्घाद्धस्व । ? 15 । न्तस्वरितम् B 2 खलु भो पू. B 3 ०वण्यामु B 4 सम 1s wanting in B 5 व्यञ्जनानि B 6 इति तृतीयो दशक B द्वितीयो दशक AC 7 बाहर्यता । ४ स्वादी०B 9 य कृष्णगर्भा (1 240) 10 पदान्तो B 11 Is wanting in B ·२, ३ ४-१०-३०] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [६ ॥२४॥ ग्लावन्यपरौ ॥४॥ रलौ पूर्वान्तसखरौ भवत अव्यपरौ । अर्को देवानाम् । अर्कस्य देवा । स्पर्धन्ते (१ ५३६) कार्धी (१ १०५)-प्रभृतीनि । शुल्का (१ २६१) गल्दया (१ ३०७) श्रव्यपराविति ? प्र हो। पूर्व्यम् (१ १८)-प्रभृतीनि । तुर्वशे (१२७६) स्वा असुरेभ्यः (१२५४) व्यञ्जने ( सू०२२) इति ? °स्या 5 अराते (१६)। ॥ २५॥ स्पर्शः स्खे ॥ ५॥ स्पर्श वे प्रत्यये पूर्वान्तसखरो भवति । सख्य ते ( १ ३२४) अग्ने (१ १) न ज्याय (१ २०३) अरण्यो ( १७६ ) अन्धंस (१ ३१३ ) इन्द्रा० (१३८८) विभ्राद् (श्रा स ४४)-प्रभृतीनि । स्वे इति ? जन्मान सं० 10 (१ १०१ )-श्रादीनि । सुरूपकृत्० ( १ १६० )। ॥२६॥रादि रमन्यत् ॥ ६॥ परोदि स्वरमन्यदत । ॥ २७ ॥ सयुक् सण ॥ ७॥ सयुक्त व्यञ्जन सयोगस भवति। चित्तम् (२ १२०६) वित्तम् (१ ४१७) 15 भित्तम् । निमित्तम् । एवमादीनि । ॥२८॥ मात्रार्धमात्रा वा॥८॥ मात्रा वा अर्धमात्रा वा भवति व्यञ्जनमित्यधिकार । ॥२६॥ तिश्च त्रिकला वा ॥६॥ गतिश्च मात्रा अर्धमात्रा वा त्रिकला वा । ॥३०॥ सन्ध्याद्यश्च ॥ १० ॥ सन्ध्याचश्च वर्णस्त्रिकलो भवति । एकारौकारयो । इति तृतीयो दशके ॥ ३ ॥ 1 लविव्यपरी B लावावन्यपरी A लावव्यपरौल 6 सादीनि । 2 Såman form of hidhi 9 सुरूपकृ B 3 प्रहात्रे पूप्रभृ• B 10 पदादि. B 4 धनुर्वशे B 11 गतिश्च A BC 6 is v anting in B 12 चतुर्थो दशक BA 6 व्यजनस्या भराते B 20 7 रन्धा B ·ऋक्तन्त्रम् 5 १०] [२, ४ १-८-३८ [अथ चतुर्थो दशकः] ॥ ३१ ॥ द्रुतायां मात्रा ॥१॥ द्रुताया वृत्तौ मात्रा त्रिकला भवति । ॥३२॥ चतुष्कला मध्यमायाम् ॥ २॥ चतुष्कला मात्रा मध्यमाया वृत्तौ भवति । ॥३३॥ पञ्चकला विलम्बितायाम् ॥३॥ पञ्चकला मात्रा विलम्बिताया वृत्तौ भवति । ॥३४॥ वर्णान्तरं परमाणु ॥४॥ वर्णान्तर परमाणुमात्र भवति । तत् कलार्धम् । ॥३५॥ स्वरयोरर्धमात्रा ॥५॥ स्वरयोरन्तरमर्धमात्री भवति । ०मिणादीनि (१५७२ )। ॥३६॥ विरामे मात्रा ॥६॥ विरामे अन्तर मात्रिक भवति । अवमाने तत् । ॥३७ ।। नित्यविरते द्विमात्रम् ॥ ७ ॥ नित्यविरते द्विमात्रमन्तर भवति । अर्धर्चान्तर्गतेषु । ॥३८॥ गाथासु ॥८॥ गाथासु च द्विमात्रमन्तर (नित्यविरते ) भवति । ये नौमि प्रतर्रान्ति मानस काश्मीरा सलिलम् । मदानेस तानश्वपंथे वशीकृर्था युधीन्द्रो' दिवि' दानवानिव । नैवोदकमस्ति पातवे न पक्षा उत्पतनाय । स्तोममकृपण बत । सारसो मृगो मण्डूको विललाप । धन्वन्युपचित्रकपाण्डुपलाशक- 20 मत्स्यकाजहि । जालकाने गरणीषु च मत्स्यकामानाहननासकस्यै विदि- 10 10 । 1 मात्र B 2 प्रतर B ति omitted 3 कास्मीरा B 7 युवीन्द्र इव दिyि bar 8 धन्व पन्यु० । 9 पण्डु B 109 B Bur reads-मत्स्यका जहीहि 11 जानककेन. B 4 मदासर B 5 नवाश्च पथे Bur 6 ०कृता Bar 12 मत्स्यकामाला हममसकस्य Bur ·5 3 २,५ १-६-४६] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [११ शानि सामिकम् । यो ग्ना-है ( १ १) इत्यादीनि । सुब्रह्मण्योम् ( षड्- विंशब्राह्मणम् ११) इति च । ॥३६॥ त्रिमानं सामसु ॥६॥ त्रिमात्रमन्तर सामसु वेदितव्य भक्त्यन्तेषु । ॥४०॥अकालो हस्वः ॥१०॥ अकारकालो वर्णो ह्रस्वो भवति । अ इ उ ऋ इत्येते । इति चतुर्थो दशक ॥४॥ [अथ पंचमो दशकः ] ॥४१॥ अर्धमणु ॥१॥ अर्धमकारकालो अणु सशो भवति । स्वरितविनतप्रणताभिगीतेषु । ॥४२॥ मात्रा ॥२॥ मात्रा चाकारकालो भवति । ॥४३॥ द्वे दीर्घम् ॥ ३॥ वे मात्रे दीर्घ नाम । ॥४४॥ तिस्रो वृद्धम् ॥ ४ ॥ तिम्रो मात्रा वृद्ध नाम भवति । ॥४५॥ वैस्वर्ये स्वरस्त्रिमात्रः॥५॥ वैस्वयें स्वरस्त्रिमात्रो भवति । द्युता-दीनि (१८३) ॥ ॥४६॥ अक्षरम् ॥६॥ अक्षरसन्न भवति । अकारकालो द्विरकारकालो वृद्ध इत्यधिकार । कृते वर्णोपदेशे सामान्यपृथक्त्वेनातरपरिभाषयान्वर्थो धर्मोऽक्षरज्ञाने । अक्षर- 10 10 1 श्रोमायित्या. B 2 अ इ उ इत्येते B 3 चतुर्थो दशक A and C पचमो दशक B 4 500 काल Bur 5 प्रकारकाला B 6 Is wanting in B 7 खिमात्रा Bur 8 सामन् form-2 ता तू (३ म्) वाम् द्विरकालो B द्विरकालकालो Bur 10 नर्थो B ·ऋक्तन्त्रम् 5 10 १२] [२, ६ १-२-५३ परिमाणसबन्धः । द्विस्वरः पर्व । तत्रोद्घातनिघातौ प्रत्यु क्रमोऽभिगीतं वृद्धि कर्षणम् । अष्टाक्षरेण प्रथमाया च प्रस्तौति । द्वयक्षरेणोत्तरयो । दशाक्षर मध्यतो निधनमुपयन्तीति हि ब्राह्मणम् (ता म ब्रा ७,७,१२।८,५,१३)। एकवत्त्वे- ऽभिहिते सर्वप्राप्ति। ॥४७॥ वर्ति ॥७॥ अकारादिषु वर्तते व्यञ्जन वर्ति चाप्यक्षर भवति । ॥४८॥ भूयान् ॥८॥ भूयाश्च सव्यञ्जनो वर्तित्वेनाक्षर भवति । कारु बिभ्रत् (१४८६) अग्नि दूतम् (१३)। ॥४६॥ गुरु सणि ॥६॥ गुरु सयोगे प्रत्यये भवति । अग्नि (१४) अश्व (स्तोभ ) उष्ट्र । उद्र । उग्रम् (१ ३२६) अभ्रम् । ॥ ५० ॥ घम् ॥ १०॥ दीर्घ च गुरुसज्ञ भवति । ए ओ ऐ श्री प्रभृतीनि । इति पञ्चमो दशकं ॥ ५ ॥ [अथ षष्ठो दशकः] ॥ ५१ ।। उदात्तमुत् ॥ १॥ उदात्तमुत्सक भवति । उच्चमित्यर्थ । ॥ ५३ ॥ वान्सन्धिः ॥२॥ उदात्तवान् सन्धिरुत्सझो भवति । श्रा इन्द्र सानसिम् - एन्द्र सानसिम् (१ १२६) आ इन्द्र याहि-पन्द्र याहि (१ ३४८) आइत उ नु-एतो विन्द्रम् 20 (१३८७) उघेदभि श्रुतामघम् (१ १२५) अत्राह गो रमन्यत (१९४७)। 15 । १२ 3 २ २३ 3 २ ३ २ ३ 3 २३१ २ 3 3 1So Bur .सबन्चात् B 2 भिगान B 3 वृद्धिकर्षणम् Bur 4 एकवचाभि. B 5 Is wanting in B 6 उभ्रम् B 7 पञ्चमो दशक AC षष्ठो दशक B 8 वात्सन्धि A वासन्धि C वान्सन्धि B विन्द्र स्तवाम B न्वन्द्र Bur Amls pript ·२, ६ ३-६-५६] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [१३ १२ १२३ २३१.२ 3 7 ३ १ ३२उ ३ २ कर 10 उदात्तवानिति ? पो न स सपर्यन् (१ १६६) के यथ वेदसि (१२७१) । ॥ ५३॥ आद्यार्धमात्रा स्वरितम् ॥ ३ ॥ श्राद्याधमात्रा उत्सज्ञा भवति । तत् स्वरित नाम । ॥५४॥ उन्नीचे मे ॥४॥ उच्चीभवति तत् स्वरितम् । नीचे वा प्रत्यये विरामे वा। नि होता सत्सि 5 बर्हिषि (११) सखाय इन्द्रमूतये ( १ ४०० ) अभि त्वा शूर नो नुमोऽदुग्धा (१ २३३) इन्द्र तुभ्यमिदद्रिवोऽनुत्त वजिन् वीर्यम् (१ ४१२) यदिन्द्र चित्र म इह न (१ ३४५) नीचे वा प्रत्यये विरामे वा इति ? पाह्य ३ त (१३६) पुरि चम्वों (१५१३) इत्यादीनि । ॥ ५५ ॥ नीचमुच्चात् ॥ ५ ॥ नीचमुच्चात् पर स्वर्यते। प्रायाहि (११) वारवन्तम् (१ १७ स्वादिष्ठया (१४६८) अग्ने स्तोमम् (२ ७५३) पान्तम् (१ १५५) इन्दो (१ ५०५) आयोहि (१ १६१)-प्रभृतीनि । नीचे प्रत्यये विरामे वा इति ? पुरि चम्बो (१५.३)। ॥५६॥ संयोगात् ॥ ६ । सयोगाच्च पर स्वर्यते । श्रुष्टि अग्ने-अष्ट्यग्ने (१ १०६) अभि एति- 15 अभ्येति (१ ५२४) अभि अर्धाम -अभ्याम (१ ५३५) योज न इन्द्र- योजान्विन्द्र (१४१५) पाह्यत द्वितीयया (१३६) मा न इन्द्राभ्या३ दिश (११२८) विद्धी त्वा३स्य नो वसो (११३२) पिबा त्वा३ स्य गिर्वण (२ ७४१) शग्भ्यू ३ ७ शीपते (१२५३) । उच्चाद् (सू ५५) इति ? प्रयोध्यग्नि (१७३)। २ २र उकर ३२र २ 20 5 पायत B 1 ०षदा उपो. B 2 Is wanting in B 3 Cmitted in B अभ्यर्चाम देवान् B 6 त्वस्य B 7 अबोधि नीचम् । अपावृशिसयोगात् यावाहु B ·१४] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [२, ६ ७-१०-६० 5 ॥ ५७ ॥ केयहीन्द्रनी-वे ति ॥ ७ ॥ क इयथ-केयथ (१२७१) अधी हि इन्द्र-अंधी हीन्द्र (१ ४०६) नि इव शीर्षाणि मृदम्-नीव शीर्षाणि मृदम्' (२ १००२) । ॥ ५८ ॥ नोर्धे स्तेम् ॥८॥ तोरुणेप्सु (१२१६) वृधेश्स्मान् (१ २३६) ते मन्वत' (प्रा.स २२)। ॥ ५६ ॥ नैगिनोभयथा ॥३॥ उभयथा नैगिना प्रोक्तम् । तोर्धे स्तम् इत्यधिकार । उदात्त स्वरित वा। ॥६० ॥ न्यायेनौदवजिः ॥१० ।। न्यायेनौदवजिराचार्यो मन्यते । उच्चानामुश्चसन्धिरुश्च एघ कार्य । इति षष्ठो दशक ॥६॥ इति द्वितीय प्रपाठक । 1 Is wanting in Bur 2 Is wanting in B 3 तोरुणदूरादिहेवय अतोऽरुण B 4 वधेमान् । वृधेऽस्मा अवन्तु। मन्वत । ते मन्वतेति वा B 5 So B न्यायेनौदबजि A न्यायैनोदुवाज c_cf Ss p 443 "न्यायनादब्राजियथा" Siddhesaras CY PHOIG P 50 Siksaprakata "अनन्त सयोगे मभ्ये यम पूर्वगुण इत्यौदवजिरपि" s9 p 388 6 श्रीदवजि B 7 इति ऋक्तन्त्रे प्रथम प्रपाठक B प्रथम AC omits प्रपाठक इति द्वितीय प्रपाठक Bur ·17382 TWE "PSISWA SASTRI 1JIE [अथ तृतीयः प्रपाठकः] उक.र ३ कर [प्रथमो दशकः] ॥ ६१॥ तस्मादुच्चश्रुतीनि ॥ १ ॥ तस्मात् स्वरितात् पराणि उदात्तश्रुतीनि भवन्ति । व्यदातये (११) अभि त्वा शूर ( १ २३३ ) प्रभृतीनि । श्राजाता सुक्रतो पृण ( १५२) इन्दु रिन्द्राय धीयते (१४८६) सुतो विदथे अक्रमु (१४७७ ) नीचे वा प्रत्यये विरामे वा (सू ५४) इति ? पवित्रे चम्बो सुन (१४६०) सखायो 5 दजिह्वयम् । (१५४५ ) । ॥६२॥ पदमेकोच्चम् ॥ २॥ पदमेकोश्च भवति । अग्ने (११)-प्रभृतीनि । ॥६३॥ प्रकृतिः॥३॥ प्रकृतिश्चापि पद भवति । ॥६४॥ मान् विकारः ॥ ४ ॥ प्रकृतिमान् विकारो भवति । दण्डाग्रादीनि । ॥६५॥ समासे ॥५॥ समासे चैकमुदात्त भवति । व्यदातये (११) प्रभृतीनि । ॥६६॥ विभकिलोपः॥६॥ विभक्तिलोपश्च समासे भवति । राजपुरुष । पाण्डुकम्बल । मत्तहस्ती- 10 15 ·ऋक्तन्त्रम् 5 १६] [३, १ ७-८-६८ ति प्रथमा लुप्यते षष्ठी च । द्वन्द्वसमासे'। शिववैश्वानरौ । स्कन्दविशाखौ। नारदपर्वतौ । उशनाबृहस्पती इति । गणसमासे फौण्डिन्यवनस्पतिषु । चातुर्वण्र्ये च । बहुवचनम् साल्वशरदण्डादीनि । वा यसमासोदाहरणम् । पुरुषशत माणवकोदकमानय । गा चित्रामभ्यागच्छेति । ॥६७॥ समिकर्षः संहिता ॥७॥ सनिकर्ष सहिता भवति । पदस्येत्यधिकार । अानन्तर्य संनिकर्ष । अबोध्यादीनि (१७३) साम्नि । सस्य स्वे प्रभृतीनि (१५८२) दधि मध्वति सनिकृष्टमिति चेत् ? य पर सनिकर्षों नान्तरेण विकारम् । को नाम विकार ? शास्त्रप्राप्ते" लोपे" च सन्धि हो । ॥६८॥ न वृद्धं रे ॥८॥ न वृद्ध स्वरे प्रत्यये सनिकृष्यते । सनिको न भवति । मिणा श्रव्य वारम् (१ ५७२) भरा इन्द्र ज्याय (१ ३०६) ०म धारया श्रापो २ (१५११) ०ष्णो ३ श्रागा ३ ही (१ ३४७) सो ३ श्रा श्वा३ या (१४८२) अय पूषादीनि' (१ ५४६ श्रेय पूषो हो) वृद्धमिति ? आजिष्वादीनि (१ ४११ 15 स्वाजितिम्) 10 1 समास B 2 शिवश्रवा B 3 .स्पति B 4 इति गणममाम । One sentence in B Fullstop aftor 914 5 कौण्डिन्य वचनम् (One sentence in B 6 समासो दधि हरति B 7 चित्रामभ्याहृति विभक्तिलोप B 8 पादस्ये. B 9 अानन्तर्ये B 10 90 B स । स्वे प्र. Bur 11 प्राप्तोपे B 12 सन्धिशब्द (प्राय 1s wanting) B 13 Is wanting in B 14 But there is Samhita here in SV 1572, which reads ऊर्मिणाम्य वार (= RV 9 106 10 मिणाव्यो वार) 1551 1 309 (=RV7 32 24) roads भरेन्द्र ज्याय 16 SV 1 011 (=RV 1 107 4) rends पुनान मोम धारयापा वमानो अर्षमि 17 5V 1 347 (-IV 1 84 1) roads शविष्ठ धृष्णवागहि 18 This is correct SV 1 482%3 RV 9 94 4 Both road गव्या सोमासो अश्वया 19 SV 1516 %3D RV 9 1017 Both have अय पूषा रयिर्भग सोम पुनानो अर्षति 20 RV I 81 1 reads .तीमन्महत्स्वाजि धूतेमर्भ (=उत+ईम्+अर्भे) But sv l 4lI has तमिन्महत्स्वाजिपूतिमौ ति may be emended to ते Bur roads स्वा इतिम् ·३, २ १-४-७४]] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [१७ ॥६६॥ दमु॥६॥ पदमुकारो न सनिकृष्यते । तमु अभि प्रगायत (१ ३८२) इत्थमु प्रा० (१ ३०५) तस्मा उ श्रा० (१ २७२) पदमिति ? त्वा वृत्रेष्विन्द्र (१२३४) ॥ ७० ॥ ओभूतं च ॥ १० ॥ ओभूत च उपद न सनिकृष्यते । दोला उ प्रा अगात् (दापो प्रागात् । १ १७७) एषा उ उषा (एषो उषा १ १७८) प्र उ प्रयासीत् (प्रो प्रयासी १ ५५७) इति प्रथमो दशक ॥ [अथ द्वितीयो दशकः] ॥७१ ॥ प्राणि ॥ १॥ आकार पादादो (प्राणि) प्रत्यये न सनिकृष्यते । क इम नाहुषीष्वा इन्० (१ १६०) कदा वसो स्तोत्र हर्यत श्रा अव० (१ २२८) यदिन्द्र नाहु 10 षीया श्रो० (१ २६२) ॥ पदम् (सू ६६) इति ? पुनानायाम् (१ ५१२, धारया १) पादादाविति ? दिव पृष्ठान्यारहन् (१ ६२)-प्रादीनि । दधन्वाँ यो नर्यो २ प्सु वन्तरा । वो २३ (१ ५१२ h)। ॥ ७२ ॥ न वन्वा च ॥ २ ॥ सानकृष्यते । श्राद्वन्यथा (१ ३०५) किं वा वयनम् । ॥ ७३ ।। औ॥३॥ औकारश्च सनिकृष्यते। न 'योमातरावन्वेति (१६४) यावाहु (१ ३६१) ॥ ७४ ॥ द्वयर्थे ॥४॥ द्वधर्थे च न सनिकृष्यते । इन्द्राग्नी (अपात् १ २८१ ) प्रभृतीनि । उभे यदिन्द्र रोदसी प्रा० (१३७६) उभे शैची ( ? उभे अनु २७७३ ) 20 द्वयर्थे इति वर्मीव ( १५८५) 15 1 उप्रय B 2 इन्द्र is wanting in B 3 3 is wanting in B 4 Note the Sandhu in all the three oxamples in SV (Benfey's Ed ) 6 Is wanting in B 6 Is wanting in bo 7वन्तरा । उपा । . 8 श्राद्व Bashp 9 वपनम् B 10 अनुमातराव• B 11 श वसू B ·१८] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [३,२ ५-८७८ . ? ॥ ७५ ॥ ई न वपरे ॥ ५॥ ईकारस्य वैध न वपरे एव न सनिकृष्यते । इन्द्राहीप्रभृतीन्येव । निवृ तानि । उपधीव । प्रधी । चर्मणीव । दपतीव । वाससीन। ॥ ७६ ॥ अयवावे न्यूने ॥६॥ एकारौकारौ अकारप्रत्यये न्यूने पादे न सनिकृष्येते'। नमस्ते अग्न प्रोजसे (१११) वायोरनीके अस्थिरन् । (११३) न तत्ते अग्ने (१५३) प्रेष्ठ वो अतिथिम् (. ५) त्व नो अग्ने (१६) वृषो अर्वावति । ( १ २६५) मधो अर्षन्ति (१ ४८५) यज्ञायशादीनि (१३५ वो अग्नय ) ॥ एकारौकारा विति किम् ? श्रुतकक्षारम् ( . ११८) अकार इति ? अग्न इत्थे तराँ (१ ७) 10 न्यूने ? घ्नता वाम् (१ ३०५ णो शु०) पादोऽस्य सर्वा (श्रा० स० ३५) पादोऽस्ये हाभवत् (प्रा०स० ३४) वपरे (सू ७५) इति ? वृष—तिनोंऽविता (१ २६३) अय वामढेऽवसे (१ ३०४) सोऽवथा (ऋ वे ४ ३६ ५) स्थूर न कश्चिद् भरन्तोऽवस्यव (१३०८) प्रनोऽविशत् ( २ ४११) ॥ यदिन्द्र शासो अवतम् । (१ २६८) अधि सानो अव्ये" । (१ ५३२) त्रिरकान्तग्रहणान् ? ।। ७७॥ त्रो णि ॥ ७॥ जो शब्द पादादी प्रत्यये न मनिकृष्यते । भगो न चित्रो अग्निर्मक (१४५०) ॥ निवृत्तानि एह्य पु बेवाणि ने ऽग्ने" (१७) अग्नि गये एरमाढवुन नरोऽग्नि" (१४८ ) अभिन्वा शूर ना नुमो' ऽदुग्धा देव (१ २३३) ॥ ७८ ॥ नृतो प वो नि ॥८॥ सनिकृष्यते । तव न्यन्नर्य नृतोऽपं०(१४६०) अभवोऽङ्गिरस्तम (१ ५१६) ? 1 . 20 10 Dus is fulind in RI Only Buis letelene 15 Wion, 11 अवतम् IS winting in , 1) अव्ये 19 wintin, m B 1} अक्रान्त Bur | Is wantin, in P ) प्रयया , } मचायत । मनिकृष्यते Bun 4 अग्ने प्रमषे । वति is wantin, in 1 , कक्षाकारे। 7 तरा 15 w anting in 8 So Band SV 1263 नोऽविता ting in B tyyíão Bur 9 अय वाममो यथास्थूर प्रनोविशत् अपा गर्भो यदिन्द्र शासो B 1510 1150 BindV17 प्वब. Bun 1) Is wantingin B 16 ls wanting in B 17 Is wantingin B 18 ०५ इन्द्र ।

·३, ३ १-६-८६] ऋकतन्त्रम् [१६ ॥ ७९ ॥ गो॥३॥ गोशब्दश्च न सनिकृष्यते । गो अग्रम् । गो अश्वम् । गो अजिनीकम् । ॥८०॥ न वा ॥१०॥ न वा सनिकृष्यते एव वा । गो अग्रम ' गोमश्वम् । गोऽजिनम् । गो जिनीकम्। इति द्वितीयो दशक ॥ 5 10 [अथ तृतीयो दशकः] ॥८१॥ अवं वा ॥१॥ अव वा प्रापद्यते । गवग्रम् । गवश्वम् । गवजिनम् । गवजिनीकम् । ॥ ८२॥ त्वे ॥२॥ त्वे शब्दश्च न सनिकृष्यते । त्वे अग्ने स्वाहुत (१ ३८)। सिद्धग्रहणा सामर्थ्यग्रहणम् । निवृत्तानि । यजत ता श्रादीनि (१ ७५) । ॥ ८३ ॥ लुबन्यः ॥ ३॥ लुप्यते अन्य प्रकार । पादोऽस्य (श्रा० स ३५)-प्रभृतीनि । ॥ ८४ ॥ पूर्ण इति करणाभ्यस्ते ॥४॥ पूणे पादे इति करणाभ्यस्ते लुप्यते । मही यक्षस्य (१ ११७) घृतवती (१ ३७८)-प्रभृतीनि ॥ पूर्ण इति ' प्रप्र वयममृतम् (१ ३५) यावाहु सयुजौ ।। (१ ३६१)। ॥ ८५ ॥ ऋति ॥ ५॥ ऋति च प्रत्यये न सनिकृष्यते । गायत ऋतान्ने (१ १०७) अभ्य ३ तस्य सुदुघा (१५५६ ) । प्रणीत्यधिकार । ॥८६॥ ओजि ॥६॥ प्रोजि च प्रत्यये न सनिकृष्यते । त्व न इन्द्रा भर प्रोजो (१ ४०५ ) . 20 1 After गो अश्वम् । rod, गो अजिनम् 2 अजिनिकम् । 3 गोऽजिनिकम् B 4See and } " स्वाहुत is wantin, in ! 6 यजत तादीनि Bur 7 अमृतम् 19 wanting in b ५ सयुजौ 1s winting in B ·२०] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [३, ३ ७-१०-६० 10 इन्द्र ज्येष्ठं न अाभर ओजि० (प्रा० स० १) अमितौजा अजायते (१ ३५६) (सू ७७)-त्यधिकार ॥ ॥८७॥ शकन्धुकादीनाम् ॥७॥ शकन्धुकादीना च न सनिकृष्यते । शक अन्धुक ईश । अक्षपा असि । • वपा इव त्मना । अनेहसम् (१ ६२) सुपथा अकृण्वन् । ॥८८ ॥ कि-इन् वी-उत् ॥८॥ न कि इन्द्र त्वदुत्तरम् (१ २०३) पृथिवी उत द्यो (श्रा०स०५) । ॥८६॥ स्मिन्-व-ज्म-यम् ॥ ६ ॥ यस्मिन् व्रतान्यादधु (१ ४७) उप ज्मन् य विप्रास (१ ३३७)। ॥१०॥ महुँ युक् ॥१०॥ मकारो हिंकारयुक्तो न सनिकृष्यते । विशा विशो हिम् वो (१ ८७ अग्ने वाजस्य (गो हिम्मातोइ । १ ६६ b) स्वादिष्ठया (ो हो हिं हा।१ ४६८ h) इन्दु पविष्टा-सु (१४८१ ।) सृजा दाश्वाम् (हिम् हिम्) च । अपा ३ म् हिम वा (१ ५८४ b) । इति सम्मील्ये हिमादीना क्रम । विशेषाद् वमौ" च 10 दीर्घानुस्वारमयौं''। मकारकरणाश्च श्येते (१ २३५ ८ हिम् मा) मकाराकरणे' न वर्तन्ते।तद्वच्चैवाचार्यस्य नकुलमुखस्य वचन श्रूयते । "प्रफ्रेमते मकारकरणन नतो हकारादिमनुस्वार गायति ततो मकार" इति नकुशमुख । इति तृतीयो दशर ॥ 1 Is wanting in b 9 वाज (स्य wanting in in) b 2 आणा. 10 0 Bur Ct SV 1 99 (with Sayapas कर 3 After this B reads न कि इन्द्र० (omm p 264) गो हू म् मतो हो हाँ इ 4 य्यन्य B ग्यन्या । म्मिन व्रजमनयम् । 11 पविष्ट । 12 सुदुर्य । 6 50 IBC IEH Bui 13 सृजदश्व । 7 B doos not mark accent CISV 187 14 हुम B (Sayana's comm Vol I P 243) विशो 15 See 11 विशो हुम् वो The South Indian gana 16 पाद्धमी । msg write this हिम् स्थि वो Here Sthi' 17 मधो । =Sthira matra or 1 matra pause 18 •करणाचते B So in the following oxamples 19 मकारकरणे B 8 Is wanting in B 20 His wanting in B । u Soo 4 ·३, ४ १-४६४] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [२१ [ अथ चतुर्थो दशकः ] ॥ ६१ ॥ विकारः ॥१॥ विकारश्च सनिकर्षों भवति । नैव वृत्तेनापि प्राग् लोपागमप्रकृति भावश्च विकार। ॥१२॥ सस्थानः॥२॥ विशे नि शब्द प्रयोगे (११५,b विशा इ वा इशे)। सस्थान सविकारो । विज्ञेय । विशेषस्थानान्तर वा । यथानन्तर वा। ॥६३॥रो घम् ॥ ३॥ स्वरौ दीर्घमापद्यते । उभावेक विकार । सस्थान (सू ६२) इत्युक्तम् । ईडिष्वावसे (१४६) न त्वा द्रिव (१ २६१) अथादित्य व्रते (श्रा० स० ४) वयमुत्वाम् (१ ४०८ भरन्तो वस्यव) आगमत् (१ २६०) अभिमातिषाह (प्रा० 10 स० १६) अधा हीन्द्र (१४०६) वाजिनीव (२१०६३) सूक्तेभि (१५६) आजि- तिम् (१४११) सूर्यस्य (१ ५३८-पदपा०सु । ऊर्यस्य) सन्ध्यापैत्तिर्विशेषात् । ॥६४ ॥ अस्थनामिनी सन्ध्यम् ॥ ४ ॥ अस्थनामिनी सन्ध्यमापद्यते । एन्द्र-सादीनि (१ १२६) तघे १० (२ १०२) श्रापप्राथोषा (१३७६) अस्थनामिनी" इति किम् ? पूर्वेण (२४४१) 15 । नपि Bur 10 iften आगमत् biends होतृषभम् । मातृषभम् । अधाहीन्द्र जिनीवसू । After tullstop B reposty tho Sutra 11 उक्तभि ।, Bur refers to 109 3 विकार , whilo Bui includes the same But Vajinna is not found therein Wo find Immvasu in II 1098 3 CF विशायिवा २३ यिशे । 1 1 15 12 जिबूत पाis iranting in B Cf RT p (Sayana s comm Vol I p 117) + नो विकारो B पत्तिवि० ; Is wanting in L 11 ० पद्यते । 6 1 1s wanting in B 15 So correct तदेव B 7 च न त्वाऽद्रिवोऽपि B sv 1 291 11 16 अस्थाना ना. B च न त्वाद्रिव परा 17 किम् 19 wanting in B 8 अथ swantiny in B 18 पूर्वे (ण 1 wanting an) B 9 मूB SV 1 408 roads वयमु त्वा. 2 In B the comnm ond, with oभावश्व in the comm 16n 20 13. o Bus ·[३ ५-६%3D६६ 5 - १ ॥ १६ ॥ सन्ध्यं द्विवर्णम् ॥ ५॥ सन्ध्यक्षर द्विवर्णमापद्यते । अस्थोपधमिति' प्रकृतम् । प्रैतु (१५६) कृणुतैकमिन् माम् (श्रा स ६) (साम्नि) क्षत त्वोऽ३ हो'३ (१ ३२०) अर्प प्रेरयत् सगर० (१ ३३६ अप प्रैरा) अमितौजा (१ ३५६ ) ॥ ६६ ॥ भाषांयां णीपरयोः ॥६॥ भाषाया णीपरयोरक्षरयोर्द्विवर्णमापद्यते । स्व इरिणी । स्वैरिणी । अक्ष ऊहिनी । अतौहिणी ॥ अस्थनामिनी (सू ६४)-त्यधिकार । ।। ६७ ॥ उपसर्गादहेण्यौ प्रेष्यार्थे ॥ ७ ॥ उपसर्गात् परादूहेष्यौ प्रेष्यार्थे द्विवर्णमापद्यते । प्रऊह । प्रोह । उप ऊह । 10 उपौह ।प्रै ईष्ये । प्रेष्ये । उप ईष्य । उपेष्य । कस्मात् प्रेष्याथे ' प्रेष्यतु भवा नध्वर्युश्च । ॥१८॥ मन्ध्ये परं मामथ्र्ये ॥८॥ सन्ध्ये प्रत्यये पर (वर्णम्) मापद्यते सामर्थ्ये । प्रोढीयती"प्रोजयति । प्रेष यति । प्रोषित ॥ उपसर्गा (सू ६७)-दिति ? राजौढीयति । सामर्थ्य कस्मात् 15 प्रौढीयति । ॥8॥ ममासे ॥४॥ समासे च परमापद्यते । कोमित्यवोचत् । सोमित्यवोचत् । ब्रह्मामित्यो चत्। समोहम्। विषमोहम् । दु खोहम् । समोल । विषमाल । दु खोले । समोष्ठी विषमोष्ठी । बिम्बोष्ठी । समोक । विषमोक । दु खाक । जलोक ॥ समास 20 कस्मात् ' अजीतु भक्षयति'' । उपोष्ठबनी वडवा । नाम चंदपर्युदास । 1 द्विवण वणमा.b Then at 16posts मध्यावरण भाषायाम् । wanting In B 10 मापात P । होइ Is wanting in L 11 इण्य । प्रध्य । 4 पावाप । प्रेरय मगर B 1) प्रेटयति । । अमितीजा B 11 प्रजर्यात B (, मन्य द्विवर्ण भाषायाम A F भाषाया 1 राजीनयति । ही परयो C 15 स्मादाढनात् । 7 I wanting in , 16 ममोलुर्विषमोलुर्दु खालु । 8 ऊहणी । अतीहणी B 17 अजीत भक्षयन्ति । O After this B reads भाषाया गीपरयो । 18 बदुवा Bur मिति ·३,५१-६-१० . न्त्रम् [२३ ॥ १०॥ न वा ॥ १० ॥ न वा परमापयते । द्विवर्णमेव वा न वा॥ इति चतुथा दशक ॥ [अथ पञ्चमो दराकः ॥] । 5 ? ॥ १०१॥ हस्वमृचि ॥ १॥ ह्रस्वमापद्यत ऋचि प्रत्यये । अचम्। नवर्धम् । दशश्चम् । शाकलछम् । मालम् । मन्त्रे । सहर्षभा (श्रा स ४२)। ।। १०२ ।। ऋमप्येके ।। २॥ ऋमप्येक प्राचार्या ह्रस्व मन्यन्ते । ॥ १०३ ।। मासे घमृति ॥३॥ समासे दीर्घमापद्यते ऋति प्रत्यये । मशकार्त्त । शीतात । भयार्त । दण्डात ॥समासे कस्मात् ? मशक इति मशकमामन्त्र्य-ऋत पश्य । मशकर्तम्। 10 मशक ऋतम्। ॥ १०४॥ म क्रियायाम् ॥ ४॥ म शब्द क्रियाया दीर्घमापद्यते । मार्यन्तम् । मार्षभम् । माव॑न्तम् । मातीयमानम् ॥ माशब्द इति ? राजेति । समर्थन्ति । क्रियायाम् ? मर्षिम् । मर्षभम् । कर्मणा चेहीर्घमेव ॥ ॥ १०५ ।। उपसर्गः सामर्थ्ये ।। ५ ॥ उपसर्ग सामर्थ्य दीर्घमापद्यते । प्राचति । उपाचति ॥ उपसर्ग इति? राजचति । सामर्थ्य कस्मात् १ अर्शनात् । ॥ १०६ ।। वत्सतरादीनामणि ॥ ६॥ वत्सतरादीनामृणि प्रत्यये दीर्घमापद्यते।प्र ऋणम्।प्रार्णम्।वत्सतर ऋणम्। 20 1 Atten this IB 1ends-अष्टप्रभृतीनि । 7 मार्भवत B , मशकौ । मशक ऋत b 6 मात्वीयमानम् । 3 मार्छम् B मार्षत 8 Confusion of and in B ) 7 मशब्द B B ·२४] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [ ३, ५ ११११ वत्सतरार्णम् । कम्बल ऋणम् । कम्बलार्णम् । वसन ऋणम् । वसनार्णम् । दश ऋणम् । दशार्णम् । दशार्णो नाम देश । ॥ १०७ ॥ रमृस्थमखे ॥७॥ . रेफमापद्यते ऋस्थमस्वे प्रत्यये । होत्रत्र । पित्रत्र । मात्रवेति । अस्वे ? 5 होतृषभम् । होतृषदनम् । स्वरया ,त्यधिकार । ॥१०८॥ हस्वमेके ॥८॥ हस्व वैके प्राचार्या मन्यन्ते । होत पत्र प्रभृतीनि । ॥१०६ ॥ अन्तस्थाम् ॥६॥ अन्तस्थामापद्यते । अस्वे ह्रस्वमेक इत्यधिकार । अबोध्यग्नि (१७३) 10 सूरो अनुष्वायमतं (१ १२८) पर्युषु (१ ४२८) स्वरयोरित्यधिकागे व्यभिचार इति चेद्विकारें । स्वस्थान इत्युक्तम् । ॥११० ॥ तिः ॥१०॥ गतिश्चान्तस्थामापद्यते । इनाई । इनी (११७७) हा वा त्रा (१९४७) हा वाऊँ । (१५६४) स्या ग्ना ई श्रादीनि (१६०) तद् विविड्डाइ (१ १५) 15 स्वरयोरित्याधिकार । इति पञ्चमो दशक ॥ [अथ षष्ठो दशकः ] ॥ १११ ॥ सन्ध्यमयवायावम् ॥ १ ॥ सन्ध्यक्षरमयमवमायमावमापद्यते । अग्नयां याहि (११) अग्नयित्थे' (१७) ०ष्णवागहि (१ ३४७) । तस्मायु अद्य (१२७२) मानरावन्वेति (१६४ यावाहु (१ ३६१) 1 Is wanting in B 7 स्यामारानि P 2 So correct ० प्वायमत Bur अबोध्यक्तु ९ दायि B वादीनि B 3 After this B reads-नि हाता तमि न्द्रम्। 10 श्रम इत्ये B Cf Sv 17 which 4 No fullstop in B reads अम इत्ये 5 इनायि B 9 अन श्रा० BCf S1 1 which roa ds अन श्रा 11 तस्मा उ Bf VS 1272which roads 6 हावाजा B तस्मा उ प्रय ·३, ६ २-५=११५] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [२५ ॥ ११२ ॥ घामो डि विसर्जनीयं यवोहिषु ॥ २॥ दीर्घात्परो नकार पादमींये प्रत्यये विसर्जनीयमापद्यते यवोहिषु प्रत्यये । ऋतूरनु (१२२६) परिधी रति (१ ५१६) सिन्धूरवासृज (२११५०) इन्द्र इव दस्यूनुं० (द्राह्या०सू०२१ १) उत् पणी र्हतम् । (ऋ० ० १ १८४ २) पण महाँ असि सूर्य (१२७६) मृड महा अस्यय (१ १२३) वस्या इन्द्रासि । (१ २९२) महाँ इन्द्र (२ ६५५) मही हि प (१ ३८१) दाशिवॉ बोचे (१.६७) गो मॉ यदिन्द्र ते (१ २७७) दधन्वॉ य (१ ५१२) अग्नि- पीडायाम् (श्रा स २१ होतार रत्न०) इन्द्रस्य च सञ्जये (१ ४१६-इष स्तो०) दीर्घात्पर इति ? क्रीडादीनि (१ ५८४ डिन्नूर) । नकार ? त्वामग्ने (१ ६) विश्वेषा हि० (१२) अशुमतीमति (१ ३२३) पादमींये इति ? अव यहानवान् 10 हर्न (१ २१५) दुर्हणायून (१ ३४१)-एनेष्विति ? अह्न केतून समीसति' (श्रा स २४) भद्रान् कृण्वन् (१ ५३३) देवान् विश्वान् (ऋ वे ३ ५६ ८) नियुत्वान् वायो (ऋ वे २ ४१२) परिधी रति" (१५१६) पाकाहाँ । हाशाम् । मा (१ ५७१b) सन्ध्यगीतम् ॥ ॥११३ ॥ घाद् ग्रा॥३॥ दीर्घात् परस्य द्वेध ग्राम एव विसर्जनीयमापद्यते । देवॉउष ॥ निवृत्तानि । सत्रस्यौं (श्रा गा ३, १४-अविदाम देवान् । समु) तावानस्य श्रा स ३६) धर्मरोचने (श्रा गा App२, ६- लोकानरोचय )। ॥११४॥ प्रा रक्तः॥४॥ प्राकारो रक्तो भवति । बण् महादीनि (१ २७६) । ॥११५ ॥र विसर्जनीयो घोषे ॥५॥ रेफमापद्यते विसर्जनीयो घोषे प्रत्यये । खरे चेत्यधिकार ॥ वृत्रहा नृभि (१४११) धा-इगु । धा इगु (१२७३ १) दो भादीनि (१) 1 After this B reads स्वरे चेत्यधिकार 7 Is wanting in b 2 B reads सिन्धू र प्रहणात्तन्व दस्यूनेन्यो 8 अति 1s wanting in B ना उत्पणान् हितान् । 9 हन् 1s wanting in B 3 Is wanting in B 10 Is wanting in B 4 असि अय 1s wanting in B 11 .रघु B 5 B adis मे पितु 12 प्राकलशाँ सन्ध्यगीतम् B 6 ते 19 wanting B 13 धायिगू B । 20 ·ऋक्तन्त्रम् २६] [३, ६ ६-७=११७ निर्धतीनाम् (१ ३६६) ऊमिरपाम् (१ ५८४) मनुष्येभिरग्नि': (१ ७६) अरण्योर्नि'० (१७६) घोषे इति ? पति पृथिव्यादीनि ॥ (१ २७)॥ ॥ ११६ ॥ रप्रकृतिः॥६॥ रप्रकृतिर्विसर्जनीयो रेफमापद्यते । जरितर्वि० (१३६ - पदपा० जरित) 5 अग्ने त्रातर्गंत (१४२) प्रातरग्नि (१८५) प्रातर्जुषस्व (१ २१०) चन्द्रमा अपस्वा ३ न्तरों (१४१७) य उनिया (१५८५) त्वावत (१ १६३) परीत (१ ५१२) उदर्दरुत् (१३१) अद्य नो देव सविर्त (१ १४१) महि त्रीणामें (११६२) प्रणेत (११९३) कदावसो (११२८) य ऋते चिदभि (१२४४) ब्रह्म जशानम् (१ ३२१) कृपा स्व (१४६४) स्व शब्दो रहस्ये (स्व ८३ र-स्तोभ 10 प्रा० गाने) प्रातविभि (१५०) अहरह (१३६६) उन्नयने (श्रा गा A pp ३१०) समासत्वादुशब्दकृतौ (अर्दा उ) । निवृत्तानि । देवानाम् (१ १३८ अव) अग्ने त्व न (४४८-भुव ) त्व'नश्चित्र (१५१) तव त्य नर्यम् (१४६६- भुव) यत्सोमे सोमे श्राभुव (११८८) विसर्जनीयमिति था। सर्वसिद्धिरघोषे। अन्तश्चरति (२७२५) ऊधे (१ ३३१) ऊष्मणो" निष्ठिन्यपदान्त इत्यधिकार । 15 जरितरादीनि ॥ ॥११७ ॥ अस्थाद् यम् ॥ ७॥ अस्थात् परो विसर्जनीयो यकारमापद्यते । वण् महादीनि (१२७६) इत्थेतरा गिरें (१७) देवा यशम् (१५६) विश्वा हि मा० (१७५) पृतना 1 Is wanting in B 2 अनु हि अरण्यो B 3 प्रातर्जुषी B 4 अप्स्वा३न्तरा 19 wanting in B 5 स्वस्तरददीरूत् B 6 वसवित 18 wanting in B 7 णाम् 1s wanting in B 18 wanting 9 उभये B 11 तव त्य सामे (नयं 1s wantiny im) B 12 After ऊध Breads पत 13 ऊष्मिणो B 14 जरितरादीनाम् Bur B Teads जरिता- दीनि । निवृत्तानि । मर्तो यस्ते । पुष्टा वन्तो । निपूतो । प्रहोता । सिमा पुरू । गोमत ईशे । सुवीर्यस्य गो अन्ताटेश्व परी ताया वज्रोतसिद्धमिती समास दृष्ट त्वात् । 15 गिर 18 wanting in B 16 पृतना अभि भूतर is wanting in B 8 अभि in B 10 Second त्व न W wanting in B ·5 ३, ७ १-३-१२३] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [२७ अभिभूतरम् (१ ३७०) उत द्विषादीनि (१६) ॥ घोषे (सू ११५) १ रथ क्षये । सम्मील्ये । वाघ्ने (१४६४) देवव्रते। अनूषत तो (प्रा०स०२२) ॥ ॥ ११८ ॥ओम् ः॥८॥ ओम् प्रापद्यते । उक्तभिर्मन्दिष्ठेप्रभृतीनि (१ २२६-मन्दिष्ठो वा० ) तरोभिवो' (१२३७) ॥ महतो विरप्शिन् (प्रा० स०४१) ॥ ॥११६ ॥रे ॥६॥ स्वरे द्वैधमकार भो भवति । पुरो अग्निम् (१ ४६१) द्विषो अह (१ ३६५) को अद्य युक्ते (१ ३४१) प्रेष्ठ वो (१५)-प्रभृतीनि ॥ निवृत्तानि । चित्र इत् (१६४) स इन्द्रः॥ ॥१२० ॥ नौ ॥१०॥ नौ शब्दश्चाकार भो भवति । अधिसानो अव्ये (१ ५२८)॥ अकारे ? अश्विना बृहत् (२ १०७६) ॥ इति षष्ठो दशक ॥ [ अथ सप्तमो दशकः ] 10 15 ॥ १२१॥ तो पि ॥१॥ इद च रूपग्रहणम् । परीतो षिञ्चता-याम् (१ ५१२) ॥ ॥ १२२ ॥ होरा खो-रु ॥२॥ अह रात्रि । अहो रात्रि । स्व रुहाणा । स्वो रुहाणा ॥ ॥ १२३ ॥ राजने च ॥३॥ स्वं शब्द प्रो भवति ॥ सुवर् (स्तोभ ) इति वाघ्ने (१)। 1 क्षथ B 2 ०व्रतेऽनूषदक्षा B 3 कोरोभि. B 4 After this B reads अव द्रप्सो It omits महतो विरशिन् 5 शूरो अमे instead of पुरो अमिम् B 6 अद्रि B 7 नावृषि B 8 च is wanting in A BC 9 B reads-राजने च स्वशब्द. ete 10 B reads सुवरिति वातव्ये. (s on the margin) पर्थम् ।

·२८] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [३, ७४-७-१२७ ॥१४२॥ उभयथा भुवो म्न ऊधरवः ॥ ४॥ उभयथा न्यायो यकारो रेफो वा। भुव इति' । भुवरिति । अम्न इति । अम्नरिति । ऊध इति । ऊधरिति । अव इति' । अवरिति । भुवरिति दक्षिणाग्निम् । व्याहृतिवर्गे च (स्तोभ ) । अन एवावरुन्धे । अम्नरित्यर्वे 5 निरुप्यम् । ऊधर्वा अन्तरीक्षम् (ता म ब्रा २४ १६) । ऊधर्वा अनु प्रजा प्रजा- यन्ते । छन्दस्यूधरवश्च भवति । चत्र. यद् अ० (१ ३३१) महि त्री० (१ १९२) ब्रह्म जज्ञानम् (१ ३२१) च । ॥१२५ ॥ सप्रकृतिर्मासे सं कृकमोः॥५॥ समासे सकारमापद्यते कृकमो प्रत्यययो करोतो कामयतौ च । श्रेय 10 स्कार । तेजस्कार । यशस्कार । कामे चैव सप्रकृति श्रेयस्कामै ॥ समासे ? यश कारयते" । वर्च कामयते" । कृकमो इति ? श्रय पाला ॥ ॥ १२६ ॥ यश्चातिशये ॥ ६॥ य शब्द अतिशये सकारमापद्यते। अयस्कारायते । पापीयस्कारीयते । वर्षीयस्कारायते ' (१)। काम चेव य शब्द । ये इति? अयस्काम । ॥ १२७ ॥ अङ्गे च क्म्व्यादौ ॥ ७॥ अङ्गे च प्रत्यये सकारमापद्यते ककार मकार वकार-यकारोंदावने । अजस्कम् । पयस्कम् । यशस्कम् । तेजस्कम् । आयुष्मत् । सर्पिष्मत् । ज्योति ष्मत् । ऊर्जस्वती । पयस्वती । रजस्वला । चतुरस्या । शिरस्या । पयस्या। यशस्या च | उरसा । पयसा । शिरसा । यशसा ॥ १४ 15 1 भुर्वायति B 2 अनयिति B. 3 5001 4 अनायवा. B 5 रित्येवा न निम्प्य B 6 अन्तरिक्षम् । 10 छात्रस्कार । 11 यशस्वामयते । वर्चस्कामयते । ।, 12 कारयते । 138005 14 वार्षीयस्कारयते । वाष्टीयस्कारायते Bur 15 After this B reads छात्रस्करोति। छत्र स्करोति 16 यश इत्य.B 17 यकाराकारादी B 18 अयस्कम् B 7 जज्ञासु च B 8 B reads-सप्रकृतिविमर्जनीय समासे ote 9 B has अयस्कार । यशस्कार । तेजस्कार । अयस्कार ।

·३,८ १-२-१३२] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [२६ 5 ॥ १२८ ॥ कौतस्कृतादीनाम् ॥ ८॥ कौतस्कुतादीना च सकारमापद्यते । कस्क । कौतस्कुत । पुत्रादिन्या- स्पुत्रः । शिरस्पदम् । अधस्पदम् । अयस्पात्रम् । पयस्काम. । अयस्पिण्डो राज्ञो देश ॥ पुत्र पितु । पितु पुत्रं । पुत्र शुन । शुनस्पुत्र । शुनस्पति । शुनस्कर्ण ऋषि । ॥१२६ ॥ पर्वणि सद्यस्काला ॥३॥ पर्वणि सकारमापद्यते । सद्यस्काला पौर्णमासी । सद्यस्कालामावास्यो। सद्य कालमन्यत् । ॥१३० ॥ नामिनो ऽघोषे सामर्थ्य ॥ १० ॥ नामिन परो विसर्जनीयोऽघोपे प्रत्यये सकारमापद्यते सामर्थ्ये । यजु- 10 ज्योतिर्हवि सर्विहिर्धनुर्वपुरिति पूर्वपदान्येक प्रमाण वन्याम । यजु- कुण्डम् । ज्योतिष्कुण्डम् । शोचिषकेशम् (श्रा स ५६) ॥ नामिन इति ? पात्रम् । अघोषे ? ज्योतिर्गायति । सप्रकृति (सू० १२५) १ अग्नि कुण्डे । समासे (सू० १२५) ? ज्योति कुले । सामर्थे ? अाहर त्व धनु पाणे । यश ? इति सप्तमो दशक । [अथ अष्टमो दशकः ] 15 ॥ १३१ ।। मिथुनाख्ये वा ॥१॥ मिथुनाख्ये वा भवति परोष्मापत्ति । प्रकृतिभावसितिभावा । पूर्वयोगे सिशब्दे अपि हितानि त्रीण्यायान्ति ॥ ॥१३२ ॥ विग्रहे च ॥२॥ विग्रहे च वा भवति । ज्योतिष्कुण्डप्रभृतीनि । 1 After this B loads IFTGATH . पितुष्पुत्र । 3 Is wanting in B 1.मबासी Bur 5 ज्योतिष्कुले B 6 B reads पाणिकाकत्व विव्याहरेद सर्पि काक कोष्ठ त्वमवरोह॥

·5 ३०] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [३,८ ३-१०-१४० ॥१३३ ॥ निः ॥३॥ निष्कृतम् (१ ११०) नि खादितम् । निष्पीतम् । निष्वादितम् । ॥ १३४ ॥ दुः॥४॥ दुष्कृतम् । दु स्वादितम् । दुष्पतिम् । ॥१३५॥ असुखे खे ॥ ५॥ असुखे चै खे प्रत्यये न सकारमापद्यते । दु खा बुभुक्षा। दु खा पिपासा। दु खो रथ । कस्मादसुखे ? दु खमिद शकटम्। पापकमस्य खम् ॥१३६ ॥ ख्यातौ च ॥६॥ ख्यातौ च पापिकाया न सकारमापद्यते । दु ख्यातिश्चाय वैधतेय. । 10 पापिकास्य ख्याति । ॥ १३७ ॥ द्विः॥७॥ द्विष्कृतम् । द्विष्खातम्। द्विष्पीतम्। द्विष्पाटितम् । ॥ १३८ ॥ त्रिः ॥८॥ त्रिष्खातम्। त्रिष्कृतम्। त्रिष्पीतम् । त्रिष्पाटितम् । ॥ १३६ ॥ चतुः॥६॥ चतुष्कृतम्। चतुष्खातम् । चतुष्पीतम् । चतुष्पाटितम् । ॥१४० ॥ बहिः ॥१०॥ बहिष्कृतम् । बहिष्खातम् । बहिष्पीतम् । बहिष्पाटितम् । इत्यष्टमो दशक । 15 ॥ इति तृतीय प्रपाठर्क ॥ 1 निष्पाटितम् B 2 After this B reads दुष्पाटितम् 3 Is wanting in B 4 Breada दसुखे खे? 5 दुख्यातिरय वैधपेय B 6 इति ऋक्तन्त्रे द्वितीय प्रपाठक A B इति ऋक्तन्त्रे तृतीय प्रपाठक C Bur ·[अथ चतुर्थः प्रपाठकः] ॥ १४१ ॥ आविरादीनां करोतौ ॥१॥ प्राविरादीना च करोती प्रत्यये विसर्जनीय सकारमापद्यते । प्राविष्कृ- नम् । प्रादुष्कृतम् । तिरस्कृम् । नमस्कृतम् । विभक्तिविशेषे च । ॥ १४२ ॥ पुरः ॥२॥ पुर शब्दस्य विसर्जनीय सकारमापद्यते । पुरुस्कृतो ब्राह्मण । पुर -5 स्कृता कन्या । पुरस्कृतमृण निर्यातुं । पुरस्कृतो रथ । प्राचुरीकृतो निर्याता पुर- स्कृता वत्सा कुमारै । परिपात्यन्ते मृगाश्च श्वभिर्याकृतरूपा इति ॥ ॥ १४३ ॥ अडि ॥३॥ पादम(ये प्रत्यये विसर्जनीय सकारमापद्यते । श्रोषधीष्कृधि । अथा नो वस्यसस्कृधि (२ ३६८) सा शन्ताता मयस्करद (१ १०२) प्र तष 10 सस्कृतानि (१७३) ज्योतिष्कृणोति (१ २०३) ज्योतिष्कृदसि (प्रा०स०५१) करोताविति ? ज्योति पश्यन्ति (१ २०) पादमीये? सह (२ ३०१) सून. तावत (१४१६) नृभिर्यत इति भाष्यम् । ॥ १४४ ॥ इव ॥४॥ इवलिमायामृचि ऋकारपरेऽघोषे प्रत्यये विसर्जनीय सकारमापयते । 18 I B roads fasira a 2 So B and Bur प्रचुरी० seems correct 3 B puts fullstop aftor this 4 भिर्भूया (or ध्या) तरूपा B 5 After this B reads वरिवस्करवन् 6 सहस B ·5 ३२] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [४,१५-७=१४७ ज्योतिष्कृणोति (१ ३०३) परिष्कृण्वन (२२४६) इवलिङ्गायाम् ? साध (१२१७ साध कृ०)-प्रभृतीनि । ऋकारपरे १ दिव ककुत्पति पृथिव्या (१२७) पकारे विशेष । पुस कृष्टीनाम् (१ ७८) ऊष्मस्थानमित्युत्तरार्थम् ॥ ॥ १४५ ॥ रि खिडि ॥५॥ रेफपरे पादोपान्तीये प्रत्यये विसर्जनीय सकारमापद्यते । मयस्करत् (१ १०२) पादोपान्तीये ? सूनृतावत (१ ४१६) । ॥ १४६ ॥ पि ॥६॥ पकारे रेफपरे पादोपान्तीये प्रत्यये विसर्जनीय सकारमापद्यते । अगन्म तमसस्पारम् (स्तोभ) अविदाम तमसस्पारे (स्तोम) शृणाहि विश्व 10 तस्परि (१६५) दिवो अन्तेभ्यस्परि (१ ३६७) दिवं सदोभ्यस्परि' (१ ३१२) देवो देवेभ्यस्परि (२१०६) च्यावया सदस्परि (१२६८) निवृत्तानि । जात परेणे (१६०) द्विष परि (१ १३४) वसिष्ठ परि (१२४१) अव्या वारै परि (१५१६) वृषा वृष्ण परि (१ ५३१) अहमिद्धि (पितुष्परि ११५२) अस्था दित्य (सू ११७)-धिकार । ॥ १४७ ॥ यदन्त्यरे ॥७॥ कराव्यदन्त्यपरे पकारे प्रत्यये विसर्जनीय सकारमापद्यते । ब्रह्मणस्पते (१ १३६) ब्रह्मणस्पते' (१४८ इपस्पते (१५७६) इडस्पदे (१६३) गोष्पदे (स्तोभ )। शवसस्पति (१२४८) मित्रास्पान्ति (१ २०६) ॥ पकारे? सोम कलशे (१ ५५७) कठ्यपरे ? विश्वेदग्नि (प्र० (१ ११४) आय गौ [पृ० 20 (श्रा स ४६) उषस [पृ० (२२२७) उरु पृथु । दन्त्यपरे ? ज्योति पश्यन्ति (१२०) मधो पपान (१२६७) इन्दु पविष्ट (१४८१) सुत पवित्रम् । हिरण्यपावा १० (१ ५६४)। पादमींये ? चन्द्रमा (१४१७) अनुप्रत्नास । विश्वत (१३६३) ॥ 15 ? १ 1 Instead of this B reads वरिवस्कृण्वन् 2 Is wanting in B 3 परे B 6 After this B reads ब्रह्मणस्पति । 7 After this B reads सोम राजान । कृणु हिब्र० । वास्तोष्पते। 8 लश B 9 व्यपरे B 4 ष्टय A Bध्यद. C Bur 5कराव्य ·४,२१-२-१५२] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [३३ ? 10 ॥१४८॥ घेणः ॥८॥ दीर्घातरे पादतृतीये' एव विसर्जनीय सकारमापद्यते । दिवस्पायु १३६) मित्रास्पान्ति (१२०६)॥ निवृत्तानि । (बन्) धुं पावक (१५२४) य पात्रम् १४२४) सप्तहे (प्रा० गा १६१२-नरा)॥ ॥१४६ ॥ यः॥६॥ य शब्दस्य विसर्जनीय सकारमापद्यते । रायस्पोष सहस्रिणम् । राय स्पोष कुलायिनम् । रायस्पोषेण (ऋ वे १,१२५ १)। बहुला भवन्ति पञ्चनिधने कश्यपपुच्छे (श्रा० गा० ३,८१०) । नद्यस्पृणन्ति । रायस्पूर्षि (१३४६) ॥ य शब्द ? सोम पूषा (१ १५४) विश पूर्वी (१३२८) य पात्रम् (१४२४) कराठये विशेष । ॥ १५० ॥भे स्वे मान्तस्थी॥ १० ॥ स्तोमे प्रत्ययेपि हस्वे मकारान्तस्थी विसर्जनीय सकारमापद्यते । गोष्पदे ओकिरसयोरङ्गिरसा वतद्वितीये (पा गा ३,२४) जमदग्निवते' (श्रा गा ३,४५) परिधिषु (श्रा गा App २ १०-३५) ॥ निवृत्तानि । पतिलिङ्गे कीयॆ हदये (श्रा गा ३८,५) ॥ मकारान्तस्थी? देवव्रते (श्रा गा ३,५६) । 15 अभि त्वा शू० (१२३३)। वागादौ तु ॥ इति प्रथमो दशक । [अथ द्वितीयो दशकः] ॥ १५१॥ नोष्मपरे ॥१॥ नोष्मपरे विसर्जनीयो विक्रियते । क्षप्य । क्षप्यादीनि । ॥ १५२ ॥ पुं स्पर्शे ॥२॥ पुकार स्पर्श प्रत्यये सकारमापद्यते । पुस्करे । पुश्चरति । पुस्त्र यम् । 20 पुस्तत्र । पुस्पारे । द्वितीयेषु च ॥ अघोषे ? पु गायति। नोष्मपरे १ पुतुरमें 1 पादस्तृतीय एव B 6 After this B reads भाव्यम् 2 गिर्वणोधु B 7 After this B reads वृक्षर । चुर । 3 अमि. Bur वृक्ष । त्सारुकम्। 4 जमदभिर्वते B 8 पुष्ट्रिय B o offer B pati oocurs horo 9 अनूष्मपरे B 'prajapate' 10 पुतरम् B In ·३ ३४] क्तन्त्रम् [४,२ ३-६=१५६ पुत्सारुकः । पदमिति ले (Sic) पुस्कटे' । सहोपध इति चेत् पदान्तविकारो. ऽयम् । स्पर्श ? पुसाल। ॥ १५३ ॥ नो मध्यमवर्गे ॥ ३॥ नकारो मध्यमवर्गीये प्रत्यये सकारमापद्यते । भवाश्चरति । भवा 5 ष्टिको । भवास्तत्र । द्वितीयेषु च । अघोषे । भवान् यजति । जयत्यनूष्मपरे ? भवान्त्सुराणामें । महान्त्सुराणाम् ! मध्यमवर्गीये ? भवान् पारे । ॥१५४ ॥ ऋक् चे ॥४॥ प्रार्चिकस्य द्वैध च शब्द एव सकारमापद्मते । चरश्चरस् (१६४) ततो ज्यायाश्च (श्रा स २६)॥ निवृत्तानि । श्राजिगीषन् तम् (१ ३७२) 10 जान तरन् । नियाम चित्रम् । वज्रिने चित्रम् ॥ प्रार्चिक इति ? सेतुषाम्नि (श्रा गा १,७ ११) शुक्रियसमापने (१)। ॥ १५५ ॥ कान्त् स्वे ॥ ५॥ काछब्द स्वे प्रत्यये सकारमापद्यते । कास्कान् ह जयति" । कास्कान नाशयति । कास्कान् अामन्त्रये । स्वर इति ? कान् कटे । कान् खनति" । 15 कान् पारे । कान् फलके। ॥ १५६ ॥ बुदेषसस्य व्यञ्जने ॥६॥ लुप्यते उदात्त एषसस्य इत्येषा व्यञ्जने प्रत्यये । कास्य वृषभ (१९४२) एष स्य ते (१ ५३१) एष स्य धारया सुत (१५८४) एष ब्रह्मा य ऋत्विय (१४३८) एष प्रकोशे (१५५६) स नो वसूनि (१ १६०) स त्व न (२ १६०) एते शब्दा । 1 लेपुटेक B 10 जानक्षर B 2 चेत् 13 wanting in Bur Bur has 11 वनिचित्रम् B पदविकारोऽयम् । 12 आर्चिका इति B 3 पुसात B 13 कास्कान् भोजयति B 4 भवाष्ट्रिय B 14 वनति B 5 This is wanting in Bur 15 देषस्य. c 6 जयत्यूष्मपरे B 16 उदात्त इत्येषसस्य B 7 भवास्तरुण B 17 कस्य B 8 महास्तरुणा B 18 B reads एष कटे । सकटे। सनोक. otc 9 Wwanting in B ·5 ४, ३ १-२-१६२] भूक्तन्त्रम् [३५ द्विषस्तरध्यै (१४२८)। उदात्त ? उत् सो देव (१५११)। व्यन्जने १ प्र सो अग्ने (११०८) । साम्नि चेत् सन्ध्यगीतम् । ॥१५७ ॥ नान्पूर्वः ॥७॥ नत्वपूर्वो' लुप्यते । अनेषो गन्छति । अनेषो धावति । अन्यूनातिरिक्त- मिति' वा। ॥१५८॥ य॥5॥ यकारश्च व्यञ्जने प्रत्यये लुप्यते । महान् हि ष (१ ३८१)-प्रभृतीनि । इत्थे तरादीन्य (१७) नुनासिक । श योरभि (१३३) व्यञ्जने 'अबोध्यग्नि (१७३) । ॥ १५६ ॥ रमध्ये ॥६॥ स्वरमध्ये नैगिर्यकार (सू० ११०) लुम्पति । ईनाई । इनी (१ १७६ साम) 10 तय इन्द्र० (१२४६) अग्ना याहि (१) स इन्द्र (१ ३३७) ॥ स्वरमध्ये ? अछेत्यग्नि (१४४७) पीतये (१ २६३)। वैकारिकग्रहणात् । ॥ १६० ॥ वमेके ॥ १० ॥ धकारमप्येके प्राचार्या लुम्पन्ति । हावात्रादीनि (१ १४७ b)। इति द्वितीयो दशक ॥ 15 [अथ तृतीयो दशकः] ॥१६१ ॥ अर्ध वा ॥१॥ अर्ध वा वकारयकारयोर्लुम्पन्ति । ॥ १६२ ॥ वं नैगिरुस्थे ॥२॥ वकार नैगिरुस्थे लुम्पति । अष्टा उपरि । का उपरि।ता उपरि ॥ वैराजे (१३६८) पुष्पे (१५६५) इलान्दाघे (भा गा ३५१)। पुरुषवते (पा गा ३६१) उस्थे १ ०ष्णवागहि (१३४७)। 20 1च Bur 2 नान्पूर्वो Bur 3.तिरिकेति Bur * इना इति B 5 तया b 6 वीतये B 7 Is wanting in Bur 8 Instead of पुष्पे B roads अपत्ये ·३६] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [४,३ ३-६१६६ ॥ १६३ ॥ नो तौ ॥३॥ न त्वोतौ लुप्यते तत् । अचिक्रदायाम् रहस्ये (१४६७ सामन्-हा वो तु)। 5 10 ? ॥ १६४ ॥ अत् पटादीनामितौ ॥४॥ अच्छब्द पटादीनामितौ प्रत्यये लुप्यते । पटिति । म्रसिति । द्रसिति । ॥१६५ ॥ दोऽभ्यासे ॥ ५ ॥ दकार अभ्यासे लुप्यते । पटत्पटेति । द्रसद्सेति । म्रसन्म्रसेति । ।। १६६ ॥ पृषोदरादीनाम् ॥ ६ ॥ पृषोदरादीना च दकारो लुप्यते । पृषोदरे । पृषादानम् । ॥ १६७ ॥ उद् स्थास्तम्भोः ॥७॥ उत्पूर्वयो स्थास्तम्भयोरादिलृप्यते । उत्थातां । उत्थास्यति । उत्थानिकामुत्तम्भयति । शकटमुर्तम्भिता। एवम्पूर्व ? विद्युत् स्थिता । विद्युत् स्तैम्भिता । विद्युत् स्तम्भयति । ॥१६८ ॥ तुल्ये ॥८॥ तुल्ये स्थाने लुप्यते । पाथर्वणे (श्रा गा १२६) देव वहन्ति (१ २५१) ०ष तो० (२३४६) इमास्त इन्द्र (१ १८७) वित्तादीनि । पुन पुन प्रसाश्च । तोहै (१४३४) यावाहु (१ ३६१) तुल्य इति ? सुरूष इत् (१२७७)। ॥१६६ ।। रात् स्थाजरे ॥६॥ स्वराद् द्वैधमन्तस्थाजपरे वर्णे प्रत्यये लुप्यते । न वेद्यम् (१५) 20 अबोध्यादीनि (१७३) स्वरादिति ? निवृत्त्यर्थम् । अन्तस्थाजपरे" वर्णे" ? अच्छादीनि । विश्व न्व० (स्तोम ) अपदान्त ? दुधा हु० (१ २६५)। 15 ? 1 दकारस्त्वभ्यासे B 2 उत्थिता Bur 3 उत्थानिकामुत्थम्भयति Bur * •मुत्थम्भिता Bur 5 स्थम्भिता Bur 68003 7 B reads देव वहातीषड़े 8 सुरूप नवे B 9 मन्तस्थजपरे B 10 अन्तस्थवर्णे परे जरे B 11 त्व B 12 सुदुषां तु B ·४, ४ १-४-१७५] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [३७ ॥ १७ ॥रः ॥१०॥ रेफश्च तुल्यस्थाने लुप्यते । युक्ता वन्ही र० (११४६) बहीं रशनाभिः (१५२३) वृषा हरी राजे० (१ ५६२) रपूर्वयोश्च दीर्घत्वम् ॥ इति तृतीयो दशक ॥ [ अथ चतुर्थो। दशकः ] ॥ १७१ ॥ सोष्मण ऊष्मा ॥१॥ सोष्मणश्चोष्मा तुल्यस्थाने लुप्यते। सख्य ते (१२३४) अछा नप्त्रे 5 १२१) दूत्यम् (१ ११३) अबोध्यादीनि (१ ७३) तुल्य इति ? विभावसो (१८६)। ॥ १७२ ॥ तृतीयः परगुणम् ॥२॥ तृतीय परगुणमापद्यते । वाचो व्रते (प्रा गा ३,११-२) अस्तु श्रीषद पु० (१४६१) यत् सोममें (१ ३८४) नु श्रव प्राधे । अघोष इति ? तद्वो गाय 10 (१११५) तृतीय इति ? भवान् पारे । ॥१७३ ॥ अन्त्ये ॥३॥ अन्त्ये च प्रत्यये तृतीयोऽन्त्यमेवापद्यते । उदग् । न्यग् वा (१२७६) बण महान् (१२७६) हव्यवाणे न सुमद्रथ (१४४७) व्यख्यन् महिषो दिवम् (२७२५)। ॥ १७४ ॥ दन्त्याच्छश्छम् ॥४॥ दन्त्यात् पर शकारश्छकारमापद्यते । और्वभृगुव (छुचिम्-११८) चित्र इच्छिशो (१६४) यच्छकार्सि (१२६४) यच्छितसि (१ २६६) यस्य त्यच्छम्० (१ ३६२) दिवि सम्छुक (१८३) मघवञ्छन्धि (१२७४) ॥ दन्त्या- दिति ? भनु शूर (१२५३)। 15 20 1 क्रतूरयोरी• B 2 •सोममुपव्यावाये B 3 So B 3 Bur A B does not add to me in any of those oxamples ·। 5 । ३८] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [४, ४ ५-६-१७६ ॥ १७५॥ चलमोदयमेके ॥५॥ एवमुदय शकारमेके इच्छन्ति कुर्वन्ति । नैनांचोतं विश्लोकान्त्सनशति श्मभूणि इति प्रत्ययाः (१)। ॥ १७६ ॥ तृतीयाद्धश्चतुर्थम् ॥६॥ तृतीयात्परो हकारश्चतुर्थमापद्यते । एकेषामित्यधिकारो न नैगे । वणिक् हरति । वणिग्घरति । षद हरति। षड्ढरति। त्रिष्टुप् हरति। त्रिष्टुबभरति इति । ॥१७७॥ ऊष्मा स्थानम् ॥७॥ ऊष्मा च परसंस्थानमापद्यते । दिव ककुत्पति (१२७) उषसश्चित्रमें (१४०) उष्ट्रादीनि । अग्निस्तिग्मेने (१२२) पति पृ० (१२७) निश्शशा 10 (१४१०) अग्निस्समिधा (१७३) दुष्वप्न्यम् (१ १४१) । ॥१७८ ॥ दन्त्यं मध्यमवर्गे ॥८॥ दन्त्यवृत्ति परमसंस्थानमापद्यते मध्यमवर्गीये प्रत्यये । और्वभृगु (११८)-प्रभृतीनि । पश्यन् जन्मानि (ऋ वे १,५०७) यज्जायथा (२७७७) भवान् जयति । तजयति"। चरश्चरन् (१६४ स्तोभ) सुश्चन्द्राश्चर्यादीनि 15 (२३७३-४) दन्त्यम् ' वणिक् चरति । मध्यमवर्गीये ? भवान् परे"। ॥ १७६ ॥ श्लोः ॥४॥ शकारलकारयो प्रत्यययो परस्थानमापद्यते । तच्छ्लोके । ऋक्- श्लोक" । पर्षच्छ्लोक । भवॉल्लुनातीति । १ 'गीये' it gives । वर्गे 1 So A and c मनोदय B 2 So Bur न नैगि । श्चोतयत । श्मति । श्लोक । श्वशति। श्मश्रूणि इति। प्रत्यया । B 3 परसस्थान• B 4 दिवश्चित्रम् दुष्ट्रार्दानि । B 5 न 18 wanting in B 6 पतिष्ठा B 7 After there is fu on the margin of B Thon it reads faceret 8 So A B C वर्गीये Bur At tho end of the comm B repeats मध्यमapffat, but after crossing as the correct form 9 See one 10 भृगु 1s wanting in B 11 तज्जायति B 12 पारे B 13 परसस्थान. B 14 f in all the three oxamplos B 16 ऋच्छ्लोकम् B ·5 10 ४,५ ११८५] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [३६ ॥१८०॥मो सन्ध्यः ॥१०॥ मकारश्च सन्ध्य परस्थानमापद्यते। त्वाकाष्ठा० (१२३४) व गो- जीकम् (१ ३१३) नि' घृतवन्ति रोह (१ ५३२) उदकन्नयन्तम् । अनिन्दूतम् (१३) तन्ते मदम् (१ ३८३) । सन्ध्य इति ? त्रिष्टुम् मकारे'। ॥१८१॥रणमपि स्थायाम् ॥११॥ करणमप्यन्तस्थायामापद्यते । इविं यथा (१२१४) प्र वोच यानि (श्रा स २८) धर्मरोचने (आ गा App २६-उद्य लोकान्।इमा लोकान्) प्रेष्ठ व (१५)-प्रभृतीनि । त्वा विप्रास (१४२)। ॥१८२॥ अनुस्वारमेके ॥ १२॥ अनुस्वार चैके आचार्या मन्यन्ते । प्रेष्ठ व (१५)-प्रभृतीनि । ॥१८३॥ रेफोष्मसु ॥१३॥ रेफोष्मसु अनुस्वारमापद्यते । सोम रा० (१६१) विष्णु सूर्यम् (१ ६१) जेतार हो' (१२८३) उभय ऋ० (१२६०)। ॥१८४ ॥ हि नमपरे च तत्परम् ॥१४॥ हकारे नमपरे' तत्परमापद्यते । यत्पर सहकारो भवतीति । 15 वणन्नुते । तृणम्झलति । किन्नुते" । किम् मलयति । इति चतुर्थो दशक ॥ [अथ पंचमो दशकः] ॥१८५॥ व्यवधानोऽन्त्यविकारे॥१॥ व्यवधानोऽनुस्वारो भवति अन्त्यविकारे" । अाग्नु (१२२६) चरँच । । 1 परसस्थान• B 2 निघृतव । प्रियश्चेति । उदकानयन्तम् B 3 त्रिष्टुम्मकारे B 4 य B 5 विष्ण B 67 B 7 नमकारेपरे च Bur 8 इति 18 wanting in B 9 मृण न्हुते । कृपाप्मवतीति Bur 10 Are wanting in B 11 From this up to कांस्कान् प्र. 13 omitted in B ·। . ४०] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [४,५२-६-१६० रन् (१६४ साम) काँस्कान्-प्रभृतीनाम् । अन्त्यविकारे' १ मयस्कार । त्वा काष्ठा०-(१ २३४)-प्रभृतीनाम् । रेफोष्मसु इत्यधिकार । ॥१८६ ॥ अन्त्यात्प्रथमोऽघोषे ॥२॥ अन्त्यात्पर प्रथमो व्यवधीयते घोषे प्रत्यये । प्रत्यक्शेते । प्रत्यक 5 षण्डे । प्रत्यक् सारे । गा शेते । गा षण्डे । गा साये । यानि चान्यानि । ॥१८७॥ नात् सि ॥३॥ नकारात् सि प्रत्यये तकारो व्यवधीयते । तिलान्त्सायी । भवान्त्सायी। महान्त्सायी । महान्त्समुद्र (१४२६) हरिवान्त्सुतानाम् (१ २२६) केतून्त्सम् (श्रा स २४)। ॥१८८ । टान्तमेके॥४॥ ट पूर्वरूप सिप्रत्यये तकारों व्यवधीयते । षदत्सा भोजयति । षट्तिस्व तौ । षट्तिस्वति कायिन । प्रकृत्या नैगि । ॥१८६ ॥ स सं करोतौ ॥ ५॥ स पूर्वरूप करोती प्रत्यये सकारो व्यवधीयते । सस्करोति। सस्कर्ता । 15 सस्करिष्ये" इत्युक्तम् । विशेषे च । ॥ १६० ॥ अङ्गव्यवाये चाङ्गपरः ॥ ६ ॥ अङ्गव्यवाये चानात् परो भवति सकार । सम् अकरोत् । समस्करोत् । सम् अकुरुताम् । समस्कुरुताम् । सम् अकार्षीत् । समस्कार्षीत् । सम् चिकी पति । सचिस्कीर्षति । 10 ११ 1 अविकारे प्रत्यये B मयकार० B 3 1 घोषे B No sign of अभिनिहित सन्धि 4 अक्सायो B 5 गाण्डे B 6 गा साधेया चान्यानि Bur 7 दान्तमेके Bur In comm also Bur has द् instead of ट् 8 टकारो B दकारो Bur 9 After this B. has FER Agrola 10 षदत्स्वीतम् B 11 षटूत्स्वैतिकायन B 12 सस्करिष्यति । उक्त B 13 सचिकीर्षति Bur ·THE KUPPUSWAMISASTRI RESEA TUTE MADre:-34 5 ४, ६ १-२-१९६] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [४१ ॥१६१ ॥ कृ चकारमस्वयं दृष्टे ।। ७ ॥ कृ चकारमापद्यते अस्वय दृष्टे । सचकार । सचस्कार । सचक्रतु । सचस्क्रतु' । सञ्चछ । सञ्चस्क्रु.। सञ्चके। सञ्चस्के । सञ्चक्राते । सञ्चस्काते । सञ्चक्रिरे । सञ्चस्किरे। ॥ १६२ ॥ पर्यु भूषणप्राचुर्यवाक्येषु ॥८॥ परि उप' इति पूर्वरूपे सकारो व्यवधीयते भूषणप्राचुर्यवाक्येषु । परिष्कृतम् । परिष्कृतो रथ । गोभिर्भग परिष्कृतम् ब्राह्मणमुपस्कार जल्पति। परिकृतम् । उपकृतमन्यत् । ॥ १६३॥अब मर्यादावर्चस्कयो ॥६॥ अव इति पूर्वरूप सकारो व्यवधीयते मर्यादावर्चस्कयो । अवस्कारमय 10 ब्राह्मणोऽस्मत्तो मर्यादा बधीते । वर्चस्के ? अवकरोऽन्य ॥ ॥ १६४ ॥ पार पर्वते ॥ १० ॥ पारं इति पूर्वरूप सकारो व्यवधीयते पर्वते । पारस्कर पर्वत । पार करोऽन्य । इति पञ्चमो दशक ॥ [अथ षष्ठो दशकः ] ॥ १६५ ।। अप रथे ।।१।। अप इति पूर्वरूप सकारो व्यवधीयते रथे । अपस्करो नाम रथ अपकरोऽन्य । ॥ १६६ ॥ किरतावध्यात्मम् ॥ २॥ किरतौ धातौ प्रत्यये सकारो व्यवधीयते अध्यात्मम्। अपस्किरते" अवि मजवर्षभश्च" । कस्मादध्यात्मम् ? अपकरोऽन्य। 15 20 1 चकर ABC 2 अ wanting in B 3 This is wunting in Bur 1 उपरि Bur 5 See4 6 परिष्कृतो रथो । गोभिर्भग परिष्कृत । wanting in Bur 7 अवस्कर. b ५ Omitted in Bur वर्चस्के । वर्चस्करो ऽन्य । B 9 परेति B 10 रथस्य B 11 अयस्किरते प्रविमजश्चर्षभश्च 12 B has कस्माद यात्म । भवकिरत्यन IN ·? 5 ४ 10 ४२] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [४, ६ ३-६-२०३ ॥ १६७ ॥ उपप्रती हिंसायाम् ॥ ३ ॥ उप प्रति इति पूर्वरूपे सकारो व्यवधीयते हिंसायाम् । उपस्किरस्व पासु मुष्टिना । प्रतिस्किरस्व भस्में मुष्टिना। हिंसायाम् ? उपकिर गवाम् । प्रतिकिर परिरवाम् । ॥ १६८॥ वि शकुनौ ॥४॥ वीति पूर्वरूप सकारो व्यवधीयते शकुनौ । विष्किरा नाम शकुना । विकिर इत्यन्य. । ॥१६६ ॥ कुस्तुम्बुरु जातिः॥५॥ जातिरिति ' कुतुम्बुरुं । ॥२०० ॥ आस्पदमास्थायाम् ॥६॥ भास्पदमिति सकारो व्यवधीयते श्रास्थायाम् । श्रास्पद लब्ध्वा गावो ब्राह्मणाश्च । कस्मादास्थायाम् ? कृच्छमापदमापन्ना ब्रह्मद्विष ॥ ॥२०१॥ अपरस्परं सातत्ये ॥ ७॥ अपरस्परमिति सकारो व्यवधीयते सातत्ये । अपरस्पर धावन्ति 15 भुञ्जते शेरते च । सातत्ये कस्मात् ? अपरपर" बृहि । ॥२०२॥ प्रस्कएव ऋषिः ॥८॥ प्र इति सकारो व्यवधीयते कण्व ऋषौ" । प्रकण्वोऽन्य । ॥२०३॥ गोष्पदमुदकमाने ॥६॥ गोपदमिति सकारो व्यवधीयते उदकमाने । गोष्पदोदक केदार । 20 गोपदमन्यत्" । ? 1 उपप्रती BC उपप्रतिA I ur 2 प्रती B 3 अपस्किरस्व Bur 4 भस्म Bur 5 विकिरा इत्यन्या Bur 6 B has कुस्तुम्बुरु । कुतुम्युरु । 7 कृच्छामा• B ५०परा । 9 त्मरन्ति Bur 10 अपरपद ब्रूहीति Bur 11 After this B reads प्रस्तएव ऋषि । 12 The comm 1s wanting in Burnel's odition ·४, ७ १-६२१०] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [४३ । 10 । २०४॥ अगोष्पदमनाचरिते ॥ १० ॥ अगोष्पदमिति सकारो व्यवधीयते अनाचरिते । अगोष्पदमय ब्राह्मण पानागार सेवते । अगोपदमन्यत् । इति षष्ठो दशक ॥ [अथ सप्तमो दशकः ] ॥२०५ ॥ आश्चर्यमनित्ये ॥१॥ आश्चर्यमिति सकारो व्यवधीयते अनित्ये चेत् । अाश्चर्य यदय दद्यात्'। सर्वत्रैव अनित्यम् । आचर्य बृहीति । ॥२०६॥ आस्का आस्क्रभो विस्फुलिङ्गाः ॥२॥ प्रास्का पचत वाहस इत्यानाय । आस्क्रम इवारकन्दइवास्मद्भयेन विस्फुलिङ्गा । ॥२०७॥ समास ऋतु चन्द्रे ॥३॥ समासे स शब्दो व्यवधीयते ऋतु चन्द्रे प्रत्यये । सु चन्द्र । सुश्चन्द्र (२ ३७३-सुश्चन्द्र)। पुरश्चन्द्र (२१०१०) हरिश्चन्द्र (२६५६) समासे ? सदा चन्द्राति (१२७७) कस्मादृतु ' सुचन्द्रा पौर्णमासी। ॥२०८ ॥ कास्तीराजस्तुन्दे नगरे ॥४॥ कास्तीराजेस्तुन्दे नाम नगरे । कस्मानगरे' कातीरगामिन्यजतुन्दिनी" | 15 ॥२०६॥ नदी रथस्या ॥ ५ ॥ नदी रथस्या नाम । कस्मात् ? नदी रथया। ॥ २१० ॥ मस्करो वेणु ॥६॥ मस्करो"वेणु । मकरोऽन्य 1 श्राश्रर्यपद य Bur आश्चर्य पद छ । 7 Bones before this पुरु चन्द्र । । प्राचार्य ब्रूहीति Bur हरिचन्द्रो हरिश्चन्द्रो मरुद्गण B १ श्रास्कभोविष्फुलिङ्गा Bur • भोवि.A BC 6 B has समासे यदा । चन्द्राति । 4 स्कन्द इवा 1s wanting in 10 कास्तीराज 19 wanting in Bur 5 समासे स शब्दो व्यवधीयते ऋतु चन्द्रे 11 न्यजातुन्दिनी B ०न्यजतुन्दादीनि Bur प्रत्यये I wanting in Bul 12 Is wanting in Bur 6 विसर्जनीय 18 wanting in B Bur ·४४] भूक्तन्त्रम् [४, ७ ७-१०-२१४ ॥२११॥ तस्करस्तेनः ॥७॥ तस्कर स्तेन '। तकरोऽन्य । ॥ २१२ ॥ दीर्घ भाषायां प्राप वृणोतौ संवरणे ॥८॥ दीर्घमापद्यते भाषाया प्रअप इत्येतौ शब्दौ धातौ वृणोतो प्रत्यये सव । रणे । प्रवृणुते। प्रावृणुते। अप वृणुते । अपावृणुते । सवरणे कस्मात् ' प्रवृणुते ऋत्विजम् । अपवृणुते। ॥२१३ ॥ अच्छ वदतौ ॥६॥ अच्छेत्यस्यान्तो दीर्घाभवति वदतौ प्रत्यये । अच्छ वदते । अच्छा- वदते । अच्छ वदिष्यति । अच्छा वदिष्यति । सम्प्रति च कृते चैवम् । वदते 10 कस्मात् ' आगच्छतोऽच्छ गमिष्यतीति । ॥२१४ ॥ समासे गिरौ पेषुणगोपवत्सकयवाञ्जनभञ्जनानाम् ॥ १० ॥ समासे गिरी प्रत्यये एतेषामन्तो दीर्घाभवति । पेषुण गिरि । पेपुणागिरि । गोप-गिरि । गोपागिरि । वत्सक गिरि । वत्सकागिरि । यव गिरि । यवा गिरि । अञ्जन गिरि । अञ्जनागिरि । भञ्जन गिरि । भञ्जनागिरि । इति सप्तमो दशक ॥ इत्युक्तन्त्रे चतुर्थ ' प्रपाठक । 1 ls wanting in Bur 2 So Band Bur प्रापयेते seems correct 3 अछ वदते A B अन्छ वदेते c अन्छ वदते Bur + बदते B 5 वदते Bur The correct form seems वदती वणोतो in 212 6 So A B C पेषण Bur 7 इत्युक्तन्त्रे तृतीय प्रपाठक B चतुर्थ प्रपाठक C Bur ·- [अथ पञ्चमः प्रपाठकः] [ प्रथमो दशकः] ॥२१५ ॥ कर्णस्य शृङ्गे ॥१॥ कर्णत्यस्यान्तो दीर्घाभवति शृङ्गे प्रत्यये । कर्णाङ्गे' वद्धा ।कर्ण । कर्णाङ्गे। ॥२१६ ॥ वृषस्य कपिमोदनीदर्भरवेषु ॥२॥ वृषेत्यस्यान्तो दीर्धीभवति कपिमोदनीदर्भरवेषु प्रत्ययेषु । वृष-कपि । 5 वृषाकपि (ऋ वे १०८६ १) वृष मोदनी। वृषामोदनी । वृष दर्भ । वृषादर्भ । वृष रव । वृषारव' (ऋवे १० १४६२)। ॥२१७॥ कर्णे मीहाइकुशकुण्डलोपरिष्टाध्यक्षतबाणानाम् ॥३॥ कर्णेच प्रत्यये एतेषामन्तोदी(भवति । प्लीह कर्णी । प्लीहा कर्णी । अड्कुश- कर्णी । अड्कुशाकर्णी । कुण्डल कर्णी । कुण्डलाकी । उपरिष्ट कर्णी । 10 उपरिष्टाकर्णी। अधि की। अधीकर्णी । अक्षत कर्णी । अक्षताकर्णी । बाण की । बाणाकर्णी। ॥ २१८ ॥ विश्वस्य नरवसुराट्सु ॥४॥ विश्वेत्यस्यान्तो दीर्घाभवति नरवसुरासु प्रत्ययेषु । विश्व-नर. । विश्वानर (१ ३६४) विश्व-वसु । विश्वावसु (ऋ वे १० १३५ ५) विश्व-राद् ।15 विश्वाराद् । 1 कर्णो Bur 2 कर्णस्य भो B 3 Is wanting in B * In RV 101463 00ours वृषारवाय ·5 7 10 । ४६] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [५, १ ५-१०-२२४ ॥२१६ ।। मित्र ऋषौ ॥५॥ मित्रे च प्रत्यये यत् प्रकृतम् ऋषौ दीर्घाभवति । विश्व मित्र । विश्वा मित्र (ऋ वे ३५३ ६) कस्मादृषौ ? विश्वमित्र एव । ॥२२० ॥श्ववित्पदवराहकर्णदन्तदंष्ट्रेष्वसंप्रति चेत् ॥६॥ एतेषु च प्रत्ययेषु यत्प्रकृत श्व इत्यस्यान्तो दीर्घाभवति । श्व वित् । श्वावित्। वित्पद । श्वपद । श्वापद (ऋवे १० १६६) पदवराह । श्व वराह । श्वावराह । वराहकर्ण । श्वकर्ण । श्वाकर्ण । कर्णदन्त । श्वदन्त । श्यादन्त । दन्तदष्ट्र । श्वदष्ट्र । श्वादष्ट्र । ॥ २२१ ॥ सर्वनानो दृशि ॥७॥ सर्वनानामन्तो दीर्घाभवति दृशि प्रत्यये । कि दृशी। कीदृशी । य दृशी । याशी । इ दशी। ईदृशी (२ २०४-शे) अस्म दृशी । अस्मादृशी । युष्म दृशी। युष्मादृशी । ईदृशेष्विति वा । ॥ २२२ ॥ उक्ष वेहती ॥८॥ उक्षेत्यस्यान्तो दीर्धीभवति वेहती प्रत्यये । उक्ष वहती। उक्षावेहती। वह 15 तीति ? उतवेहा चैव । ॥ २२३ ॥ उप नखे ॥६॥ उपेत्यस्यान्तो दीर्घाभवति नख प्रत्यये । उप नख । उपानखो रोग । कस्माद्रोग ? उपनख छिन्धीति । ॥२२४ ॥ साङ्गेनं च समागमे ॥१०॥ सागसमागमे च प्रत्यये पूर्वपदान्तो दीर्धीभवति' । हस्त हस्ति । हस्ता हस्ति।मुख मुखि । मुखामुखि । केश केशि। केशाकेशि । दण्ड दण्डि । दण्डादाण्ड । 20 इति प्रथमो दशक । 1 विसर्जनीय 1s wanting in all examples cited in B 2 वेहति B C So everywhere 3 Is wanting in B At the end of the list of examples the 27 and the comm aro given Bur has पूर्ववदन्तो instead of पूर्व 4 In all examples Bur reads long ई ·५, २ १-५-२२६ ] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [४७ [अथ द्वितीयो दशकः ] 5 ? ॥२२५॥ अष्ट ॥१॥ अष्टेत्यस्यान्तो दीर्धीभवति । अष्टापदम् (ऋ वे ११६४ ४१-अष्टापदी) अष्टाकपालम् (ऐत ब्रा ११) अष्टाशफा पशव (तल उप ब्रा ११ १) अष्टाभ्यो हिंकरोति इति च ताण्डीये (२११)। ॥२२६ ॥ प्राक् शताचे ॥२॥ यत् प्रकृतमष्टान्तो दीर्घाभवति । अष्ट दश । अष्टादश । अष्ट विंशति । अष्टाविंशति । अष्ट त्रिंशत् । अष्टात्रिंशन् । प्राक्शतादिति किम् ? अष्टशतम् । अष्टसहस्रम् । श्राभावमेके द्विशब्दस्य । ॥ २२७॥ पदगोयुक्तदन्तशालीये च तीर्थे ॥३॥ एतेषु च प्रत्ययेषु यत् प्रकृतमष्टान्तो दीर्धीभवति । अष्टपदम्।अष्टापदम्। 10 पदगोयुक्त । अष्ट गोयुक्तम् । अष्टागोयुक्तम् । गोयुक्तदन्तम् । अष्ट-दन्तम् । अष्टा दन्तम् । दन्तशालीयम् । अष्ट शालीयम् । अष्टाशालीय च तीर्थम् । ॥२२८॥ नाम्नां षाडि ॥४॥ नासामन्तो दीर्घाभवति पाई इति प्रत्यये । यव षाद।यवापाट् । जल षाद। जलाषाद् । तुर पाद । तुराषाद् (२३०४)। ॥ २२६ ॥ वने व्यक्षरप्रभृतीनां प्राच्यभरतसंज्ञा चेत् ॥ ५ ॥ नानामन्तो दीर्घाभवति। औलुपवनम् । औलुपावनम् । मिश्रकवनम् । मिश्रकावनम् । रेहकवनम् । रेहकावनम् । सुन्दरवनम् । सुन्दरावनम् । कश्यप- वनम् । कश्यपावनम् । व्यतरप्रभृतीनामन्यथा। आम्रवनम् । आश्रवणम् । इक्षु वणम् । शरवणम् । शीतवनम् । असप्रतीति ? न्यग्रोधवनम् । पनसवनम् । 20 15 1 प्राक्शतात् (च wanting in) BA C 2 Before this B has प्राक्शताच 3 B reads षाडि प्रत्यये 4 Before this B reads वने त्र्यक्षरप्रम- तीना 5 वणम् B 6 वणम् B 7 Is wanting w B 8 सीत. B ·? ? ४८] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [५,२६-१०-२३४ प्राच्यभरतसक्षा चेत् ? चित्ररथवनम् । शतशारववनम् । कटाहपंतनीयकपि- लोलान्ताना गुरुलघुतुल्यानामिति वाच्यम् । ॥ २३० ।। उपसर्गस्य धातावेकाक्षरे नामभूते ॥ ६ ॥ उपसर्गस्यान्तो दीर्घाभवति धातावेकाक्षरे नामभूते प्रत्यये । उपनत् । 5 उपानत् । उपवृत् । उपावृत् । प्रवृदं । प्रावृदं । निवृत् । नीवृत् । ॥ २३१ ॥ यक्षरे गुर्वादावकाराङ्गे ॥ ७॥ धक्षरे धातौ प्रत्यये दीर्घाभवति गुर्वादावकाराङ्गे । निघत । नीवर्त्त । अभिवर्त्त । अभीवर्त्त । परिवर्त्त । परीवर्त्त । परिवाप । परीवाप । परि वार । परीवार । प्रकार । प्राकार । उपसर्गान्त इति ? घोषवाह । मापवाह । 10 तिलवाह । धातौ ? सुशाल । विशाल । उपशाल । यक्षरे १ परिवाहक परिचारक । परिवापक । गुर्वादौ ? प्रतर । प्रचर । प्रकर' । अकाराने ? विहारी। विशाली । विनाशी ' असप्रतीति । प्रतिकर्ष । उपकर्ष । अपकर्ष । ।। २३२ ।। प्र दन्त्यादौ सादसूदसङ्गसेनेषु ।। ८ ॥ एतेषु च प्रत्ययेषु यत् प्रकृत प्रेत्यस्यान्तो दीर्धीभवति । प्रसाद । 15 प्रासाद । प्रसूद । प्रासूद । प्रसङ्ग । प्रासङ्ग । प्रसेन । प्रासेन । निवर्तन्ते । प्रदीपप्रसेकप्रदानप्रवाहा । ॥ २३३ ॥ न सत्त्वांवे लुडिते च ॥३॥ न सत्त्वभावे लुडिते च दीर्घाभवति । प्रासादो देवतानाम् । प्रासादो गुरूणाम् । प्रसाद सुराया । प्रसादो मृत्तिकाया । ।। २३४ ॥ निष्ठायामित् तादौ ।। १० ।। निष्ठायामिकारो दीर्घाभवति तकारादौ धातौ प्रत्यये । नीत्ता वीत्ता । परीत्ता । निष्ठायाम् ? निदीयने । विदीयते । परिदीयते । 20 ? 1 वतीय Bur 2 प्रवत् प्रावत् Bur 3 परिवास परीवाम B 4 परिहारक B 5 This is wanting in Burnels edition 6 Yo ABC Bur bas TITATIZ ·५, ३ १-२३६] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [४६ ॥ २३५॥ उचे काशे दर्शने ॥ ११ ॥ उ-व कारस्य दीर्धीभवति काशे दर्शने प्रत्यये । अवनुकाशते । अवनू- काशते । प्रतिकाशते । प्रतीकाशते राज्यामेतत् । दर्शने कस्मात् १ प्रतिकाशा गच्छानुकाशानिति वा। इति द्वितीयो दशक ॥ [ अथ तृतीयो दशकः ] ॥ २३६ ॥ युग्मं घु ॥१॥ युग्म लघु दीर्घाभवति । पादस्येत्यधिकार । एवायसि (१२३२) त्रिरेतस्याम् । एवा हि वीर (१ ३८५) सिमायाम् (पा गा परि० ४ महा- मानी ३) पुरीषपदेषु (एवा हि १२) च । अर्चा देवा० (१८८) योजा न्विन्द्र (१४१५) बोधा स्तो० (२८७६) येना नवग्वा (२२८६) तेना पवस्वान्धसा' (१४७०) अधा बने (२ ११२६) अधा स्म (२५६८) रक्षा ण (१२५) 10 शिक्षा ण (१ २५१) युवा हि (१२५) वेत्था हि (१ ३६६) पिबा सु पूर्णम् पिया सुतस्य (१२३६) पिबा सोमम् (१२२६) (१ १२४) भवा नः सधमाद्ये (१२६०) स्वा च न (१४३) मत्स्वा न इन्द्र (१२३६) तिष्ठा देव (१) अच्छी नप्त्रे (१ २१) अच्छा वीरम् (१५६) अच्छा कोशम् (१५१४) अच्छा वहीं रशनाभि " (१५२३) देवम् अच्छा (१ ५६३) बास्पान्ति' (१ २०६-घा) 15 हता मखम् (१५५३) युग्ममिति' मघव छन्धि (१२७४) लध्विति ? क्षिती०--(१ २६२)-प्रभृतीनाम् । नित्यसयोगे वाभीष्टयों प्रहणम् ॥ । 1 Yo C 37 a Bui aud B aifa Bur Anv 3 %B युग्म 1s wantius in Burnel 4 सिमाद्यायाम् B 5 बोधा नो B 6 येना पावक B 7 अन्धसा 19 manting in B 8 प्रथा स्वथा B 9 30 B Burnel reads दिष्टा । 10 b does not add example ।। रशनाभि is wanting in ob 12 Is wanting in B 13 B reads अवां मघव 14 भीष्या• B ·। ५०] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [५, ३ २-५-२४० ॥२३७॥ उ घोघुनि घोषादिः ॥२॥ उकारस्य द्वैध घोषादिरेष दीर्घाभवति लघो परो लघुनि प्रत्यये । युग्म लघु (सू २३६) इत्यधिकार । तमू शुचिम् (श्रा स २३) अरुषस्य नू मह (श्रा स २५) पुरू चिदर्णवान् (१ ३४०) पुरू नृषूत (१२७६)॥ निवृ. 5 तानि । अनु मातरम् । श्रा सीदतु-(१५३५)-प्रभृतीनाम् । मधु दुघे (१ ३७८) समासत्वात् । असुरिणम् ॥ घोषादिग्त्यिधिकारो वर्षिण्यनुपसर्गो न । ॥ २३८॥३॥३॥ इकारस्य द्वैध घोषादेरेव दीर्घाभवति लघो परो लघुनि प्रत्यये । युग्म लघु (सू २३६) इत्यधिकार । प्राभाव पादादौ' च । श्रुधी हवम् (१ ३४६) 10 व्यश्नुही मदम् (११६१) चर्षणीधृ० (१३७४) यदी वहन्ति (१३५६) शृणुही गिर (२५६४) कृणही न इन्द्र (१४५५) तक्षद् यदी (१५३७) ॥ अधि यदस्मिन् (१ ५३१) उपसर्गो न ॥ निवृत्तानि । दिवि सछुक (१८३) दिवि सद्भः (१४६७) हव्य वहसि (१४६) गौर्धयति (११४६) मित्रो नयति (१११८) मयि वर्च (श्रा स १८)। ॥ २३६ ॥ सोष्मि दन्त्ये क्षे॥४॥ सोष्मीकारो दन्त्येऽक्षरे पदे प्रत्यये दीर्घाभवति । विद्धी न्वा३स्य (१ १३२) कृधी न (१४७६ श्रा स ४१) अभी षत (१३०६) अभी षु ण (२ ३४) अभी नो वा० (१५४९) सोष्मीति ? दिवि सद् अक्षरे (१८३) अभि- देवाँ अयास्य (ऋ वे ६४४ १) अभि सोमास (१५१८) दन्त्ये ? अभि यो 20 धीरम् (१२६५) अभि त्यम् (१३७६) नित्यसयोगे। ॥२४०॥ कएल्ये ॥५॥ कण्ठिनि दन्त्ये दीर्घाभवति । अभीषत (१३०१) अभीष्याम 15 1 घोषादेरि• Bur 2 वर्षाण्यनुपसर्गो न B It has both the Short and long matras in अनु •ण्यनू. Bur 3 पाहाव पदादौ B 4 After this B roads great a radi मदम् 5 गौर्दयति B 6 सोध्मिकारो Bur 7 अभीषद B 8 अयास्य 18 wanting in B अमीषद B ·3 ५, ३ ६-६-२४४] भूक्तन्त्रम् [५१ (१३३६) अभी नव ते (१५५०) दन्त्ये अमि वत्सम् (२५४१) करव्ये ? अभि त्रिपृष्ठम् (१ ५२८)। ॥२४१॥ व्यादेः॥६॥ तालव्यादरक्षरस्य दन्त्ये प्रत्यये द्वैध कण्ठ्ये च दीर्घाभवति । अक्षरे वा पदे प्रत्यये । अच्छा नप्त्रे (१ २१) योजान्विन्द्र (१४१५) निवृत्तानि । अच्छ' । सुता (१५६६) दश धीरस्य (१५३८).दिव ययं दि० (१३४८) अर्चादे परत्वाद समाने वा। ॥ २४२॥ क्षमवि ॥७॥ अक्षरस्य पदस्य द्वैधमक्षरे वा परे प्रत्यये दीर्घाभवति अवकारे । युयो तना न (१ ३६७) पर ऊ त एकम् (१ ६५) अद्या दे० (१४०) सुनीथो घा 10 (१ २०६) गावश्चिद्धा स० (१४०४) घा तम् (१४२४) अद्या म० (१ ३२५) प्रातू न इन्द्र तुमन्तम् (१ १६७) प्रातून इन्द्र वृत्रहन् (१ १८१) एषु (१७) शग्ध्यू ३ षु (१ २५३) पर्युषु (१४२८) तमूषु (१ ३३२) अवकारे ? त्यमु व (१ ३५७) विदा गातुम् (महानाम्नी १) देवा यक्षम् (१५६) प्र न इन्दो (१ ५०६) युग्ममित्यधिकार । अतप्ततनून (१ ५६५) । ॥२४३ ॥ तृतीयम् ।। ८॥ तृतीय चाक्षरे पदे प्रत्यये दीर्धीभवति । ईडिष्वा हि (११०३) ऊर्ध्व ऊषु (१५७) इममूषु (१२८) स्तुष ऊषु(१ ३६०) वय घा ते (१ २३०) अत्रा- ह गो (२ २६५) हस्वादित्यधिकार । एतमु त्यम् (२४३१ ६२१) लध्वित्यधि कार । उक्थ च न (१ २२५) अयमु ते (१ १८३)भाष्यम् । ॥ २४४॥ यतौ ॥३॥ यतौ च दी/भवति । तृतीयमित्यधिकार "यावयों' (१२६६) व्यावया 15 20 1 भाछ B 2 यार्चादे B 3 विस. 18 wanting in B 4 80 ABC Burnel roads are 5 भयातम् । 6 गाधतु B 7 तृतीये B 8 .कारो B दीर्धीभवत Bur 10 तृतीयमित्युक्तेऽधि• B 11 यावता B ·5 ५२] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [५,४ १-२-२४७ (१२६८) ओ गन्ता (१४०१) श्रा सोता (१५८०) पर्वता (१) प्रा त्वेता (११६४) ॥ निवृत्तानि । कृणोतने (१ ३६५) युयोतने (१ ३६७) सुनोत (१२८५) सोम हिनोत (१५३५) सचेत (१ १६) आ धावत (१ १२३) दानाय (२ ६६८) भगायें (१४२७) इस्वादित्यधिकार । ॥ २४५ ॥ ष्मिणोव॑िवतः ॥१०॥ द्विवत परस्य वैधम् ऊष्मिणो प्रत्यययों दीर्घाभवति । युग्मम् (सू २३६) यता (सू० २४४)-वित्यधिकार । गूर्धया (१ १०६) द्रावया (१३०८) महता (वे १ ३२५) श्रा जुहोता (१६३) भरता (१ ६८) अर्चता (१ ३६२) तो षिञ्चता (१५१२) ॥ निवृत्तानि । तृतीयेन (१६५) या इन्द्र (१२५४) अर 10 गमाय (१ ३५२) वियन्त्यसुराय (१५५१) सम्मील्ये (श्रा गा १,७,४, आच्छा) श्रा धावत (२ ६७६) सोम हिनोत (१५३५) अमीमदन्त (१४१५) असिष्य दन्त (१५६३) स्थविराय तक्षु (१३२२) ह्रस्वादित्यधिकार । वृषभा सुते (११६१) सोष्मिविशेषात् । जनयत (१ ७२) भाष्यम् । इति तृतीयो दशक ॥ [अथ चतुर्थो दशकः] ॥ २४६ ॥णि ॥१॥ णकारिणि पदे दीर्घाभवति । इन्द्रमित् स्तोता (१ २४२) (अभि)मदता (१ ३७६) सप्तानूषत (१५७७) ॥ ष्मिणो" १ श्रादिद्वन्द्धे । ॥२४७ ॥ नीचस्य च प्रथमे ॥२॥ नीचस्य पदस्य यक्षरस्य द्वैध वर्गप्रथमे प्रत्यये दीर्घाभवति । वहाँ त्वम् (१४०) भजा त्वम् । पूर्णमिन्द्र (योजा) (१ ४२४) निवृत्तानि । उब्ज रथमिव । 15 1 श्रा as wanting in B 2 7 18 wanting in B 3 Alter this Breads अधत tall इन्द्रेण । 9 पादे B 10 ष्मिणोरादिद्वदे (2) Bur 11 So Burnel नीचस्य तु प्रथमे A B (' 12वदा B 4 Bhas भगाय च 5 After this B hus यतावित्य यक्त 6 Bur has ऊधिमण्योरप्रत्ययो 7 But bore महता (वजेण) 18 2nstrumen ·11382 THE KIUPPije RES, JIE MADISAS À ५, ४ ३-७-२५२] वक्तन्त्रम् [५३ यहा इव (१७३) इन्द्रमई (१५६६) जराबोध (ऋवे १२७ १०) वजहस्त (आ स १) समासत्वात् । युग्मम् (सू २३६)-ण शब्दिन्य (सू २४६)-क्षरे वेत्य- धिकार. । इन्द्रम् (इत्) स्तोता (१२४२) आ तू (१ १६७)। ॥२४८॥ म ॥३॥ मशब्दो दीर्घाभवति । सिमा पुरू (१ २७६) जनिमा विवक्ति (१५२४) 5 सुषुमो हि ते (१ १६१) लघुमध्ये । ब्रह्म जशादीनि (१ ३२१) । ॥२४६ ॥ तम् ॥४॥ तलिङ्गाया चर्चि मशब्दो दीर्घाभवति । ररिमा ते (१ १२४) सह्यामा त्वो० (१ ३१६) जगृह्मा ते (१३१७) विद्या (१३१७) ऋध्यामा ते (१४३४) तलिङ्गायाम् ? वनेम तत् (१ १२८) सोम सुवीर्यम् (१५०१) धाम वि राजति 10 (श्रा स ४८) नीचस्य निवृत्ति ॥ निवृत्तानि । ब्रह्म जमानम् (१ ३२१) ब्रह्म चकार (१४१०) तमु हुवे (२६८) साम गायत (१ ३८८) धाम गोनाम् (१५३४) नाम गोनाम् (२२६)। ॥ २५० ॥ इमम् ॥ ५॥ इमलिझाया चर्चि मशब्दो दीर्धीभवति । द्विरिम स्तोमायाम् (१६६) 15 सोमपर्वभि (११८०) समासत्वात् । ॥ २५१ ॥ तेः ॥६॥ ते पर च वर्गप्रथमे' प्रत्यये दीर्धीभवति । तेना पवस्व (१४७०) ॥ निवृ तानि । तेन नूनम् (१ ११६) तेन मासम् । ॥ २५२ ॥ अयुस्त्य ॥ ७॥ पादान्तस्य द्वैध स्त्यपदमेव दीर्घाभवति । मृज्यमान सुहस्त्या (१५१७) निवृत्तमन्यत् । 20 १ 1 इन्द्रमर्च B Bur has इन्द्रमच्छ } सुमाहिते B 3 50 Bur and B Benfey stext सह्याम 4 B reads वनेम तत्सोमनस. । 5 हुवेम B 6 Bhas स्वासगा. 7 वर्ग 1s wanting in B 8 So B ते Bur १ भयू स्त्य A B प्रयु स ( 10 पदान्तस्य Bur 11 सुहस्त्य B ·5 ५४]] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [५,५ १-३-२५८ ॥२५३ ॥ बाइ वर्तनीः ॥८॥ पिबा इमम् (१ १६१) त वर्तनी ' (१ ३७२) अन्यत् स्वरे । निवृत्तपदा- न्तश्च । पिबेदस्य । व्यञ्जनान्तम् । ॥ २५४॥ यम ॥8॥ य परस्य व पदस्य दीर्घाभवति । श्रा हर्यता० (१५५१) ताक्ष्य मिहा (१३३२) लघुमध्ये । त्वया (ह स्विर युजा) वयम् (१ ४०३)। ॥२५५॥ प्रा चु सोष्मिणि ॥ १० ॥ प्रादिन्यामृचि सोष्मिणि पदे दीर्धीभवति । प्रदेवमछा* (१५६३) प्र धन्वा (१५६७) च ना (२१०७७) प्रायासु (२४६५१) सोष्मिण्यपदान्ते इत्य 10 धिकार । प्र सेनानी (१५३३)-रित्यधिकारस्य विशेष । इति चतुर्थो दशक ॥ [अथ पञ्चमो दशकः ] ॥२५६॥ परस्य ॥१॥ प्रकार प्रतिषेधो नेमौ दीर्घाभवत' । इन्द्र वाजेषु (श्रा स १४) इन्द्र सुतेषु (१३८१) तत्र पूषा (११४८) कस्य नूनम् (१ ३४) न तस्य मायया (१.१०४) पूर्णमिन्द्र । श्रा जभारा (प्रास १५) विशेषात्तु । ।। २५७ ॥ रसन्धिः ॥२॥ स्वरसन्धि पद न दीर्घाभवति । श्रोत रथया (११८६) न आ गहि (ऋ वे ११३६ ६) सन् यदि वेह (१४५०) तो न्विन्द्र (१३८७) न केवल स्वरसन्धिा त्वेता (११६४) आ तू (११८१) ॥ ॥ २५८ ॥ उपसर्गः ॥३॥ उपसर्गच न दीर्घाभवति । प्र उप अप" अवश्रा पर वि नि सु उत् 15 20 1 वर्तिनि A BC 2 वर्तिनि Bc 3 is omitted in Bur 4 B has सपर्यत instead of अाहर्यत 5 So Benfey देवमच्छा Bur देवमन्छ B 680 B इकारस्तु Bur 7 'दीर्घाभवति (91c) Bur 8 So Bur and B रसन्धे A 9 केवलस्वर• Bur 10 उपसर्गात् A 11 Bur 12 परा B ·५, ५ ४-८-२६३] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [५५ अभि प्रति परि अपि अति अघि अनु निःदुः समित्येतानि पदानि । अभी- षतादीनाम् (१ ३०६) इकारस्य विशेष । चित् स्वित् छित्' इत् वाक् है हे हि हुम् एवमादयो निपाता। ॥ २५६ ॥ध॥४॥ घशब्दश्च न दीर्घाभवति । यदद्य (२ ६६६) अद्य नो दे० (११४१) निवृ. 5 तानि। अद्या देवान् (१४०) अद्या ममार (१३२५) वह्निमद्या (१४६८) अस्मा- कमद्य (१२४१) प्राप्तस्य। ॥ २६० ॥ मि तृतीयी ॥५॥ मकारे प्रत्यये वर्गहतीयी न दीर्घाभवति । मृड महाँ (१२३) इन्द्रो अजम० (१२००) वैराजे (१ ३६८--इन्द्र म०) सिमासु (महानाम्नी ३-पिब म०) 10 मकारे ? पिबादीनि (१२३६) वर्गतृतीयी इति ? योधा सु (२२७६) । ॥ २६१ ॥ अनुषगादिः ॥ ६ ॥ अनुषगादिर्दी/भवति । हव्यम् भानुषक् (१८२) बर्हिरानुषक् । आदि- रिति ? यदि वीरो अनुष्यादग्निम् (१८२)। ॥२६२॥अवः ॥ ७॥ 15 अवादिर्दी/भवति । वेन प्राव (१ ३२१) अवरिति ? महि-त्रीणायाम् (११९२-अवरस्तु) इखाखरितमिति था। ॥ २६३ ॥ हखात् पुरुषः॥८॥ हखात् पर पुरुषादिर्धीभवति । ततो ज्यायाश्च पूरु० (आ स ३६) विराज' (मास ३७) ॥ निवृत्तानि । सहस्रशी० (आ स ३३) त्रिपाद् ज० 20 (भा स ३४)। 1 अवि Bur 2 औ Bur 3 चित् Bur 4हहह B 5 प्राप्तस्याय Bur 6 Is wanting in Bur 7 भवादि ( no विसर्जनीय n) Bur 8 See7 9वीराज Bur ·? ५६] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [५, ६ १-३-२६८ ॥२६४॥ द्विस्पर्शः ॥३॥ द्विर्भवति स्पर्श । हखात् पर इत्यधिकार । तदावृणादीनि (११३८) हखादिति ? यदिन्द्र प्राक् (१ २७६) स्पर्श इति ? यष्कादीनि । ॥२६५॥रेऽन्त्योप्रतिषेधे ॥ १० ॥ खरे प्रत्यये वैधमन्त्य एव द्विर्भवति । अप्रतिषेधे पदान्त । ऋष्यव्रते' (आ ग्र ३६ १०-भुडिति मधवनिन्द्र) प्रत्यड्डदेषि (श्रा स ५२) गए पत्र । हसनत्र' । अजगन्नप (१५३) क्रीडादीनि (१५८४-गीडन्नू०) अप्रतिषेधे अनानत ' (११४२) अनाभयिन् (१ १२४) । 5 । इति पञ्चमो दशक ॥ [अथ षष्ठो दशकः ] 10 ॥ २६६ ।। हुम् ॥१॥ हुम् शब्दस्य मकार खरे प्रत्यये कामति । हुम्मा-दीनि (स्तोभ) अन्यो मकारो निवृत्त । तमिन्द्रम् (१४६०) त्यमु वादीनि (१ १७०) । ॥ २६७ ॥ छः ॥२॥ छश्च द्विर्भवति । अहिच्छत्रा । कर्णाच्छिद्रम्। सुच्छिन्नम्। परिच्छिन्नम् । समील्ये'चतुर्थे (श्रा न १,७,४-आच्छा) द्वखादिति ? तये छी । वरुणे छम् 15 (१२५५) । ॥ २६८ ॥ माभ्याम् ॥३॥ माशब्दाकाराभ्या व परश्छो' द्विर्भवति । मान्छादयमानम् ' । माच्छे 8 B never adds 7 9 ममील्य B 1 द्वि स्पर्श Bur परे B 3 शयस्य व्रते B 4 After this B reads वसत्र 5 After this B reads भद्रति । गलप । 10 छम् B 11 A omits छ 12 परस्थो Burnel 13 मा छदयानम् B 6 श्रना न तस्य B 7 छ BCश्च Burnel ·५, ७ ४-७-२७२] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [५७ दयमानम्' । माच्छिन्नम् । माच्छिदता । माच्छिन्नोति । अच्छादीनि । माशब्दा काराभ्यामिति ? कालीछायाया शाला छाद्यते । समा छाया । ॥ २६६ ।। रात् सण् ॥४॥ स्वरात् सयोगादि कामति । प्र महिष्ठा० (११०७) अभिप्रियाणि (१ ५५४) अभिप्रव (१२३५) स्वरादिति ? त्वमिन्द्र (१ १२०) प्रतुद्र० (१५२३)। 5 ॥ २७० ॥रं हात् ॥ ५॥ पर तत् रेफहकाराभ्या कामति । न तौ । विहृतम् (१ २४४) आजुह्वा नस्य (१४६५) दुदुहिरे (१५६०) अर्कादीनि (१ १६८ इत्यादि)। ॥ २७१ ॥ ऊष्मा व्यञ्जने ॥६॥ ऊष्मणोद्वैध व्यञ्जने प्रत्यये द्विर्भवति । वार्ष्यायणीपुत्र' (श्रा ब्रा २ 10 २३ १६) वाष्र्यो' ॥ निवृत्तानि । हर्षते (१५३३) वर्षति । दर्शनीयो अर्हति । बर्हि स्पर्शने । कार्षापणम्" । स्पर्शे ? कवय" (श्रा स ३६) । ॥ २७२ ॥ दे नो मूर्धन्यम् ॥ ७ ॥ एकपदे रेफे"नकारो"मूर्धन्यमापद्यते। शरणे (१६७) चरणम(ऋवे ९ ११३ ६) गिरीणाम् (१ १४३) तरणिम् (१ २०४) अप्रहणम् (१ ३५७) वरे- 15 एयम् (१४८) हिरण्या० (२७७५) हिरण्यय (१५११) सुप्रपाणा (श्रा स ४२)॥ एकपदे १ रेवतीर्न (१ १५३) वारवन्तम् (१ १७) वरोन (२७३५) ०प्यन्' वजिन् (१३०२) अक्षरान्तप्रतिषेध । पूर्विनेष्ठाम् (१ ३५३) समासत्वात्। 1 मा छेदयानम् B 10 कार्षापणा B 2 मा छिनोति Bur छिनत्ति seems correct 11 कय B 3 शति छायन्ते B 12 रेफानकारो B 4 गादिष्कामति B 13 शराणा B 5 प्रगो B 14 चराणा B 6 But Ar Br has वार्षायणी वार्ष्यायणि 15 तरणि B (पुष om 1n) B 16 अप्रहरणम् B 7 पाष्र्या B 17 Is wanting in B 8 हर्पति । 18 वर ते B 9 Bur misconstrues दर्शनीयोहति and 19 परन् B givos a quory mark ·। ? ५८] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [५,७ १-२७६ ॥ २७३ ॥ ऋषाभ्याम् ॥६॥ ऋकारषकाराभ्या च प्ररो नकारो मूर्धन्यमापद्यते । होतृणाम् (श वे ८ १०२ १०) मातृणाम् । पितृणाम् (ऋवे १ १०६ ३) अपो वृणान (१ ५३६) मानुषाणाम् (ऋ वे १८४२) अक्षण (१ ३३६) पोषिणाम् (१ ५८) 5 क्षपमाण (१३०५) ईषमाणा (१ ३२४) सु ष्वाणास (१३१६) सोम उ वाण (१५१५)। ॥२७४ ॥ नों व ॥१३॥ न शब्दश्च वलिगायामृचि मूर्धन्यमापद्यते । ऊर्ध्व ऊ षु ण (१५७) गव्यो षु ण (११८६) रक्षा ण (१२४) शिक्षा ण (१२५६) मिमिक्ष ण (१ 10 ५१६) वलिङ्गायाम् ? सुनेषु न । वाजेषु न । (श्रा स १४) त्वष्टा न (१२६६) मध्यमवेतत्वात् । ॥ २७५ ॥ न मध्यमवर्गीयैर्व्यवेतं लशसैश्च ॥ १४ ॥ न मध्यमवर्गीयैर्व्यवेतम् । लशसैश्च न गम्यते। क्षितीनाम् (१ २६२) दक्ष साधन (१४७४) राजानम् (१ ६६) राधानाम् । रथानाम् (११४६) रशनाभि 15 (१५२३) ०स्य रसिन (१ २३६) हारियोजनम् (१ ४२४) अरिष्टनेमि पृतना० (१ ३३२) ऋजुनीती (१२८) कृणोतन (१ ३६५) हिरण्यनेमय (१४१७) शाकरलोमायनम्' । प्रतापनम् । प्रमोचनम् । विष्वक्सेन । हर।। वृषलेन" । लोलाक्षदर्शनादर्शन । दर्शनीयेन। इति षष्ठो दशक ॥ [ अथ सप्तमो दशकः] ॥ २७६ । काभ्यां सो वैभक्तः॥१॥ ककाररेफाभ्या पर सकारो गम्यते वैभक्त । ऋतु । वणितु"। वातु । 8 सिरसि न B 2 अपा रणान B 9 योरियो B 3 नोऽव B 10 शारलोमायन B 4 शब्दोऽव लिगा. B 11 Bur reads प्रवृषा instead of वृषलेन 5 अवलिझायाम् B 12 Bur reads लोलिक्षदर्शनादर्शनदर्शनीयेन् 6 मध्यमरेतत्वात् B B omits la 7 This is wanting 10 Bur 13 After this B has मृतु । दिक्षु । 20 1 षाम्या Bur ·५,७ २-५२८०] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [५६ गीर्षु (१ १७०) धूर्षु (षड्विं २३) चतुषु । पूर्षु । ककाररेफाभ्यामिति ? महत्सु (१ ४११) वैभक्त इति ? वाक्सूक्तम्'। ॥ २७७ ॥ उगि ॥२॥ - २० उगि च प्रत्यये गम्यते । बूं गा यता--३३३ उ (१२५५ अ) पू गा ३ या ३ ता ३ (१,२५५ श्रा) उगि इति ? स्ये त्वामिद्धि (१ २३४-- त्वाम् इद् धि। सातौ)। राजसु गो--३३ । हो--३३३३३३ (१२५५ इ) दीर्घश्रवणात्' । ॥२७८ ॥ अन्ताक्षरात् ॥३॥ अन्ताक्षराञ्च परो गम्यते। ब्राह्मणेषु । एषु। तेषु । केषु । अन्ताक्षरादिति ? यासु। तासु । कासु। ॥ २७६ ।। उपसर्गात् ॥ ४॥ उपसर्गाश्च परो गम्यते । इन्द्राय सोम (सु पुत -- ५६१) प्रा त्वेता नि (११६४) अच्छा व इन्द्रम् (१ ३७५) श्रा सोता (१५८०) सोम उ प्वा० (१५१५) प्रते (२ ३३६) स खा स्व-(१ ३६०-स्तुष ऊ षु १५६८-नि षीदत) अभीषत- प्रातीयौ (१३०६,२२३) उपसर्गादिति" १ श्रा नो (१४३) अभि त्यम् (१ ३७६) उच्चा ते (१ ४६७) उदीरत' (१४१४) अन्ताक्षरादिति ? 15 अपसेधत १३६७) स्वराधमुषाद्विशेष " समासो 10 १५ वा। ॥ २८०॥राम् ण सु॥५॥ रेफाकारमकारिणि पदे द्वैध णसुलिङ्ग एव पादे सूर्धन्यमापद्यते । अभी २ 1 वाक्सूत्रम् Bur 2 च 19 wanting am Bur 3 B reads गौ यता ३१ उ । धू गोयाता१ । उगीतिश्चेति त्वामिया रोजसु गौ २३ । हो' ३१२३४ । दर्घिग्रहणात् । 4 येषु B 5 B reads नम्पते instead of गम्यते is wanting in B 7 B reads प्र तु सखा स्वभीषतादीनि 8 उ षू Bur 9 अभीषत् bur 10 1s wintan, m B 11 P has अनुपसर्गा० and ,1189 3 belon the line 12 Is wantinym B 13 अन्त 19 omitted in Bur 14 अपसे धातु. B 15 स्वरायमुछाद्विशेषसमासोवा B 16 रेफरकारिणि Bur 17 पदे B 6 नि ·5 10 ६०] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [५,७ ६-६-२८४ प्याम (१ ३३६) । निवृत्तानि।अपनिधम्' (१ ३६७) विजुतय ' (१४५३) विसे नाभि । परि स्वान (१४७५) अधि सान (१५२६) त्रि (दि)। यास्वादि- रिति' (२ १०८६) वा न निवर्त्यम् । ॥२८१॥ उद आये ॥६॥ उस्थात् पर श्राद्ये पादे मूर्धन्यमापद्यते । एह्य षु (१७) मो षु त्वा (१ २८४) यदि वीर (१८२) कुष्ठ (१ ३०५) परीतोषि० (१५१२) सोम उष्वा० (१ ५१५) श्राद्ये पादे १ करवेषु। कश्यपपुच्छे (श्रा गा ५२ २०-चक्षुर् अ०) उ त्वा मदन्तु (१ १६४) इन्द्र सुतेषु । मकारिणीत्यधिकार'। उस्थादिति ? अयमु ते (१ १८३)। ॥ २८२॥ ताज्जागते ॥७॥ अक्षरात् पदाजागते पादों मूर्धन्यमापद्यते । महाँ हि ष (१३८१) स्तुष ऊ षु । शग्ध्यूषु (१२५३) जागते ? उपो नु स सपर्यन् (१ १६६) । ब्रह्माणि स । साक्षरादतरमित्यधिकार ॥ २८३॥ सन्ध्यः ॥८॥ सन्ध्यश्चान्ताक्षरात् परो गम्यते । चतुष्पात् (१ ३६७) ज्योतिष्कृणोति (१३०३) वास्तोष्पते (१२७५) गोष्पदे (स्तोम ) जमदग्निवते" (श्रा गा ४ २ १५-ज्योतिष्प०) परिष्कृतम् (१४८७) सन्ध्य इति ? पूर्वे (१ ५५०) । अन्ताक्षरादिति ? दिवस्पायु (१ ३६)। ॥ २८४ ॥ दन्त्ये स्पर्शे ॥६॥ दन्त्ये प्रत्यये द्वैध स्पर्श एव पादे मूर्धन्यमापद्यते । न किष्टम् (१२४३) १ 15 1 अतिसुधो B 2 विस्तयो B 3 अधात्वादिरिति B स्वादि इति Bur 4 So B Bur reads कण्ठेषु and says 'this name is not known' 5 अमकारिणीत्यधिकार B 6 I, wanting in B 7 Is wanting in B 8 Is wanting in B 9 Is wanting in Bur 10 अक्षरादक्षर• B 11 Bur refers to Ar Gr III 4 5 Nether jyotusma . (his reading) ज्योतिष्प० o is found thoro nor ·५, ७ १०-११-२८७] ऋक्तन्त्रम् [६१ न किष्ट्वानु० (२ ३००) योनिष्ट इन्द्र (१३१४) गोभिष्टे' (ऋ वे ६ १०४ ४) दुष्टरम् (१ २६६) सुष्टुत ' (२८५०) महानानीषु (२-श्राभिष्ट्रमभिष्टिभि ) विभोष्ट इन्द्र (१३६६) निवृत्तानि। अग्नि समिधा (१७) अस्थु सुतेषु (१ ३४६) यावाहुः स० (१३६) चवो सुत (१४६०) गृहपतिस्त्वम् (१६१) सेतुषानि (श्रा न १, ९ -सेतूस्तर) चतुरनुगाने (श्रा प्र २ ७ २२-२५-तेभिस्तेज 5 श्राप) विष्णोते (श्रा प्र ३,८-शोचिस्तपोहर)। पादमध्यस्येत्यधिकार । ॥२८५॥ द्विवति परे ॥१०॥ द्विवति पदे द्वैध पकारपर एव पादे मूर्धन्यमापद्यते । अग्निष्टपति (स्तोभ )।धनुष्टन्वन्ति (१५११) ॥ निवृत्तानि । शिशोस्तस्याह्न । सुवीरामि स्त० (१ १०८) सजूस्त० (१ ३७०) ०त गीर्भि (१७४)। ॥२८६॥षाद्दन्त्यः॥११॥ षात् परो दन्त्यो मूर्धन्यमापद्यते । कुष्ठ (१३०५) धृष्णुहि' (१४१३) नकिष्टवादीनि (२ ३००)। 10 - इति सप्तमो दशक ॥ ॥२८७॥ स्वरोऽनन्त्यः ॥ (सामतन्त्रम् १.१.१)॥ इति पञ्चम प्रपाठक ॥ ॥ इति शाकटायनोक्लमृकतन्त्रव्याकरण सपूर्णम्" ॥ ] नकिष्टदा B 2 गोभिष्ट Bur Cf RV 104210 3 स्वसुष्टम B 4 परे B 5 वकारपर० Bur 6 Is wanting in Bur 11 So Bur चतुथ । इति छन्दोगम्याकरण समा- HA A The colophon in B runs thus- सप्तमो दशक । चतुर्थ प्रपाठक समाप्त । छन्दोगशाखायामृक्तन्त्राभिधानव्याकरण- वृत्ति समाप्ता । ऋक्तत्रव्याकरण शाक टायनादिभि कृतम्। सूत्राणा सख्या २८.। अशीत्यधिकशतद्वय सूत्राणि । After this begins सामतन्त्रम् (with the comm ), of which only one page ॥ 7 Bur gives प्रसो the oponing of the stanza also 8 इन्द्र गीर्भिस्तवि B 9 कुष्ठो B 10 अधिष्णुभि B proserved in B

·No text on this page.

·अकारादिक्रमेण- सूत्रादीनां सूची

·No text on this page.

·APPENDIX I INDEX TO THE SOTRAS अच्छ वदते अकालो द्वस्व 40 प्रव 262 उद आये 281 अक्षरम् 46 अव वा 81 उदात्तमुत् 51 अगोष्पदमनाचरिते 204 अव मर्यादा 193 उद् स्थास्तम्भो 167 अजव्यवाये० 190 अविशेषस्थानी० 11 उन्नीचे मे 54 अनेच 127 अष्ट 225 उप नखे 223 213 असुखे खे 135 उपप्रती हिंसायाम् 197 प्राडि 143 प्रस्थनामिनी 94 उपसर्ग 105 258 अत् पटादीनामितौ 164 अस्थाद्यम् 117 उपसर्गस्य धातावे अनुषगादि 261 आणि 71 काक्षरे 230 अनुस्वारमे 182 प्राचार्धमात्रा स्वरि उपसर्गात् 279 अनुस्वारीच 23 तम् 53 उपसर्गाहेष्यौ 97 अन्तस्थाम् 109 भारत. 114 उभयथा भुवो० 124 अन्ताक्षरात् 278 प्राविरादीना करोतौ 141 उरसि विसर्जनीयो वा 3 अन्त्यात्प्रथमोऽघोषे 186 आश्चर्यमनित्ये 205 उव काशे 235 अन्त्ये 173 प्रास्का० 206 ऊष्मा व्यञ्जने 271 अन्त्योऽनुनासिका 17 पास्पदमास्थायाम् 200 ऊष्मा स्थानम् 177 195 238 ऋक्चे 154 अपरस्पर सातत्ये 201 इमम् 250 ऋति 85 अभिनिधान 21 इव ऋ 144 ऋमप्येके 102 अयवावे न्यूने 76 ईन परे 75 प्रोजि 86 252 उक्ष वेहती 222 प्रोभूत च 70 256 उगि 277 भोम्म 118 अर्धमणु 41 उघोघुनि 237 मोष्टये वो पू 9 161 उत्तमा घोषाः 14 भो 73 अपरथे भयुस्त्य अर्ध वा ·2 29 न वृद्ध रे किरतावध्यात्मम् कुस्तुम्बुरु जाति 138 नि ख्यातौ च कराठ्ये 240 ति. 110 नवा 80 100 कर्णस्य शृङ्गे 215 तिश्च त्रिकला वा 68 कणे प्लीहा० 217 तिस्रो वृद्धम् 4+ नसत्त्वभावे लुडिते च233 कान्त्स्वे 155 तुल्ये 168 नात् सि 187 कास्तीराज 208 तृतीय परगुणम् 172 नान् पूर्व 157 कि-इन्वी-उत् 88 तृतीयम् 243 नामिनोऽघोषे सामध्ये किकिडाकारोहन्वाम्10 तृतीयाद्धश्चतुर्थम् 176 130 196 ते 251 नाना पाडि 228 199 तोर्धेस्तेम् 58 नासिकाया यग्गनु कृ चकारमस्वय दृष्टे 191 तोषि 121 स्वारनासिक्या 12 कौतस्कुतादीनाम् 128 त्रि 133 काभ्या सो वैभक्त 276 त्रिमात्र सामसु 39 नित्यविरते द्विमात्रम् 37 केयहीन्द्रनीति 57 तो णि 77 निष्ठायाम् 234 क्षमति 242 त्वे 82 नीचमुश्चात् 55 क्षाज्जागते 282 दन्ते स्ला. 7 नीचस्य चु 247 136 दन्त्य मध्यमवर्गीये 178 नृतोऽपवोऽति 78 गाथासु 38 दन्त्याच्छश्छम् 174 नैगिनोभयथा 59 49 दन्त्ये स्पर्श 284 नोतो 163 गो 69 नो मध्यमवर्गे 153 गोष्पदमुदकमाने 203 टान्तमेके 188 नोऽव 274 घम् 50 दीर्घ भाषायाम् 212 नोष्मपरे 151 134 नौ 120 घान्नो डि० 112 दे नो मूर्धन्यम् 272 न्यायेनौदवजि 60 148 दोऽभ्यासे 165 पञ्चकलाविलम्बिता 259 याम् 33 चतुष्कला मध्यमायाम् 32 द्रुताया मात्रा 31 पदगोयुक्तदन्तशा- चलयोदयमेके 175 द्वि 137 लीये च तीर्थे 227 छश्च 267 द्वि स्पर्श 264 जिह्वामूले 4 द्विवति 62 व्यदन्त्यपरे 147 वे दीर्घम् 43 पर्युपरिभूषणप्राचु- 192 णि 246 द्वथक्षरे तम् 249 द्वयर्थे 74 पर्वणि सद्यस्काला 129 तस्करस्तेन 249 नदी रथस्या 209 पार पर्वते 194 61 न मध्यमवर्गीयैः 275 पि तस्मादुधश्रुतीनि 146 तालुनि श्च्ये 5 न घन्यास स्पणे 152 गुरु सणि 79 दमु घाद्ग्रा 113 दु घेण 139 घ 285 पदमेकोच्चम् 231 र्यवाक्येषु 72 पु ·3 142 र हात् 63 रप्रकृति 255 रषाभ्याम् 96 रात् सण 26 280 मिणो 145 सयोगात् 119 सन्ध्य म हिं युक 270 राट्सु 218 पूर्ण इति करणाभ्यस्ते 84 र विसर्जनीयोघोषे 115 वृषस्य कपि० 216 पृषोदरादीनाम् 166 रणमपि स्थायाम् 181 वैस्वयें स्वरस्त्रिमात्र 45 प्रकृति 116 व्यञ्जन पूर्वस्यान्त प्र दन्त्यादी० 232 रमध्ये 159 स्वरम् 20 प्रस्कराव ऋषि 202 रमृस्थमस्वे 107 व्यञ्जने 22 प्राक् शताश्च 226 रलावव्यपरी 24 व्यवधानोऽन्त्यवि- प्रा चु सोष्मिणि 273 कारे 185 बहि 140 रसन्धि 257 व्यादे 241 बा इ वर्तनी 253 राजने च 123 शकन्धुकादीनाम् 87 भाषाया णीपग्यो 269 श्लो 179 भूयान् 48 रात् स्थाजरे 169 श्ववित्पदवराह० 220 भे स्वे 150 रादिग्मन्यत् षाद्दन्त्य 286 248 राम्ण सु 245 म क्रियायाम् 104 रिखिडि 56 मस्करो वेणु 210 रे 283 90 रेऽन्त्योऽप्रतिषधे 265 सन्ध्यमयवायावम् 111 मात्रा 42 रेफो मूले वा 8 सन्ध्य द्विवर्णम् 95 मात्रार्धमात्रावा 28 रेफोमसु 30 मान् विकार 64 रौ घम् 93 सन्ध्य 98 माभ्याम् 83 सप्रकृतिर्मासे 125 103 लुबुदेषसस्य व्यञ्जने 156 सनिकर्ष सहिता 67 1 वत्सतरार्दानामृणि 106 समास ऋतु चन्द्रे 207 मि तृतीयी 260 व नैगिरूस्थे 162 समासे 6599 मित्र ऋषी 219 वने त्र्यक्षर० 229 समासे गिरौ० 214 मिथुनाख्य वा 131 वमेके 160 सयुक् सण 27 3+ सर्वनाम्नो दृशि 221 180 वर्ति +7 सस करोतो 189 149 158 वान्त्सन्धि 52 सस्थान 92 यती 244 विकार 91 साङ्गेन च समागमे 224 यम 254 विग्रहे च 132 साक्षर पदान्तोऽव यश्वातिशय 126 विभक्तिलोप 66 सित 18 युग्म घु 236 विरामे मात्रा 36 सोष्मण ऊष्मा 171 19 वि शकुनौ 198 सोष्मि दन्त्ये क्षे 239 र स्पर्श स्वे 25 183 सन्ध्याद्यश्च 268 लुबन्य मासे घम् । मासे यथा दृष्ट मूर्धनि षटौ 6 वर्णान्तर परमाणु मो सन्ध्य युग्मा सोमाण 170 विश्वस्य नृवसु ·4 287 हुम् 217 अप 26 अस्वे 195,212 श्रा 201 प्राधा स्पर्श गस्य 13 हा. कण्ठे 2 हो रा स्वोरु 122 स्मिन् व्रज्मन्यम् 89 हान्तस्था 15 ह्रस्वमृचि 101 स्वरयोरर्धमात्रा 35 हिनमपरे च तत्परम् 184 हस्वमेके 108 स्वरोऽनन्त्य 266 हस्वात्पुरुष 263 APPENDIX II WORD INDEX TO THE SUTRAS মক্কায় 231 अन्तस्वरम् 20 असप्रति 220 मकाल 40 अन्ताक्षरात् 278 असुख 135 अक्षत 217 अन्पूर्व 157 अस्थनामिनी 94 अक्षरम् 46 अन्त्यविकारे 185 प्रस्थात् 117 अगोष्पदम् 204 अन्य 83 अस्वय दृष्टे 191 अघोषे 130, 186 अन्यत् 107 अङ्कुश 71, 114 अलपर 190 अपरस्परम् 53 श्राव्यवाये 190 अपि प्राधे 102,181 281 अले 127 अप्रतिषेधे 265 आविरादीनाम् 141 अच्छ 213 अभिनिधान 206 अजस्तुन्द 208 अभ्यासे 165 प्रारका 206 अजन 214 अम्न 124 श्राश्चर्यम् 205 अडि 143 अयवावे 76 प्रास्थायाम् 200 श्रण 41 प्रयवायावम् 111 प्रास्पदम् 200 अत् 2525 238 अतिशये 126 परस्य 256 इत् 234 अधि 217 अर्धम् 84 अध्यात्मम् 196 अर्धमात्रा 28,35,53 इतौ 164 287 प्रव 250 अनाचरिते 204 अवम् 144 अनित्ये 205 प्रव 124 262 अनुनासिक 17 अवसित 18 उ 237 अनुषगादि 261 प्रवि 242 उक्ष 222 अनुस्वार 12, 23, 182 अविशेषस्थानी 11 उगि 277 17, 173, अव्यपरी 24 उबधुतीनि 61 186, 265 म 55 अन्तस्थाम् 109 मष्ट 51, 54, 156 21 श्रास्कभ 104 अयुम् 41,160 इति 57, 193 इमम् 81 इव 19, 75 69, 118 उपात् 225 उत् ·5 9 गोयुक्त 60 प्रा - 216 घु 236, 84 घोषा 3 कान् 151 कि इन् 10 चतु उत्तमा 14 प्रोम् 118 गोप 214 उद् 167, 281 अोष्ठधे 227 उदकमाने 203 औ 73 गोष्पदम् 203 उदात्तम् 51 औदबाज 113 192, 197, 223 कण्ठे 2 घ 50, 93, 103, 112, उपरिष्ट '217 कराव्ये 240 113, 148 उपसर्ग 97, 105, 258, कपि 237 230, 279 करणाभ्यस्ते 14, 115,237 उभयथा 59, 124 करोतो 141, 189 च 23, 29, 30, 70, उव 235 कर्ण 215, 217, 220 72, 123, 126, 127, उरसि 155 132, 136, 184, 190, उस्थे 162 काशे 235 224, 226, 227, 233, ऊधः 124 कास्तीर 208 275 ऊष्मपरे 88 चकारम् 191 ऊष्मा 171, 177, 271 किकिडाकार 139 उद्देष्यो 97 किरतो 196 चतुर्थम् 176 144 कुण्डल 217 चतुष्कला 32 207 कुस्तुम्बुरु 207 ऋचि 101 क 175 ऋणि 106 हकमो 125 247,255 ऋति 85, 103 कृ 154 म् 102 कौतस्कुतादीनाम् 128 चेत् 220, 229 ऋषाभ्याम् 273 कम्ब्यादौ 174,267 ऋषि 202, 219 काभ्याम् 282 स्थम् 107 क्रियायाम् 199 एकवचने 19 केय 8 एकाक्षरे 230 क्ष 239, 242 282 ज्मन् यम् 89 एके 102, 108,160,175, स्विडि 188 182, 188 खे 135 व्यदन्त्यपरे 147 एकोयम् 62 ख्याती 136 डि 112 एषसस्य 156 गाथासु 280 पोजि 86 गिरी 148 श्रोतो 71,77,246 प्रोदयम् 175 गुर्वादौ 231 णीपरयो 96 मोभूतम् 70 गो 184 154, 199 चन्द्रे 191 चलम् 8 चे 127 छ 276 जागते 104 जाति 57 जिह्वामूले 145 टान्तम् 38 ण 214 ण 49 णि 163 गुरु 79 तत्परम् ·6 5 द्विवर्णम् 44 यक्षरे 231 परम् 7+ परमाणु . 233,275 पर्वते 39, 208 पुम् 209 पुर 249 दुतायाम् 31 न्यूने 76 तस्कर 211 द्विः 137,264 पटादीनाम् 164 तस्मात् 61 द्विमात्रम् 37 पञ्चकला 33 तादौ 234 द्विवत् 245,285 पद 62,220,227 तालुनि 95 पदान्ता 18 ति 29, 110, 251 द्वे 43 परगुणम् 172 तिन 98 तीर्थे 227 द्वयर्थ 34 तुल्ये 168 धातौ 230 परि 192 तृतीय 172, 176, 243 68,72 75,80,100 परे 285 तृतीयी 260 151, 157 163 पर्वणि 129 तोर्धे 58 194 तोषि 121 न 112,153,272,274 पार 194 त्रि 138 223 पि 146 त्रिकला 29 नगरे 152 त्रिमात्र 45 नदी 142 त्रो 77 नमपरे 184 ज्यक्षरप्रभृतीनाम् 229 पुरुष 263 नर 218 पूर्ण 84 82 187 पूर्वस्य स्ला नात् 20 7 नामभूते 230 पृषोदरादीनाम् 166 165 नामिन 130 पेषुण 214 7, 220, 227 228 प्र 212,232 12 प्रकृति 63 दन्त्यादौ 12 प्रति 197 69 नि निगार 220 11 प्रस्कण्व 202 दर्भ नित्यविरते 255 दर्शने 226 दीर्घम् 54,55, 247 प्राचुर्यवाक्य 192 दु 229 रशि 221 नृतोऽप 78 प्रेष्यार्थ 97 1 नैगि 59, 162 प्लीहा 217 120 बहि 140 259 न्यायेन 253 त्वे he . दन्त्य 174, 178, 239, नाम्नाम् 284, 286 नासिकायाम् 232 नासिक्या 133 प्रथम 46,247 REMEEEEE 37 प्रा 234 प्राक् 216 235 निष्ठायाम् 43,212 नीच 134 नीव 57 प्राच्य 272 नौ 60 बार ·7 217 युक 229 युग्मा 192 रक्त 150 रणम् 32 रमध्ये 24 विरामे 210 रव बाण 90 वचस्क 193 भजन 214 युग्मम् 236 वर्णान्तरम् 34 भरत 16 वर्तनी 253 भाषायाम् 96 र 26,68,93,107,115, वर्ति 47 भुव 124 119, 169,170,265 वसु 218 भूयान् 48 269,270 वा 3,8,28,29,80,81 भूषण 114 100, 131, 161 मे 181 वान् 52 म 104,248 रथस्या 207 वि 198 180 रथे 195 विकार 64,91 मध्यमवर्ग 153,178,275 रप्रकृति 116 विग्रहे 132 मध्यमायाम् 159 विभक्तिलोप 66 मर्यादा 193 रलो 36 मस्कर 216 विलम्बितायाम् 33 महुम् 90 रसन्धि 257 विश्वस्य 218 मात्रा 28,31,36,42 रादि 26 विसर्जनीय 3, 112,115 मान् 64 राट 218 विस्फुलिका 206 मान्तस्थी 150 राजने 123 वी उत् 88 माभ्याम् 268 राम् 280 वृणोतो 212 मासे 1,103,125 रि 145 वृद्धम् मि 260 रेफ 8 वृषस्य 216 मित्र 219 रेफोष्मसु 183 वेणु 210 मिथुनाख्ये 131 र्गस्य 13 वेहती 222 मूर्धनि 6 लशसै 275 वैभक्त 276 मूर्धन्यम् 83,156 वैस्वयें 45 मूले 8 लुडिते 233 वोऽक्ति 78 मे 54 व 9 मोदती 216 वत्सक 214 व्यञ्जन 20, 22, 156,271 126,149,158 वत्सतरादि 185 यतो 244 वदतौ 275 यथा 229 व्यादे 241 यम् 117 घन्वा 72 शकन्धुकादीनाम् 87 यम 75 शकुनौ 198 यव 160,162 शतात् 225 यवोहिषु 220 शालीय 227 +4,68 272 लुप् 274 वो पू 106 व्यवधान 213 व्यवेतम् 1 बने 12,254 वपरे 214 घम् 112 धराह ·8 56 स्थानम् 212 स्थायाम् 67 स्पर्श #tilstrup 221 स्मिन् व 92 स्वर ने 215 सनिकर्ष. 67 स्थाजरे 169 श्च्ये 5 सयोगात् 177 श्लो. 179 सवरणे 181 श्ववित् 220 सस्वाद 11 स्थास्तम्भो. 167 षटौ 6 सहिता 13, 25, 152 षाडि 228 सयुक् 27 264, 284 षात् 286 सर्वनाम्न 89 ष्मिणो 245 सस्थान 35, 45,287 स 18 स्वस्तिम् 53 224 स्खे 25, 150, 155 स 201 स्वोरु 122 सक्षा 176 सण 27, 49, 269 सामर्थ्य 98, 105, 130 हन्वाम् 10 सत्त्वभावे 233 सामसु 2 सद्यस्काला 129 सि 15 सन्धि 52 सु 184 सन्ध्यम् 94, 95, 98, सूद 57 111, 180, 283 सेन 197 सन्ध्याद्य 30 सोमण 171 हुम् 266 सप्रकृति 125 सोष्मिन् 239, 255 होरा 122 सम् 125 स्तेन 211 इख 40 101, 108,263 समागमे 224 स्तेम् 270 समासे 65,99,207,214 स्त्य 252 189 साक्षर 276 सालेन 232 सातत्ये 229 साद 232 ह 39 हा 187 हान्तस्था 280 हि 232 हीन्द्र 232 हिंसायाम् 58 हात् APPENDIX III References to the rc of the S V in the Commentary (The rc in each Samhita are numbered consecutively ) I PORVARCIKAM . Rc Sutra 1 18, 25, 38, 54, 55, 61, 62, 65, 111, 159 2 112 3 48, 180 Rc Sutra Rc Sūtra 4 49 158, 242, 281, 5 76, 119, 169, 284 181, 182 9 112 6 24, 76, 117 11 76 7 76, 77,111,117, 13 76 ·9 143, 15 92, 110 61 284 105 24 17 1, 55, 272 62 87 106 56 18 174, 178, 63 147, 245 107 85, 269 19 244 64 73, 111, 119,108 156, 285 20 143 147 154, 174,178,109 1, 245 21 171, 236, 241 185 113 171 22 177 65 242, 245 114 147 23 112, 260 66 250 115 172 24 236, 274 69 275 116 251 25 168, 236 72 245 11784 27 23, 115, 144, 73 56, 67, 109, 158, 118 1,76 177 169, 171,177,119 22 28 23, 243 247 120 269 33 158 74 285 121 22 34 1, 256 75 82, 117 122 1 35 76, 84 771 123 22, 244 36 54, 56 78 144 124 236, 249, 265 38 82 79 1, 25, 115 125 52 39 1,177,242,247, 82 1, 261, 281 126 20 259 83 45,174,238,239 128 56, 109, 249 41 116 85 116 129 52, 94 116, 181 86 171 132 56, 239 43 236, 279 8790 133 46 238 88 236 134 146 4789 90 110 146 138 20, 116, 264 48 147, 272 91 183 139 147 49 77, 93 92 71 141 1, 116, 177, 259 50 116 95 146 142 156, 265 5261 97 21, 112, 272 143 272 53 1,76, 265 98 21, 24, 245 144 56 21,95,117,236, 9990 147 52, 110, 160 242 101 25 148 256 57 243, 274 102 143, 145 149 170, 238, 275 58 273 103 1, 243 152 146 59 93 104 256 153 272 42 116, 1 1 ·10 154 149 219 1, 58 274 174, 236 155 55 220 1 275 23, 283 158 21 223 1, 279 276 20, 112, 114, 160 25 225 243 117, 173 161 238, 245 226 118, 187 277 112,168, 207 164 244, 257,279 228 21,71, 116 278 19 165 1 229 112, 185, 236 279 1, 20, 24,173, 167 242, 247 230 243 237, 248, 264 170 266, 276 232 230 281 1, 19, 23, 74 176 159 233 54,61,77, 150 283 1, 183 177 70, 110 234 69,180, 185,277 284 281 178 70 235 90, 269 285 244 180 250 236 1, 22 290 93, 183 181 242, 257 237 118 291 24, 93 183 243, 281 239 58,236, 260,275 292 112 186 257, 274 241 146, 259 293 159 187 168 242 246, 247 294 147 188 1, 116 243 284 295 1, 169 190 71, 156 244 116, 270 296 174 191 55, 248, 253 248 147 298 76, 146, 244 192 116, 124, 262 249 159 299 274, 284 193 1, 116 253 56,174,242,282 302 272 194 281 254 24, 245 303 1, 143,144,283 196 52, 282 255 1 267, 277 304 76 198 270 258 305 69,72,76, 273, 200 260 259 236, 274 286 2011 260 236 30724 203 25, 88 262 71, 236, 275 308 245 204 272 263 76 309 68, 239, 240, 206 147, 148, 236,264 174 258, 279 242 265 239 312 146 210 116 266 244 313 1, 25, 180 214 181 271 52 57 314 284 217 144 272 69, 111 315 112, 116 218 238, 275 273 115 316 249, 273 1 281, ·11 1 317 249 365 119 408 76, 93, 154 318 1 366 284 409 1 320 95 367 146, 383 410 177, 249 321 1, 116,124,248, 370 117, 279, 285 411 68, 76, 93, 115, 249, 262 372 154, 253 276 322 245 373 412 54 323 1, 112 374 1, 238 413286 324 25, 171, 273 375 279 414 279 325 242, 259 376 239, 246,279 415 56,236, 241,245 326 19 378 1, 84, 237 416 143, 145 328 149 379 74, 94 417 27,116,147,275 329 49 380 22 419 112 331 1, 116, 124 381 112,158, 256,423 1 332 242, 254,275 282 424 22,148,149, 335 1 382 69 242, 247, 275 336 1, 240, 280 383 180 427 244 337 89, 159 384 172 428 109, 156, 242 339 1, 95, 273 385 236 429 187 340 237 387 52, 257 434 1, 168, 249 341 119 388 25, 249 438 156 345 54 390 243, 279 447 159, 173 346 149, 238 392 174 448 116 347 68, 111, 162 393 147 450 77, 257 348 1, 52, 241 395 244, 275 453 280 349 284 396 115, 116, 236 455 238 352 245 397 242, 244, 279,460 266 353 1, 272 280 461 119, 172 354 1 398 162, 260 464 116 356 238 400 54 465 270 357 242, 272 401 244 466 78, 116 359 86, 95 402 467 238, 279 360 -1 403 254 468 55, 90 361 73,84,111, 168, 404 242 470 22 236, 251 284 405 86 473 1 362 245 406 57, 93 474 275 112, 1 ·12 146 1 475 1, 28 533 112, 255, 271 580 244,279 47761 534 249 582 67 479 239 535 56, 237,244,584 90, 112, 115, 481 90, 147 245 156, 265 482 68 537 238 585 74, 116 483 1 538 93, 241 485 76 539 24, 238, 273 486 1, 48 545 61 II Uttararcıkam 487 283 546 68 489 61 549 239 29 249 490 61, 284 550 240, 283 34 239 494 117 551 1, 245, 254, 64 1 497 163 285 771 498 259 553 236 98 249 501 249 554 1. 269 10294 505 55 556 85, 156 104 1 509 242 557 70, 147 109 510 22, 133 558 160 156 511 68,71,156 272 559 180 156 512 71, 112, 116,560 1, 270 204 221 121, 245, 281 561 279 227 147 513 54, 55 562 170 236 279 514 236 563 1, 236, 245,249 144 515 273, 279, 281 255 265 243 516 112 564 110, 147 279 26 517 252 565 162, 242 289 236 518 239 566 241247 300 284, 628 519 78, 146 274 567 255 301 143 523 170,236,269,568 279 304 228 075 570 346 168 524 56, 148, 248, 571 112 373 178, 207 528 240 572 35, 68 389 143 529 120, 280 576 21 431 243 531 146, 156 577 246 441 94 532 1,76, 180 579 147 465 255 1 } ·17382 13 116, 124, 146, 147, 169, 266, 283, 285 Aranyagana 15 1, 541 240 568 236 594 238 621 243 655 20, 112 659 207 668 244 676 245 683 192 699 259 725 116, 173 726 23 735 272 741 56 753 55 773 74 775 272 777 178 850 1, 284 879 236 1002 57 1010 207 1050 1 1072 255 1076 120 1089 280 1093 93 1126 236 1150 112 1209 27 4 93 5 88 6 95 14 256, 274 256 18 1, 238 19 1,93 21 112 2258, 127 23 20, 149, 237 24 112, 187 25 237 26 154 28 281 33 263 34 1, 263 35 76, 83 36 113, 263 37 263 39 271 41 118, 239 42 1, 101, 272 44 25 46 147 2014 2 9-168 6, 12-148 7, 4-245 267 7, 10-284 7, 11-154 II 7, 14-17-284 III 1, 1-2-172 1, 4-113 1, 9-10-11 4-150 3, 7-284 3, 5-150, 283 4, 5-150, 283 4, 10-10 5, 1-162 5, 6-150 5, 11-11 6, 1-162 8, 5-150 8, 10-149, 281 Appendix 2, 9-113, 181 2, 10-150 3, 5-150 3, 10-116 Rahasyagāna 116-277 47 1 48 249 51 143 52 20, 265 56 130 III Aranyaka Sam hita Mahanamni verses 58 236, 242, 260, 284 Stobhas ss 1, 24, 49, 90, 186, 247 ·14 APPENDIX IV References to the verses of the RV in the Commentary II - 112 . 27, 10 32,5 50, 7 219 112 247 245 178 273 273 272 149 257 225 112 41, 2 III 53,9 59,8 IV 36, 5 44, 1 VIII 102, 10 IX 104, 4 284 113,9 272 X 16,6 220 86, 1, 216 218 146, 2, 216 84,2 109,3 113,9 125, 1 139,6 41 184, 2 135, 5, 76 239 164, 273 APPENDIX V 1, 1, 1, 8,5, 1 References to other works in the Commentary (a) Pañcavimśabrahmanam (d) Talavaharopanısad br 2, 1,1 225 225 7, 7, 1, 2 46 (e) Samavidhanabrahmanam 13 46 2, 5, 1, 24, 1,6 124 (f) Drihyāyanasūtram (b) Sadvimsabrahmanam 112 1, 1, 38 205 2,3, (g) (Amnaya) 276 (c) Aitareyabrahmanam 1, 1, 225 21, 1, - APPENDIX VI Index to the melodies referred to in the Commentary अङ्गिरसा व्रतद्वितीय150 इलान्द 162 धर्मरोचन 113, 181 पाथर्वण 168 ऋष्यव्रत 265 चतुरनुगान 284 प्रादित्यवत 93 कराव 281 जमदग्निवत 150,283 इन्द्रस्य च सजय 112 कश्यपपुच्छ 149,281 देववत 117, 150 ·15 90, 117, 245,267 1 पञ्चनिधन 149 वाघ्न 117, 123 सम्मील्य पतिलिङ्गे कीत्ये हृदये150 विष्णोर्वत 284 परिधि 150 वैराज 162, 260 सार्पराक्षी पुरीषपद 236 शुक्रियसमापन 154 सिमा पुरुषव्रत 1, 162 श्यैत 90 सेतुषाम पुष्प 162 सत्रस्यर्द्धि 113 वाचोवत 172 सप्तह 148 260 154, 284 APPENDIX VII Index to the proper names in the Sutras औदवाजि 60 (एके) 102, 108, 160, 175, नैगि 59, 162 182, 188 Index to the proper names referred to in the Commentary औदवजि 60 नैगि 59, 162, 176 नकुलमुख (प्राचार्य) 90 APPENDIX VIII Index to the Ganas referred to in the Satras वत्सतरादि 106 प्राविरादि कौतस्कुतादि 141 128 पटादि पृषोदरादि 164 166

·No text on this page.

·NOTES is the PL PL 1–2 075- Speech Speech is a series of 1--6 The om,gion of Upadhmaniya sounds caused by expelling air sooms accidontal from the lun, throu,h differently 1–7 uHTET JIEHE ZEHT shaped positions of the throat and तत्त्रपु निषिन्यते Locative preferable mouth 2--1 वर्णाना व्यक्तिर्भवति According to वायु प्रकृतिम् Air Olloin of sound Cf RP XIII 13 with the grammarians and the Mima msakas the sound-Sphota is eter Uvata's comm, VPr 1 79, TPr nal Our organs do not properly II 2, Panınıyasıhs. 6 Weber Ind Stud IV pp 350 351 For the produce it, but their action brings it to the cognizance of the senses, fact that all is the origin of sound cf Page, Hunan Speech pp 4 11 as the action of digging brings water to li_ht CF Trıbhasyarat श्वासो नाद Cf VPr 17 na on 1Pr II 1 See also U vata 1-4 # partia CF PŚchsr 9 on RPs XII 14 According to जिह्वाग्रणेर्यमाणस्य The tongue Bhartrhari the individual sounds plıys most important part in artı crento an ite pression in the hu culation It is a musculul organ man mind, which is thus able to const int in volumo, but hohly perceive the word Spota the real and very rapidly variable in form ly indivisible word Cf Vakya 1-5 Cf pipiero with Uvatus note padiya 1 8586 Kaiyata on Bosidos, position, there are four Panini 1 1 73, handabhatta, Vai other determining elements which vakranabhusanasara Mandana cause the differentiation of artı misra, Sphotosiddhi culate sounds viz, omission, clos 25 Samanaksa sara is the name of simple ure, disposition of producing or vowels and Sandhyaksara that of gan, and the quantity Cf 1Pr diphthongs In TPr I 2 the nino XXIU Samanaksaras intended are & ·2 83, 1 I 13, u u u3 Thor and 1 after o) For hãi or ho yı (for vowels are doned the quality of the insertion of y cf Weber, Ind simplicity or homogeneity thou h Stud 4 252, Wackernagel I p their structure as composed of 338) see PpS 5, 119 190 for bo heterogeneous elements is not set boy1 = hoi 5 127, 169 for ha-ha forth RPr VIII 34 37, V Pr yı or ha i 5, 127 129 131 3 140 IV 145, and CA I 37 39 142 170, foi a uvia uvayı or a uvaj describe the formation of r and I, 5, 183, 184 while our treatise does not RPr (b) In fact a cand a u are regard II, V Pr 1 44 includo rl od as variants of a, oi of o See among the Samanaksır us and Pps 5 119 190 CA as pointed out by Whitney (c) A form that shows an initial sooms to recognise the same classi h, is ro,arded as a variant of the fication stobha without anh, hai is variant of a 1 hour of 0-1, hup of 2-6 Tho diphthongs are vowel sounds, up See also ho-da orda For wh ch thu,h not simple and homo detuls soe Simon, Pps p 520, geneous, yet form but a single J V Van Der Hooot, The Vedic syllable, and are treated as if they Chant p 20 were simple sounds RPr VIII 39 citos Šakatiyanı as holding FATI For the definition of vowel that a forms half of oach and ? cf Daniel Jones, Outline of Eng and 2 the remaining half RPr Phon p 20 For lines 5 15 cp XIII 40 states that eo on ac V Pr VIII 114 count of the fusion of two ele 2-10 ETT =y, r ), v Those have ments have sound in which the this peculiarity that each has a two elements aro not distinct vowel corresponding to it, viz, 1, According to RPr XIII 38 the These were named 'an Sandhyaksaris have double posi tastha intermediate, standing tion The V Pr I 73 specifies undway (between vowels and con only az and au as made up of sonants) in roforence to the mode two elements and directs them of their forination, as being noi (IV 14) to be treated as simple ther by a complete contact, lako sounds #qut=gasplantacal Uva the full mutes, nor by an open ta See also I Pr II 13, 14, 15, 17, position, like the vowels Thus 23, 26, 29 For details seo Whit. "antastha virtually accords to noy, CA 140 somivowel For the definitien of somivowel cf Daniel Tonos (Out- 2-7 (a) mi longthoning of a stobha line of Eng Phon pp 25,291) The vowel through the incoming of an word 'antastha' occurs in RPr I 1 or w (adding 1 or u after a ori 9, V Pr IV 102, CA 1 30, Nır I u ·3 II 2, For the meaning of antastha cp Whitney CA I 30, Macdonell, Vedic Gr p 40, Wackerna gel, Altınd Gr I p 197 noto the following nasal Cf V Pr VIII 13 and my note on ATITRAT यमा- JETITAITHETI (RT 12) 2-11 For the unusual order of aksaras cf Uvuta on RP 1 3 The Yimus are transitional sounds, assumed to interveno between non nasal and following nasal, as a kind of nasal counter part of the non nasal, and there foro called its yaına ur twin For the explanation of Yama Cf Whitney CA I 99 are Own 2-12 अकारादिना वर्णसमाम्नायेन सहिता सन्त एते वहन्त्यात्मलाभ प्राप्नुवन्तीत्ययोगवाहा श्र इति विसर्जनीय Visarjaniya 1s pronounced as a voiceless breathing This very pronunciation prevailed in the time of the Pratisakhyas, since they describe it as an uşman, the common torm for breathings and gıbılants ( Macdonell, Vodic Gi p5+, Wackernagel, Altınd Gr I pp 259 260 loi its place of articulation see note on 2 lho term visar ya in tho meining of Viserjiniy does not occur in the Pratıśahhyas and Panin asla प इति जिह्वामूलीय ( formed at the root of the tun,u0) and 39071212 (onbroathing) the two voiceless breathings, hid both separato cha racters in the alphabets of the earlier conturios AD, but for nearly a thousand yours thoy are obsoleto I his inay be the reason why our Piatiśnklıyı does not prescribe any rule for those Soe Burnell, Llements of South Ind Pal 2nd od Plute XXIV They are, however, employed in Kasmi rián Sarada mss 2-13 gafa ga artit seems cor root Nasıkya is a name of the pasal inservion betwoon h and The theory of Yama is in a way similar to that theory accordirg to which a t is introduced between an and s For Yama cf CA 1 99, IPr XXI 12, 13, VP. IV 160 kPr is more explicite on this point After stating (148) that the Yam is nose sounds it says (VI 29) that the non nasal mutes, before following Dasals, become then twins The Yama is thon stated (VI 32) to be similar to its original There is an audible utterance 11 I 33) in the mouth of the same quality with the Yamı, but the office of the suffixed sound does not differ from that of its original (VI 34) Our troutise (purv og unah) sooms to follow RPr in this The exact number of lamas is yet unsettled, but they 116 generally belived to bo tuonty For the terms kum bhum otc cf Whitney CA I 99 As for the syllabıcation of the Yamas the TPr XXI 8 declares thoin to belong to the suocooding syllable, whilo according to the ·4 V Pr 1 103 thoy belong to the pre coding syllable Both views were phonetically possible for details cf Siddhesvara, Critical Studies in the Phonetic Observations of Indian Grunmarians pp 79-81 2-14 अथानुस्वारी अनुस्वार and अनुनासिक (=rakta 114) both are meant (a) Anusvari is a nısal addition to the previous vowel, 10 in aoi ma, (cf 185 and Bhuttoji on Pi nini VIII 3 4), while Anunısıka is a nasalisation of that sowel the range For Ringa cp S Varm , Critical Studies oto p 150 (1) Anusvara is nothing but a porvadıng nasalisation of the pre ceding vowel This is held by CA (soo Whitney on CA I 26) and partially by I'Pr (cf TPr V 31, V 11, XV 1, XXII 14 with Whitnoys note) That this was also the of Siddhantaka uinudiharı (s Varma 19 wlong beciuso he expressly decluies it as an agina'(=inser tion of something extraneous and not as a more nasalisation VIOW p 148) (b) RPr, VPr, IPr, Rt and Papini admit the ovistence of both the Anusvari and Anunası ka that is they acknowledge the existence of two different pheno mena, 10 (1) the nısıl addition to the vowel and (2) the nasalı sation of the vowel The CA on the other hind, admits only the latter Cf Whitney CA I 26, Macdonell, Vedic Gp 53 Wackernd,ol Altind Gr I p 256 The statement of S Varma that Whitneys view about CA is wrong, is unwarranted His state mont (Critical Studios p 148) that Bhattoji regards Anusvarı as a puro nasalisation is also wrong Cf 'anustaragamali' Bhattoji on р VIII 3 4 (2) Anusviri 19 4 nasal ad dition to the preceding vowel, it contains both the vocalic and conson intal elements or according to RPr (1 5,22) Anusvara is other a vowol or à consonant Uvatas explanation that it was equivalent to saying that Anus vara was neither a vowel nor consonant thou, h apparently negative is yet su stive and may mean that it was a resonant voc alıc pasal as Berguign has put it Cf Wacker nagel, Altınd Gr I p 250 note The second view is held by RP 1 22, V Pr IV 148 149 (which zivos detailed directions as to the quantity belorzing to och element), TPr (excepting the above quoted sutras) RI 23, 185, Panini and Bhattoji otc Different theories about Anus vara There are three different theories about Anusvara (3) The Anusvara 18 entirely a consonant and is to be pronoun ced like half 9 This 19 held by "certain phonetic treatises of tho ·5 Taittırıya school, the Vaidikabha according to this is a vowel rana (on TPr II 30) the Sarva as well as a consonant Cf RPr sammatasıksa and tho Yajusa I 5 bhusana" S Varmı p 151 2-16 ani sa e for Cf TPr I 16, In fact Anusuari contained both V Pr I 37 No other Pratisakhy the elements 1 a vocilic and conso prescribes this usage nantal (RPr I 5, 22) "During the व्यञ्जनमकारपूर्वात् पूर्वादकाराद्वा (B) period of preclussical and classical sooms correct Cf akaro vyrju Sanskrit, the consonantal eloment ninim TPr I 21 which allows of it was more predominant, while us to call a consonant not only as in Mali and Prakrit the Anusvara prescribod in 'varnah kurottaro' verged more towards the vocalic by name formed by adding karı sido '(S Varmı p 154) In Sans with a interposed, but also by one krit the scope of Anusvara is very formed with a alone much limited, while in Pali and Prakrit, it muy stund before ? 3-1 रिति• Read एफाद्वा Cf TPr I 19, vowel, consonant and even a pauso VP. I 39 For a comprehonsive statement FYE PUTH Cf CA I 29, RPr of the teachings about nasal sounds, XIII 9 see Roth, Litt und Gesch des Voda pp 61-82 for the difference दुस्पृष्टमन्तस्थानाम् RPr XIII 10 also calls it 'dusprstam imperfectly between Anusvul and Anuna in contact Soo CA I 30 with sıkı cf Bopp, Lohergeb 352 f Macdonell Vodic G1 P 53, Whitney's note Wachernagel, Altınd Gr I р 3-2 विकृत स्वरो According to CA_I 256, for the fact that there was 31 tho position of the organ is no roal difforence between the noither very close nor very open actual pronunciation of Anusvara According to TPr II 44, 45 the and Anun ısıkı cf Whitnoy, IP, spirants, in their order, aro uttered II 30, JAOS 10 P LXXXVI in the positions of the mutes, but f, for the three theories about Anu with the middle part of the produ svara, cf S Varmı, Critical Stu cing organ opened RPr XIII 12 dios pp 148 155, for the sylla declares the vowels, Anusvara and bication of Anusvara see my note the spirants, as produced without on RT 23, for Ring cf Webor, contact, and with the organ stati Ind Stud 4 270, 9 38, Kielhorn, onary The class of spirants is com Ind Ant 141 A posed of visarjanıya, jihvamülya, 2-15 ह्रस्व and दीर्घ अनु. 19 moant Cr upadhmaniya and śş 8 h YvŚ 63 65, 134 142, PatŚ 30 35 विवृततरमकारै Cf CA L 34, 35, Read my statement on 2 14 with Whitney's note ·6 226 und mut for the surds and dhr for the sonants Soo VPr I 50 53 nen2 Anuprad in a banupradıyte vainali ( wherowowith is given forth an articulate sound नादानप्रदाना स्वरघोषयन्त Cf TPr (II 8) which means th it in vowels and sonant consonants, the emi ssion is sound It is the omitted matorul, whother tone, breath or the intoi moduto h sound Seo RPr XIII 2 TPr II 9, CA I 12, 13 स्वासोऽघोषाणाम् In surd conso nunts tho emission is breath cf I Pr II 10 19 3-3 सवृतो घोषवान् =vorced that which is produced with the accompini ment of a luryngeal hum अघोष = unvoiced that which 19 merely brer thod The thing is as follows Tho vocal cards situated in the throat act in much the sino minnor as the lips of the mouth Thoy muy be kept wide apart, they may be closed entirely, or thoy may be held clusoly to other so that they vibrate, whon ur passes between thom When they are hold wide apart (1 o whon the glottis is open) and an pisses between thom, the sound produced is called bioith But when thoy aro l opt nenor und 211 forced bot ween them, so that they vibrate, the sound goneritod is termod Speech sounds contun either brenth 31 Those which contun breath are called breathed or voicoless sounds und those which contain voice tormed voiced sounds (Diniel Jones, pp 20 21 ) Thus in the surd class it is more breath, simple unintonated air, in tho sonant class it is brorth made son ut hy the vocal cards on its pissie through the throat and thus con verted into sound Of Svaso ,hoso svanupradanah | Nado shoşuvat svarosu || CA I 12, 13 The same thing 19 stated in RP XIII 4, 5 and TPr II 8, 10 The VPr gives no corresponding definition It does not use the term 'aghoga' and 'ghoşavat but adopts the arbitrary designations VOICO voice ale 3-4 TIT Cf TPr JI 11 (1) तनायान् प्रथमानाम् In simple surd mutes (1 eh, c, t, t, p) the om sssion of breath is loss Cf I Pr II 11 (b) उभा हचतुर्थानाम् ,f Uvata on RPr VIII 2 XIII 6 See also TP. IT 46, which mean that the h sound is produced in a method intermediate between closed and opened Those are tho two Prati ś ikhyas which recognise a third hind of articulated material, bosi dos tone and breath RPr XIII 2 derives this material from a combination of the two others, rathor than their mean Whitney thinks that this distinction is for ced and futile Cf his notes on CA I 13, TPr II 6 (c) सनिवेशो ऽन्य I have given the punctuation adopted by the mos ·7 But to mal o the sense of tho pa ssage clour wo should punctuite विवतोऽघोषाणाम् । नादानप्रदाना स्वर घोषवन्त । श्वासोऽघोषाणाम् । तनीयान् प्रथमानाम् । उभा हचतुर्थानाम् । सनि- वेशोऽन्य प्रत्याहारार्थ । वणोऽनु बन्धो व्यञ्जनम् । याव० पराणाम् । उद्देश= showing letters in comman order 39èp=showin, thoin in å puti cular ordor 3-5 यावतिथ -पराणाम्० Cf Panini I 1 71 but we do not find iny pratyahard in Rl tanti This shows that originally this TTTT formod part of some ancient 671 fou, but later on was adopted by tho compilers of our text as in introduction to the text 3-6-7 This was the order of lottois adopted by Cars und for thoir pratyahuas Note tho difference botwoen this order and that of quittia and his follo weios For a briof statement on the order of letters in the Pi iti sakhyas ef tia on the first Sutra of RPr and MD Shastri Int to the RPr p 16 3-10 अकारघोषाणाम् Cf श्राहुघाष घोषव तामसारमेकेऽनुस्वारमनुनासिकानाम् RPr XIII 15, which means that tho voice in 9, , dd, 6 is due to the sound of हकारस्तु घोषवताम् Cf घोषिणां घोषि wa RPr XIII 17, which monns that h forms the second half of the voiced aspiratesi o gh, jh, dh, ah, th This is supported by the evi dence of words liko hata from [dhu Jag h ini from Nhan and tad dhu for tud + hi Similarly Jihvimuliya and upidhminiya, the two voicoloss broathings are rezudod to form the second half of the voicele s aspirates 10 h and ph Cf Macdonell, Vodic Gr p 50 55 Whitnoy, TPr 11 47 3-11 Is not cloal to me 3-15 ब्रह्मराशि Cf V Pr VIII 15 Tagra 1 1 2 132 1 Thus rule is meant to cover all sorts of sundhis found in the SV But hore oui trentiso is mal in; short shift of 1 subjout which occu pios lon, pissi, es of othe Prati sal hyas and has cost thour outhors 1 vist deal of labour This is a cleri admission of the unwillingness to copo with the intricacies of Vodio grimin ir Let us now examine era mples given by the commentator TECHT Rule 85 is counteracted अनापत्ति requires सह ऋषभा and B actually leads THT but of the on 101 गो ऋजीकम् Pragi hyisaſjór Cf RP II 74 Toy तिम् Cf गोयूतौ छन्दस्युपसख्यानम् on Pamini VI 1 79 उषवुध , सबदुधाम् (sabas) do not come under 116 Cf RPr I 80 103, Benføy, SV Einl XLII 99137 183 is counteracted Cf RPr IV 23, Panını VIII 325 ऋतीषहम् Cf 238, RPr IX 27, 28, Padap Ich ( Bonfoy, SV LX) graafia comm ·8 IS 247 15 . ह्रस्वाभाव Cf sv II 79 प्रतीव्यम् (प्रति । व्यम्) of the comm on 228 परीणसि RPr IX 10, ऋतावृध , तुग्रियावृधम् RPr IX 11 23 ऋतावसो RPr IX 1 दूरात् Padap दु । प्रात् on SV I 219 दूरे Padap दु । ए, but see दू । ए on SV I 53, Benfoy SV lix adulyah 18 co vered by 238 and is actually cited by the commentator Cf RPr IX 8 श्रुतक्क्ष I do not know which sutrı is counteracted here out of question, because a of श्रुत is not anudatta दुष्ष्वप्न्यम् गत्व (213) is counterwted 9 is piovi ded, because in the matter of षत्व and a dus is not upasarya, cf दुर षत्वणत्वयोरुपसर्गत्वप्रतिषेधो वक्तव्य on Paniai VIII 4 16, and so 279 is not applicable here In the RV षत्व is provided by RPr V 1, and गत्व is refused by V 47 See also Panini VIII 3 111 In परीणसि, दुरोणयु , स्वर्णरम् , गिर्वण , n 19 pro vided, bocause those are not ehu pada like itfitTiH und so are not covered by 272 But this difficulty does not arise RPr V 40 (ऋकाररेफषकारा नकार समानपदेऽवगृह्ये नमन्ति । अन्त पदस्थमककारपूर्वा अपि सध्या ॥) For प्रणेत , परीणसि of RPr V 56 नृमणा Cf Papin VIII 4 26, for FEUI VIII 4 11 In गोषाता, अनुष्वधम् etc षत्व 1s pro vided, because the same are not coverd by 276-286 For गोषा of Prvini VIII 3 108 सुष्टुतिम् covered by 279, hence its mention is superfluous Cf RPr V 12, Panini VIII 3 65 In नृषद्मा नृषाता षत्व is provided They are however cover od by RP- V 1 For longtho ning in नृषाहम् of RPr IX 47 प्रानुषक seems superfluous Cf 279 इत् सुभृ० (-इत्सुभृतो) has nothing to do with षत्व and हविष्मद्भि' in the fourth prda 1s covered by 283 In पुरुष्टुत cerebralisation takes place (Pınını VIII 3 65) In fayl (RPr v 12), निषत्तम् (Panini VIII 3 66), विष्वा, आनुष्टुभस्य, (VIII 3 60), विष्कभिते (VIII 377), सुष्टुत , अतिषाह (not covered by VIII 3 70) षत्व is providod For नेष्टाम् of RPr V 22 E Cf Panını VIII 3 109 दिक्षु सदा 281 is cou nteracted इन्द्राग्नी, इन्द्रपान are not el aparla, hence their mention is superfluous Ip 3=6917 RPr V 43 counteracts V 40 See also Panini VIII 4 9 10 the mention of सोमेसोमे, सुतेसुते, हृदिस्पृशम्, गो- ससा soems superfluous, because they do not come under 276-286 For सोमेसोमे सुतेसुते in the RV of RPr V 28 गोसखा Cf गोषखा In RV 8 14 1, but गोसखा in RV V 37 4 cited by RPr V 27 za स्पृशम्, पुरुस्पृहम् Cf RPr v 23 which counteracts V 21 2 Our commontator nowhere includes protracted vowels The same sounds in ·35, 44 includes in the series only the yuttural mutes and spirant, but reverses the relation of posi tion and organ As for the l vowel the V Pr I 69 and Paninya Siksi make it dontal Cf Macdo nell, Vedic Gr P 20 are defined is kanthya by RP. I 38, 39 CA I 19 The Vpr 1 71 states them to be foi ined in kinthe but by the middle of jaw 18 org in The IPr II 46 declires only h ind visurjiny is produced by kanth, and then says (II 47, 48) that some hold that h has the same position as the beginning of the following vowol, and visarjaniya hische sime position as the end of the preceding vowel 1h19 stite ment is noteworthy in as much is it is the peculiirity of the aspiration that it is an emission of unintona tod breath through the same po sition of the mouth organs by which the following intonatod sound is produced This also hints at the phonetic velue of the visarjınıya, showing it to be a more uncha racterized breathing, y final h Cf Whitney, I Pr Il 47, CA 1 19 # The vowel r is pronounced as ri (Wickornuel, Altınd Gr p 31) and this pronunciation is old is shown by the confusion of the two sounds in inscriptions and mss (Benfoy, SV Einl XLIV, Oertel, Synt of Cases etc I P 211) as well as the reproduction of r by ruin the Tibotan script Macdonell, Vedic Gip 8, Wackernagel, Alitind Gr Ip 28 But r was originally pro nounced as vocalıcı The RP XIII 34, V Pr IV 146, CA I 37, 71 describe it as containing r which according to the RPr (XIII 34 ) is in the middle 3 Cf RProl 40 which notices that some call ho and visai juniya chest sounds Cf Paniniya Siksha 16 4 It is peculiar that the commentary does not include jihvamulıyı in the list, while it names upadlmaniya in 9 The correct reading sooms (aga HEIHEIAT CA I 20 includes r vowels, the guttural mutes, the jih vamuliya spirant and the vowell The same are stated by RPr I 41 to constitute the dass of jihvannuliya The VP states the same with the exception of 1 to be formed at the base of the tongue (1 65) by the base of the jaw (1 83) The TPr II Like r this wowel also was originally a vocalic 1 For details see Bhuttoji, Sabdakaustubha 1 1 2 62, Wackernagel, Altınd Gr I p 31 5 Our treatise does not include ar in the series, while other Pratıšakh yas do Cf CA 1 21 RPr 1 42 They are described by the VPr (1 66) as for med upon the palate by the middle of the tongue Tho TP. 11 36 makes the same definition of the c series and s, but holds (11 40) that y is formed upon the palate by the middle and end of the tongue TPr doos not in clude any vowel in the class ·10 For the two distinct series of palatals and their detailed treat mopt seo Macdonell, Vedic Gr P 26 34 Wackornagel, Altınd Gr I pp 138 164 For the description of e diphthong seo Mu Vodiu Gr p 9 Wackornagel, Altind Gr IP 35 39 For the meaning of diph thong and its pronunciation see Daniel Jones An Outline of in. etc pp 57 59 6 Cf CA 122, RP. 1 43, I'Pr 11 37 44, VPr 1, 67, 78, and TP, 11 37 The cerebrals soom of Aus tric origin Of A C Woolnery paper on it 7 Cf CA 1 24, VPr 1 69 adds (1, 1, 13) to the class which it defi nos (176) as formed at the teeth by the tip of the tongue According to RPr 1 44, 45 tho class 18 composod of 1 s,r, besides tho 1 serios and is called dantimulıyı The TPr declares the same lotters except , as formed dantamulosu the t series and s by the tip of the tongue (11 39, 44) ind i by the middle of the tongue lip II 42 According to Whitney this des cription is more accurate, since the contact by which dentals are pro ducod is not upon the teeth them selves, but just at their base or be hind them Cf CA 1 24 Our tror tige doos not include l in the list See also Macdonell, Vedic Gr p 35, Wackernagel, Altınd Gr I pp 177 179 8 Cf CA 1 28 and the commen tary Pratıśakhyas are at variance with reference to this sound The RPr 1 45 declires 9 with other dentals as dantumuliya, but adds (1 46) that some hold it to be varseya gingival The VPr doclares it as produced at the roots of the tooth (168) by the tip of the tongue (1 77), the IPr 11 41 by the tip and middle of the ton„ue at a point close behind the roots of the teeth The Panınıya Siksi (17) alone declares it to be murdhan, a Thus all the Pratiskhy us ignore its zelationship with cerebral mutes and with r But according to the ouphonic systom i is carobial, and can hardly bo supposed to have been uttered otherwise than with the tip of the tongue reverted into the dome of the plate, to the cerebral position Cf Whitnoy, CA 1 2 3 9 (A1 25, and RPr I 47 agree with our treatise The V Pr 1 70 also declares the sau saine sounds as produced upon the lip (1 70) and by the lip but adds (1 71) that in the utterance of the tips of the tooth are employed With refe ronce to the IPr li 43 makes the same specification For details see Whitney CA 1 25 See Mac donell, Vodic Gi p 37, Wacher nagel, Altınd Gr I pp 181 184 12 For Yamas see note on 2 and the important statement of Bhattoji in Sabdak 1 1 4 143 144 By Anu svara our treatise takes both afa The word nasıkya has not boon satisfactorily explained by the commentators of the Prati and दीर्घ ·11 nusmin sakhyas, so much so that on RPr I 26 we do not even know the co rrect reading before 'इति नामिक्य ' M D Shastri accepts the reading इति नासिक्य and gives the follo wing Viriants, in footnotes हु इति वा नासिक्य (२) ऊ इति नासिक्य (३) इति नासिक्य (४) इति नासिक्य corrected to ड ज ण न म इति भिक्या The commentitor of V Pr does not explain tho torm on I 74 Not knowin, thorou morning of arf494 the commenta tor of CA has committed z blun der on I 26 are I The real moaning of नासिक्य howover seems to be the insition (called nasılyn) after h ind before a following nasal Cf CA I 100 1 Pr XXI 14 The RPr I and VP I 74 80 descube its mode of pronunciation and VIII 13 (हु इति नासिक्य ) speals of it again amon, the constituents of the spoken alphabet Oui tieztise (2_13) हुमित्यनुनासिक thore fore be emended to हु इति नासिक्य For the difference between a yama and the nasikya of Whitnov on CA I 100 13 Cf (Pr 1 27 V Pr 1 6+ 14 Cf TPr 1 14, RPr 1 12 16 Cf lPr 1, 13 CAI 10, VP his nothing analogous and doos not employ the terms sosman and The term usinin lite rally heat hot vapour, steam, de Sonates in the grammatical langu do all thoso sounds wich produced by i iush of unintona ted brouth through an open posi tion of the mouth orgins, or whose utterince has 1 cartun similırity to the oscapa of stoim throu, hi pipe Cf Whitney, C11 10 18 Foi contespondin. rulos cf RPr 63 IP VI 6 and Pa um Vul 4 57 which closely resurubles the lule of RPrand torches tho sime thing by one Sutu tut which our treatise has two (18 19) The same fact may be noted i Sutris 16 157 for which Puni hus only one II 1 132 The opoiition of the rule was porhips mener al in bhası as well in the Veda But in clessical Sinsl nt it has since long become obsolete, though theoritically its existence hus evoi boen admitted and Bhittoja actually turns the hit fuur forms of sumskarta into 108 by applying the rule (VIII 4 57) to thiom The phenomena is however in Prihut, pa iticularly in Pali Cf kuhin Bei trage 58 63 Muller, Jainpi 37 In Ved is this is often met with in pluta Cf vindatı 3 m RV 10 146 1, inqua3 m 15 7 4 20, vi my comnica RP, I 48 precisely azioes with our troatiso The V Pr I 71 dose ribes the same sounds as producod ip the nose, and states (1 80) that their place and organ of produ ction is the same, adding further (1 82) that the Yamas aro uttered with the root of the nose ·12 nuhuna is a peculiu and imperfect utterince of certain letters in cer tun siturtions, which plıys so pro minont # part in the phonetic systems of the RP and CA We mily, howovoi, beaning thit dutrine in mind, conjocture with somo plausibility that the word here not only signifies an insertion, but design itos also . peculiur qui lity of the inserted letter, l'or the meining of the word of Whitney I Pr XIV 9, CA I 41, for 1 detuled discussion on abhinidhana if S Varm Critical Studies pp 137-147 sᎾᎾ veśa3 in VS 23 49, babhuva3 in AV 10 2 28, tapatı3 m AB 6 35 4 In the RV we find all ind a nasalised (RPr II 67) in words which are not in actual puuse, but at a particulır vu coma in the poorla ind occur invariably before a word boginning with a vowel (see note on 71) For detuls Wackernacol, Altınd Gr 1 p 302 The statement of Whitney that 'tho operation of the rule is confi ned to pada tert only'(TPr XV 6) is baseless and wrong 19 The scope of this Sutra is covorod by RPr I 63 and TPr Y V 6 20 A consonant in pluse bolongs to the preceding vowel The equiva lont rules of the other treatises pro RPr XVIII 33, TPr XXI 3, VPr I 101 The observation is on the whole sound Tho final consonants in Sanskrit wore implo sive, so that they eventually disz ppeared in Pali and Prakrit With so much laxity in their articulation they were not likely to be inde pendent syllables Cf Siddheśvara, Critical Studies etc p 63 It is to be noted that the treatinent of syllabic division is moa, er in our treatise 21 (a) The name abhınıdhānn is appl 1od to the muto which arises from doubling and is inserted before mute The author of Tribhasyarat na on TPr XIV 9 explains the word by abhındhryate aropyate at which is set down against, and does not take notice of the doctrine of abhi (0) In words like arkkam, the consonant following the r or the h is doubled, and the former of the two, which is rogirded as the one that owes its existence to the hran oi duplication is to be lou konod as belonging to the piece ding syllable Cf CAI 58, VP. 1 104 The 1Pr XXI 5 teaches that a consonant not combined immediately with a vowel belongs to the preceding syllable This would leave only the final mom ber of any group to be attached to the following vowel RPr | 26 is meant for 2 ciso in which the consonant following the r is itself succeeded by another For details soe Siddhesvara on syllabication of r plus double plosive Critical Studies oti pp 69-71, Wacker nagel, Altind Gr I p 278 22 It is a general i ule that the first member of a consonant group will ·13 appond & more belong to the preceding vowel Thus mukta will be divided as muk ta and not muc hta The fact that Sanskrit had predomin unt tend ency to this syllabic division 19 shown by the doublin, which the initials of Sinskrit conson int groups undergo The most jono ral rule of doublınz is that the first member of a consonant group, if preceded by vowel, is doubled (R1 269) For corresponding rules of other treatisos 300 TPr XXI 4, CA 1 56, VP. I 102, and RPr XVIII 35 and I 2., which allows it to be counted other with the preceding or follo wing syllable For details seo Whitney, CA I 56 and TPr XXI 4 23 Cf RPr I 25, XVIII 34, CA I 53, TPr XXI 6 tion of the syllabication of the anusvare is closely bound up with tho question of its phonetic value, regarding which, however, there no agreement among the ancient grammarians Somo hold it to be a pervading nasalization of the preceding vowel, others, a nasıl addition to the preceding vowel The former view is adopt ed by CA which acknowledges only nasal consonants and nasal vowels and entirely ignores any such constituent of the alphabet as the anusvara In this case the question of its syllabıcation was simple, the nasalized vowel itself forming a complete syllable as in takram The RPr 1 5 and VPr declaro anusvāra as nasal age to the vowel, the latter (V Pr IV 1178) gives diroctions as to the quantity belonging to each element In this case, when the anusvira was not a pure nasalızed vowol, but contained in or loss degree, a consonantal ele mont, it was open to question whether it belonged to the pre ceding or the succeeding vowel, hence the necessity of the above rule according to which the anu svāra belongs to the preceding vowel The TPr takes no dis tinct ind consistent ground upon the question, whether the anusvāra consists in a nusalization of the vowel or in a nasıl consonantal element following the vowel It however tako, provailingly the view of the RPr but lets the otherwise appear here and there lor instance in TPr XXI 6 anusvāra appears with the distinct value of a consonantal elemont following the vowel, but not as a full consonant See also TPr X 11,XV 1-3 Thus we have seen that, although the authors of the Pratıšakhyas differed as to the phonetic value of the anns vara, yet they were unanimous in dec laring it to belong to the proced For details of the syllabıcation of the anusvāra cf Siddheśvara, Critical Studies ato Our treatise differen tiates between anusvara and ranga and obviously regards anusvāra as a consonantal olomont (500 185) lhe quos WOS ing vowel Pp 81-83 ·14 mora For the dual anusvarar of 28 RPr I 34, TPr I 37, VPr I ह्रम्वादने भवेद्दीक़ दीर्घादने भवेल्लघु । 59, agree in assigning half a mora सयोगे च परे हख सियसि निदर्शनम् ॥ 28 the length of 1 consonant CA I 60, however assigns one अनुस्वारो द्विमात्र स्याहवर्णव्यानोदये । as the len„th of a consonant Our ह्रस्वो वा यदि वा दीर्घ देवाना हृदये तथा ॥ treatise mikes an option between Yajñavś 63-65, 138-142, Pars the two 30-35 31 33 The idor underlying the group 24 The first portion of the rule is ing of sounds into short, long and includod in 20 The nogitive here ultr a long was sud to be duration implies a direct reversal of 20 Cf - Cf P Sil sa 11 lirom the point of यवौ तु रेफसयुक्तौ रेफ आद्यो भवेद्यदि । view of duration human speech पूर्वाह्न तद् विजानीयात्सूर्ये पूर्वे निदर्शनम् ।। was dividod into threo kinds i o यवौ तु रेफमयुक्तौ विरते च भवेद्यदि । quuk, inter mediate and slow (See परराङ्ग तद् विजानीयात्तरो हर्येति लक्षणम् ॥ RP X111, 46 49 IPR XXIII 20) The quintity of sound in 25 The positive side of the rule is intor mediate speech was one third included in 20 It rather denotes more than in quick spooch, the a denial of adjunction of the second ratio being 9 12, the quantity in sparśa to the preceding vowel, slow spooch was one thud more and honce implies adjunction to than in inte, medrate spooch, the the one that follows, since the ratio bein, 12 16 Cf RP XIII consonant cannot stand by itself 48 with Uvitis note But authon Thus the division in salhyam ties difter on the exact ratio of (sakkhya) would be scok khyam and quintity betwoon tho'three vittrs so on Cf I Pr XXI 7 Thus while our treatise declares 26 Cf RPr 1 23, CA 155 TPr the proportion 3 4 5, Uvata XVI 2, V Pr 1 100 This general (RP XIII 48) mentions some rule is equivalently stated by all zuthorities holdin; the proportion Pritisakhyas The matter of syllabı 16 20 25 cation sooms of pretty puie theory Thus Karyat on Patanjali 1 19 The only practical boarmy it cin have inust be in determining द्रुत श्लोकमृच वोच्चारयति वक्तरि whether such and such a consonant नाडिकाया यस्या नव पलानि स्रवन्ति shall rocoivo ono or another accent, तस्या एव मध्यमाया उत्तौ द्वादश पलानि as being that of the preceding or of the following vowel Cf Whitney, स्रवन्ति । नवाना त्रिभागस्त्रीणि पलाणि CA 1 55 तदधिकानि नव द्वादश सपद्यन्ते। विलम्बि 27 Cf RPr 1 37, CA 1 49 V Pr ताया तु प्रत्ती षोडश पलानि स्रवन्ति । 1 48 Pr offers nothing corres For the three vrttrs of Katya ponding yana V 4, 5 on Panını 1 1 70 517 says ·15 TPI and V 1-5 on Panini 1 4 109 with Patañj ili on it for the concep tion of vitti in modern phone tics see Siovers, Phonetic 639 p 231 For detuls soe Wackerna gel Altınd Gr [ p, 280 Grimmanins prescribed the uso of theso vittis under different con ditions According to RP. XIII 49, quuk spoech should be used in Vedic rectals, inter mariliate in business and slow during instru ction When the question of determin in; the stund ırd of quantity arose thointer nu duct spooch was selected as the basis, bociuse presumibly it reprosontod ordinary conver sition For details seo Siddhe svarı, Cutical Studios otc p 172 34 Cho pause between two individual sounds hd durstion of very infenitesimal time Ct Vyasasıhsı 'viramo ardiyor midhte pyrnu kalo pyis imyuto which attubutes a quirter of moral to the hiatus between two individual sounds Kihnu nay isiksi contests this Cf Siddhesvara, Cutical Studies etc p 186 Anu the mummum standud of quantity was called anu which could not be perceivod by the Cf 'indriyavisiyo yos? vanurityucyate budhaih Sam bhuś The Lom iśısıkşa (ŚS 462) compares the anu to a particlo ro flectin, the sun sriys-sury iraświ prstikasa kiniha yatra drsynte | inostu tut priminam sy in matra tu vaturanavat|| Next to this comos paramanu which is just perceptible (cf Vyasasıksa, ma tradham vyaktamatr ikam ) See also V Pr I 61 (paramanvardhamatra) Noxt to paraminu comos matra The quantity of r mora was com paied by Vyas siksa to a snap of finger, by the Nirada Ś to a twin kling of the eye by same authori ties to a flash of lightning, and by the RPr to a note of the wood coch Cf Varm 1, Cutical Studios etc р 177 'Rgviimah padaviramo vivrttı virun ih samınapadaviyrttıvırama strim itro dvimatra okamatrordha mativ ityanupurvyena || XXII 13 Cf also YYS 11 12 37 (a) The versepaudp is of three moins, that is, the quantity of the pause at the end of a vorso is of three moras ‘ubha vajasya satye huve vain | Our treatise (37) seems to declare the quantity of this pauso only two moras 36 (b) The padla pause is of two moras, of the pause of two moras in Pada tort, between the padas the exam ple is 'ise tvi, ur je tva Our trea tise declares only one mora As for the aragrahe pause it sooms of two morate according to the TPr while RPr (I 28) and VPr (V 1) doclure it to be of ono mour a This well accords with our treatise (36) 35 (0) Pause for hiatus is of one mora 'sa idhana), ta enam, tu ismat Our tro utise (35) declares only half more between the two vowels, be they short or long This accords with RPr IT 4 which W10W senses ·16 prescribes half a mora for vivrtti( = svarantaram) Uvata is more spe cific on this point He slys 'tatrayam vivrttervibhag istri prakarah | ubhayato hrasva pada matrakala | pra rbhubhyab (RV 4 33 1) | ekato dirghardhamatra kala / nu ittha (1 132 4) | ubha yato dirgha padonamatrahala | ta im vardhanti (I 155 3) | But cf the peculiar statement of Kaiyatı, 11 4 201 which seems the basis of the following statement of llı ttoji— 'yattu pritisakhyantaram rdhamatrovagrahah itu tattu sar vatra simhitayrinardhamati akalu sya sattvat tatotırıkto'rdhamatrı kalo' vagrahustityovam paramıt ıh pratišakhyayoravirodhah's Kaustu bha 1 1 4 139 IIo is wilfully over looking here the sharp differences that existed between the Piatisk khyas, and in fact it was these diffe rences that led to the composition of so many Pratiśakhyas (= prati sakham bhavam) (d) Pause for hiatus in the in terior of word of hulf 'pra ugam' The comme ntator quotes a couplo of versos on TPr XXII 13 laying down four sub divisions of the pause of hiatus, and assigning them different qua ntities that between a short and long vowel is vatsanusrtz, and is one mora long, that between a long and following short 19 va tsånuarini, of the same length, between two short vowels, 'paka vatr, three quarters of a mora, between two long vowels, piparka, a quarter mora only Compare it with Uvati's remarks on RPr IT 4, quoted by Varma in Critical Studios p 186 As reg irds the nature of hiatus, the commentary on Vyasa sikşa, 'viramah tusnimbhutih kalah syat', defines it is a 'time of silence But this goes against the Indian theory of continuity of sounds so strongly maintained by atañjalı (on P 1 4 109) and others Nor there is any proof to prosume that the hiatus was accompanied by a glottal stop By hiatus then the ancient rammarians may have mount - glide between one sound and another, and this is in a way confirmod by RPr II 4 which assigns only a quarter of a mora ( time of a svara bhaktı ) to the hiatus For details soo 8 Varma, Critical Studies PP 185-187 39 Bhakti=division of, saman Soo Laty, VI I 14, Drahy III 4 12, Simon PpS 52? The chants of a mode or modes, and, therefore, could only bo sung in Unison At the sacrifices, the Sama veda priests whose business it is to perform the musical part, do not sing in unison except the nidhana or finale which consists usually of one, seldom of two syllables The rest of the chant is divided into sections of which the first is (I) Himkara the syllable hum, (which so often occurs in the Saman, was called originally, as the Brahmanas prove, saminare in a a 1S mora ·17 crios Chunkara' Bui Ārsoyabr In troduction XI VII) is sung by all puests (say in SV p 54) or by three singers (Sayina on PVB II 1 1) (II) Prastu. It 19 sun, by the Prastotr It is doult with in general part (PVB I 3-13) and in special ono (1 3137) (III) Uditha It is sung by • Udgatr (IV) Pratıhara It is sung by Pintihartr It is deilt with in general put (PVB 1 30 - 1 62) and in special one (1 63-2 81) (V) Upadruv It is sung by Ud, at (VI) Nidhini or finale is suns by Prustoti, Ud, and PT tihutr For the virious linds of nidhan is seo Say on PVB X 10 1 Nidhana is dealt with ir 1 general part (PVB 2 82-110) and in special one (2 111-120) (VIT) Pranava The syllable Om lhe real Bhaktis are five 16 prastav udgitha, pratıhara, upa drava, and nidhana For the theory of Bhaktı according to the explınation in the Puñcuvidha sutra of The Vodic Chint Pp58-70 and Simon Pus 522 See also B l'iddegon Ritualistic Acta Orientalia V 1226 p 185 which makes u u and u 3 the stan dard of short, long and ultra long vowels RPr XIII 50 attempts to fix the length of the short, long and ultra long vowels by com pirin, them with the of certuin birds, a fact implied in Pausini 1 2 27 Cf 'kukkutarute ikua ek udvitrinatı itvi prasiddh erakaradayo nuktah Nayesa Ś$ on this sutrı lhe ides underlying the grouping of sounds into short, long und ultra lon, was supposed to bo duration Cf SS 379 A Suuritavınta It should be noted that the Ginas ne not accented in the ordinuy sense of the word, or like the other Vedas, but that the murks which form such a pro minent feature in the text are utually musical notes They are seven and then names difter Samuvidhanbrahmana (I 185) Ives krusta, prathama, dontiya, titiyn caturtha, pañcama, and susthu or antya Those corros pond to the sadja, rsabha, yandhara, midhyamı, pañcama, dhaivats and nisada of usual Indian music, but in roverse order, 1o the first note of the Hindu inusiu is the fourth of the Sama priests and the scale ascends the loveise of the scale of the last In S India the names of these Prakrtı Notes are prathama, dvi trya, titryn, catur tha, mandra (5th, cf Burnell's note in Arbr XLIII) аг68 varya (6th) and atis varya (7th) Besides those there are seven others which indicate constantly Dadaism 40 Cf RPr I 20, CA 159, V Pr I 55, 56, und TPr I 33 which makes r and I, the standard of a short vowel and Panini 127 ·18 recurring groups of notos These aro svara on (1) Pronkha which adds two moras to the preceding sylla ble and ends with the second It is marked 2 For the conformity and discre pency between the Purvagana and the Uttaragana with reference to the use of the sign 2 soe Vedic Chant pp 44-47 (2) Namana it consists of the first three notes (1 o, one, two and three) “prapatam tat svuritacitur thadımandrantam (Comm on Shpbr II P 20) indicates that there is a difference bet woon namana and pranata (3) Karsana soo noto on 46 (4) Vinata is marked by vi ors and consists of 1 and 2, where Vinata occurs in the Gramı goyagana pienkhri is put in the Ūha For the signifi cance of vinata, cf Vedic Chant PP 45-46 Simon Pps 522 (5) Atyutkrama 4565 This vikit is an embellishmont (6) Sromipasarana 2345 This also is an embellishment (7) Abhrguta this consists in a repetition of the note with a it appears to be marked in the Bibliotheca Indica od by 7 See Bur Arbr XLLV Svarrta mandrasvaru. CE N on Pps 1 2 'svar atasabilena man drasvara ucyate, on 8 232 'svarı tasvarantam = mandrasvarantam But the Comm on Shpbr II p 20 vinatam tatsvarıtacaturthadıman drantam shows that svarita is the third See also Whitney on 1 Pr XXIII 16 For vinata, pranatu and abhiqita soo the comm Shpbr IT p 20 - Arcıkasamhıtayam sarvotravina mitanı punarapranamitati aksa rani pathitani, atra ganavıdhau kvacit kvacidvitamitani pranu mitanı ca goyanı vinamita subdend vinatam prapamitaśabdena pranıtım | vinatun prathamadı dvitiyantani prinatam tat svarita caturthadimandrantam abhigi tam dvitiy adiprathamantam tatha vinatapranatıyorante rdhamatra nicena svarena bhavatyucce'pyar cha dırgho hrasve'rdham|| (b) For the Saman tones and sounds of animals soo, Nars which connects the music with the sounds of animals sadjam vadati mayuro gavo, rambhantı carsnbham aja vike tu gandhariu, krauộco vadatı madhyamam puspasadharane kale, kokılı vıktı pañcamain | asvastu dhaivatam vaktı, nisadam vaktı kuñjarah || SS P 407, also Samgitaratna kara 1 3 48 Hore the author of the Siksa is perhaps analysing the microcosmos vız the common sounds of animals with the micro cosmos viz the tonos of the human yamut For details of Simon It runs short no, ·19 800 Bur was an 'vaistaryam Sual a PpS Einl, 8 Varma, Critical Studieg Chapter X (The Nature of Accent) (c) Saman tones and the accen tuation of the spoken language Burnell in the Introduction to his Arbr (XLII) does not see any appreciable connection between the Saman tones and tho accent Simon on the other hand, is inclin od to believe that there was cloar connection between the two (PpS 524) The Indian commen tators put together the svaras of the Chandogas and the accent of the spoken word CiU vata on RPr XIII 44, the Comm on Pos 1 2 svaritasabilena mandır 24cynte, on 8 232 svarrtas var antan = mandi asvurantan on 8 232 udattatvadvrdhe svar ab See also the four ślokas from Aryanyaka stobha quoted by bui in his In troduction to Shpbr XIX The Author of the Vedic Chant (39-41) hus instituted a comparative study of (a) mononomul stobhas consist ing of two gyllables (b) the poly 8syllabic mononomial stobhıs and (c) stobhas which consist of phrases, and has arrived at the conclusion that "there is in punci plo a connection between the word accent and melodic movement of the SV 42 Cf RPr | 27 43 There is no discordance among the Pratisahhyas upon this point Cf RPr T 29, CA I 61, VP. I 57, 1Pr I 31 Ajatasatru also declares two matras for dirgha 44 Note the use of yrddham Our treatise nowhere uses the term pluta See RPr I 30, CA I 62, V Pr I 58, TPr I 36 Ajataśatru says that a vrddha syllable = 3 matras For details Shpbr XX In the chant there emphasis on yrddha syllable 43 For vaisvai ya cf Vivrti on 53 coccanicamśayorma dhye sphuta śabdadubhayasadhara nam na svarantaram etc 46 A vowel is a syllable CI VPr I 99, RPr, XVIII 32 which states explicitely that a vowel, whether puro or combined with anusvara or combined with consonants, 18 & syllable See also RPr I 19 that both the short and the long vowels are syllables On the Vartika ‘varnam vahuh pui vasūtre' Patañ juli statos 'athavā pārvasūtre var nasyāksaramıtı sanjña kryate DI Bh 1 1 2 131 Kaiyata glosses it with pūrvasuti e | vyakaranantare Svar na aksaranıtı' vacanat varnă aksai ana is not found in RPr XVIII 32, V Pr I 99, CA I 93 ind our trenuse 46 But we know from Bhattara Harichandra that the Aindra grammai usod the term vai ne instead of aksar a and that this grammar opened with the sutra "atha varnnsamuhah " Cf his Nyasavyakhya, Sutrasthanam ( Cajaka р 58 just published ) which runs sastros vapı ‘atha varnasamuhah' iti Aindı 1---vyakaranasya 'athato dhirmam Wakhyasyamah' iti ·20 Vaišosikadarsanasya ca' and so on I suspect here that Katyayana Patañialı, Kaiyata and their follo wers are referring here to Aindre Vyaharan isutra and we my not bo very far from the mark if we assume that pui vasutic here stands for prathamasutre 1 Both the RPr and the VP, place this rule at the head of the rules for syllabıcation Cf Uvuta on RPr I 22 mentioned and hence they can only be implied as Uvata doos on RP. I 19 But our treatise does away with this difficulty by inclu ding the definition of pluta in 44 СА 1 93 ( xvaro ksar am ) also does not serve the purpose of an intıoduction to the rules for aylla bication but accordin, to Whitney may be regarded as a virtual pre cept that the accentuation, which in litter rules is taught (cf Uvata on RP I 19 tantrantare etc ), extends suy over the whole syllable, or on the other hand, that the accents wluch are declared to belong to syllables, affect specially the vowels This explanation of Whitney is not peculiar to C1 alone, but it applies to other Prati Sikhy is 15 well Ct tri ucyante nsariisi ayah IP 1-2 (Uvata I 19) ind our treatise 46 which will just open the treatment of ucentuation in (51) the 7th dasaka, and this 19 hinted at by our Commentator who says krto varnopade a samanya (in the 1st Prap ) prthaktvona (40 45) hsar aparıbhasya (46) nvartho dharmo ksarajñ 100 (omit virama) aksaraparımanısambandhat tatı oyd, hatunghatau and so on In aksar aparimana parimana = 1 ala of Whitney on Pr XXIII dvisvar ıh parva the melody between the dundas ( a bar indi cating viruma is called a parvan The lengths of the parvan are videly divergent Cf the Comm on Shpbr 11 p 18 which runs evam istau saman iksaruni (11) ityadını varnasamamnayumanuhi mya tutah 'survih soso vyanjinani (1 6) ityadına vyañjanagatah san) nah krtvi anantarum--ojih-svi ranain (1 17) ityadınaksara, atalı sanjah krtva adhuoakşıravyañ nas unniharse kım kasyan,amityeti noirupanayaha Inusvaro 'yan) nam caksarangim, iti|| Our trea tise on the other hand has already shown the rules (see also CA I 55-58) toi syllabication probably because it thinks that the difficulty about syllabication arises with regard to the consonants and anusvara one and not with ro, rd to the aksaras i the vowels One difference more in RP and our treatise After defining hiasva by 1 17 and lugha by 1 18 the RP, definos a scoil ind then states on guruni dirghini, (20) tathotare şam samyoganusvalaparını yanı (21) | Note also the order in RPr XVIII 32-44 In this order the ultra long vowels and I are not ·21 4 3 5 From third to the second 5 hi 2 3 4 81 From second to the first 2 2R 1 ho 11 | gne ra From fifth to tho third mane 6 SR 3R 2R sim pa / avna From fifth to the second 7 5 A SO on priya 2 8 From third to the first 3 2 puna 31 For details seo Simon, Pps P 521 ‘yato ganavıdhau kutracid ekaksaravasanam, yatha-'agna a yahı vil tyasyrmici (1 1 ) sya samnı samurambhe | dvya ksarayasan un paiva yatha--' gna 1 | titha udu tyam jatavoda (1 31 ) ity asyam gły imano samdi 'ja' sebdo ekaksaravasanam parva | atraiva samarambhe trya ksaravasanam cal and According to Burnell the bar of division (= parvan) marks the notes to be sun, with one breath For details seo Vedic Chant pp 43-50 Udghata-uccibhava Cf 'matia laksane trividha udzhato vyndamat au r cau ho prabhrtını vyadato ya -- | matau huva--1| rcau ho Nighatasidhing of a tone hanyate nico bhavati Pps X 46, nihanyate mandrasvaram bhavati'll Abhyudghata is opposed to udzhata Cf Simon, PpS p 520 Pratyutkramah the moving for ward of a note to a lughor note, pratyutkramatı elccaszaro bhavalı N on PpS 5 74 pratyutkrantal urdhvam gatah VI 45 It 18 ot oight kinds From the sixth to the fifth ini (1) The numbers 1-6 indi cate the pitches of a down ward series of tonos The tones 1-3 are high com pared with the tones 4-6 (b) Replacing the pitch 1 by 2 in å melody is called nicatva (Simon, PpS 614) (c) The numbers over the syllables are the Prakrtı tones the essential tones of the melody, those in the letters are the Vikrir tones io orna montal tones (d) Where there is a group of notes and a number upper numbers give the length in matras, og 10 oror each one, these 1 va 2 3 4 5 noto ra 6 6 n 2 From fifth to the fourth 3 su 4 ra 3 From fourth to the third (o) The length of the note deponds on the vowel, and not on the length of the syllable according 4 të 3 m, ·22 2 The karsana upto the third 2 tono va 3 to prosody, thus in citra the first note is short The last note in each parvan is always vrddha Bur Arbi XLIV 3 The harsana upto the fourth a 2 3 4 4 lhe korsada upto the fifth situ sru 2 3 4 5 ta 6 5 6 1 The Comm on Shpbi P 19 tuns Abhigitam "dvitiyadih pratha mantyam | abhigite ardhamatra dvitfye prathame adhyardha | stomam rudrayı pinvo ukul (1 156) / stomam rudra (a abhu) | på invo (o abhi) 1 N on PpS 5 32 and 281 Soo also the Common Shpbr (p 20) According to the above the abhrgıta tone consists of two tones It shows the union of the second tone with the first tone in tho same syllable, of which the second tone is worth half a matra the first tono having an additional half matra (adhyardha = 13 Jör nendra on Panini V 1 28 Bur Shpbr XIX) For details Simon, Pps 517, 592 Vrddhih emphis Seo SV u 0122 paſca svaral kar sanalaksital | kusanaliksanim Chandog upari śisto udahrt im 1 pañcavidhim harsanam adutiyakarşapim atiti yakars inam acitur thakarsanam amandrakarsanam wu indrascatisva Tyatkisyata iti | ye ova piath madarabhya (te) sa atisvar yat kisyate sumyah svarali | vatha vasisthe ( 1 269 ) sa ta śru 2 3 4 5 6 5 61 Soo also Sunon, PuS 519, Vedic Chunt p 44 Astaksarena the Bhat and R. thantara are cattle, ( the first ) eight syllables of the first verso he (the Prastotr) takes as prastava See note on 39 See Culand PVB sᎾᎾ note on 68 or pro It 19 P 149 Karsana extending longing down the scale occasionally applied to the fifth poto indicating that it is drawn or produced beyond the mandia Cf ‘krsyate kursipam bhavati' N on Pp8 V 810 This 19 either up the scale marked V or down marked 1 and includes all the notes between those market Seo Arbr XLIIT Kargana is of five knds The karsına upto the second Dvyaksarena the first two eyll bles of the last two verses he takes as prastivi See Caland Daśaksarena they make (chant) in the middle a finale of ten sylla bles For nidhana see note on 39 See Caland, PVB p 175 47-48 Cf RPr XVIII 32 and the note on 46 49 Cf RPr XVIII 38, 39 50 CE RPr XVIII 41 1 tone ba 2 rhiso ·23 ACCENTUATION 51 The subject of accentuation is trea ted in our treatise in a moagro wiy What is given as just sufficient to construct the Sambita from the Pada text For detailed treat ment of the accentuation in Saman cf the fust two Prapathk as and the first six Dasakas of Samatantra In the following treatment of accen tuation I have copiously drawn from Whitney l'or the detailed treatment of the accontuation in the SV of Rktantri vivrti 52 That is, when two simple vowels or a vowel and a diphthong coalesce and form a single vowel or diph thong, in case either of the two was acute, the resulting syllable is scuto The rule is Soneral one ind suffers exceptions which form the subject of rules (57 58), name ly thate and 0, when they absorb followin, n bocome t and ò and that u become i The correspon dın, rules of the other treatises are RP III 6, V Pr IV 131, 1Pr X 10 and X11 10, CA 111 66 53 Szarta is nothing but a combinu tion of udatta and anudatta and its first half mora which is udatta (ulod si arrta, the rest being pracayı of the Chindogas Cf अत ऊर्ध्व प्रवक्ष्यामि ह्यार्चिक तु स्वरत्रयम् । उदात्तश्चानुदात्तश्च तृतीय प्रचयस्वर ॥ Naradis 1 Our treatise does not define the three terms adatta anudatta und svarito The CA I 13, the V Pr I 108, 109, TPr I 39 39, and Panini 1 2 29-30 precisely agree in their do cuption of the uulatta and anudatla ucents the RPr III 1 is moro profound As for the szarita they all virtu ally agree in spiut, thou,h not in form the 1Pr I 40 und Panini 1 2 31 call it a simahara-com bination of acute and grave, the VP, I 110 statos that a syllabllo possessing both the other tones is svarila The RP III 2 says that a syllable 18 ezarrta into which the two other tones enter together CA I 16 agrees with this definition The three Ski accents udutta, anudatta and sva irta precisely correspond in phone tic character with acute, grave, and circumflex This will be clear from the fo llowin, Viviti on Rktantra which is available in parts only It reads - अथायाधमात्राया एवोदात्तत्व स्वरित चाह "श्राद्यार्धमात्रा स्वरितमिति।" तस्य वृत्ति । "प्राद्यार्धमात्रोत्सा भवति तत्स्वरित नामेति" । वर्णस्यार्धमात्रा उत्स ज्ञा भवति । उदित्यनुवर्तते उदासमुदिति विधानात् । श्राद्यार्धमात्रा उदात्ता भवतीत्यर्थ । उदात्ताधार्धमात्रा स्वरितम् इति वच नात् आद्यार्धमात्रोदात्ताश एव स्वरित नाम । नानशब्दस्य प्रसिद्धार्थत्वात् । यत् स्वरित ·24 - - (स्वरत) मिति प्रसिद्ध तदुदात्त एव स्वरित मिति व्यवहियते । नादात्तानुदात्तप्रचयस्वर त्रयव्यतिरेकेण स्वरित नाम स्वरान्तरमस्ति । अवशिष्टार्धमात्रानुदात्त । प्रचयस्थानत्वात् । स्वर प्रचय इत्यर्थ । तदुक्त नारदशिक्षायाम् अत ऊर्ध्व प्रवक्ष्यामि ह्यार्चिक तु स्वरत्रयम् । उदात्तश्चानुदात्तश्च तृतीय प्रचयस्वर ॥ इति । 'अत ऊर्ध्व प्रवक्ष्यामि ह्यार्चिक तु स्वरत्रयम्' इति प्रतिज्ञाय तृतीय प्रचयस्वर इति उपसहारात् स्वरित नाम स्वरान्तरमुदात्तानुदात्त प्रचयव्यतिरेकेण नास्तीत्यर्थ स्फुट एव । तर्हि स्वरितव्यवहार स्वरान्तरत्वाभावे निरा लम्बन स्यादित्यत आह - य एवोदात्त इत्युक्त स एव स्वरित स्वर । इति । अवशिष्टाशस्तु स्वरप्रचय इत्यत आह - प्रचय प्रोच्यते तज्ज्ञै न चात्र स्वरितान्तरम् ॥ इति । उदात्ताधार्धमात्रा स्वरितमिति । उदात्त एव स्वरित इति विधानात् । अर्थादवशि ष्टाश स्वर प्रचय इति । तज्ज्ञै स्वरितस्वरूपज्ञै। उदात्त एव स्वरितशिष्टाश स्वरितोत्तरप्रचयत्वात् स्वरप्रचय इति व्यवहियते । रित्यनेन ये स्वरितमिति स्वरान्तरमस्ति तेन साक स्वरचतुष्टयम् ऋक्ष्वप्यस्तीति वदन्ति ते तदज्ञा इति । स्वरितस्वरूपाज्ञा इति वचनमेव तान्निन्दति । तोकस्यैव वर्णस्योचनीचात्मक त्व कथमित्यत आह - उच्चैर्वर्णस्वरो नीच स्वरतो द्विधा स्मृत ॥ इति । मात्रको वर्ण एवैक आद्यार्धेनोच्च इतरार्धेन नीच इति। स्वरत उच्चनीचस्वरभेदत । द्विविध स्मृत इति । ऋक्तन्त्रकारादिभि स्मृत इत्यर्थ । यदि च स्वरित नाम स्वरान्तर- मस्ति तदोञ्चनीचप्रचयानामिव स्वरितप्रदर्शन- स्थानान्तरमपि स्यात् । यथा तैत्तिरीयाणा चातु स्वर्यात् स्थानचतुष्टयम् - द्वितीयाद्यास्तु मन्त्रातास्तत्तिरीयाश्चतु स्वरात् ॥ इति वचनात् । नास्माक स्थानचतुष्टये स्वरप्रदर्शनमस्ति । उच्चनीचापेक्षया स्वरितान्तरा भावे तस्य स्थानाभावे च वचनान्तर यथा उच्चादुच्चतर नास्ति नीचानीचतर तथा । वैस्वयें स्वरसज्ञाया किंस्थानस्वर उच्यते ॥ इति । उच्चादुच्चतर स्वरितमित्युच्यते वा नीचान्नीचतर वा तदुभयाभावात् । तस्माद् वैस्वर्ये स्वरसज्ञा । विस्वरत्वेनोच्चारणमे विस्वर इति नाम्ना वदन्ति । वैस्वयं चोचनीचाशयो मध्ये स्फुरणादुभयसाधारण न स्वरान्तर येन स्थानमपि तस्य स्यात् । तदुक्तम् - उच्चनीचेऽथ यन्मध्ये स्वर साधारण स्मृत । इति । अत एव न स्वार स्वरसज्ञाया प्रतिजा- नाति शैक्षिकतिक्षिकोऽपीत्यर्थ । ऋक्तन्त्र- कारतव्याख्यातृभि स्वरितस्योच्चनीचव्यति रेकेण स्वरसज्ञाकरणाभावात् । स्वरितस्य स्थाना- न्तरसत्त्वे द्वयन्तरत्वमप्यार्चकस्य स्वरस्य स्यात्। तथात्वे- एकान्तरस्वरोऽनृक्षु गाथासु पन्तर स्वर । सामसु व्यन्तर विद्यादेतावत् स्वरतान्तरम् ॥ इति वचनविरोध स्यात् । गाथासु यजुष्षु चातुस्वर्येण स्थानचतुष्टयस्य विद्यमान- त्वात् द्वयन्तर । अस्माक स्थानत्रयत्वेन त्रिकस्वर एकान्तर एव। तस्मादाद्यार्धमात्रोदात्त एव स्व- रित । न स्वरित नाम स्वरान्तरमस्तीति । अत्र तज्ज्ञ For a partial correspondence, cf V Pr I 126, TPr I 41, RPr III 4, CA 1 17, Panini 1 2 32 These treatises are unanimous in declaring that the ardhamatrā (=half a mora) of a svarita 18 udatta, or to be more explicit, the succooding low tone starts ·25 the commentators on Piatiśakhyas assert that in Pavini 1 ? 32, the word hrasva is redundant and ardha-hrasva moans half the sylla ble P 37) highoi thau even the preceding high accent, a phenomena, the like of which has been noted in Sechu ana, an 1fican linguage by Prof Daniel Joves (Sochusna Reader The wording of the rules is clear and the montion of matra makes it quite patent that the juthors hero imply only half 1 Mona and not the half syllable But the commentators on these traz tises have tried to explain witha mitru hy half the syllablo (1 on short svarita £ mora is alatta and anulattıb, in long 1 mora noclettro and I anudatta, in ultra long 1} inora udatir und 14 anud attır) Now, if the authors of the corros ponding rulos really intended to convey the sonse, these commen tators put upon them, we would have hd actordhamudattam instead of metrardhamudattan in CA, svar ardham instead of svarvi dhamatram in V Pr yavaclurdhan instead of yuvadardham hrasvasy. in TPr, and above all Panını who believed in ‘ardhumatralaghavona putrotsa vam manyante vaiyakaranah' would never have used the word "hras vam'ın 1 2 32, (of Pat 'ardhahias va Śabdo' idhamatrarudhah', and Hari 'pramanamova hrasvada, vanupattam pratſyate' | VakyaP II 309 10) --whore Kāśıkakara (of 1 2 32) and Bhattoji (of SK, Manorama, and SabdaK on 1 2 32) following RPr IIT 4 tasyodattatarodattadardhamatrardhameva va' clearly lays down an option between half 1 more and the half of syllable, but even su clor a construction 28 this, has been wilfully mishand led by no less in authority thin Bhattoji who following his own Sakha says 'ardham voti dırghabhi priyam' and the ŚR glosses it with 'etau paksu vaikalpikavityapag tom va sabdastu padapuranayeti bodhyam' But this is simply ab surd will be shown by 1 quotation from Svarastuke, a ms work in the Iibrary of Mysore (1024) which confirms the fact of option betweon the two views svutasyaiva purvardha, mapare tu manisipah 2bhı»viryaiva purvardham, miya chantyeva compitam || and so on For a similar farfetched statement of Kaiyata and Bhattoji of iny noto on 33 In fact, those nicoties seem to have been a matter of pretty puro theory, and there were certain Sakh29 (cf Vajasaneyi) who took the half of the svarita syllable as udatta and the other half as anu datta but this view 18 not supportod by the wording of the Prati fakhyas It runs For the observation that the ·26 first half mora of the svarita was higher than the high accent, cf 8 Varma, Critical Studies pp 161 163 , for a detailed discussion on the relation of accent with musi cal notes, cf Burnell, Arbi XLI XLVIII an acuto in the same word tho acute sylluble is a final, and the circumflex an ipitinl the latter is to be denominated pratrhata XX 3 thus in tatra, the enclitic svarita of tra would be tairoi ya njann, in tat te that of te would be pratrhata The practical im portance of these numerous sub divisions of an enclitic accent seeru of little importance and our trea tise does not notice them But Naradaśıksa agrees with VP when it states 55 This is the rule prescribing the enclitic svarita i na svarita arising in an unaccented syllable which 18 proceded by an acute, and not again immediately followed by an acute or circumflex The RPr III 9, 10, und C1 III 62-63 subdivido the enclitic circunflox into two forms the turi ovyanjana, where the circumfiexed syllable is separated from the acute by one or more consonants and the pidavitta (the RPr calls it vari rtla) where a hiatus intervenes The VP I 117-119 and the IP. XX 6, 7 teach the same thing but the formoi distid,uishes under the lairovyañjana 1 subform tarı ovi rama (having a pause between) 19 occuring when the acute is parted from its onclitic circumflex not only by consonants but by the avagraha, or pause which separatos the two parts of a compound word l'hus in projāvat the enclitic accent of vat would be the tairovirama while in prijanam that of nanı would be the tarrovyañjana simply The tarrovirāma, then would occur only in the Pada text The TPr doos not note this pada accent, but allows the namo tairovyañjana only to a circumflex which follows udatt spurvam yatkıſcit, chandası giaritam bhavet! esi sarvabahusvaras, tanovyanjanamucyate 11 avagrahat param yatra, svaritam syadanantaram tirovirumam tam vidyat, udatto yrdyavayrıhah || svare cot svaritam yatra vivrtta yatra sawhita otut padantavrtiusya laksanam śastracuditam || 56 This svarita is called ksarra The term comes from hipra "quick hasty' and marks the sandhi ay oue in which there is a gam of time, or a hastened abbreviited utterance of the semivocalized vowel All the treatises viz RPr IIT 7, V Pr 1 V 47, TP. X 16, CA III 58 state that in such a caso, when the former element of the compound is acute and the latter grave, the resulting syllable is circumflex, and all-RPr III 10 VPr I 115, TPr XX 1 CA ·: ز:۱۹ پر RESEA CITTUUTE MADRAS 4 27 III 58-apply to the circumflex, thus arising, the name of the com bination, ksaipra Naradnsiksa also teaches the same thing It runs iu varnau yadodattu apad yote yavau kvicit | unudatte pratyayo nityam, vidyat ksaigrasya laksanam | The gatya svar ita precisely corre sponds in origin and in quality with the ksarpra "The meaning of the term gatya is natural, original primitive The circumflex syllables to which it is applied are those which have that accent in their own right and always indepen dently of the combinations of the sentence (Whitnoy) It is distinct from the enclitio in as much 19 it is preceded by an unaccentod vowel or having no predecessor while the former invariably suc ceeds un acuto This arises froin the ucceuted Oll after i conjun ction of consonants ending with y or v, that is to say no syllable in Sinskrit hus an indopendent circumflex accent except as it rosu Its from the conversion of an ori ginal accented on u, short or long, into its conosponding semi vowel y or į before a following dissimilar vowel Whitney Thus kanya represents an earlı pi kani a, svar an oullier su ar and the like The jatya svar itu then corresponds in origin and in quality with the / sarpra and diffe rs from it only in period, arising in connection with the combination of syllables into words, rather than of words into a sentence for the definition of jatya svarita cf RPr III 4, V Pr I-111, TPr XX 2, CA III 57 and Narada siksa which reads sayakaram savam vapi, aksaram svuritam bhavet | na codattam purastasya, jatyasvaiah sa ucyate | Seo IP: XX 2, wblich reads - "ayakaravakaram tvaksaram ya tra svaryate sthito pade' nudatta purvo' purvo va nitya ityova jani yat 57 This is praslista or praśleşas varita The RP II 7 gives this namo to all those cases of combination in which two vowels, or a vowel and diphthony, are combined to gether into a single vowel or diph thong A svarita accent arising in connection with such a combina tion is, hy all the other treatises, called praślista The RPr III 8 says that a single teacher Mandu hoya hold that the praślista svarita urose in all cases of a praślesa combination, where the former ele mont acute and the lattor glave, and it is well known that the Satapathabr follows this rule of accentuation throughout Panını VIII 2 6 also permits it, when over the unaccented latter element is the initial of a word But this svarità is not at all of so frequent un occurrence as the general accep tance of this rulo would show it to be, because all the Prátisakhyas was ·28 agree in prescribing that a combi nation into which enters an uda tta vowel is itself udatta (seo 53), the acute element raising the gra ve to its own pitch All however allow the exception which forms the subject of the rule (58) and all but the I Pr allow also that, which 18 treated in this procept Cf Naradasıksa -- ikaram yatra paśyoyul, ikarepaiva samyutam | udattamanudattena, praślistam tam nibhodhata | If the vowel í and 1, both short, are fused together into a long vowel, this vowel has the praślışta svarita The illustrations cited by the com inentator accord to this for fur ther discussion on the subject, see Whitney, CA III 56 58 'udattamapadyate' does obviously mean svaritamapadyate' Svirita is implied, because there is no mon tion of udatta in the previous sutra Cf note on 53 This is an abhincheta svarita The RPr II 13 calls the absorp tion of initial (int) preceding final e and o the abhinihita sandhi, while the VPr I 114 and CA III 55 apply this title to the re sulting circumflex The TPr XX 4 has for the same accent, the slightly different namo abhipihata The VPr IV 59 and TPr XII 9 give rules for the occurr ence of the abhinihita circumflex in connection with those for the absorption of initial a, and define and name the accent in 1 114 and XX 4 respectively, when trouting the general subject of accent The RPi deals with both matters together, fust pioscribing the varit i III 7, and then Living it its distinctive appellation in III 10 lbe Naradasıhsa definos rubhumhita thus 0-0-abhyamudattabhyam, akaro nihitasca yali akaram yatra lumpanti, tamabhinihitam viduh || 60 In the commentary read fuccă nuccasandhisucci ova karyah? 61 A grave following a circumflex has the tono of acute All the other treatises RPr III 11, VPr IV 138 139, 1Pr XXI 10 CA III 71 lay down the same prin ciple, saying also distinctly what must be taken as implied in oui sutra (and the 01 111 71) that not only the single grive syllable which immediately follows the circumflex receives the acute ut terance but those also, which may succoed it, until the proximity of an acute ou circumflex (a rulo not stated in our treatise but occuring in everv other treatise , cf RPr III 12, V Pr IV 140, IPr XXI Il CA III 74) causes the voice to sink to the proper anudatta tone The KPr and 1 Pr use the term pracaya = accumulation, inde finitely extended number or serios" in describing this accent It may be interesting here to note the rule of rise and fall of the voice in connection with the Consecution of the accents, a sub ·29 or are yet pronounced at the pitch of acute l'his grave accent with the tune of scute is called pracayaaccumulation Cf RPr III 11, TPr XXI 10 Now the RPr III 33 decliros that the first portion of a circumflex should be uttered not at acute pitch, but with a yot hi,her tone and its latter portion it acute pitch Cf TPr I 41-42 also This boing the cuse, it is quite natural to suppose that the follow in, frive syllables should run at the same level, is the acute pitch But the grave, which next precedes in acute or circumflex 19 not of uute tone, but maintains its original character Cf RPr III 12, V Pr IV 110 IPr XXI 11, CA III 74 This is in brief the way of the rise ind fall of the tone in the pronunciation of the con secutivo dcconts For details 800 Whitney, CA ITI 65 on Ject fully treated by all other Pratisakhyas except that of ours A syllable may be uttered in the three tonos in anudatta, the low grave which belongs to an unaccented syllable, udatte, the high or acute, which is the proper tone of an accented syllable, and the svarita circunflex, which com bines in it a highor ind a lower pitch within the limits of the same syllable, and alwys results, as an independent accent, from the fusion of two originally separate elements, of which the one was acute ind tho other give A great complication however arises by the rule that in originally grive syllable, when it follows an acute, receives clitic circumflex that is to suy the Voico, when raised to the pitch of acute does not ordinarily come down with a loup to the level of the give but makes its descont in the course of the next following syllable We should iin on onco thus say TOLOIVO in met trane To this there is an exception, that the syllable which would other wise onclitic svanita reinains grave, if an acute or circumflex comes next after it, the theory being that the voice prepares itself for rising to the acute pitch by sinking before it Cf RPr II 9, V Pr IV 133, TPr XIV 31, C4 III 70 Thore is yet another complica tion, and it is this that the un accented syllables which follow % circumflex, although grave in value, 03 In Pada teut each word stands sepurate, and a Pratisakhya gives rules for its conversion into the euphonically combined text Ac cording to this precept the padla lelt sooms fundamental and may be taken as the foundation of the Samhita toxt Cf RPr II 1, TPr V 2, Yaska, Nır 1 61 64 Euphonic alteration takes place in the padas 66 Cf Panını II 4 71 In the com put a fullstop after 'ganasamasah' instead of after 2tr With regard to the gana, cf 'dadhipaya adı gana' on Papını II 4 14 which runs brahmaprajapatı, śivava gravanau' ·30 (vaiśvanırau Bur), skındavisakhau, parivrnthausik zu etc Seo note on 128 In the coin put a full stop efter 'bahuv icanam For kaundiny, cf Panını II 4 70, and for the plural in vanaspati ct P II 4 12 In the sentenco com pound 'vyapehsi sunarthya inplied phonetic theory, and laid down such rules as apply to words in their independent form, and it now enters upon what is the chief function of a Pratisakhyı 1o the 10,1stering of these changes, which occur when the padas of disjoined text are put together in the form of Sunuta Thus iule is hara applied to all what follows in the succeedin, chapters Other treatise hue equivalent headings, of RPr II 1, V Pr III 1, IP V1, C1 II 1 19 an adhr 2 a Inolo hita is 67 Aitareyı Arunyaha IIT 1 5 yives three definitions of Sumhita (1) Samhita is the interval between two syllables This is indefinite, because it does not show the naturo of interval and it sumy osts that the syllables in juxtaposition were independent units (2) Samhuta is the interval by which the cont or the quantity of two syllables Ty distinguished This muludes al cent and quintity and 18 satisfactory definition (3) Sam à pronunciation of two syllables which are neither entire ly separated nor united This suggests a sound view of syllabicz tion and is practically correct Sao S Varm Critical Studies p 105 See Yashi, Nir 1 6 1, TPr XXIV 1-4, Panını 1 4 109 with Patmalı (=puah piikisto yalı simnikarsch samslesih paraspa rena svaranam svalaruchanam vyu ñjananam sa samhita =) the union of separate words in euphonic com bination The second Prapathaka (note that the first is a later addı tion) of our treatise, coupled with the first six rules of the third, hus disposed of all matters of general 68 (a) Cf Panini V[ 1 125 The commontatoi uitos mil a vyam, bherr indra, dhar iya apah as oxa mples but in all those we find sandhu in the SV of Bonfey, JS of Cilind ind the text of Stoven son and the commentator humself olles dhiri upal 18 counterexi mple on 71 Moreovel, wo find exemplo where the pluta under 2005 euphonic alteration of tva 3 sya I 129, 165, IT 271, hva 3 sya I 142, tve 3 dya I 295 In five situations tho a stinding at the beginning of 2 pada is elided after I puta vowel Cfyrdhe 3 sman I 239 II 769 (JS his vrdhe 3 asinan), pano3 bhi rhe 3' mrtam II 1195, ayudhyo3 smakim II 1208, hito3' bhi II 279 Sandhi takes place when apluta is followed by a pluta, cf apsva 3 ntara I 512, abhy:3 tasya 1 556, ayatyu3 chanti II 101, hya 3 nga IJ 288, 860, abhya 3 rsan II 408, devatya 3 madam II 774, ·31 ᏚᎾᎾ SV II 508, sagdhu 3 şu II 927, śary dhyu 3 gradhanva II 1204 The exact kon of this suti may there fore be found somewhere else (b) Dirzhatua ind viddhi llibles with the short vowel count for a short tone, those with a long vowel count for long tone Fou the sile of musical composition short vowels nie ofton longthened Sometimes a long vowel is replaced by a short vowel CfPpS VI 70- 108 Besides the short and lon, tones there are the increased ou emphasized tonos, the viddh us According to burnell the last noto of a pai van is always emphasized ind, in fut, thore is alw sys found a lengthening of vowel or ayıbhavi (ayıbhava or ubh iva is the chin, from 1 i o into ayı or 11, in the same why there 18 irbhavi with the chan e fomu i into 11 PpS VI of a long syllable The dirgha can be clearly distinguished from the viddha syllable For details Vedic Chant р 43 For viddha in 44 cf Loması sıksa in 55 p 456 and 8 Varma Cutical Studios p 180 69 Cf RPr II 56, VP IV 87,1P. IX 16, 17,CA IIT 36, Panını l 1 14 70 CE RPr I 70, VP. I 94, CA 1 80, Panini 1 1 15 Macdonell, Vedic Gr P 67, Wackernagel, Altind Gil P 326 note ds 109-152 ) SV 1 1 3 1 2 vitave 1 2 1 changes into vi-itoya - 1 Which syllables undergo this kind of viddhi tau,ht in PpS v 1-118, and herein perhaps lios the solution of the difficulty mon IS 71 Cf RP II 61 with Uvata on it The commentator uites here 'kna Vaso stoliam hal yata a ava’I 228 in example But we rowd in IV 10 10 1 hai yata ava noted bi Uvati on R Pr II 74 Add to the list of examplos carkısada upo nul 196 (wanting in RV ), saca udyat II 102 noted by RPr II 60 But our treatiso does not soom to cover piba imam I 191 whoro does not stand at the beginning of a pada, but cf 253, in which ba-1 is expressly given staddur it RV 7 32 14 has been noted by RPr II 59, but tho samo stan occurs in SV with sraddha hi to l 280 Note also josuina indrah II 1140 registered by RPr IL 61 RPr vides for ova ignim RV 5 6 10 In the SV we find sandhi in such situations Cf evamıtaya II 716 Other examples noted by RPr II 58-66 are not found in our Sam hita and hence they are not noted by the commentator RPr II 67, 2 tioned above In itoya 2 i sundh does not take place, because the ? of itoya 19 vrddha = emphasized, lengthened There 18 no special notation for viddha II 66 pro The sign ? over the wyllable means a dirghie syllable, which according to Burnell is 'prolonged beyond the usual length, but appa rently doos not lose its character ·32 Papını VI I 126 prescribe nasa lisation for such uncontracted), but this is singularly absent in oui Samhita Hiatus without n isalısa tion is seen in IS IL 1 11 5 and MS I 4 12 60 14 CE Wackernagel, Altınd Gr I p 315 Oldenberg, RV I 469 72 This is an exception to 69 FOI corresponding rule, of Puni VIII 3 33 In the comm rond kım vavapanam, of bohtlink on P VIII 3 33 73 Exception to 74 74 For coi responding rules of RPr I 71 ( rodasime RV 7 82 noted by RP. IL 72 is not noted by RI) V pr I 93, CA I 75, 76 I Pr IV 11, 13, Panını 11 11 The dual 1 oi u never change to y or v nor is the former over proso dically shortened, though the lattor sometimes is lhe dual 1 m wy remain even before 1, og hari iva, but the contraction is written in upadhiva eto noted in 75 Cf Mac donell, Vedic Gr p 65, Wackern's gel, Altınd Gr I p 321 But there is no provision foi somo yauri adhi śritah SV II 546 in our treatise while others note it, cf RPr I 72, CA I 74, Padını 1 1 19 In TPr IV I the term prayralını soparated, implies that the vowel 80 designated 18 exempt from san dhr, while other treatises find it necessary to teach by a specific rulo that the vowels declared to be pre grhya are not subject to euphonic alteration Cf RPr II 51, VPr IV 87, CA IIT 33, Panını VI I 125 Our treatise does not even mention the term pragrhya and declares that such and such vowels do not undergo sandhi 75 l pulhauna and pradhiva are not found in SV but are met with in RV ? 39 4 Dampativ i occurs in RV 2 9 2 Clourly the rule is a later iddition to our treatise lor conosponding rules of RP, U J, 72 Papını does not provide for such itsos, while the Vittikara does, uf Kasika on Pupini 1 111 but he has been refuted by Kaiyatı who forms these exam ples pot with wa but with va, the by for in of zca Ct Kaiyata on Pat ñjali 1 ill, bhattoji, Śabda K on Panini 1 l ll, and I ñanendra SK Acsandhi, Macdonell, Vedic Gr p 65 n 12, 66 n 9 76 In the sutri ayavive - +0+0+ 10+ 0 ( = locative of a) Nyune = intih pad in Cf RPr II 35 , Panını VI 1 114 The word also unplies that sandhi is negatived m those situations only, where the metre requnos retention of a other places the a is elided, though at inay stind in the middle of a pada Cf pado' syehabhavat Ars 34 pado' sya 35 This clearly con firms the viow of Whitney who says "if there is any rule or system of rules, determining the ery various phenomena-which I can not but seriously doubt-I have been unable to discover any trace of it" CA III 54 In the commentary on ·33 navapare is brought down from 75 Whitney, CA III 04 Cf Padını avyapare VI 1 114, 79 Cf go agrıya RV 971 8 In RPr 'yakaradyzhsalam parum the commentary we may road go vakaradyapi va bh.vet' II, 35, afvam go ajinam go ajinikam VPr IV 73, though in another Read ajinikam in 80-81 sense, of course RPr II 49 pro 80 The scope of 79 80 and 81 18 scribes prayzhyaszõjna, and of all covered by one sutra of Papini, cf the examples citod on it SV bar VI 1 122 Note its borring on only one 'parivito atho' SV II the age of our treatise 252 = RV 9 39 5 On RPr 81 According to Patañjali and other II 50, pantama voandhasth RV 8 commentators Panını has not re 92 1 tallies with SV T 165-II corded gavaśvam etc He on tho 63 Compno 10 also V Pr IV 82 other hand prescribes (VI 1 123) 84 CA III 54, Pinını VI 1 avan adesa, thereby forming gava 115, Benfey, SV Einl XXXI gram, gavajiham etc The original In the commentary "trirakran sandhi of the compound go agra tagrah anat moins trih-10 such must have been givagra Cf examples are only three (a) taso Wackernagel, Altind Gr I р avratam, only once in 1 298 (b) 325, Macdonell, Vodic Gr p 66 sano avye (twice, I 529,532, in II D 7 601 529 19 repeated) Soo note 82 The exact scope of this sūtra 19 not on 280 'Akranta grahanit may known Two explanations may be mein, v not joined with conso offered (2) Sandhı does not take nants that make it liable to krama pluco if tre is followed by a Edoubling (16 y, r) the of avyo, tvo agne I 38 But as this is cover and avr itam is therofore not olidod od by 74, the commentator seems to CA prescribe only two rules, IT take the sutra 'niyamartham' 1,0 53, 54, with regard to this sandhi ro is not olided after tve alone, and and thus makes short shift of a subject that it may be omitted after te ete, which occupies lons passages of the as 19 done in yajatam te'nyat other Pratisakhyas (cf RPr II I 75 etc But in SV we invarı 35-50 V Pr JV 61 85, TPr XI ably find the retention of a after 1--XII, 8, Panini VI I 115-121) this te ind there are a host of and has cost their luthors 1 vast other examples where a is not oli deal of labour According to ded after te, tre etc Cf I, 53, 58, Whitnoy there is not in the wholo 230, 279, 324, 419, 439, 529,531, work another discreditable 533, 547, II 75, 85, 88, 89, 100, confession of unwillingnes 103, 108, 173, 181, 222, 836, 237 ability to cope with the difficulties 252, 262, 365, 367, 370, 372, 373, of an intricate subject For details 439, 587, 601, 612, 627, 629, 640, about this bandhi AV cf 974, 996 998, 1094, 1095, 1169 as in SO or in in ·34 19 omitted It may be argued here on the luthority of Patañjalı (= nanu ca bhoschandoganam satyamugriranu yaniya Irdhamekaramardhumoka rim cadhiyate sujate osvasunrte adhveryo odubhih sutam, cukum to envat etc 11 2 99) that a hulf p and oarise in such situations, and that iftor them a fact boi ne out by Nage-a, who says on the above quoted lino 'sujite e issetyakar alokh istu pra madil Ji (f the Comm on v Pr I 94 2,21nst it But tho su gestion fills to the ground, when we noto that this phenomenon was confined to the Sahl is of Satywuri uud Rina muy zs alone, who according to the statement of Bhattoji (yad y spi chindoganam madhye saty a mugri raniyanıy? adhimeharam ardhamokaram undhiyate sujate e aśvasunrte iti antah padasthasya vyaparasya tadıyaparsakhye dha mehuramarılhamohar am vidiu dhati tatham pratsakhya samakhya balurleva sarvas khasadhar ane smin sastre tasya na grahanam SabdaK 11 255) definitely noted it in their Pratisakhya (not availablo now) which must have been differ ent from oui trontise, which shows no trace of such a thing and which the Carana Vyuha clourly ascribes to the Kauthumus (B) The second explanation may be that the sutra is not meant for abhinchita sandhi alone and that like RPr I 73, VPr I 96, I Pr IV 10, and Papını 1 1 13 (Muc Vedic Gr p 66, Wachernagel, Al tind GII p 325) it prescribes pragı hy atva for tve, not only before a but before other vowels as well Cf the Comin on V Pr I 96 IP IV 10-11 t+ 0 1ddhuy ite huvih RV I 26 6 noted by RPr I 73 occurs in SV II 966, besides tro asah II 1171, occuring 10 times in SV but only twice before vow ols If we accept this expla nation we can o sily count for such che, otherwise not But two diffi culties move 2, unst this guess (1) The content is not in its fivour (2) Why to provide for tar alone, when we also have asme inilo se ibhur un IT 571 (the word occuring 13 timos in the Samhita) 3 The RPr II 34 35, V Pr IV 61,CA III 53 und PinVI I 109 trent the ablurrahia sanithi is of a with the precedins, diphthong or its absorption by the latter Our treatise on the other land pie scribes an actual loss or omission of the a, a fact in which it agrees with IP. XI 1 The elided a is to be very often road, as the evi donco of the metre shows sandhi of į and oliefore a ou,inally the sue as hefore other vowels Cf Vicdonell, Vedru Go p 66 Wachern gel, Altind Go р 324 Tho stanzas on which RPrº IT 37-40 44, 46 and 48 are based are not found in SV, hence there is no rule for thom in our treatise Wo find however (1) samkrandano' union ca 110 Wu I ·35 . nimisah SV II 1203 = RV 10, 103 1, not posed by our treatiso, but ro,istered by RPr II 41 (2) amho tipipaiti Il 700=RV 7 66 5 overlooked in lul, but noted in RPr 12 (3) orto pivo I 466- RI 2 22 4 noted by 78 and RP +2 (4) yavaso'visyan II 749=RV 7 3 2 covered by 76 and RPr +3, () malu trina malo stu 10 155 1 (1.P. 4))-- mihi trma muu arristio I 19. [0 yo udhyotyrsibhuih 11 647 -1 V 9 67 32 overlooked in lul but covered by RPr 47 RPr II 67, ugray okah 8 103 5 (wanting in SV ) puruştuta eko (winting in SV) bharık ojo 8, 98 10, sıvayav ova 1 113 1 Nasılı sation does not take place in SV and the last two exumples are read here blira ojo I 415 savayaiva 11 1102 See Benføy, SV Einl XXX1, Wackernagel, Altınd Gr I 314 Add visva ojasa I 372 in the comm The sutia,lihe 85 in restricted to the words o ding in a or a, otherwise m bhinattyojasa (SVI 297) 109 will be counteracted 1 aro 95 Say I tak stavno is not found in RV In abhyi 3 tisya (1 566 bliya Stevenson Benfey, SV YAIT) sandhi takes place, becauso r hero does not stand at the beginning of a pnd 1 and so it is in miñj intyrsisana II 236 and yasyrkı abhih 11 938 but howy to provide for (1) abhi Yeye dohain II 52 where also r does not stund it the beginnin, of a padi (man serum II 946 = 1. V 4 56 7 boing covered by 71) (b) adhyetyrsıbhil II 646 asyojisi II 759 where itou,lit to have counter acted 109 T would rather live this sūtia like the following one restricted to the words endi, in a or a nlone, and would guess the solution for abhi rtasya in 68 And the fict that this sūtia is moint t) Cover cisos similar to those monti oned in RPr II 35, 64 corrobora tos my view 86 Cf RPr II 62 In such situations a or a is nasalised in the RV Cf Si The ex unples citod by the comm entilor 18 not found in any vedi Thoy are cortunly Vedık and are druun from some lost work In SV I 62 anrhetsam stends at the end of the stanzı, hence it hus no bear ing on sandhi Similar cases dealt with in RPr II 64,65 Exam ples like pathu indra 1 453 are not covered by 71 and the comin entitur could havo easily citod them here but we do not know if these were included in the Sakan dhvadı, an which was certainly different from the yanı referred to in salandhvadisu piirupim va cym i artika on Pinm VI I 94 providi, parar up (quite the contivy to oui sutra) ın sakındhu, harhindhu etc Voto the form of the sutri Wo would rather have Śwka andhuhá dinam 88 For conosponding rule, soe RPr II 74 But what about bhuvanın vyase IT 307 = vyasa RV 9 80 ·36 1 37 Noto nakı indru ( 203 = niki rindra RV 4 30 1, the latter being common 89 This is to counteract 181 93 The punctuation in the commenta ry may be emended to - uhhavekam (1Pr X 1) vika rah sasthānah (91-92)-ıtyuktam The contraction was not so very common at the time, when Samhi tas were composed This is shown by the fact that at several pluces the motre requiros hiatus Cf(2 + a) stavetatithih 1 81, devayan nye 118, indraśvam 240, brahmarata 257, sıñcadhva 385 aśvadrı 398, devaja 419, pavasvindhasa 470, sutasyandhas sh 500, sunvanayan dhasah 553, somandhasa II 327 prasya 1118, narva 1127 a ta in I 70, 420, II 663 963, 1079, 12 15, 1224 Indraynı forms four sy llables in I 281 II 203, 204, 341 342, 343, but three syllables in II 9 10 266 267 269 423 424 4 25, 923, 924 925 926 1046, 10 65 a ta in II 964, 1+un Il 541 774 977, utu in IT 724 For details soo, Benfey SV Find L The rulo is general in lohnı and Veda For corresponding sutras, of RPr II 15 17 V Pr 1V 51, TPr X 2, CA III 42, and Papını VI I 101 Note the examples tvam (tval am) and sury isya (su ül yasya ) The Padatent divides sūrya only oncu at this place for a detailed discussion on SV Pp and RVPp cf Benfey, SV Einl LVII--LX 94 Namin All vowels except a and a are called namin, because they tend to produce the natı or conver 81on of a followings into s RPr I 65, 66, 76, CA II 29 have the samo term, while V Pr IV 34, 46 etc use bhavin in its place Cf Bha ttoji, ŠabdaK 1 1 2 64 The use of astha for a, a a 3 is noteworthy and so is ustha in 281 Sandhya -- sandhija CF Uvata on RPr I 2, "akarasya ikareni ukarena ekarona okarona ca saha sındhuu yanyak garani nispadyante and this 19 exactly the view of our treatise in fiti sindhyaksirani p 2 But here in 94 and 95 it uses sandhya for er and dvirarna for arc of Panini Cf bhattoji Sabda K 112 58 'Slisy amanı vırnadvayasadrśavayavatvāt enndhiyaminamahsiram sandhya ksaramityinvartha pūrvacarya b] ddhi ecam sañjna" The term dor varna may be yogarūdhi for yung (second and fourth in RPr XITT 39 of Uvita on I 37 and 'may signify that ar and 276 2ra composed of two varnas i AQ 2 and both these elemonts are equal being one mora och a view singularly attributed to Sakatayana Cf RPr XIIT 39 Kalanırnayaśıksa 6 Patañjalı on Panını VIII 2 106 S Critical Studies p 180 Varm? on Enda is cited by Uvata RPr IT, 16 But in Naiyoyasa kha Benføy hus noted aindram in SV I 129 459 Cf SV Ein] XXXII In I 377 aindram is not a-indram, but means Indra sambandh In kveyatha 1 271, virayondave 360, brahmondraya 390, pavamă ·37 nayendave II 1, prendre 89, some ndraya 313, nend, a 1051, preta 1216, preddho 371 paprathosa I 379 etc metre requires hiatus Cf Benfoy SV Einl L For corres ponding rules of RPr II 16, 17 VPr IV 53, 54 IPr 4, 5, CA III 44, 45, and Pınını VI 1 87 In a few cases e is first changed to dy by 111, y is omitted by 159, and then a 18 joined with the following 2 by 24 Such instances are recorded by RPr JI 70, where meha pasta RV 5 39 1 corrosponds to our 'ma ihu nastı 1 345 Cf Nir TV 1 4 whero Scold in vain tries to 500 1 closer relationship bet ween the SV and Nu Cf The Ni ruhta p 14 This irregular sandhi is frequently met with in Nai, o yad uvitum wluch has dvitiyon drah 1,6 117, truivendrell 1 6 1 1 3 Soo benfey, SV Einl YI YIIT 19 applied to Bhãsã and Veda alike, which is wrong, because 76, and 77 are not applicable to Bhāsa The sūtri obviously is an addition, made probably at the time, when our treatise underwent its final redaction For corresponding rules,cf svadırerinoh aksadūhinya mupasamkhyānım || the two virti kas on Pinin VI I 89 See also VPr IV 58, where the commen tator cites turya ūhi | turyauhi | VS 18 27 97 For pirtral correspondence cf RPr II 72 (which notes praisayuh=pra + is uyuh Macdonell, Vodic Gr p 64) and 'pr uduhodhrudhyesai Syesu 1 yırtık on Papini VI 1 89 with Bhattojis noto --"yasta 15a uñcho yasca isa gatıhımsadarśa nosu tayordır, bopadhatvat isah isyah tatrad, une pres sli piosyah' Thus will mule the difference bet ween our treatise and the vartika quite cler 98 For similai rule, cf RPr II 71 (Macdonell, Vedic Gr p 64) VPr IV 55 56, I Pr X 14, and Pinini VI 1 94 VP IV F6, 'ojatyojoro kes un' provides for sahojalı etc (but note tho SVPp sahah | jah on II 1206) which is covered here by 99 In our tre itise the phenoinonon is restricted to upasaryas, but in CA III 52, TPr X 14 its scope has been extended to words like sakalya and so on 99 Cf Panını VI I 95 and 'otvosth zyoh samaso va a vartıka on P VI 1 94 Our treatise goes further 95 For corresponding rulos cf RPr II 19, 19 V Pr IV 57 IPr ! 6,CA III 50 51, and Panını VI 1 88 In the commontiry dvivir nam varnim ipady ate is the correct readın, 'asthopedhim prikrtam sooms botter Thou, h the contric tion is written, the original vowels must sometimes be restored Cf praitu I 56, naitaśah II, 43, pra frasyauhaso II 94, sutaryauasah II 1118 Soo Benfey, SV Einl L, Mcdonoll, Vedic Gi p 54 96 Note the use of bhasãy im Shis implies that (like Panını) the rest ·38 > and declares pararūpa to the com exception to II 32 For the corre pounds in general sponding rule in Papini cf VI I 101 For corresponding rules, cf C4 128 III 46 (and 47 which is an exce 103 V Pr IV 59 provides for aprktas ption to 48), TPr X 8, Papını VI only No corresponding rule is found 1 87,1 1 61 All proscribe the in RPr, CA, CPr and Panını But sandhr in a like manner RPr II 800 'rto ca trtiyasamaso a vartika, 32 and V Pr IV 49, however trout ou which Bhattoji cites sukhona at very differently, merely prog Italia-suhhartah SK Acsandhi cribing that both a and a become 104 Exception to 101 a before r, without requung the 105 For corresponding rules of other conversion of the latter into a de treatises soo CA III 48, TPr X fact stated by our treatise in 102 9, Panını VI I 91 (va supyapısaleh and by Panini in VI 1 128 92) and VPr IV 59 which how 102 101 covers RPr II 32 and VPr ever restricts the operation of the 49, but implies rabhava (guna) 4 rule to the proposition a alone well, while 102 nagatives the same Tho TS extends this contraction in the opinion of some in the to propositions ending in a, upårc authors of RP and V Pr and chatı, see Whitney CA III 47 others, who follow them in thit wat 1Pr III 9 In the post vedıc luog ter Thus it seems to provide for ua,o this contraction was extended yatha rnam RV 8 47 17, yathi to all prepositions ending in a Cf rtavah 10 11 5, yatha rtuśo 10 Macdonell, Vedic Gr p 64 n 2 98 10, 224 13,2 28 5 and so 106 Cp' pravatsatar ıkımbalavasanırnad on, and also makes provision for asapumine" avartika on Panını VI mahna rte SV II 1137, if we con 1 89 struo eke as pujartham The comm Note its bearing on the date of entator on ŚŚS XII 13 5 makes the composition of our treatise an interesting statement, which 107 Cf Pani VI 1 77 may throw some light on the difference 108 An exception to 107 Cf Padını between the Rgvedaśakhas On 'na VII 127 The declaration of hra rte śrantasya sakhyaya devah'RV 4 sva implies pragrhya sanna Cf 33 11, he says 'apadruto nama san patanjali on P VI I 127 dhir baskalănam prasıddh sh tasyo 109 For corresponding rules, of RPr daharanam' Are we to understand II 21, VPr IV 46, CA III 39, from it, that the followers of other and Panini VI 1 77 The I Pr X sakhas did not admit this gandhil 15, however iestricts the conser For a list of the examples like sion into a semitowel to 1, i and those quoted above, cf Benfey SV uma restriction, which inight have Einl XXXII RPr II 64 19 boon made by all, since finul û is an ·39 no clear saving of Ono always pragrhya and final r where in the Vedas comes to stand before an initial vowel Cf Whit noy, CA III 39, Modonell, Vodic Gr р 65 n 4 The fact soons to have buon noted by the authors of our treatise who separately for med sutra 107, which is obviously meant for us yes seen in Bhaga alone Were it not so, the order of the sutr is would have been asventistanın 107, rrehe 108 and there would have accrued 1 sutr We may also note here tho close resom blance between our treatise and Sabdanuśasaun of the Jaina soka tayana, who lived in the time of Amoghavarsa I, and wrote his work about Saha 789 The sutras ro as follows RT SA Papini रमृस्थमखे, अखे I 73 इको यणचि 6 1 77 हखमेके हखोवापदे 74 इकोऽसवर्णे TISTO TFT अन्त स्थाम् ऋत्यक 75 ET 127 27 128 It is clear from the above, that the author of Śabdanuśnsana w 19 well family with the terminology of our treatise, and that while adopt ing some terios from RI on from some other incient common souico he in the matter of systenuntisation closely follow od Panini In the commentary RP II 32 is covered by asze (107) hiasun meke is to cover Panını VI I 128, which provides optional pragrhya tva for abodhi agnih eto In the comm read 'svarayorityadhikarah | vyabhicara iti cod vikarah sasthåna ityuktam' sasthanah of RPr II 21 is covored by 92 of our treatise The word antasthā designatos yan of Papini and its use in famı nine gonder (cfantastham svam RPr II 21) may be significant Does it not hint at the important fact that Indian Grammarians, re garded semivowels not as essential ly diffurent from 2, u etc but merely a by-form of the same (an tastha vrttı), form with which they had very often an interchan go (as in the samprasaranaform of the vowel gradation)! And the fact that in reality there was no interchange between the so called strong and woak forms and that both of them sxisted side by sido even in Indo European times, sooms to have boon hinted at by Yaska, who, while discussing the ways of deriving words incidental ly remarks 'tadyatrı svaradanan tarantasthantardhatu bhuvatı tadelopahtunum sthananıtı pradısa atı' Nur II 1 2 Cen we not infer from dviprakrtinai.l that both iyaji, and 18tá, and vásatı and us mási are original forms ? 110 (a) The corresponding rule in Papini sooms 'tayoryvavaci sam hitảyam VIII 2 108, which coun teracts VI I 101 in agna 3 yin dram, and VI 1 127 in agna 3 yáśå, a fact corioborated by Kašika which ruas 6 ·40 kinta yanā bhavatiha na siddham, yvavidutoryadayam vıdadhiti tau ca inamı svarisandhisu siddhau sakılıdirghavıdhi tu nivartyau | ik ca yada bhavati plutapurvah, tasya yınım vıdadhaty spavadyam tena tayosci na sakaladır, ho, yansvirabadhanameva tu hetuh || Like hau atra hau | añja, we have to assume some vowel in 'syr gnai' and 'ın 31', as is clear from 'svar yorityadhikarah' (b) zatih 10 idding : or 14 after a, or 2 after o About the defi nition of gati seo Simon Pps 530, for ai iod ayı seo Simon, Pps Lin p 527, note 2 (the 21-bhuvi is dealt with in Pps III 1-4, 242) In between the x ind a vowol ay or a like sound 19 inserted in the ganas of SV Cf Weber Ind Stud IV 252 Oldenber, RV I 457 ff, Bloomfield on hs 71 19 9 The y before 1, 1 ind e 14 phoneti cal, such a phenomenon 19 recorde ! in Pali where y und , ire inserted before lande Fordetuls, if Wik ernigel, Altınd Gi I p 335 note 111 Cf CA IIT 40 V Pr IV 47, IP IX 11, lo and Panini VI 1 78 RPr II 20, 28, 31 however con vert ar and au directly into a and cand o directly into a, adding that after the a and a which come from o and 676 i v is inserted except before a labial vowel seo Macdo nell, Vedic Gr p, 67, Wackernagel, Altind Gr I p 326 (274) In the examples cited by the cominen tator, the reading of B is preferable y is dropped by 159 according to Nagi, while according to other teachers it may remain Benfey's SV supports the reading of B 112 Our treatise converts a n to visar juniy, when it 19 procoded by any lon; vowol, be it 1, 1, ū ou ř The visirjaniy whon preceded by , becomes y by 117, only to be droppod by 158, but when proce ded by other long vowels, it is redu cod to r by 11. und an anusvari consonitel elowent is inserlod by 185 between tho vowel ind then The price , horo ly thon is follows -- pudhu + 11 = pundhuh + 11(112)- piridh tuti ( 115 )=pudhry nati (1) This proces exactly vreo with that of the C 1 accor din, to wluich the pu scoss in upobi ddhiveho would be like this upah buddhin tihni - upabudilah + iha 10 11 27) = upalıç'dhah + ihn (nosaltu lon of the procedin, vowel by 1 67)=upobuddhiy+iha (II 41) - upobuddha iha ( II 21) This 18 in omple of 110 procedød by bon, but in orupples like ituu utsijate whoro n 19 preceded by a vowel other thin the CA inakes some diffor once Instoad of following tho loisonable process of chanzın; n into visarjanıya and loiving it for rule IT 42 to chu nge the latter into r it directly converts the n into , by II 29 The RP. IV 69 70, 71 also change no into r and then prescribe nasal: sation of the preceding vowel by IV 80 Whitney's remark about ·41 RPr on CA II 29 sooms wrong within a pada, cf Oldenberg, RV Similarly VPr III 142 specifies 1 428, 429 A For the detailed the few passages in which the con treatment of such a n, cf Wacker version of r to r occurs after i and nagel, Altınd Gr I p 330-32, u See also I Pr IX 20 which cha Macdonell, Vedic Gr p 68 nges n to r, when it is preceded by Before P, finel no, when etymolo 1, and to y when it is proceded olcally is equal to ns, sometimes by a becomes--mli, cp nrmh pahi When compared with other Pra For detruls soe Wackernagel, Altınd tisakhyas, the process of our treatise Gr 1, p 331 This change does not (1 that of changing a n to visir soom to have been noted by our juniya and then to r) seems unne treatise For the different readings cossarily cumbrous, yet in fact it is for nr pahı SV II 594, cf Ben wellfounded and correctly carried fey, SV Einl XXVI out It should be noted that wall 113 This is to restrict the scope of 112 the vises in which this loss of a On viśvam apud visah II 205, cf final ni occurs are accusativos plural Benfey SV Einl XXV oi nominatives singular (is vidvan) which ouginally possessed a final 114 Cf RPr IV 80 VPr III, 131, 132 [Pr XV 1 CA I 67, and sifter the n ind the loss of the n Panını VIII 32, with Bhattoji's before the sıbılınt, with a compa romark about the Taittiriyas Our nyiny nasalızition of the preced treatise however, prescribes ranga 10,4 vowel, and then the disappou in the case of a only, in case of 1 ance of ho sıbılent itself, is ind u it declares the insertion of other cases aflei 7 ind before 1 anusverk, (185) which it regards vowel, are unquostionably the cli se of the sandhr as it finally pres & conson intal element I Pr XV 2, 3 record this phenomenon ents itself Whitney, CA II 27 Our trentise then by bringing in as a view of some teachers the Visarjiniya sa step in the rakta soo raktasandño nunasikah RPr 1 36 SV 1 571 reads process, (like C1 II 27; has a de cided theoretic advantage over a kalasım madhumantsoma nah other Pratisal hyas Like those tre sidali 1 atises Panını (VIJI 3 9 and the 115 Visarjoiya whether produced from series of sutras prescribing nutva nor 8 is implied here The exam VIII 3 1-12) also prescribes the plo "vitraha nibhih sooms illchange of n tor chosen Cases in which visarja Padamardhıye etc At the end niya is preceded by a are covered of a pada-an-in-un remain unch by 117 Here the visarjaniya is anged before Vowel For passa strai, htaway changed to y and ges in which is unchanged then dropped by 158 By 'dhra in IS > For an ·42 19 iguh,' the commentator probably moans 'rathebhıradhriguh SV I 373, where visarjanıya has been turned intor dobha may he omended to dorbha For corios ponding rules so0 RPr 1 67 IV 27 VPr IV 36, TPr VIIT 6 СА II 42, 43, According to Panını the visarjaniya is first con verted into 8 by VIII 3 34 and the same is changed intor by VIII 2 66 See Macdonell, on euphonic combinations of final before voiced sounds in Vodic Gri 11 P 70 RP I 82-86 Uvata are not found in the SV 87 ma nastarabhinataye 8 3 2-II 770 88-92 Examples cited by Uvata are not found in the SV 93 svardrsum, svoryuvah, svarvid ih svarvidretc (VP. I 166) svo ara pah 6 75 19,, a coun ter eximple, is found 10 SV II 1226 with an important variant 91-99 No olimplo 100 records exceptions vivo mado siram 10 21 1-1 420, mrhyro 2018? 1 157 1-IT 1111 101 sthatai huipam & 46 1 1-1 193 jarita rjlam 10 42 2 of I 39 10. dosivustardhiya Vl I 7-1 14 of 1 Pr I 165, up pi dja nto adhvaram 1 coun terexample 1 74 1 IT 727 7 116 This rule is applied to those words whose final visarjiniya ropresents an original , and not s and in which accordingly thoi 19 luble to rozppear before sonant initial even though a or a piecode corresponding rule if C1 IT 44 which ro,isters those words of which the final visirjanii 18 chin ood to, The RP. I 76-103 reherrse words of which the final spirant is rephila and in IV 27 piescubes the conversion into , of the rephita visarjanıyı boforo so nants And here I may mitted to give a detailed compari sion of the RV and SV with rogard to this sandhu with special reference to the RPr RPr I 79 gobhnaksah, 29 & coun ter example RV 0 107 I-II 348 80 usi budhah I 44 9- 1 40 Several exam ples occur CE SI 82-86 Fxam los cited by lor be per → 103 durdurut samasi jo vi khini 5 32 1-1 315 All the examples mentioned above are covered by 116 of our treatise The VP I 160-166 IT03 suunlar list and ti ko rule for the alteration (IV 36) IP, VIII 8-15 treat similar words - For a detuled treatment of the lind of, when it is final, cf Wacker ·43 sᎾᎾ nagel, Altınd Gr Ip 335, for a list account of an actual process of of root stams in-2, and-ur, cf Grass phonetic transition Instances like mann W 1663, for a list of words bhuvayrtı (142) indicate that there in which r is original, cf Macdo was a tendency to pronounco y in nell, Vedic Gr p 72 n 3, for irre plico of 8 (=z) at least in some gulnr examples, cf Benfey, SV parts of the country, a fact clearly Finl XT For ahi ova -aharoi i, borne out by Papini VIII 3 17, aksı induh - aksarinduli, udho 18 Some examplos of the insertion ūdhni avo - Ivar, Macdo of y in place of s (=z) indeed nell, Vedic Gr p 72 n 4 Wnchor occur in SV Thus SV I 14 roads nagel Altınd Gr 1 p 334 Soo (in some mss ) bharantayomasi, and also Benfey SV Finl XL und II 569 ajar ayıdhanah (in St) Seo our treatise 176 also Kathakopa II 11 (Cal od ) 117 (a) The rule prescribes, that visarja yiyistaka No*e also the tendency niyż when preceded by { is con (in the Punjab) to pronounce y in verted into y both whon followed place of 8 (=7) oven in English by a vowel or A consonant Hor words like pleasure For a thorough putially coni esponding rules of philological treatment of 8 (-2) TPr IX 10 CA IT 41 rho cf Wacl ernagel Altind Gr I V Pr IV 37 also prescribes the p 337, Macdonell, Vodic Gr p 70 change of the spirant to y before VPIV 39 TPr IX 9, and Alision but restucts it to the cises (III 5) diop the spirant, when of a yıs ir jiantve preceded by a it is proceded by a and followed by kanthyrio a and i The RP a sonint consonant, without chan follows a mothoi different altoge sing it to y The RPr II 24 ther It does not chanzo e spirant declares that the spirant, along to y, nor does it prescubo its oli with the preceding vowel, in such sjon but teaches (II 24, 25, 27) u situation, is changed into a Gon that when & pu ent is precoded erilly there is 20 Sanlle utter hy a long rowol and is followed by the olision of y, but exceptions a vowel it becoinoy a and when ire lotod in RPr II 68, 69, for situted in similar i reuinstance which our troitise maho, no pro but piecoded by 1 short vowel Cfsnaamna RV114 11 it boumno recorded by luPr II 69 (b) It is to be noted that the mam SV II 1045 y pro scribed by our troulise is step to 118 (f RP IL 3), V Pr its disapper ince by 158 It is I Pr IX 8 und CA II 51, which difficult to ascertain whether the alone of all the Pratisakhyas con conversion into y 18 I matter of verts a spirunt into 26, which, of pure theory or whether it olves Comse whou coin biped with the 1 VISION = SO IV 4., ·44 7 1 preceding a becomes e, a process SV Einl p XLII CA II 52 in which it exactly agroos with states that the Visarjanly of these Papini VI 1 114 words is not convertible into r, a 119 Cf RPr II 33, VPr IV 43, TPr procopt utterly uncalled for in that IV 7, CA II 5 and Panını VI treatise, since no precept has been 1 113 For the sturting point of given there which should autho this sandhi of Wacker nagel, Al niso the conversion into , of the tind Gr I р 338, Macdonell, final of those words Cf Whitney Vedic Gr р 70 on CA IT 2 For the corres 120 Cf RPr II 70 pondin, Yule iu Panini cf VIII 121 parito siñcata (St) but 'parito sin 2 70, 71 with Bohtlink on them cata' Benfey Cf SV Einl p XXIV 125 Cf RPr IV 45-64, VPr 'II 21 Hors-ito probably stands for TP. VIII 23, CA II 62 and ita +u (cf kV Pp Y 107 1, paris Papini VIII 3 46 In the comm itah) as 80 cit-si+u-cit and not ‘yrśah kumayato' seems better But sah-cit See also adoputo 1 187 of Bhattoji suunase kim ? yasah Cf Wacker nagel, Altınd karoti Gr I p 339 Macdonell, Vedi 126 No outly conosponding rule is Gr p 70 n 7 In the comm found even in Punni In the ‘idam ca a īpagrahanım - athutanı comm reud kame instead of ka yathagi hitan nipatyanto' Uvatn main ya iti ? zy iskim il' 19 doubt on RPr V 17 ful ya may stand for atisaya ay 13 122 It is an exception to 116 Cf rūpa kumah, in that case would be ratrirathantaresu rutvim vacy im counter example and may be eme & vartıka on Papını VITT 2 69 oded to 'dysh kamalı' 123 This also is an exception to 116 17 Ct, VP. III 30, Pinini VIII 3 CE TA 4 40 1 38 do the comu lead wyaskam 124 The onginal form of udhas w 19 instead of rejeshan and wasya in udhar, as shown by the equations, place of catwasya outer-udder Thus there was a clash 128 Instead of 'k vutaskutadinim of between 116 and 117, to prevent our tratise Panini has 'kaskadısu which the word is included here VIII 3 48, and I suspect that According to RPr I 96 avar also here he has placed hasha, the 18 rpphita The V Pr and IP, do second word in the gani not take notice of these words treatise, at the head simply for RPr I 96, 97 however make arar brevity's sake The two ganas run and wdhar as rophita Cf Uvata kaskadi on these rules See also Wacker kuskah, kautaskutah, bhiatus nagel, Altınd Gr 1 p 339, Ben putrah, sun iskarnah, sadyaskalah, fey GGA 1846, 831 b 1847, 1486, sad yashrīļ, sadyaskrah, (but cf of our ·45 (P III ani hi - sidyah krenz, sudynh huomu in LSS 130 Red in the comm nyevampruma VIII 3 1, 3) 1 ans) in, sarpisku nam instead of nyel impri The nilil a dhumus pilim (if Thittoji citi ions show that this sutra cor Son P VIII 345) y ujuspiti un, responds to Panini VIII 3 45, if so, nyaskantah tunisl indu, lyas then the use of samar thye is quite hand in mod espndah bluus uh, the revoiso of that in Pinini VIII 2P) this unch 3 11, which corresponds to our 131 kautiskutadi 131 Punctu ito mithunakhye vı bhav I cut isl ut ıh, I wnell, puli diny itil purosur bhivah | asputrah, sir ispadu, udhuspedem tini | purvayoge etc is 110t clear (P VIII 3 17) ay ispatım (VIII The word si occurs in 187 only, 3 46 49 ) Pisos) im ih (VIII and that suti his nothing to do 340) Ayaspindah (medaspidi with this phonomonon in k osl idi), pituspiuto il (tho word 1 Ct Pinni VIII 3 44, with lattva doos not (laui in JV SV and bodliini on SK of Bhuttoji AV (f luP 59 61 Ilu ji hues Bo Ct 111 IIT 23, IP1 VIII 24, putuh puluh on VI 13, ind CA IL 63 und Panini VIII 3 41 histule jut di inl is) dı) sun ispu Bi Ili III 24, 61J 63 and til suutspath (in the intenor Puu VIII } 11 olipodi covered by 147 Pinun Bilo onospondin, zult is found in colors this by VIIT 351) suns the hill why s but of Pioni lain di (mimo to both 11 3 4 In the comm read The Love comprison will show losmidisul lie ? dushli odam that the Ins of our trotz salatim (1 ham - cludo in) Soo tly differed from thoso if mmm Jacobiliz2 139 i biolhorn, u futoutumed by the connoilo Ind Ant 16 315, Epigr Ind tor on 66 whoroho rods 'SINI I bi 2 180, Wicontyol, Al Swiu (10 UN 1) ind i vi i tind a P. 311 note Thiu, un deportiu u inbibi 16 In the comm vond zaudhazeyah putiti, en is im is the comporthuis (-vadhu uputyun) with tho didhipeye di (11 137 39 1 toimi VIII 3 13 I lb) of Pumi which runs did ulconiespondence of C1 II 64 Impey ist, sivavarst av alu skandar 110 I inimu VIII 3 il visalhau, punjikel zusliu, ind It Bli IV 47 VP1 III 23 1Pr VIII ?! (11 63 und Puma Noto the intluonge of Pipini VIII tl lol u shit im on the commontator Ho also puts 11'1 VI 30, and I min 1111 Two at the head of the 3 40 129 sady ishala is covered by Pinini 142 Lanını VII } 40 In the um VIII 3 48 Tvad 'pui iskıtımını | muy iti 101 lol pir Soon ᎾᎾ Di bo ·46 tam | Cf 'Madiah karam vina IT 745 and RV 6 16 35 [RPr yante - niryntayantı' Bohtlink on IV 611 but how pituh pita in AV Pınını 1 3 36 svibhirurya Is 18 ? 19, 3 46 59 [cf Whitney doubtful I would prefer 'svabhi on CA IL 73] and munuh pita I i bhūyatıūpah (-bhūmru yatam 355 [where RV hiss and which rūpam siriram jos in) is so notod by RP. IV 64] svalı 143 R Pr IV 43, VPr UI 62, CA patılı II 892, ind svah poti II II 65 ind Panini VIII 350 351 - RV svarpati in 9 19 2 In 144 This is to deny sinonimples lile RV we find yaspatih in 5 51 1. sadhal kr SVI 217 but yah patih in 10 85 39, pu 146 R Pr IV 44, 45,56, VPr III 26, 31, i vyzs prtih in 10 48, 1 but pūr wak putih in 1 153 4 which are IPr VIII 29 CA II 66, 67 ind noted by 1.Pr 1 V 51 Panını VIII 351, 53 I do not 148 Ilus is to 'lvoids in cases like know why the commentitu bios brindhuh pun al ah included 'pitusparı' [RP. IV 66] 149 Cf IP. IV 5) 1Pr VIII 29 among the counterov unples, whore VP, III 25 C111 80 and Panni 'divah pu'II 34 may sufoly be VIII 3 53 placed For the practice of writ ing visar gas boforo sinds of 151 Befuro mutes immoditely follo Benfey, ST El XLVI wed by sors finel s regululy becomes visnjiniya In RV occi 147 Cf RPr IV 42, 46 49, 49 53 sionally the sibilant disuppo us Cf V Pr III 28, 35 36, IPr VIII Macdonell Vedic Gr 1 71 27, CA IT 70-74 ind Panini Foi corresponding rules of VIII 3 53 somaspiti II 22 1 19 IP IV 31 IP IX 3, and correct, according to our trentise Pininı VIIT 3 35 Soo also Bha but cf somali prtih RV 9 101 6 (so noted hy RP: ttoji on P VII 3 37 Cf priyah kszpah II 1176 visvatali prthuh I 393 -II 595 152 Cf CA II 25 Panni VIII 3 6 corect according to RT [cf divah puthuh as I counteroxample According to Whitney CA II 25 on IP VIII 28, Panini VIII 18 in interpolation, but mirk tho 3 51 Buhtlınl] but of visvatas order of this and the following ng prthuh RV 8 4 specially sūtru in CA and our treatise noted by R Pr 53, 57, V Pr IU 133 CE CA II 27 Virtually a sibilant 27, C4 II 78, and Panını VIII is insertod before the mute of the 3 49, and such are divisprthivyah same class with the latter, and the 9 31 2 and vihtasprthuh 2 21 4, nitsolf is noplaced by the nasalısatı not found in SV and similar is on of the preceding vowel (see 185 ) divasprsthe on Panını VIII 3 Cf CA III 133 36 Tho TPr V 53 pituspita is correct in sy 20 gives a general rule for the IV 51) IS ·47 a insertion of the sibiiant before all voiceless palatals, carebrals and c and V 21 gives all the cases in dentals Cf Whitney on CA II which it does not tako placo The 27, Bopp Comparative Gr 1 468 isertion before t 19 noted in V 478 479 'bhavumstiha' of the com 14 and all the cases of its occuren montary may be corrected to 'bha coire counted The hP IVE vumstil ito Cf the commentary on registers ll'those words before CA II 27 which the sibilant is added, 18 Lile CA II 27 the precept of well as before cas before t, IV Cur treatiso also looks more like 76 See Panni VII 37 In a rule of General grammer rather the RV this insertion OCCUIS th in that of a particular grammer only whon the sibilant is etymoloji or Pratisal hy? This fict should cilly justifiod that 19 in the nom be notod evoiy now and then in sig and uc i misc almost our treatise, and this actually exp exclusively thou, h not invariably lains the name Rktantra vyakar before ca (if 151) and cul The nam of this pratısal hy. ongin of the insertion of a sibi 154 Rc=the your of the samin, and lant 19 historical Formerly the not the Ry vedl Siman form i insertion of 2 sibilunt bofore e ind sotusama und sul riyasamapana etc t was made after I word which are excluded Aftoi śukriya wo was entitled by origin to 1 finals expect some counterexample Cf Macdonoll, Ved G1 p 69 Wacl 155 Ct Pauni VIII 3 12 Examples on na, ol, Allind Gul P 333 ind quoted by the commontator do not the note on p 332, I imu in 516 in SV No corresponding A note but in course of time the rule is found in other Pratsukhyas truo character of the incortads wis 156 budesusasy • 19 for, otten and its sphere of occuro I mispiint Road nce being considerably extended, lubedeslasya Cf II II SO, VP III 15-17 IP V 15, CA it came to be appliod to cases, to which it did not historically bolon, II 57, and Hanini VI 1 132, 133 Phim seduceshi 156 and 157 into Thus in the other Samhitas the ono ūtia 'otattadoh sulpo I oranaſ inserted sibilant becomos commo Sam iso bili 11 1 138 and is nor, occuring even where it is not thus i decided improvoment on our etymologically justified, that is in treatise impf, and the voc and 157 Cf RPr V 16 Panini (akoranaſ doc of n stems There are no exa sam iso) V] mples of the inserted sibilant ndın, rule is found in other Pri before ch in the Samhitas Jp the tisakliyas post Vodic language a sibilant is 158 Read maha hisal'ın the common invariably insurted after n before tary Cf CA II 55, V Pr IV 38, occure the 3 pl I 132 No correspo ·48 19 in Vli quite 1 Pr IX I CIVP and IP do not change & Visujiniyı into y boforo consonants They all diop it strught Out trentiso on the other hand, chin,os 1 visnjiniy b, preceded by a į (if 117) ello bofore vow ols and consonants lho RP. IV 24 declines that the vis irjuly 1, alon, with its procodin, vowel, pissos into i, which is other wey of saying the simo thing 159-160 The sūnui loquues hitri in the comm C C III 21, IV 125 IP. 19-23 vite muy discord int opinions on the subject Accordin, to it y und v no diopp ed, whon proceded by a ind i Uhhyr munt uns continly luty i domoy the loss of u liyi allowin, the loss of both when followod by 26010 Vitsipun bo'ls that they io not lost on her but only importoutly por ounced (uf 161) The toitmont of final diphthongs in the lul, dons not Juclude the exhibition of finul solivouel which is opunod to bo lost and hence there is no suche precopt in RP. Soe Panmi VIII 3 19 thoy were omitted In the RP lo il once found in the chapter toitin, of fiulty pronunciation (IV 17), n here lost is glossed by Uvite with puyatnasuthilyona' Puum VIII } 18 attributes to Suity Ina the sumo doctune reguds the pronunciation of final y und P vyollhupi nyatnata ih Sihitij in isytis plosied by bhi ttoji with ja Joccu ine juny agro puli m id hy umilun um suihuly um Solitīj in i then is to be uudorstood as huldın, lile Vit supu that tho im lomirowaly vo not to be omitted to other but ultored with a shihtor eftert the pintul contul (Is it prstim untis thumam) w luch is the chutoustio of them bon, complotoly The followers of Pipnin io tuut Saltilul doctime to and I whon procçilod by Thu Whuyo work und 16 (it litt bodhm on Sk), but tho VP, IV 127 refors to lumits Olomp tin, only the word resoun from the troumont prescubed for yindi in overy othoi ise wuch tient mont however it does not doulon to be atenution but omission Sin Muu viot medo 11 alam ino 161 CE C 1 (II 24) lo cvrttıradhip Sul itionel, whore the word lo i noins duomution, the word Our unin, in the menin, in IP . 19-2, which douluos that Vat po holds not the omis sion but the le 1 of final y und / oftoi a ind i ind the commentury there explans le v by luptu vaduc curanai-an utterance of them is if llo stilement udhum va doo duy not attribute the phenomenon 1 a particular ummuman but as Vlow of the authors of thus treats! Does it not indiate that the tre tise is com osed by the lower of Sikutij ini, who adored th view 29 then oun, and lice di not think it nocessary to attribué ·49 it to Sakatryanı by name? 162 Seo note on 161 InSV II 144 St reads ya rtuvrdh uvrtasya, while benfoy his yzvitiyrdhuytisyu Cf mitraveruntas dhuit 14pis. RV 1 2 8, yayıtuvidhuvrtasy 1 RV 1 23 5 Cf benfoy, SV Finl VIIV But we must be voi y cuutious in fix in the text of the Vode on the basis of this kind of comparison, boc iusco oparticulir rouding may belong to e particulu sikha and may not bo uceptable to others For oxum ple horo the veiding with v which is coniect according to 162 muy be accoptıblo (in tho SV) to the followers of Nay. Sal hi and my not be liked by othois, wo 29100 with 160, ind benfeys SV is anything but tho tort of the Numeys See also SV 198 whero Stroudy vuuniita which I enfey emonds to Vinvita ou the lound of RV 125 163 v is not omittorl botoro uti in the opinion of Noint (upraptı) is well is others (160) 161 Cf 'tru tinul unusy ito itiu P1 mm VI 1 OS suho varnavipar yayat | gūdhotma virnavikiter, vir nanasut pisod iram || 167 CE CA II 18 VPr IV 98 marks the loss of s from the root, stambh, but omity ul mention of sthu The TPr V 14 includes such cases in a moro general rule, that s is drop pod, whon proceded by ud and followed by 1 consonant See Pini VIII 4 61 165 The commentator offors little help in tho exposition of the sūtra, the exact scope of which can only be wfouod from 1 cutical comparison with CA III 30 VPr, IV 110, and IP VV 23 ind in 2 way from Panını VIU 4 50 Let us tal e C l which prescubes doubl in, by simyo, idih svarat (11/ 24 = 269) ind then hy 's usthane ca' (30~16) 110.,thies it in the case of a conson int which is followed by inother of the sino cliss Simni luly IP XIV 1 (svar ipuivim ใy ] เll im duyui nim vyañjur piram=-269) prescubes doubling of the fist of conjunt consou mnts and then suys 'sav u nisu iryly p? il (23=168), th it a letter follo wod by one homo,onevus with it olf or one of the same mute ser is not duplicated When reid in the liht of the above quoted Jules of the two Prati ihhyns, our sūtra "tulye (tulye sth que lupy zte) cin be easily reducod to this much, that a lettel is not d jubled by 269, when followed by its suvu na huich is inother way of saying tho IAS vinok 165 Cf 'nami oditasy anty sya tu va P VII 99 prtatput iditi or petitp teti from potatpiti+iti Noto that the sphere of Punni V 4 57 with the two valulis (10 do site dve bihulum, nity muoli te doti viktavyim) is different from that of our sutri 160 See note ou 128 CF P210 VI 3 109, where bhattoji quotes bhavedvarpayımaddhamsa), ·50 same thing Thus in 'vahanti I cute the absurdity of blindly follo 25 31 n is not doubled, isantokay? in the mss, which were very often (=ışam + to 180) n, in imasti s copied and recopiod by ignorin (obtained by 269 which is not soubos llant de culoful editor of the restricted to 'luasvatper th' 263, cf Samlıtas au,ht to disiegard as of vedyam in the comm 169, VP no juthority or conseqence, the IV 102 prescribes the doublin, V hlillions on the inanimity of bus of t in such cisos, while oui troa mss upon such points, and to adopt tise does not), in indi in, (the omi umformly the reading prescribed ssion of y cannot be moint), and m by the Pratisahhy 13 was susfested yavahuh susuja (= huh + sa 177) by Whitney on 1Pr 24 In the countei oximple 'surup. Our sūtr i would then restrict tho id goniu al occasioned by the dou ben of 165 to terms liko indiah bling (269) my be onittod but ristiun, bhi astrim, candrah, ind not the ongin uld, which is here these are tho very ovom les quo not followed hy its savarna leitar tod on Pini VIII + 50 till Wo must noto here that the sand ribhitisu Sakitay in isya' which rou in SP IIV 23 applios only mems that according to Sakatay to an identical letter and to the ina no duplication tahes plice in nasal somirowols into which rund a group of thmoo or more letters m are converted before y l and And it is a pity that burnell with 2 by IP. V 26 28=181 Thus out making a thorough study of while IP. donios doubling of v in the tout remarked in his introduo devav vihanti', our treatise (169) tion to RT (P XI) but of all his makes it optional That the above distinct and peculiar opinions thero mentionod is the ken of this pro is no cloar trace in tho text' copt is hintod at by the comm who 170 For cor rosponding rules, cf RP. says 'punah punalı prasangıścn' IV 29, CA II 19, VPr IV 35 (= 8,ain doubling by 269 ind IP. VIII 16, Pinini VII 3 14, again omission by 168) Wachernagel, Altınd Gr I p 325, 169 In the sutra, rat-syarat stha=an Macdonell Vodic Gr p 72 Steven tasthi, ajare - djapare (-re-pare, son reads 'yukta barhı ra' cf ben as ridipur di in 26) This sutra foy on it in SV Einl XXVI is meint [1] to make 168 optional When r is dropped, the final vowel before semivowels and [2] to dany is longthoned by RPr IV 29 V Pr the same bofore letters that pro IV 35, TPr VIII 17, CA III followed by ric Cf ‘anaci ca' VITI 4 20(which is a bit deficient, Whitney) 47 According to this the c of accha and Papu VI III, and I 523 should not bo omitted [cf sinco our treatise does not give V Pr IV 25] But Benfey adopts such a rule, the commentator pre 'acha overy whore, which may indi scribes a vartıka 'rapūrvayośca dır ·51 Sion ELS in ghatvam 'For othei vartikas, cf the tator loquues ‘ud'ın nyag va' comm on 226, 236, 243 245 etc 174 Ct RPr IV 12, 13, VPr IV 97, 171 For similar rules, cf RPr VI 2, CA II 17 and Panini VIII 4 I Pr XIY 5 VPr 1 V 108, СА 63 TP. V 22, 24 proscribe the I 94, and Pinn1 VIII 4 33, 55 change of t and n into c and ñ be 172 (f VPr IV 119, C1 II 4 ind tore $ ind V 34, 35 the conver Pınını VIII 4 53 linal consonant of Ś into ch, whon pre 18 assimilated in quility to the codod by any mute excepting m, following intil, becoming voice Vilmiki (V 36) also excepting loss before 1 Voiceless conson int pind Pauskarsadı (V 37) denying and voiced before I Voccod sound the chan,es, when s is followed by in yattı16 RV 1 15 10 d conson int and denying in this Thero is i tendency to write 'ksi situation also the chango of the pajyım' for ksipajjyım' (RV 4 proceding n into î For detuls 27 3) ind titva yumi for tettyr Seo Whitney CA II 17 'magha yami in sono mss for its justi v ſ chngdhi according to Wacker fication see Wu ern2,el, Altınd nel the process of ouphonic | Gr 1 P 327 ind my note on 271 tention here is 1 bit different In TS 1 271 samyatto -sunyal llo thinks that in such examplos to and here i final guitur illius in insertion of t (similar to that become a dental bofore I dontal beforo s 187) tikos pluco bofore ś, A similu oxamplo has beon notod that is vijun snithil may become hy me 10 Samutuntur where we un enathihi or nchin (throu,h huve icchlokcom for rh lokam et olC3112 foi jrint sni) Cf note on 179 Hero the assimila Wackernigol, Altınd Gi U р tion has artonded its sway to the 332 and the rule 280 a on 331 plice of articulation as well CE Mcdonoll, Vedic Gr р 69 Wackernagel Altınd Gi I P 175 Cf Pinini VIII 4 63 and the 328 (277A) vīrtika 'chatvamamiti 273 The Pratiśahhıyas aro Rond 'ni na zih | scota on this point CE RPr yatı, snathi, slokam, snašati, śma VP. IV 121 1Pr VIII 2 Pe Śrupi itu pratyayıh | For śnathihi ninı VIII 4 45 allows either the cf Wukernagel, Altınd Gr I p unaspirated sonant or the nisal 331 On VPr IV 96 is cited adı before i nasal, whilo mas uso e is tyaſ masrubhıh Soo also YvŚ 123 invariably in favour of the nasal Foi slokum, cf ‘icchlokom' on 179, See Macdonell, Vedic Gr p 67, which in the opinion of some will Wackernagel, Altind Grip be shflolam Ixamples for other 328 c SV I 279 (Benfey) leads words ire not triced in SV and fruclug nyag 20, while the common RV (For such a case in RPr cf vacy un' unanimous on it 4 IV 3, ·52 U vata 'vad 2, misyimudah uan on VII 33) For 'scyotati' bhittoja citos 'val scgot iti on the vutik. quoted above 176 RPr IV 5, V Pr IV 122, CA JI 7 dyreo with our troutise on this point Tho sime doctuno is ittu buted by the 1Pr V 38 to Plal si etc TP. V 39-41 doclue that in view of some, the h zemuns un chansed, while the Mimumsak 14 and othors hold that in espiritud sonant is insertod between the final surd ind the h Panini VIII 4 62 allows tho h either to remun unchinged on to become the son int nepirnte Sec Vic lonell, Vodic Gr p 73 ISOS 1 177 The moining is that usmi Visul Jantje is converted into the spirint corrospondin, in position with the followin, letters Thus beforer ind ch it becomes be from ind the before t ind ths before s, s s it is changed into a ich of thoso rospectively before k und kh it becomos jihv imuliya ind beforo p ph it is converted into upadhmaniy. Visujiniy uitself thon doos stund in Sumhutes before ch CA II 40 10100s with it the VP. III 9 12 yllos is tau ght hy s kotay in the doctrine of IuI -nimoly that visirjiniy boco mes a sibilant before a síbılınt and jihvimuliya and upadhma niya before yuttu ils and labels, (while according to III 10 Stkely leuves visarj niya unchaged before a sıbılant) and itself maintains III 11 the vis ni jini hefore gutturals and labials, V Pr III 7 prescribes its conversion into s before cand ch IIT 8 de luzes the change into s before t ind th and III 13 rojects tho visujemyı ollo, othoi bofore a sıbılınt followed by urd muto I Pr 2, 3 10100 with our tror tise Tilo RI (151) IPr also do clues that visit juniy i romains un changed before h It then rehe the different opinions of other to chers in Il t, 5 ind IX I lho RP trots it considerable len,th the ch 11.05 wluch lu compressos into i sin le rule IP: IV 31 completely agree with our trouti50, oxcepting tho cise fisibilant follow od by suid mute boforo which the visnjemy is to bo dropped by 36 IV 33 34 permit tho letention of sport ant before „uttuu el labials, and unul torod sibilzuty Thus we see uutho utios vily on tho tuc atinont of us lijenty, boforo suul letters, the pomt on whurh they all inloo bom its conversion into send s before dontals ind poletely See oli Panimi VIII 3 37 which declin th it viskijuIYI com uns un ulterod beforo surd mutes if they ure tol lowed by ssando und VIIT 3 36 wluch illows it visul ) either to remun undan,od bof 10 SS 8 or to ho changed to the con0 sponding sibilant See the vartıkı khai paro savivavisar galop vaktuvyah which prescubos (ml ssion, retention and its alteratin into sibilant According to Whit pluse 1 ·53 ney the assimilation to a following sibilant was a more primitive mode of pronunciation than the reten tion of it, which has becoine pre valent in the later language, a fact fully borne out by old miss Cf Whitney' on CA IT 40 In the commentary road Jihvamulig? bofore k in divah kakutpatılı ind upadhmaniya before pin ph () prthivyah For the treatment of finals be fore dentel / and cerebral t, of Macdonell, Vodic Gr P 70, 71, Wackernagel, Altınd Gr I р 339 In the commentary 'dusvapnyam' may be rend dussvapnyam 'For the tondency of spelling rayi syut ( = rayih + sy it), śuci sma (- sucılı Esma), gobhi syama (-gobhil + syim ) cf Benfey, SV Ein XLI 178 For corresponding rules, cf RPr IV 9-11, VPr IV 95, 96, TPr V 22-24, CA II 10 11, and Panını VIII 4 40 There seems hardly any agreement among the Vedic mss in the treatment of final no before consonints in gevonal and before c, ch and ch and t in particular, and there is "hardly any passage in which all the codicos agree either to make or to noglect the assimilation Whitney We shall vurselves here mainly with the SV, where n has been •virtually superseded by anusvara - (1) » before c is represented by asmann CI II 770, vajrim ci 1 408, RV has variant, vajrun citra yåmam citra. I 135 For such examples in the RV mss cf Ben foy, SV Einl XXXVII (2) n before ch sam chukra I 83, maghavim chagdhi I 274, ovindam chisu. II 258, sf dam chyono II 167, asmam cha tru II 1219, rurukvim chatrı II 1227 For such casos in the RV cf Benfey, SV Einl (3) n before , vidharmam janı I 385, bhrajim jyotio II 377, maghavam jyok II 1154, Sacham jaro II 724 arnavam jagimyah I 340 For RV cf Benfey (4) n before { ajigisam tim I 372, maghavam tubhyam U 219, simam tapa II 779, avīm manā IT 435, śatrum tadhı II 1227, dasyum tanubhıh II 337 For RV cf Benfoy In Panını V 4 118 Bhattoji has Sajna 'while Maha bhasya has 'lộna also Cf Bohtlink on it n is required to be assimilated with the following cazarga by RPr, V Pr, TPr, RT and Papini It 19 assimilated to the following i accor ding to CA (II 11) as well But even before , we find anusvala Why? Thero has been a great simiları ty between mand n in the matter of sandhı Bunung a few stray situations (liko simrat) m, when followed by a consonant was not allowed its distinct independout existence It was assimilated with the following muite (and antastha) by RPr IV 6, TPr V 27, V Pr concern anusvira in II 213, ·54 no) nry 3 IV 12, CA II 31, RT 180, and Papini VIIT 458 It was turned into dot before r and spirants by RPr IV 15, TPr V 29, VPr IV 1, CA II 32 and Panini VIII 3 23 But there aroso a tendency, probably for conveni ence sake, to show m by the dot even before mutes and semizowels noted by our treatiso in 182, and by Panını in VIII 4 58 and 59 This tendency slowly gained grou nd till it completely superseded the phenomenon of parasavarno Exactly the same thing occured with regard to n V Pr IV 2 turns 11 into anusvars in the interior of a pada, and a similar phenomenon 19 recorded by Panini in VIII 4 24, in which CA goes further and makes the use of anusvara a versal usage Cf Whitney on II 11 seo also 34 Preceded by a long vowel and followed by a vowel or y, v, and h, then was unanimously turned into either inusvari anunasika (cf note on 112), follow od by c, ch or t it gave rise to s (153) which in turn changed it to either ununasik Thus in sandhr the letter » Weby, in a vast number of cases, repro sented by the dot, and no wonder if this dot, helped by the process of simplification, superseded n even before those letters where its use was correct, and prescribed by the grammatical treatises Thus before it we find n ropre sented by anusvara in vrsam dya va I 93, dovem deva 1 100, hari vam dadhe I 223, agmam devasya I 435, vidharmam devebhyah I 521, nyasmim dadhra II 77, kra mdam dova II 110, maham devo II 25+ kinvam div II 309 kramdam dovo 11 310, sedham durita II 666, midhumum drap sah II 719, dhumim divo II 802, stabhayım divo II 896, ma ham deva II 1110, asrgran deva II 1166 Before dh we find a variation in SV I 344, before p 12 is changed to by (Panını VIII 3 10 37, for which there is rule in our trertise) or Cf pahı RV 8 84 3 = ni pahi SV II 594, but urn pahı in RV I 174 1 Four before l, and 600 Lenfoy SV Ein XXXIY The process of simplification had gone to such an oxtro.ne by the time when the Samaveda mss (on which Lenføy based his edition of SV ) were written that, of assimi lation, we do not find in them a single example, and this was probably the reason why our commentator imported 'paśyañjan manı' from RV 1 50 7 and it is no wonder if the scribes have not followed the practice of assimilating the n to the following cavarga even under that rule which prescribes its observance In the commentary adopt bha van pare instead of pare for the euphone combinations of final t, cf Macdonell, Vedic Gr p 68, 69, uni or even anusvara or ·55 Wackernagel, Altınd Grip 328 1 179 There is no difference among the different authorities with regard to the combination of t with either ś or 1, though there are differencos in the mode of statement of the rules See RPr IV 9 10 V Pr IV 13 96 CA II 13, 1P V 22 25 ind Panını VIII 4 60, 63 kślokah is oubtful But if 'vakchote' on P VIII 463 In tho commentary of Samatantra onco occurs rochlo ham' (perh ups duo to the change of the space of articulation, as t 19 found in sumyatte for samyul te Cf Wackerna,el, Altınd Gr I p 328) for the troitment of final n before l, cf Macdonoll, Vedic Gr р 69 (see 183) and r, but makes it be foro y, land v, a semivowel nasalı sed (seo IV 7) VPr IV 1, 4, 10 dyreo with the above, but IV 5 declaros th at Kasyapa and Śakata yına hold that m is dropped The I Pr XIII 2 proscribes the omis sion of m before the sprants and r, but converts it (V 28) into the n isalised semivowel before all other somivowels Cf Panını VIII 4 59 Forms like yamyamura and aponebrokta show that final na origi nully remained unchanged in san dhı beforo y and I (Wachorna,el, Altınd Gr I p 334) and forms lilo jaganuun point to its having at one time become n before v in sindhi Vacdonell, Vodic Grp 68 Read 'krvim yyatha' and so in the commentary It is to bo noted that while V Pr IV 5 declares that according to Śaka tiyana the m is dropped, our trea tise changes it to semivowel oriors in 80 For corresponding rules, soe RPr IV 6, I'Pr V 27, VP, IV 12, CA II 31, and Panını VIII 4 59 The mss and printed texts usually repro sont this sandhr by the anusvara sign The actual change of m ton be fore dentals led to some the pada tent of RV Cf Wacker nagel, Altınd Gr 1 p 332, Mac donell, Vodic Gr р 68 tranla stha St has två kastha 'triştum makaro' preferable, hero m is not turned into anusvara 31 2 CA II 32 omits m before an tastha and usman, but this omis 'sion carries with it the nasalisation of the preceding vowels, CA II 35 however declares a nasal l be forel, the RPr IV 15 changes na into anusvara betore the spirants 183 CE V Pr IV 1, TPr V 29, RPr IV 15 and Paninı VIII 3 23 Before Sss and h final ma becomes anu svāra From its original use before abiiants and h anusvari came to be employed before the semivowels also This is shown by 182 In the post Vodic language came to be before mutes ind prsals also The compound 'samrat shows that ma originally remained uncha nged in sandhr bofore Seo Wackernagel, Altınd Gr Ip 334, Macdonell, Vedic Gr p 68, and my poto on 178 Dusvara ·56 184 Cf Papini VIII, 3 26, 27 185 114 18 meant for those cases, where the visarjaniya has been reduced to y only to bo omitted by 158 The present procopt covers those cases, where the visarjaniya is reduced to r According to our treatise then, the ranga is a nasılıs ation of the preceding vowols, while apusvala is a consonantal' element, which is inserted between et and r in 'rturanu' and the liko 1918 distinction is also admitted by Papini VIII 3 4 The I Pr XV 1 prescribos the nasalisation of the proceding vowel in case of the conversion of n into 1, a gre rant or y, also when the y is tted, or in case of the omission of m, while 1Pr XV 2 adds that some deny this and IV 3 du ects that an apustara is inserted in between It should be noted that the 1Pr is not perfectly deci Blve upon the question, whether the socalled anusvari consists in a nasalisation of the preceding vowel or in a nasıl consonantal olomont following tho vowel See Whitney on [Pr II 30 lor corresponding rules see RPr IV 80, V Pr III 131, IV 4, and CA 1 67 oml 19 physical phenomenon and is quite natural Cf Whitney, CA II 8 9 187 In the commentary 'sayr may be read 'sayo' Cf Bohtlink on P VIII 3 30 Before the dental sibilant final n renains and a tran sitional t is inse ted eg 'mahant samudial' I 429 In such casos the t is organic From such suivi vils it spreid to cases where it was not justifiod Cp Wachprnagel Altind (r) p 332, Macdonel] Vodic G p 69 The mss how Aver do not uniformly follow this rulo Cf Benføy, SV Einl XXX VIII, Burnell, Shpbr p XIII In English a fini į is very often added after n is in pleasant tyrant peasant llore the ľ iddod on the analon) of the alternation often found in 01 botwoon a sin, ulo 11-9 and a plural in Just as the sirgular mer chant corresponded to a plural in - ns, so also i singulir peusant was formed to the plural in-ns for detuls soo () Josperson A Modern I'nglish Gr I l'or corresponding i ulos, see RPr IV 17, IPr V 33, CA II 8, and Panını VIII J 30 SV II 767 yut sam (St) may be emended to yant sam Cf Bepfoy, SV l'inl XXVI 188 1 od 'sattsvartkayanth,' lihe 'pr tyannaitıkayunali, udannaupagavalı Patanjali 1 1 2, Bhattoji Subdak 1 1 2 57 189 Pr V 6, VPV 43, CI IV) and the valtika (sampumkanam so vaktavyah) on Papa VIII 3 34 118 P 220 86 CA II 9 V Pr IV 15, and IP'. V 32 110 virtually in dyreo.nont with our treatment as 10 yards the inso ations, while RP: IV 16 merely mentions them as enjoined by some authorities Seo Panını VIII 3 28 Tbe in ortion of these ten ues after the pasals is a purely ·57 190 TPr V 7, and Panını VI 1 135, 202 Panini VI 1 135 Our treatise 136 restricts the word hariscandra to 191 This rule sounds peculiar This is the ic Cf 207 apparently mount to show the 203-4 Panini VI 1 145 Panını leaves function of the past perfect, which the use of this word in anãcarrte doos not come in tho ken of z Prz (204) unnoticed, while our treatise tisakhya For the insertion of s cf overlooks its use in sovitasovita Papini VI 1 135 dese' 192 RPr IV 85 87, V Pr III 53, 205 Precisely the same rule is found Pipini has (VI I 137-139) three in Pinini VI 1 147 sutrus, while our tientiso solves the 206 No coi rosopnding rule is found For suno purpose with one In the ashrah vahusal, cf $SS VIII comm rond Gobhi bhuu, in parı 21 I 'ruisvadeviyam nivit saha skitam' SV 11 683 purvah preſcubhirunatrımsadava 193 Panini VI 1 118 sun' The reading in Nividadhya 194 Panini VI 1 17 which includes ya is 15uli' lor askia cf IS I mit priskan lirasl 11 de ind 5 8 5,2 5 8 6, VI 3 8 1 rithasyr (of 209 a sopar ito rule 207 CE RP. IV 84, VPr IJI 54, for it) lis) ul lislindhi tedbr wd Pauni VI 1 151, Macdonell, hitoli ku patyo cui dovrtnyoli sut Vedic Gr p 74 Muk the SV Pp tilop (of 211) and pattum haril | Cindrih but su candrah pat tuohutiri ind puru | cindiah According 192 Pani VI | 149 lu blittoja Papini VI 1 151 196 No correspondin, ule even in providos DI hiriscindral and Pini Ho on the other hand notes suscindih in mantra and VI 1 kapaccatuspicchi kunisiilehhuo 153 for husuindri in lola But VI 1 142 on which yutikaku? I would rather hue lol for sus suys 'suilupı hersidisvavi vihte vandrzh and puruscandrah etc vytlı, kiraterhusujivilrkulay uk uud 13 for the two words monti 11 nosviti vacyım' Cf Bhattoji on oned in the sutra it In the commipakilty iny it' 208 Lxactly the same rule is found in would suit botter Pan VI 1 155 197 Pmini has two sutras for it, VII 209 Cf palas) ni adı,ana on Panini 110 111 In tho com rou pou VI 1 157 khum 210 Cf 'masharimask 1110 iu venupall 198 Papini VS 1 150 vrajak ayoh Panini \I 1 154 199 Panini VI I 113 Jîanendra, the author of Tattoo 200 Panını VI, 1 146 bodhını says 'maskar is bdadının 201 Papımı VI 1 144 Cf Bohtlink matvarthiyenestasiddhau maskuu on it grahanam parivrajaka evayam pra ·58 1 yogo jathi syadıtyevanırtham ‘paryabhı zpopiti vituvrvarne IX Against this view of Kaiyata on 6 Pinini would construe pravrnu 154 Bhattoji in his SK remarks - te nto as pra + a + vinute and so on 'maskaraśabdo vyutpannah, to 213 V Pr III 125 und RP. VII 6 syak suditi nipatyuto This itmirk 214 Panini II 3 117 is very significant, in usmuch as 215 No conosponding rule is found it indicates in a way that this suti i The RP devotes three chapters and others which treat a vyutpanna (VII-II) to the subject of the it words are not Panini's his own, nosulur prolon.ation of vowels In who hold that the Unidis are not VP, the same subject ou upies the derivative words (cf Vartık ukari, sixth soction of the thud çapter Patanjali, huyatı, Bhattoji ind (III 95-128) ind one rule in the Na osa on 3 P 3 1) but who in seventh in the IP it occupies the order to mako his work completo third chapter which however, in and thorough, adopted them und Lorts the form of statement adopted the sutras like the present one by other Pritisakhyan end detaily from Sakatayını (N2,051 Śs on P the cases in which I vowel which 3 3 1) who in his Nauukta Vya is lon, in Sulit must be shorte kar ana ($5 on 3 3 1 ) proposed th it nod in the polo lho method of sta all words were derivative (Nu I ) tin, the phonomonon of prolonga and did accordingly give derivations tion adopted by different treitises of difficult words, somo of which 15 so viry, thit little would be may have been idopted by Yasha guned by muy detuled co aparison in his Nirukta It is quite proha 216 RPr IY 216 ble that in pırallel pass iges, found 217 VP III 130 in Panını iud Rktantra, the for 218-9 RPr IX 1, VP. III 103, mer stands a debtor to the latter, CA III 9, and Panını VI 128- which was perhaps (1) ori,inally 129 written by Audavraji, (2) was 220 CA II 10 and Suno dintadam improved upon by Sakatayana (3) strakarnahundavarahapucchapade and was finally brought to its pre su dirgho vicyah a virtika on sent form by his followers For Panını VI 3 130 details seo introduction read sva vit | śvavit | vit | sva 211 Cf V Pr III 52 taskar ah tatkaro padal | śvapadah, pad | sva bhavatıtı Yasli Nir II 3 14 varah ih | svavarahah | varaha | 2 ind 'tadbıhatol kırıp ityoścoi a and so on It was customary to dovatayol sut talopasca in kaska repeat the word after citing its digana example 212 The sutra prescribes lengthening 221 Cf Panını VII 3 90 ind 'a sarva for bhagi alone But cf RPC namnals on it In the comm ·59 Pan ni VI 3 135, RPr VII 12, 11, 21, 24, 27, 29, major portion of 30 greitor portion of 33 35, 36 37, 39, 40, 46, 49, 50, 51, 80, IX 3) ne practically covered by the sonoral rule of our trentise It should be noted that or treatise uvoides reherrsin, l umples and liho Pinini prescribes a general Tule which covers several situr tions Note that while in SV IT 532 St his juhi visvi Benfey leads juhi visvi See benfey, SV l'inl XXV 224 Cf Papını VI 3 137 Cf Bh. ttoji on this sutra, and Bohtlink on IT 2 27 225 Panını VI 1 125 126 226 Panını VI 3 47, 49 The com mentator in abhivamoko dvisib desyt is refoon, to diyustinah Simkhyayamabahubuthy byltyoh VT 3 47 227 CA IIT 2 lved in the comm astopad u stapad un pedal istagoyul tum ist1_oyukt um | 50) yukta / ind so on Ct note on 220 228 CA III 1, and Panin VI 3 137 There is no con piathin 11 turas it in the parla tort of the SV and RV For lasat cf Lohtlink ou VI 3 137 229 Pini VI 3 117 230 RP, IL 6 Pimini VT 3 116 rostricts the oporition to soien routs 231 RP. IX 7 VPr II 106 CA TII 12 and Pmi VI 3 122 SV IT 466 punas im St, pari nisam Bonfoy, SV II 853 pırı vrtah St, but parivítah in Benfey 232 Panini VI 3 122 234 CA III 11 Panini compi esses this sutra into two syllables dastı' VI 3 124, where Buhtlink citenitta vittu, pirittu Iori cf Panını VIT 4 47 and Yiske 'prattamavattamıtı dhatvadı śrsyete Nır II 1 235 VPr III 130 Note the biovity in 'ikali kase Parını VI 3 123 Mark the anusvira foi n in prati hasım (= n) in the comm 236 CE CA III 16 with Whitney s exhaustive note V Pr III 130, 237 RP VIT 23 26 VITI 1 4 are partly covered by this See also Pimini VI 3 133 SV TI 615 puru (St) but puru in Benføy Our troitise supports the latter 336 RP. VIII 9 In SV II 190 St, has visvismi Isverdrse but Benfoy reads 'visvasma isvardrso (isvar it svır of Pp)ind the note on 271, Benfey, SV Lin\XV) In SV II 381 St h 18 'pari yanti but Bon foy 'pari yantı which is correct acc ording to oui treatise Cf the comm fepasar go na' In II 332 St has 'vanını cı kut Benfey'van ani cu the latter being correct 239 RP: VIT 13, and Panını VI 3 134 In SV II 596 St has 'bhıhısatya,' but Benfey 'abhi hi saty? 'dantye pratyuyo' support the latter But why not abhı deva ayrsyah ? In fact this kind of longthening mai nly depended upon the require ments of the metre for which see 'lengthening of final short vowels in Aruold, Vodic motie p 110 OVL ·60 by this 11 240 RP. VII 43, 44, and Panını VI the commentator as an example 3 134 247 Cf RPr VIIJ 6 241 RP. VIII 18 is covered by this 248 lPr VIII 10 242 V Pr III 111, and CA INI 4 Murk 249 RP. VIII, 35 is partly covered that our treatise takes 'yuyotina' as two words and the SVPp mu 250 ‘imin stonmırhate jatavedase kes vayı aha in 'krootana etc In rathamive sam sihemi manisiya SV II 232 t histud idy' while SV I 66 In this verse the lengt Bepfoy no ids'ted idyż the latter 19 honing til os pluo, bociuse it has supported by our troutise Tam in it in dviwim stomi 243 ‘ayumu te bhasyim' is 1 kind of yum the commentary says the savio vartil a It is to be noted that whu thing in an obscure minner I do le linty iyan i uses the word vacy not undorstand tho si, nuficance of an in huis vitih us, our troutise has 'soinupuribhuh', bociuso, there bein invirithly bhasyum In the connn no imam word in this ro, the suti on Swatantra such vittil in cannot be upplied to it more than ono hundred 2,7 milovalil svar isundhuh | a tvota 244 SV I 397 runs guyot in i no'whule lhe commentator meung that tho com noqulos suyotan i no a tveti thero is fut lon,theninm beciuse here it is citing yoyotenc of a tu mud thon sanahi hence the as i countei eximplo The word duos sutrg is not upplied to it pot occur inywhere else in the 250 IP: XIT 20 zouds ‘prablyap na SV niduranūp4 sampripratinya 245 RPr VIJI 11 is included in this tyidhi sudavapı | upaswingt vms: and 243 RPr VIII 13 is also tiruthavacobah sahot ir ibhyamli covered by this A portion of VIII IPI 15 reads apravoprbhya 14 also Muh in the comm 'jiny dhi priti pari vi nityupasargah at bh isyum These ten words aro but half the 246 abhi mad ita VOSVO irav in SV number which rockoned I 242 cited as ex imple by the is prepo itions by tho RPr, ud cominentator shows that lengthen VP, VI 21 and by Pinni ) ing takes place, thou,h the parler is 4 58, 59 seo pridigana in Panni not immediately followod by i Grammatik by Bohitlink 154 The nakaripada' discordance in 10ll and difficult In the commentary reid 'adidia to explan, though the commer ta nde. In 'adid vamdeti vzrunam' tor of TPr suggested that only I 288 2t 19 not lengthoned, beca so many ulo recogn zod by tho use it is not followed by a sibilant Yajurveda See Whitney on IP. 1 'sapta nu sata' SV 1 577, thero 15 cit-vak are not counted incidi 18 do n in this, yet this 18 cited by gana Cf Panini's Grammatik for are ·61 cadigana which is an akrtigana 262 Panını VI 4 73 263 CE RPr IX 40 V Pr III 120, and Panini VI 3 137 Cf Boht link on it 264 CE CA III 27 which also pre scribes doubling of final cousona nts Our treatise doos not oxpres sly mention pad inte hence its scopo 13 unrestrictod and it may well appls to the words in pause as well Indian gluinm irians sone rilly do not procube duubling of final conson ints, the only excep tion to this being our treatise and CA VI 7, V Pr IV 116 ind IP VIV Iu un piously teach that conson int is not duplicited in pause It should be noted that the authors of these treatises rouo nized the doubling only in the Samhita pathae and not pada ter This hypothesis is to some extent supported by the fact that both the RPr VI 14 (cf Vvati on it) and Panını VII' 4 51 attribute to Sakal ou Sihat ly, the toacher to whom the in vention of pada tent is gonerally attributed, a denial of all duplıca tion 265 CA III 27, RPr VI 15, VPr IV 106, TPr IX 18, 19, and Panini VIII 3 32 SV In II 289 St reads dadhya' apo, while Benfey hug dadhyanapo See also SV II 515 St sadr-asi, Benfoy sadrnısı For reasons see Benfey, SV Lial XXV, XXXIV All grammatical authorities agroe that the final r or n, when proceded by a short vowel, and followed by any vowel are dou blod But note that, while Panını and others make this doubling obligatory (nityam), our treatise makes it optional (=dvardham) But according to the Parisiksa and Vynsasıhsı the final nasals, though written double, should be prono unced only once When a consona nt follows, those nasals, according to Varnir itn dipika siksa, like ill final consonants, may be doub led, in 'pruvannpurvam' etc as in tattharot 'But although this sıkşa ulls them final consonants, they cannot be strictly called final, bociuse thoy are followed by other consonants, and their doubling, accor din, to Siddheśvara, is really a case of liusun rather than doubling proper Lihewise doubling of final n before yowels is also a case of liaison, for the final n represents in many cases an original Indo-Ger minic nt (or 18) which by assimi lation from the succeeding vowel became rd, and was finally chan ged into nn Skt san = yonts Sim larly final n represents roks, pru tyan really being pratyunks' For details see Macdonell, Vodic Gr in the One thing inore We have no record of such doublin, in Sans krit except in liaison, while Pra hut his dropped the final conso nants instead of doubling thom If the phenomenon aver occured, it must have been confined to a par ticular area, which it is difficult to locate at present ·62 anusvill on Pur p 68, Siddheśvara Varma, Criti cal Studies otc p 106 For vari ous explanations of this doubling, 800 Wackernagel, Altind Gr p 330 266 For the definition of stobha, cf JNMV IX 2 11, Śıbıra vamimamsa IX 9 7 Siyanı, SV I p 11, Vedic Chint pp 1-3, b Paddegon, Ritualistic dad un Acta Orientalia V 1926 177 et seq 267 RPr VI 3, and P2101 VI 1 73 'karnacchidrain' may be emonded to 'karpacchidram' 268 RPr VI 13, and Panını VI I 74 Note 'ma cchio noti' in the comm and cf 'atrnoti (= atrpattı Yaska Nır II 4) in Samhitopanısadbr III p 32 Panını VI 1 76 pres cribes c in kalı cchay, also 269 Cf note on 168-169 RPr VI 1, V Pr IV 100, and TPr XIV 1, put corresponding rules at the head of the varnahrama as the fundamen tal and most important rule The CA III 28 treats it, liho our trou tise, in to general manner The intucito and obscure subject of duplıcation in consonant groups is treated in RPr VI 1-14, V Pr IV 100-107, CA III 26-32, and Pi nipi VIII 4 46-52 This is treat ed at a greater length by IP XIV 1-28 The examples given by the com mentator may be read 'abhippri yanı' and so on Benfey does not give doubling, and the majority of mss ngroo with him Cf SV Einl XLVII Our treatise does not particularly note the treatment of & conson int group, beginning with The V Pr IV 109 ox pressly exempts anusı ira from dup lication (while saith khayah (cf SK on simskarta) 1 vartıka may imply its doubling in samskarta because Patañjalı h is put anusvari among the sirs Cf Pat on haya vaint', and Nisos S on sums a rta) and the RPr VI I rules out anusvira in the estination of con son int groups, it being thought that a consonant is doubled after it in the same manner as after a vowel, a fact confirmed by Pata ñjali on 'hayavarat and Bhattoji (anugvīravisar yajih vă müliyopadh mănîywam mnāmakaroparı sarsu ca pathasyopagamkhyatatvenanusvar isyapy ictvat) SK Ilalsandhe Acco rding to Whitney there is reason to doubt, that the same is to be taken as the doctrine of the TPr, and that it takes anusvara as the affection of the vowel, to which it is attached, at least so far as the duplication is concerned This may equally hold good in the caso of our treatise algo It has alreadı been noted that both the TPr and our treatise do not hold very dofi nite views, regarding the phoneti value of the anivura no 270 ram hrat = param rophahakarat natau has boon supplied by the commentator According to the comm rephahakarabhyām would expect in the sutra 'rhat'ın Ꮎ ·REST MADRA34 63 on stead of hrat V Pr IV 101, CA, III 31, and Panini VIII 4 46 exactly agree with our treatise The RPr VI 4, 8 'puram rophat, na rephah' and TPr XIV 4 're phatparam ca' deny doublin, to r alone, and leave h to meet the same treatment with other spirits In the comm read ījuhvvını sya, arkkadını / 'duduhriro' seems a counter example, and is hore mis placed 271 Read examples with doublod s The precept seems rather an ill conceived one, since the doubling is already declared by 270 Its real function however is to deny the doubling of spirunts, when the are followed by a vowel, as in har sati, and this is exactly what other Pratisah hyas and Panini do cf TPr XIV 4-16 CA ITT 31-32, and Paninı VIIT 4 46 to 49 Thc RPr VI 10 how over exempts from duplication in spirant when followed either by a vowel or by any other spirant Foi the fact that ruyama sūtras ale meant for negation, cf Pitoñjali (Kieihorn, Ind Ant XVI 242) and Nagesas Ilrlsandhı on Papını VIII 3 17 For the im portance of Panini VIII 4 50 from the point of view of our trea tise, cf note on 168 For the fact, that like our sūtra, the three sūtras of Padını (VII 4-48-50) are really meant for vyavastha, cf 'yaro' nunasiha Ityato vetyapuvr tya, nacityeva siddhe tu sūtratra Fawapı tutheti’ Nagesa, Śś VIII 4, 50 The tendency for duplication had a peculiar charm for the Indian phonoticians, who elaborately sta ted its picot109, and thus carried it to a frightful appearance Groups such as nthsttr, tthspphy, khhshttny, mentioned by Whitney on 1Pr XIV 9 would pale into insignifi cinco before the staggering variety of the forms of samskarta [Bha ttoji, SK against 'trisakarakama pl of Nages., LSS 'iti na yuktam liksyo laksanasyeti nyayať etc) resulting chiefly from the duplica tion of 8, h, t and even anusvāra (-sar, cf Patañjalı on hayavarat), forms whuch could havo existed in pure fheory alone, and which pro bably had no Patañjali's sanction, who, for the formation of priyas tau, priyastı, first said on Papını 1 1 24, 'yathalakşanamaprayukte', but at once corrected himself by sising narva vu lakşabamapra yukte va, tate, prayuktinameva lak sanenanvakhyanat Cf also Nagesa, LŚS on priyasta Lut this tendency brought its own nomosis, and we see the pro cess of simplification set in paratively early in the mass, (cf Roth, ZDMG XI VIII, 101) which adopt more or less regularly the abbreviation of a double consonant before a consonant (Kioth, Voda of Black Yajus XYYVII n 5) and gradually ignore the doubliog altogether (if Macdonell, Vedic Gr for Students p 413 rundhe) com ·64 one in I 281, nadir This process too was carried in tion, cf Macdonell, Vedic Grp turn to extremes, till we meet in 38, Wackerna,el, Altınd Gr Ip stancos, where the Vodic mass use 187 letter place of two, 274 See RP. V 58 (exceptions in 59), which were not the result of doub VPr III 87, and Panını VIII 4 27 ling, but belonged to two different Note arsa nah II 685, where RV words Cf jy for Ijy in dadhagyotir 9 61 16 rends arsı palı' so noted +jyoo' SV II 879 ty for tty in by RPr V 58 SV II 797 has bhinattyojasa 'tti tea I 297 tr for ririh, nah, while RV 9 11 9 iuns ttr in caratrımsat 't+tri ririhi nalı not noted by RP. 59 corrected by Benſoy, tv for ttv in SV I, 81, 181, 358, 509, IL 598, mnahatvim 't+tra II 258, ntva have 726 nach and IT 247, 560 t+tva' I 194, yatvi t+tva I nerd parc nah (which sounds pecu 371, atvain 't+tvao Il 334, citli liar, when rond in the light of t+tva' II 662 osaltre satttie Pauniit1 Sal tayonth VPr III IJ 928, syntva e+tvi IL 1155 88) whilo RV 7 41 3 57 5,8 dy for ddy in patholyum'ut+yam 19 27, 71 6, 80 4 9 79 etc I 92, yailyrah 2+lyro I 278, have premili and RV 9 47 5 9 dr for ddr in t+dra' I 54 5,9 61 19 etc hivo 'pun nal 4, dv for ddo in cal salvipale 4+ 375 RPr V 10 (sumupade 'vayrhye) dur' II 1057, thy for ilthy in 01-57, VP. III, 97-99 (excep idhyasya it+hi ta'I 221, cuidh tions in 90-93, 96), CUI 76, yastı 'cut the tastr II 335 Those 77 79,-80 (exceptions in 86-92) forms are provided in our treatise prescribe natve in compound wor by 169-169 lhe principle of drop de Our trentiso on the other hand, ping d bofore dh gave rise to forins is no rulo to cover these com where t is dropped before 8 (3+3 pound words, but simply suyas mase = ts) Cf isvardı sert+sva II yıtha distih (1) and thus shows 190=itsvardrse in RV There are its unwillingness or inability to good many instinces, where in cope with the intricacies of Vedic place of nk and in only n is writ griinm ir 27% and 27 3 we appare top Cf ante lI 1101, (CI II ntly mount for sam inapades, and 20) andhı II 878, pantı I 96 Here this is exactly the roison why nt - Wikt - nhkt Cf benfey SV wordy like 'purin syiare cited ou Einl VI VII, Wackernagel, Altı sutra I And yet the winiventador nd Gr 133-134 here cites harıynjanam etu 19 Cou 272-73 bor corresponding rules, see nter ex unplos, words which no in RPr V 40, VP. III 85, 1 Pr III reality no clapala (like UDL), 6, CA II 75, and Panını VIII and to which, therefore the two su 4 1, 2 For details of cerebralısı tras (272-73) are not applicable A ) ·65 similar inconsistency has been no tod by Whitnoy on TPr XIII 15 For cerebralisation in two padas, of svarna II 1201, but against this svarnop. in II 303, which 19 wantin; in. RV varnı II 61, śrnyavrso nupat II 77, nrbliry omanah II 52-RV 2 113 3 whi ch has yomanah, nrmanah I 323 and so on "RPr V 42, 44, CA U 93, 94 give to separate rulos, while the V Pr III 96, and I Pr XIII 15 proscribe one rule Our treatise precisely wroes with the latter group The physical explanation of the effect of the sounds mentioned in this rulo, to prevent the cerebralı sation of the nasal is obvious they cause the tonguo to change its position, when the ton, uo is once bent back n the mouth to the position in whuch the cerebral sibilant, semi-vowel und vowels are ultered, it tonds to romun there and produce the following nasal at that point But these le tters suddenly call it into action in another quarter ind thus put it out of adjustment, as it word and thus prevent the cerebralısa tion of the following nasal if Whitney, CA JIT 94, Macdonell Vodic Gr p 38 0 %, Wackerus gol, Altınd, Gr p 187 note 276 VPr III 58 precisely agrees with our treatise See also CA II, 87, RPr V 22 (which has better example 'svarşainapsam'and Papin VIII 3 57, 59 It should be noted that the proper function of a Pratıśakhya is to give rules for the conversion of the disjoined text into the joined one, hence it should have nothing to do with the process of derivation of a word Peculiarly enough our trea tise is here prescribing a rule for the formation of words like rksu, vanıksu etc, with which a Pratisa khyu hng nothing to do On VPr III 58 Uvat. cites these examples and then tries to justify the posi tion taken up by the Pratiśakhya in the following words "nanu ch yatra padakaro' nyathå bhutam pad im karoti anyatha car şasamhita tatraiva laksanam kar tum yajyate, yathā susava, susava, yatra punah padakarasya carsasam hitayasca samanavakyatvam tatra laks enam na zh itato | vyakaranasya vişuyalı sth satyameva, yadı nama prasau, hinupajivudacaryena sisya- Hutpattyarthum kaścidvyakarana laksana ihasañjitah ovam samhita yamavidyamwuosu laksanain dras tavyam | athava yatha ed haharasya inadhvaharanamudakaharasya ma teyaharanam puspaharasya phala haradamevametadapi | krtva adosa aveti 1 " ovam са . But this is a lame excuse and does not by any means justify tho position In fact the Pratisakhyas do enter now and then in the dis cussion of a matter which is really out of their province For instanco in CA J 83 we read a rule which ·66 016 up the prescribes slıortoning of a nasalız led illustrations furnished by the ed vowel occuung in the interior coin inontato: wuh those given by af a word Similar is the cuso with tho scholiasts to Pinini and it 19 RPr XIII 22 (one of its later a voiy notoworthy fict, as it supp boohs) which trots the same sub lios us with a positivo proof of the ject, and for the introduction of intimato relation of the which into tlo Pratisa kly, the orunmaticul sustom of oui tretise commentator, Uvatı takes so much thin that of any othor of the pains Cf RPr III 22 Sim Pritisal hy is with the sonerid larly CA II 33, 34 concern mat Sunshut dommar ters, with which the Pratısal hya 277 'su G?y ita' is the sumin fra properly has no concorn Accord (ruja)su 3171' SVI 255 N ingly RPr IV 7 disposes of thein coriospondin, rulo is found simply by specifying that ma is al 278 Cf Pan1111 VUI 3 57 tered before in til vowel 279 Cf TP. VI 11 und C1 II 90 cepting? The 1Pr sys no lui, Note the poculiar wij of cities upon the subject, but the V Pr examples The cominentitor picks IV 2 gives - precept which inclu opening 'a tveta' of I 164 des both the rules of CI in it ind the ox imple pisideta, to which Sometimes these trortisos proscribe the sutri is applied, cuines after most blundering and superfluous words, and sucli 19 'u sota parisma rules For oxample CA 43 tu ir 1 550 For a similır pi ictice shows that in 'siminti the result in IP of Whitney ong 'Fr I ing vowel 13 short, 1 word which 20 preto 330 contains is nowhere found the AV word on which the Again it 19 a peculiarity of the hivo my beiring The roadın, author or authors of our tipatio pratio ssems correct, hecnuse I 525 like that of the CA to give thon runs 'pratu dian pirikosam nisi rules a wider scope than the voci ñc and there we got ni siſco bulary of the Samaveda requies which the sutrı 19 applied a no in many instances contemplatin, T 43, hus puer16990rhan where pierib and providing for combinations of is not in apresica ga abha tyom is the sounds, wluch no found now hoia rodin, of Bur and B ind with in the wh lo body of the Vodie T 376 ant 461, but literature and for which the co noither contains nord mmentator is compelled to fabu which the sur uny here in) cato eximplos Note the sutras beiring I susjort ubho hram in from 186 to 235 and their comme place of abhi tynn ind in abh ntary Hero one would at once krandan kolešosu sidati mark the identity or near 382, we got sadanesh rudat as a rrespondence of so many fabrica counter example of the sutra uce? no sutik may this open dny 11 CO ·67 te I 467 has drur sad udnata (yadudırat1 I 474, wluch his dha nam in place of dhana of RV) do dhosman atıhyru refors to (1) T 223, which contains and (b) II 1017, which has susu 82$ Uvcumsan mna 280 (a) In the comm trh noins, thit the word puisvinih occurs thuich in SVCE 472, II 4+), 663 But, add pari si inayıl of I 485 Similuly doh meins that dhi sunah'ocrurs only twice Cf I 529, 532, in 601, 529 15 repeated The roadın, 'ndhatvadırıtı seems better, beciuso in these situations s is not thit of a dhatu, but of a word, which is not derived from a dhatu Note the extremo brevity, wluch is the chiof characteristic of our mentator Panını VIII 3 109 s=s aften i RPr notes examples of 'sah vi sa RV 9 97 38=vi sa II 706, uti s uh 6 2 4, but uti sah in SV I 365 hisil I 381, vi su II 1057 and the liko are covered by 282 RP V 4 provides for sat and sthah divisad 9 61 10, but cf divi sad in SV IT 22 and divi san in I 83 (RV has san) 'yu vam hurthal siirpati' is a counter oxample and occure in SV II 351, 423 having svah pati RPr V 4 19 covered by 280 6 provides for gobhiyamı etc, which are not found in SV ū notos sma bisma RV 1 37 15 = hısına SV II 319 SV II 1079 hus prati sm ī, but I 2410da prati sma, where RV has s, SV 1 230 bas api sması where RV reids 8 Such ciso, are covered by 281 Cf V Pr III 68 8 examples do not uccur in SV 9 eximplos die wanting in SV 10 est u syah 9 3 10=syah II b1 SV 11 588 hus pari syu but RV reds pari aya 11 Pinını VIII 4 41 - 286 (b) The phenomenon of changin., 3 intos has been treated in dotuls by RPr Here is a comparison of the sume with our troise 8-=s after a upastut l.V 987 9 (RPr V 30) not found in SV and not noted by Panini, Benfey notes intariksasat but cf Bohtlink on P III 2 61 1fter a vrthasat 1 63 4, only once in the RV but wanting m SV tursat II 304 only once in SV but tourtimet 19 RV noted by the common with prasat, pitanasat satrust on CA II 82 prtanent II 781 thrica in SV, but fivetines in RV not divided the pada tent of either prtanasahyaya 3 37 1 noted by RPr V 23, V Pr II 75, and 1 12 provides satva for 16 padas tamu stavina 8 95 6-II 234, anustunuvantı 8 38 - II 922 (VPr 111 72), apo hustha 10 91-11 1190, (cf TPr VI 2 which converts s into 8 after 12 words) rajati stup ·68 III 56, 9 96 18-II 524, pari stobha ntu 8 92 19-II 72, II 413 All are covered by 281, 282 13 pari siñcata II 580, 63, 679, 742,796, 1026, pari svajanta I 375, pari svajamaho II 1155 Cf V Pr III 64, 1Pr VI 4, and Panini VIII 3 65 14 ni sedathuh RV 4 56 7- II 946, ni sida II 27 Cf V Pr III 59, and Panını VIII 3 66 15 pari sasvaje II 548 Cf Panini VIII 3 64, and CA II 90 16 hi stha II 1191, but hi stha II 321, 423 RV 9 19 2 17 trisadhustho II 259, cf CA II 98, which covers all cises that are not otherwise provided and Papını VIII 3 106, ibhi şata I 309 -7 32 24 For purvinostham, see note on 1 adhısnubhib I 615 VIII 3 97, V Pr and CA II 94 23 rocords exceptions CE TPr VI 8 pari srava I 567, II 249 323, 331, 412, 534, 558, 662 24 susamıddho no RV I 13 ) (V Pr III 82 records 24 exceptions) but SV II 695 reads susamıddha, divisprśah II 753, abhisvare ri 281= RV 8 97 12 27 gosakhayam 5 37 4, gosakha II 1187, but gosakha in RV 8 14 1-1 122 28 For sutesute see note on I carsapısaham 8 21 10=U 709 Cf V Pr III 84 29 abhu satva 10 103 2=IT 1206 CE V Pr JII 8, TPr VI 12 l'or anussh, cf note on 1 30 puru santyol 9 58 3-I) 409 susumidha † 17 l, sus amiddhal U 695 To the phenomenon of co rebralisation Panini dovotes 53 sutras Cf VU 3 57_-109 281 Cf RPr V 18, 19 V Pr III 61- 63, and TPr VI 2 See also 'suñith' CA IL 97 which 19 quite identi cul with Pipini VIII 3 107 and 18 according to Whitney somewhat defective Seo Whitney, CA II 97 282 In the comm 'jagato pado' may be corrected to jr, ate pado' 283 R Pr [V 41, and Papin, VII 3 41 284 RPr V 31-38, V Pr JII 74-79, and Panını VIII 3 101, 104 sustu tah, is the reading adopted by Bar But 'svasustamah' SVI 451 correct, because in 18 u sva nuh II 347 - u suvanıl RV 9 107 8 Cf V Pr III 62, IPr VI 2, the scope of which is very vide, CA II 97 and Bohtlink on III 2 106 divi sañchukra 6 ? 6, but divi sañchukri I 83 vuinsusidati II 1116-1 57 3 Noto also susrha, susuti susurnat, susu mpa etc, which are covered by 281 19 20 examples are not found in SV 21 camusacchyonah 9 96 19- II 525 mrñjantyrsısana 9 86 4-II 236 22 rathestham 6 21 1-II 774 prtanasahyay, has been noted Ct paramesthah on Panini seoms ·69 sustutah 8 18 not sandhya In Bustutab the s is changed into s by 272 See Panını VIII 3 105 In 'tvamagne grhapatistvam hota' SV I 61 patıh is not in the middle of the pada, but at the ood of it, honor cerebralisation does not take place Cf Bhattoji on Papini VIII 3 103, and the commentary here 'pādamadhyasyo tyadhikarah,' (brought down from 282) SV II 237 has prabhoste, but RV in the same passage has prabhosto 285 Correct 511 to 551, which roads dhanuştanvantı paumsyam' In suvirabhıstaratı vãjakarmabhib,' 'surirabhih' 18 not followed by a pada containing p 286 Cf RPr VII, VPr TPr VII 13, 14, CA II 16, and Panını VIII 4 41 287 This sutra has nothing to do with this treatise It stands at the be ginning of Samatantra, a treatise of Samavoda, which treats saman form of the ro and 18 invariably appended to RT In fact both the treatisos are supplementary to each other, and the one is not completo without the other We know nothing foi cortain about the author or authors of other Tradition attributes RT to Sakatayana, and Sāmatantra to Audavrajı Nor can we say anything about the author of the commentary on RT as to who he was or when and where he lived lhe quotations from gathas (see 38) and the quotation from Nakulamukba, which could have given some clue about hu date, are, inspite of my best efforts, yet untraced A portion of a copi ous commentary on this gloss was secured from Adyar Library and is given in the following pages But as it is incomplete and does not comment either on the bo ginning or the end of our treatise, it is of no practical value to settlo anything about the authorship either of Rr or of the commenta Further research is required for settling this question and I feel confident to continue my quest, till it bears the desired fruit The statomont of B, that RT contains 280 sutras, seems to bo due to miscalculation, as I have carefully compared A, B, C and Bur for this, and found the samo number of sutras in all of them III 80, ry thereon

·No text on this page.

·॥ ऋक्तन्त्रविवृतिः॥

·No text on this page.

·॥ ऋक्तन्त्रविवृतिः ॥ श्रीमते सामवेदाय नमः । श्रीमते हयग्रीवाय नमः। अथ गायत्रगानप्रकारो निरूप्यते । यथासावित्री गेय यत्रागीतमिति देवता ध्यायब्राह्मणेन यत्र गायत्र न गीत यत्र यत्र वागायत्र गेय तत्र तत्र यथा सावित्री तत्सवितुर्वरेण्यमित्यस्या येन प्रकारेण गीयते गायत्र तत्सावित्रीगानप्रकार- मनतिक्रम्य गेयम् । सावित्र्या गायत्रगानवदेव गेयमित्यतिदेशात् सर्वत्र गाय प्रमात्रे योनिवद् गानमेव कर्तव्य नार्थिकवदुश्चनीचमिति प्राप्तम् । गायत्रगान च प्रकृतिविकृतिसाधारण्येन देवताध्यायाध्ययनसिद्धमेव । गानञ्चार्षेयब्राह्मणे दर्शितम् । तद्यथा 'गायत्र पोष्कलमामेय प्रथमाया वा यथादिष्ट गेय प्रथमस्वरैर्वा चतु रक्षरवृद्धान्तराद्यपात् प्रस्ताव ओंकारान्तो हिम् मा वेत्यन्तस्तोभो वृद्धो भवति इमे वै लोका गायत्रम् इति महाब्राह्मणे सप्तमाध्यायस्य प्रथमखण्डे व्यावृद् गेयमित्युक्तम् । अस्यार्थ । ज्यावृदिति क्रियाविशेषणम् । श्रावृन्नाम गीतिखण्ड । तिन श्रावृतो यस्मिन् तत् त्र्यावृत् तद्यथा भवति तथा गेयमिति । तस्य व्याख्यानमेतत् । प्रथमाया वा यथादिष्ट गेयमित्यादि सर्वत्र वाशब्द एवकारार्थे । प्रस्तावप्रति- हारनिधनानामक्षरपरिमाण यथायोनि चिकाद्वैच्छन्दसेष्विति वचनेन यथादिष्ट विच्छ- 1 Cp Dbr III 23, 24, Agnisvamin हीमे लोका यत् व्यावृद् गायतीति एभिरेवैन on LSS VII 10 18 लोकै समिमीते" PVB bhava compound requires short i Cp Sayapa on it 2 The quotation is not found in Aibr आवृदिति गानक्रियाविशेषणम् । श्रावृतो and Concordance For the practice of quoting from memory cp M गीतिखण्डा तिस्र श्रावृतो यस्मिन् तलया Muller, Preface to I vol of the 1st कृत्तयथा भवति तथा गेयम् ।" 5 प्रस्ताव वैच्छन्देसष्वनादेशे Dr Xx 4, 3 Jho Ms has हि ममा वे. LÁS VII 9 6 'The printed toxt 4 "इमे वै लोका गायत्र च्यावृद् गेय त्रयो The avyay? 7 1 1 od of RV p XXVI hasणि .

·२ ऋक्तन्त्रविवृतिः न्द स्वादिष्ट विहित गायत्र यथा सावित्री भवति तथा गेयमिति नोंकार- योरावृतोरक्षरावापः । उक्तगेयभक्तित्वेऽपि यथासावित्र्येवाक्षरपरिमाण- मिति । तथा च सूत्र गायत्रपटले ज्यायसि च्छन्दसि प्रथमायामावृत्त्या वपेदुत्तम पाद शिष्ट्वाष्टाक्षरमिति धानजय्य' इति । कथ गानमित्यत आह प्रथमस्वरैवेति । प्रथमस्वरैर्वा सर्वैरक्षरै प्रथमा ऋग् गेयेति । तत्र सर्वेषामक्षराणा प्रथमस्वरे वस्थानप्राप्तौ पूर्वावावर्गाववनर्याविति धानजग्य इति सूत्रेण अन्त्यस्याक्षरस्य नीचैरवस्थापनरूपावनर्दन क्रियते । धेङ्गणरूपेण योनिवद्ान प्रेक्षणम् । अथ द्वितीयामावृतमाह चतुरक्षरवृद्धान्तैरिति । अत्रापि काकाक्षिन्यायेनावनर्देदिति ब्राह्मणमिति धानजय्याशय । अथ गौतममन्तमपि ब्राह्मणभाष्यकार एव व्याच ख्यौ । तद्यथा मध्यमायामागृति द्वौ स्तोभौ कुर्यात्ताववनाविति गौतम इति । अस्यार्थः। मध्यमे गीतभागे तदन्त्यखरसदृशखरावनियताववनर्दनीयाविति । तावेव गानेन दर्शयति अभिदेवॉ इया ा ा इति । तत्र द्वावाकारावन्त्याक्षरसदृशौ प्रत्येकम- बनर्दितावित्यर्थ । तथा च न नित्यावनर्दनप्रथमद्वितीयगीतिखण्डान्त्यातर- द्वयावनदनविषय द्विरवनर्देदिति ब्राह्मणम् , किन्तु आगन्तुकस्तोभद्वयावनर्दनाभि- प्रायमिति गौतमाशय । इदमप्यवनर्दनद्वययोनावधीतमेव । तथा च सर्वत्र ओंकारावित्येके स्तोभानकान्त्याच्चेति सूत्रे नित्यासस्वरविशिष्टान्त्याक्षरसदृशस्वरान्त रद्वय स्तौभिकमोंकाररद्वयमेवेति केचित् पक्षमुक्त्वा ऋगक्षरसदृशावेवेत्या चार्यमतमुक्तम् । तथा च मध्यमगीतिखण्डस्याय स्वरनिष्कर्ष । प्रथमा क्षरस्य द्वितीयखरारभोऽर्थात् प्राप्त चतुरक्षरवृद्धान्तै प्रथमस्वरैरित्ययेन प्रथमाक्षरव्यतिरिक्तानामन्त्यस्य च प्रथमस्वरावस्थान प्रथमस्वरति सबध्यते। तदयमर्थ । चतुरक्षणणि" च वृद्धान्तश्च चतुरक्षरवृद्धान्तास्तैश्चतुरक्षरवृद्धान्तः। वृद्धाश्च त अन्ताश्च वृद्धान्ता । चतुरक्षराणि च प्रथमस्वरैरेव वृद्धान्तसहित 1(a) ज्यायसि च्छन्दसि प्रथमायामावृत्त्या वपे 4 ताववन वि• LSs VII 10 23 GA# qe fereçar Dr XXI ? 8, LÁS 5 The MS has स्वरानियता० है अभिदेवा ५ इया ३३३३ इति Lss VII (b) अष्टाक्षरमिति धानजग्य Dr XXI 1024 Dr XXI 2 4 has इया १२१२ 29 LSs VII 11 2 2 qalqianiaaaalala 414674 Dr XXI 8 Dr XXI 2 5-7, wanting in LSS 2 2, LSS VII 10 22(आवृती एव आवर्ग) 9 So the MS I suspect नित्यमस्वर• 10 Wanting in the MS । VII 11 1 The Ms has पादम् 7 PVB 7 12 3 PVB7 1 2 ·३ गायत्रगानप्रकार: चतुरक्षरैर्गेयमिति वृद्धभूतचरमाक्षरेण सह तदव्यवहितैश्चतुर्भिरक्षरै. प्रथम स्वरै पञ्चभिरक्षरैरिति यावत् । तथा च मध्यमायामावृति षडक्षराणा प्रथम- स्वरगाने प्राप्ते तत्र प्रथमाक्षरस्य नीचारभः पुनः चतुर्णामक्षराणामन्त्यस्य च षष्ठस्य प्रथमस्वरत्वमुक्त भवति । तत्र पूर्वावावर्गाववनाविति धानजग्य' इति उचै. स्थितस्य नीचैरवस्थापनरूपमवनर्दनम् । अन्त्यस्य वृद्धस्य । तथा च ब्राह्मण भाष्यकारेण व्याख्यातम् । पूर्वावावर्गाववनाविति धानजग्य इति । अस्यायमर्थ । पूर्वी गीतिखण्डौ अवनर्दनीयौ । अवहीनेदित्यर्थ । पूर्वयोर्गीतिखण्डयो. अन्त्यक्षरयोरवस्वरण नित्यमित्युक्त भवति । एतदपेक्षया द्विरवनतप्रथम स्वरावस्थितस्य षष्ठस्य च वृद्धस्य द्वितीयस्वरेऽवस्थानरूपावनर्दन तत श्वरमस्वरसदृशस्वरद्वयस्य प्रत्येक द्वितीय (य्य) स्वरावस्थितस्य उच्चै कृत्वा नीचैरवस्थापनमिति । अथ व्यावृद् गेयमिति अस्य प्रतिहारभक्ते पूर्वत्वशङ्का व्यावर्तयति । पाद्यपात् प्रस्ताव ओंकारान्त इति स्पष्टम् । तथा च प्रस्ताव भागस्य न व्यावृत् शब्दार्थान्तर्गतत्वमिति भाव । तदिद गायत्रस्य पदेन प्रस्ताव सर्वत्रेत्यस्य सूत्रस्य मूलम् । सर्वत्राक्षरेणेति धानजय्य ताण्डमित्यस्य॑ तत्सवितुर्वरेण्यमिति देवताध्यायगविकर्षप्रस्तावो मूलमिति । अथ द्विरवनर्देद्धिकुर्यात्तृतीयमिति ब्राह्मणे तृतीयावनर्दनरूपो हिंकारो विहित । स च हिंकारमात्रो न भवति किन्त्वाकारसहित एवेति दर्शयति । मा एवेत्य- वस्तोभो वृद्धो वेति । हिम्मा इत्यन्तम् मध्ये स्तोम उद्गीथोपद्रवयोर्मध्ये । स च वृद्ध एव । तस्याप्यवनर्दनरूपत्वेन नीचैरवस्थापन प्रेखणरूपेण क्रियते । मध्यमपदपर्यायान्त शब्देन सापेक्षेणोद्गीथभक्के पर प्रतिहार परमुपद्रवभक्तिरिति सामर्थ्यात् सूचितम् । तथा च हिम्मा इति प्रतिहार । ५ तथा पुराण 1 Ls 7 10 22 Dr XXI 2 2 difference between this and the 2 Cp Sayada quotation अवनर्दनस्वरूप सूत्रकारो बहुधा विकल्पि 3 Cp the quotation in the begining तवान् । तद्यथा (यद्य० a misprint)पूर्वावा- 4 गायत्रस्य पदेन प्रस्ताव सर्वत्र LS VII वर्गाववनविति धानजन्य (printed text 10 15, cp Dr AXI 1 (last portion) corrupt) इति । अस्यायमर्थ । श्रावौं । अक्षरेणेति धानञ्जय Lss VII 10 16 इति । खण्डौ व्यवनर्दी अवनर्दनीयो अवस्व 6 LSS VII 10 17 रेदित्यर्थ । पूर्वखण्डयोरन्त्याक्षरमुश्चै कृत्वा 7 PVB VII | 2 नीचैरवस्थापयदित्यर्थ । Note the great .

·ऋक्तन्त्रविवृतिः क्षातो इत्युपद्रव । उपद्रव एव घ्यावृद्यमिति गीतिखण्डत्रित्वसख्यापूरक इत्युक्त भवति । अन्ते स्तोमो वृद्धो वेति पृथगपि छेदस्तेनान्त उपद्रवान्त. समा घसाने स्तोभ. कार्य निधनत्वेन । स च क इत्यत अाह वेति । वाकार इति । वा पक्षान्तरम् । वा पा इति वा वर्णच्छेद । तथा च आकार एव वा निधनमिति । तथा चैतदभिप्रायेणैव सूत्रवचनानि । यथा पावमानायेन्दवा इत्येकावृत् अभिदेवॉ इयेत्य परा क्षाता इत्यपरेति' । ऊर्ध्व रेतस्याया द्वयक्षर शिष्ट्वा हिंकार ब्रूयाद्धिम्माईत रेतस्यायामित्यादि क्षातो आ क्षातो वा इत्यादीत्यनुसधेयाहि । अथोदात्तानुदात्तसन्धेरुदात्तत्व विधातुमाद्यार्धमात्रोदात्त एव स्वरित इति विधातु च प्रथममुदात्तस्योत्सशामाह - ॥५१॥ उदात्तमुत् ॥१॥ अथोदात्तानुदात्तसन्धेरुदात्तमाह - ।। ५२ ॥ वान्त्संधिः ॥२॥ इति । उदित्यनुवर्तते । विवृणोति । उदात्तवान् सन्धिरुत्सशो भवतीति । उदाहरति । श्रा इन्द्र सानसिम् । एन्द्र सानसिम् । प्रा इन्द्र याहि । एन्द्र याहि। श्रा इत उ विन्द्रम् । एतो विन्द्रम् । उत् घ इत् अभि । उद् घेदभि । अत्र अह गो अमन्वत । अत्राह गोरमन्वत । श्राद्योदाहरणत्रय श्राकारेकारसन्धेरे शब्दस्योदात्तत्वम् । उद्येदित्यत्र घस्यानुदात्तस्य इच्छब्दस्योदात्तस्य सन्धे घेच्छब्दस्योदात्तत्वम् । अथोदात्तवानित्यस्य व्यावय॑माह । उदात्तवानिति । उपो नु । केयथेति । उप उ नु। क्व ईयथ । स्वरितानुदात्तसन्धित्वात् पो शब्दस्य के शब्दस्य च नोदात्तवानुत्सन्धि । अथाद्यार्धमात्राया एवोदात्तत्व स्वरितत्व चाह - ॥ ५३॥ आद्यार्धमात्रा स्वरितम् ॥ ३ ॥ इति । तस्य वृत्ति । आद्यार्धमात्रोत्सा भवति । तत्स्वरित नामेति । वर्णस्यार्धमात्र उत्सवा भवति । उदित्यनुवर्तते। उदात्तमुदिति विधानात् । आद्यार्ध 1 LSS 7 10 21 Dr XXI 2 1 4 अवस्वरेदिति धानजग्य क्षा ३ तो श्रा ३ 2 ऊर्ध्व रेतस्याया द्वपक्षर शिष्ट्वा हिंकार ३१११ L$s 7 11 12 Dr XXI 2 ब्रूयागु ३ श्रा ३३ इति LSS 7 11 3 (last portion) 5 क्षातो वा इति गौतम 7 11 13 क्षातो श्रा 3 त रेतस्याया प्रतिहर्ता मनसा ध्यायेन परा इत्यके 7 11 14 frafa ta# LÁS 7 11 4, Dr XXI 6 Cp RT 51-61 - Dr XXI 2 10 2 11 ·- २ ॥ - स्वरितनिरूपणम् मात्रा उदात्ता भवतीत्यर्थ । उदात्ताधार्धमात्रास्वरितमिति वचनादाद्यार्धमात्रो- दात्साश एव स्वरित नाम । नामशब्दस्य प्रसिद्धार्थत्वात् । यत् स्वरित (स्वरित) मिति प्रसिद्ध तदुदात्त एव स्वरितमिति व्यवहियते । न बुदात्तानुदात्त प्रचयस्वरत्रयव्यतिरेकेण स्वरित नाम स्वरान्तरमस्ति । अवशिष्टार्धमात्रानु दात्त प्रचयस्थामत्वात् स्वरप्रचय इत्यर्थ । तदुक्त नारदशिक्षायाम् - श्रत ऊर्ध्व प्रवक्ष्यामि ह्यार्चिक तु स्वरत्रयम् । उदात्तश्चानुदात्तश्च तृतीय प्रचयस्वर' ॥ • इति । अत ऊर्ध्व प्रवक्ष्यामि ह्यार्चिक तु स्वरत्रयमिति प्रतिज्ञाय तृतीय प्रचयस्वर इत्युपसहारात् स्वरित नाम स्वरान्तरमुदात्तानुदात्तप्रचयव्यतिरेकेल नास्तीत्यर्थः स्फुट एव । तर्हि स्वरितव्यवहार स्वरान्तरत्वाभावे निरालबन स्यादित्यत आह - य एवोदात्त इत्युक्त स एव स्वरित स्वर इति । अवशिष्टाशस्तु स्वरप्रचय इत्यत आह प्रचय प्रोच्यते तज्झन चात्र स्वरितान्तरम् ॥ इति । उदात्ताधार्धमात्रा स्वरितमिति उदास एव स्वरित इति वि धानात् अर्थादवशिष्टाशस्वर प्रचय इति तज्झै स्वरितस्वरूपझेरुदात्त एव स्वरितशिष्टाश स्वरितोत्तरप्रचयत्वात् स्वरप्रचय इति व्यवहियने । यथा एक एव वर्ण ऋतु स्वरप्रचय इति च व्यवहियते । न चात्र ऋचि स्वरितान्तर स्वरत्रयव्यतिरिक्त व्यवहियते तरिति । य एवोदात्त इत्युक्त स एव स्वरित स्वर । प्रचय प्रोच्यते तज्ज्ञैर्न चात्र स्वरितान्तरम् ॥ इति वचनस्यार्थ । अत्र तजरित्यनेन ये स्वरितमिति स्वरान्तरमस्ति तेन साक स्वरचतुष्टयमृक्ष्वप्यस्तीति वदन्तीति ते तदक्षा इति स्वरितस्वस पाशा इति वचनमेव तानिन्दति । तकस्यैव वर्णस्योच्चनीचात्मकत्व कथ मित्यत आह - उर्वर्णस्वरो नीच स्वरतो द्विधा स्मृत ॥ 1N1 has प्रवक्ष्याम्याचिकस्य and तृतीय 3 Ns has प्रचय प्रोच्यते तज्ज्ञैर्न चानान्यत् स्वरान्तरम् । Cp Ss 2 NS runs य एवोदात्त इत्युक्त स एव स्व 4 Not found in NS ४ स्वरितस्वर । Cp Ss p 422 p 422 fata II Cp Śs p 422 ·६ । ४ ऋक्तन्त्रविवृति इति । मात्रिको वर्ण एवैक श्राद्यार्धेनोश्च इतरार्धन नीच इति । स्वरत. उञ्चनीचस्वरभेदत । द्विविध स्मृत इति । ऋक्तन्त्रकारादिभि स्मृत इत्यर्थ । यदि च स्वरित नाम स्वरान्तरमस्ति तदा उच्चनीचप्रचयानामिव स्वरितप्रद शनस्थानान्तरमपि स्यात् । यथा तैत्तिरीयाणा चातुस्वर्यात् स्थानचतुष्टयम्:- द्वितीयाद्यास्तु मन्द्रान्तास्तैत्तिरीयाश्चतुर स्वरान् । इति वचनात् । नास्माक स्थानचतुष्टये स्वरप्रदर्शनमस्ति । उच्चनी चापेक्षया स्वरितान्तराभावे तस्य स्थानाभावे च वचनान्तरम् । यथा उच्चादुश्चतर नास्ति नीचान्नीचतर तथा । वैस्वयें स्वारसज्ञाया किं स्थान स्वार उच्यते॥ इति । उच्चादुञ्चतर स्वरितमित्युच्यते वा नीचान्नीचतर वा तदुभया भावात् । तस्माद्वैस्वर्ये स्वारसज्ञा । विस्वरत्वेनोश्चारणमेव स्वार इति नाम्ना वदन्ति । वैस्वर्य चोञ्चनीचाशयोर्मध्ये स्फुरणादुभयसाधारण न स्वरान्तर येन स्थानमपि तस्य स्यात् । तदुक्तम् - उच्चनीचे ऽथ मन्मध्ये स्वर साधारण स्मृत ॥ इति । अत एव न स्वार स्वारसाया प्रतिजानाति शैक्षिक शैक्षिको ऽपीत्यर्थ । ऋकतन्त्रकारतद्वयाख्यातृभि स्वरितस्योश्चनीचव्यतिरेकेण स्वर सक्षाकरणाभावात् स्वरितस्य स्थानान्तरसत्त्वे व्यन्तरत्वमप्यार्चिकस्य स्वरस्य स्यात् । तथात्वे- एकान्तरस्वरो हानु गाथासु द्वयन्तर स्वर । सामसु त्र्यन्तर विद्यादेतावत् स्वरतोऽन्तरम् ॥ इति वचनविरोध स्यात् । गाथासु यजुःषु चातुस्वर्येण स्थानचतुष्ट यस्य विद्यमानत्वाद् द्वयन्तरम् । अस्माक स्थानत्रयत्वेन त्रिकस्वर एकान्तर एव । तस्मादाद्यार्धमात्रोदात्त एव स्वरित । नस्वरित नाम स्वरान्तरमस्तीति । आद्यार्धमाश स्वरितम् ॥ ३॥ 1 Cp N$ 11 ss 1 397 The Ms has रणमिति श्रुति । द्वितीयाद्यास्तु मन्त्रान्तास्तैतिरीयांश्चतु स्वरान्॥ तस्वार स्वारसज्ञाया प्रतिजानन्ति शेक्षिकाः । 2 NŚ 6 SS 423 Tho ms has SS P 423 वैस्वर्ये स्वरसज्ञाया कि स्थानस्वर उच्यते ॥ 5 The MS has शैक्षिकशिक्षिको. १ The Ms has स्वर instead of स्वार 6 NS 3 Ss p 395 The Ms एकान्तर 4 NST runs उच्चनीचस्य यन्मध्ये साधा स्वरोऽनुक्षु ·२ ३२उ स्वरितनिरूपणम् अथाद्यार्धमात्राया उच्चीभावस्थलमाहः- ॥ ५४ ॥ उनीचेमे ॥४॥ इति । विवृणोति । उच्च भवति तत् स्वरित नीचे वा प्रत्यये विरामे वेति । आद्यार्धमात्रा स्वरितरितमित्यनुवर्तते । उच्चीभवति आद्यार्धमात्रेत्यर्था दनुवृत्तिः । तत् स्वरितमित्यनुवाद । उत्तरत्र स्वर्यत इति व्यवहारोऽपि श्राद्या धमात्रा स्वरित विद्यादिति सूचनाय । तच स्वरित नीचे वा प्रत्यये विरामे वार्धर्चान्ते ऋगन्ते च भवतीत्यर्थ । उदाहरति । नि होता ससि बर्हिषि । स उच्छब्दाभावेऽपि स्वरितशब्दनेव व्यवहाराय । खाया इन्द्रमूतये ( १ ४००)। अभि त्वा शूर नोनुमोऽदुग्धा (१ २३३ ) । इन्द्र तुभ्यमिदद्रिवो ऽनुत्त वज्रिन् वीर्यम् (१ ४१२)। यदिन्द्र चित्र म इहँ न ( । ३४५ ) एवमादिषु । नांचे या प्रत्यये विरामे वा । श्राद्यार्धमात्रा नीचविरामयो पूर्वस्य वर्णस्योञ्ची- भवति । तत्स्वरितमित्यर्थ ॥ उन्नीचेमे ॥ ४॥ ननु नीचे वा प्रत्यये विरामे वा स्वरित भवति चेत् अग्नी याही (११) त्यादावाकारादेरुदात्तस्यापि नीचपरत्वात् स्वरितस्योदात्तमेव, पवित्रे च म्वोस्सुत (१६) इत्यादौ विरामपरत्वात् त शब्दादेरपि स्वरितत्व स्या- दित्यत आह ॥ ५५ ॥ नीचमुच्चात् ॥ ५॥ इति । विवृणोति। नीचमुच्चात्पर स्वर्यत इति । उदाहरति आ याहि (११)।वार वन्तम् (१ १७) । स्वादिष्ठया (१ ४६८ ) । अग्ने स्तोमम् (२ ७५३)। पान्तम् (१ १७५)। इन्दो (१५०५) । आयाहि (१ १६१) प्रभृतीनि । अग्ने युवा (१२५)। अग्ने मृड (१ २३)। सोम सोमपते पिब (१४०२) । ऐन्द्र याहि (१३४८) । अपा नपातम् (१ ६२)। (इन्द्रा) येन्दो (१ ४७२) । (रु) चाभि गा इहि (१ ५०५) । श्री याहि सुषुमा हि त इन्द्र (१ १६१) । अग्नश्रा याहि ( २ ६०१ ) इत्येव प्रभृतीनि उदाहरणानि । तत्र सहिताया नीचमुश्चात् पर स्वर्यते । ननु तर्युदात्तात् परस्य नीचस्य स्वरितत्वे अंग्ने श्री योहि (२६१) इत्यादी उदात्तात् परस्य नचिस्य मेरित्यादेरुदात्तात् परस्यापि सहिताया स्वरितापत्तिरित्यत पूर्वसूत्रानुषा माह नीचे वा प्रत्यये विरामे वेति । तथा च नीचे वा प्रत्यये विरामे वा नीचमुच्चादिति पूर्वसूत्राशशेषानुवृत्त्या एकवाक्यत्वेन नोक्तदोष इत्यर्थ । अग्ने श्री योहीत्यादी . र २ 3 २२ १ ·२ 32 3.२ अक .स 3 २ कर ३१२ 3कर ३२ । ऋक्तन्त्रविवृति शब्दादेनींचपरकत्वान्न स्वरितापत्ति । अकारस्य नीचपरत्वेऽप्युदा तपरत्वाभावान स्वरित । अथ नीचे वा प्रत्यये विरामे वेत्यनुवृत्त स्वयमेव व्यावर्त्यमाह नीचे वा प्रत्यये विरामे वेति । रि बम्वो (१५१३) रिति । जनो न पुरि चम्वा (१५१३) इत्यत्र च शब्दस्य रि शब्दादुश्चात् परत्वेऽपि नीचप्रत्ययकत्वा भावात् स्वरितप्रत्ययकत्वेन न स्वरित । विरामपरकत्वाभावात् च । उन्नीचे, नीचमुच्चादिति पृथक्सूत्रकरणेन अनुवृत्त्या समुच्चयपराकरणेन च एकोदात्तानेकोदात्तपरयो स्वरितयो सूत्रसमुच्चयो लक्षणम् । तदन्यस्य स्वरितस्यान्यतरदेव लक्षणमिति सूचनाय । तद्यथा सखायो पिजियम् (१ ५४५) (पु) रि चम्वो (१५१३) । पवित्रे चम्वो सुत (१४६०) इत्यादि स्वरि तेषु नीचे वा प्रत्यय विरामे वेति लक्षणम् । अतिप्रसङ्गपरिहारस्तु शास्त्रान्तरेण नीचस्य नीचत्वमुदात्तस्योदात्तत्वमिति व्यवस्थया द्रष्टव्य ॥ नीचमुच्चादिति ॥५॥ अथोचात् सयोगात् परस्य नीचस्य उदात्तानुदात्तसन्धित्वादुदात्तप्राप्तौ स्वरितमाह ॥ ५६ ॥ संयोगात् ॥ ६॥ इति । उच्चादिति पूर्वसूत्रा (५) दनुवर्तते । विवृणोति । सयोगात् पर स्वर्यत इति । उदात्तात् सयोगात् पर स्वर्यत इत्यर्थ । पूर्वमसयुक्तोदात्तानुदात्त सधेरुदात्तत्वमुक्तमत्र सयोगात् परस्यानुदात्तस्य स्वरितत्व प्रतिपाद्यते । उदात्तानुदात्तसन्धित्वेऽपि सयोगपरत्वाद्विशेषः। उदाहरति । श्रुष्टि अग्ने श्रृष्ट यग्ने (१ १०६)। श्रुष्टिति षकारटकारसयोगात् उदात्तात् परस्यानुदात्तस्य अकारस्य स्वरित इत्यर्थ । अभि एति-अभ्येति (१ ५२४) । एकार स्वर्यते । स्वसार जारो अभ्येति पश्चात् (२ ८६७)। अभिअर्चाम-अभ्यर्चाम (१५३५)। प्रकार स्वर्यते। प्रगायताभ्यर्चाम (१ ५३५)। योज नु इन्द्र-योजा विन्द्र १४१५) । इकार स्वर्यते । पाहि उत-पाइ यू ३ त (१ ३६)। उकार। स्वर्यते । मा न इन्द्र अभि आदिश-मा न इन्द्राभ्या दिश (१ १२८) । श्राकार, स्वर्यते । पिबा त्वाऽऽस्य गिर्वण - (पिब तु अस्य )-पिबा त्वा ३ स्य गिर्वण (२ ७४१)। प्राकार स्वर्यते । शग्धि उ सु शचीपते-शग्भ्यू कू शची पते (१ २५३) । उकार. स्वर्यते । उच्चादिस्यस्य (५) व्यावय॑माह । यदि वहन्ति 3 २ उक । 3 २ अ उकर 3२ 3 २ 3 २ 3 उकर 3.२ ३ J २ २ 3 २२ १२२ ·६ ३२ 3 २ ३२ 3 २ 3 २ र 3 २३ स्वरितनिरूपणम् शिव.-यदी वहन्त्याशय (१ ३५६) । प्राश इत्यत्र आकारस्य नीचत्वेऽपि सयोगात् परत्वेऽपि न स्वरित उच्चात्परत्वाभावात् सयोगस्य नीचत्वात् । अथ नीचमित्यस्य व्यावर्त्यमाह । अपात् उ शिधी अन्धस - अंपादु शिष्य न्धस (१ १४५) । प्रीशब्दादुश्चात् सयोगात् परत्वेऽपि अकारस्य नीचत्वा भावान्न स्वरित । श्रथ सयोगा (६) दित्यस्य व्यावर्त्यमाह । सयोगात् । यावाहु संयुजाविति (१ ३६१) । पाहुरिति उच्चात् परत्वेऽपि नीचत्वेऽपि आकारस्य सयोगात् परत्वाभावान स्वरितः । न च नीचमुच्चाादति (५) सूत्रेण स्वरित. स्यादिति वाच्यम् । हुशब्दस्योश्चत्वेन नीचे वा प्रत्यये विरामे वेति लक्षणाभावात् ॥ सयोगात् ॥६॥ अथ स्वरितानुदात्तसन्धेरुदात्तानुदात्तसन्धेश्च स्वरितमाह - ।। ५७ ।। केयहीन्द्रनीवेति ॥७॥ विवृणोति । क इयथ-के यथ (१ २७१) । अथ हि इन्द्र-शथा होन्द्र (१ ४०६) । नि इव शीर्षाणि मृवम् - नीव शीर्षाणि मृवम् (२ १००५)। उदात्तानुदात्तसन्धेर्वान्त्मन्धि (२) रिति उदात्तप्राप्ती हीन्द्र नीवे त्यनयोरुदाना नुदात्तसन्धित्वेऽपि स्वरिता भवति ग्रहणादिति विशेष ॥क्के यहीन्द्रनीवेति ॥७॥ अथ तोऽरुण (१ २१६), वृधे स्मान् (१ २३६), तेऽमन्वत (श्रा स २१) इत्येतेषूदात्तानुदात्तसन्धित्वन स्वरित उदात्तो वेति सशयवारणायाह ॥ ५८ ॥ तोर्धेस्ते ॥८॥ इति । वान्त्सधिरित्यनेन उदात्तप्रतिपादनात् । कुत प्राचार्याणा विप्रतिपत्तेरिति ब्रूम । विवृणोति । स त अरुणप्सु -दूरादिहेव यत्सतोऽरुणप्सु (१ २२॥६) । वृधे अस्मान् -वृधे ३ ऽस्मान् (१ २३६) । ते अमन्वत-तेऽमन्वत (श्रा स २१) इति । एतेषु शब्देषु तोस्तशब्दात् धे धकारात् तेस्तकारात् परोऽनुदात्तोऽकार उदात्तमापद्यते । अस्माक पाठ स्वरित ॥ तोःस्तेम् ॥ ॥ ५६ । नैगिनोभयथा ॥४॥ व्याचष्टे। उपयथा नैगिना प्रोक्तम्। तोऽर्द्धस्त इत्यधिकार । उदात्त स्वरित वा इति । तोऽरुण, वृधे ३ ऽस्मान् , तेऽमन्वतेत्येतेषु उदात्त वा भवति स्वरितो वेत्युभयथा नैगिनाचार्येण प्रोक्तमित्यर्थ ॥ नैगिनोभयथा ॥ ६ ॥ 1 Cp RT तोर्धेस्तेम् 58 सशय २ २ २ ·१० ऋतन्त्रविकृति ॥६०॥ न्यायेनौदवजिः॥१०॥ व्याचष्टे । न्यायेनौदवाजिराचार्यों मन्यते । उच्चानुवसन्धिरुच एव कार्य इति न्याय । वान्त्सन्धिरिति प्रतिपादनाश्च । तेन तोऽरुणेत्यादौ उदात्त एवेत्यौ दवजिराचार्यो मन्यत इत्यर्थ ॥ न्यायेनौदवाजि ॥ १० ॥ ॥ ऋक्तन्त्रविवृतौ प्रथम प्रपाठक ॥ । (ऋक्तन्त्रे द्वितीयः प्रपाठकः) (प्रथमो दशक.) अथ स्वरितात् पराणा प्रचयाना समानश्रुतित्वमाह - ॥ ६१॥ तस्मादुच्चश्रुतिः ॥१॥ इति । विवृणोति । तस्मात् स्वारतात् पराणि उदात्तश्रुतीनि भवन्ति । उदाहरति । हव्यदातये ( १ १) । अभि त्वा शूर (१ २२३) प्रभृतीनि। आजाता सुक्रतो पृण (१५२) । इन्दु रिन्द्राय धीयते (१४८६)।सुता विदथे अक्रमु (१४ ७७)। नीचे वा प्रत्यये विराम वेतीति। हव्यदातये, प्राजाता सुक्रतो पृणेत्यादौ विरामपरत्वात् यावद्विराममुदात्तश्रुति । अभि' त्वा शूर प्रभृतीनीति प्रभृति गौणात् यावन्नीचमुदात्तश्रुतिरित्यर्थ । अथ नीचे वा प्रत्यये विरामे वेति ? पवित्र चम्बो सुत. (१४६०) सखायो दर्घिजिह्वयम् (१ ५४५) इति पवित्रे इति त्रे शब्दात् स्वरितात् पर शब्दो नीच एव । स्वरितनीचयोर्मध्ये प्रचयानामेवै कश्चति । सुत इत्यत्र विरामपरत्वेऽपि उदात्तत्वेन प्रचयत्वाभावात् स्वरितपर प्रचयानामकस्य द्वयोर्वा बहूना वा विरामे नीचे वा प्रत्यये एकचति । अत एव सस्त्रायो दीर्घ जिह्वयम् इत्यत्र जिशब्दपर्यन्तमेकश्रुति अन्त्यस्य व्यश ब्दस्य विरामपरत्वेऽपि स्वरितत्वेन स्वरितपरत्वाभावात् सोदात्तता इत्यर्थ ॥ तस्मादुच्चश्रुतीनि ॥ शिक्षा चेय तस्मादुच्चश्रुतीनीति सूत्रसवादिनी विजयते उदात्तानुदात्तस्वरितसहिताया स्वरितादनुदात्तानामेकश्रुतिरिति । यदि स्वरित्तानुदात्तानामकश्रुति स्यात्तदा तस्मादुच्चश्रुतिनीति स्यात् तद्व्याख्यानविरोधश्च स्यात् । स्वरितमाद्यार्धमानोदात्त शिष्ट प्रचय २२२२ १ २ उक 3 १ २ सूत्रविरोध ·- . एकश्रुतिनिरूपणम् इति स्वरितस्य स्वरनिर्णयाश्च । नहि स्वरितप्रचयानामैकश्रुत्य मनसापि सभावयितु शक्यम् । तस्मारक्तन्त्रतवृत्तिशिक्षाशास्त्रान्तरादिभिस्सहिताया मृचि स्वरत्रयस्यैव प्रतिपादनात् स्वरितस्य चोच्चनीचान्तर्भावप्रतिपादनाच्च तदेकवाक्यतया पारिभाषिकवचनस्याप्यों वक्तव्य । एव हि पारिभाषिक वचनम् दीघस्थाने तु स्वरित मात्रास्थाने तु धारय । पर्वस्थाने उदात्त स्यात् प्रकृती छललक्षणम् ॥ मात्रास्थाने तु स्वरित दीर्घस्थाने तु धारय । पर्वस्थान उदात्त स्यादुत्तराच्छललक्षणम् ॥ इति सकेतवचनमपि अनेकोदात्तानुदात्तपरम् । तत्पर एव च - स्वरित स्वारसा स्याद्दीर्घस्थाने पृथग् ऋचि । तृतीयस्वरितोदात्तो ऽनेको नेक्यश्च यत्र हि ॥ दीर्घस्तु शिष्यकोदात्त पर्वस्थाने प्रकृत्युचि । एकस्वरस्थनानार्णा अर्धर्चान्त्या न चेत्तदा ।। तद्वितीयादिधारी स्यात् मात्रास्थाने प्रकृत्युचि । स्वारघाय्योश्च दीर्घत्व मात्रात्वे व्यत्ययेन तु ॥ । उत्तरायामृचि आयो पर्वैव चिबुको भवेत्॥ प्रथमादिद्वितीयान्त पद स्वारवदिष्यते ।। पदकाले स दीर्घ स्यादभ्यास पर्वसनक । मात्रा पदाना मात्राणांमष्यन्ते सामशाखिनाम् ॥ उदात्तस्वरितद्वयचि प्रचयो निहत स्वर । तत्र तु स्वरितात् पूर्व उदात्त. प्रथम स्वर ॥ स्वरितोऽन्य उदासश्च प्रचयश्च द्वितीयग । द्वितीयस्वर कपोऽनुदात्तस्तु त्रितीयग ॥ स्वरित कपते तत्र यत्रोदात्त परो भवेत् । एकोदात्तपर स्वार प्रचयश्चोचवद् भवेत् ॥ सर्वेऽवशिष्टा स्वरिता स्वर्यन्ते सामशाखिनाम् ।' इति । अनेकोदात्तात् पर नि होता इत्यादि । अनुदात्तात् परश्च स्वार. अया वर्धस्व कन्वा गिरी (१ ५२) इत्यादि । तत्पर अनेकोदाता I Not found in SS ·१२ ऋक्तन्त्रविवृति नुदात्ताञ्च य परो न भवति । एकोदात्तात्परव्यतिरिक्तः कपव्यतिरिक्तश्च स्वार. तत्परशब्देनोच्यते । के इत्यादि । एते प्रयोऽपि स्वारसमा दीर्घस्थाने प्रकृत्युचि । एतदेव स्वरत्रयमुत्तरासु मात्रास्थान एव प्रयाणा दीर्घत्वाय मात्र त्वाय च पारिभाषिकस्वरसशाकरणम् । एकोदात्तात् परस्य स्वरितस्य स्वरितत्व यदि निवर्तयेत्तदा तस्य स्वरितत्वेनाचारण न स्यात् । नहि निवर्त यति । उदात्ताधार्धमात्रा स्वरितमित्यस्य सर्वस्वरितसाधारणत्वात् । अन्यथा कपस्यापि स्वरितत्व न स्यात् पारिभाषिकस्वरितान्तर्भावाभावेन स्वरितस शाविरहात् । प्रत्युत एकोदात्तात् परस्य स्वरितस्य नीचमुच्चात् (५) इति सूत्रोदाहरणत्वे स्वादिष्ठयो (१ ४६८), वारंवन्तम् (१ १७) इत्यादेरुदाहत- त्याच्च स्वरितत्व नास्तीति वक्नु न शक्यम् न च । न वयमेकोदात्तात् परस्थ रितस्य स्वरितत्व निवारयाम किन्तु तस्य च' समश्रुतित्व बम इति वाच्यम् । किमिद समानश्रुतित्वमुभयो. समानस्थानत्वेनो च्यते ऽथ वचनाद्वा- स्वरितो ऽन्य उदात्तश्च प्रचयश्च द्वितीयग ॥ इति वचनस्य स्वरितस्य स्थानान्तराभावेन द्वितीयस्वरत्वप्रतिपादन परस्य कपन्यतिरिक्तसकलस्वरितमाधारणत्वेनानेकोदात्तात् परस्यापि प्रच यसमाना श्रुति स्यात् । न च वचनबलेन समानश्रुतित्वम् । एव हि वचनम् एकोदात्तात् परस्वारप्रचयश्चाच्चवद् भवेत् । सर्वे ऽवशिष्टा स्वरिता स्वर्यन्ते सामशाखिनाम् ॥ इति। अस्य चार्थ सूक्ष्मबुद्धिभि सम्यग् द्रष्टव्यः। एकोदासात् परस्वार प्रचयश्चेति न भिन्नपदत्व समस्तपदत्वनैवाकरेषु बहुषु दर्शनात् । भिन्नपदत्वे ऽपि न वैयधिकरण्य किन्तु सामानाधिकरण्यमेव । समस्तपदत्वे ऽपि न द्वन्द्व समास । यत एक एव वर्ण पूर्वार्धमात्रोदात्त स्वरित शिष्टाश प्रचय इति स्वरप्रचय इति प्रोच्यते स्वरितोदात्त इति च । य एवोदात्त इत्युक्त स एव स्वरितस्वर । प्रचय प्रोच्यते तस न चात्र स्वरितान्तरम् ॥ इति समानाधिकरणवचनात् । स एव च स्वर प्रचयात्मकः । उदात्तस्वरितश्च प्रचया निहते स्वर.। 1 Ibe MS 19 broken ·इति स्वरचतुष्टयगुण न पूरकम् । तस्मादुच्चश्रुतिरिति' स्वरितात् पराणि यावन्नीच यावद्विराम वा उदात्तश्रुतीनि भवन्तीति शक्तन्त्रतद्व्याख्या भ्यामुदात्तादनुदात्तस्य स्वरित ' सहिताया स्वरितादनुदात्तानामेकश्रुतिरिति वचनेन तु च उदात्ताद्यार्धमात्रा स्वरितमिति स्वरितस्वरूपविधायके नवस्वरितस्य च प्रचयाना च स्वरभेदविधानेन स्वरितप्रचयानामेकश्रुत्या सभवाच्च । तस्मादयमर्थ । कपानुदात्तपरातत्परस्वरितव्यतिरिक्तप्रचयो द्विविध । एकोदात्तात् परो ऽनेकोदात्तात् परश्चेति । तत्र एकोदात्तात् पर स्वरप्रचय उच्चवद् भवेत् । स्वरितत्वात् आद्यार्धमात्रोच्चवद् भवेत् । वच्छब्दग्रहणादीषन्न्यूनत्व स्वरित- स्वरात् प्रतीयते । अनेकोदात्तात्परस्त्वापाद्यार्धमात्रोच्च एव भवति । तदन्य एकोदात्तात्परस्वरितादन्यस्वरप्रचयश्चेत्याह सर्वेऽवशिष्टा स्वरिता स्वर्यन्ते सामशाखिनाम् ॥ इति । न च स्वर्यन्ते उच्चवद् भवन्तीति शब्दद्वयस्यार्थभेद इति भ्रमित व्यम् । स्वर्यते आद्यार्धमात्रोच्चा भवतीत्यर्थ । उच्चवदाद्यार्धमात्रोच्चवदित्यर्थ । उभयो स्वरितत्वेनोच्चशब्दस्य सजातीयस्वरितार्धमात्रोच्चसमानार्थकत्वात् । तथा च एकोदात्तात् पर स्वरित स्वरितपदवक्तव्य अनेकोदात्तात् परस्तु स्वरितन्यैव वक्तव्य इति एकैकस्य एकोदात्तात्परस्वारप्रचयश्चोच्चवद् भवेत् । सर्वेऽवशिष्टा स्वरिता स्वर्यन्त सामशाखिनाम् ॥ इति. ऋक्तन्त्रकारादिवचनस्य सर्वेऽपि स्वरिता आद्यार्धमात्रा एवो दात्ता एव भवन्तीत्यर्थ एव विवेक । ॥ ऋक्तन्त्र समाप्तम् ॥ ॥ हरिः ओम् ॥ 1Cp RT 61 2 Cp Papını VIII 4 66 3 Cp Panini 1 2 39 4 Cp RT 53 5 So the MS May be विधायकेन च

·No text on this page.

·॥ सामवेद सर्वानुक्रमणी॥

·No text on this page.

·॥ सामवेदसर्वानुक्रमणी॥
॥ अथ सामवेदसर्वानुक्रमाणिकाप्रारम्भः ॥
सप्त गानानि सानां वै ब्राह्मणा अष्ट वै स्मृताः ।
दश सूत्राणि सप्तापि दश लक्षणमिष्यते ॥
तत एषां स्वरूपन्तु कथ्यतेऽत्र समासतः ।
गायत्रं प्रथमं गानं आग्नेयन्तु द्वितीयकम् ।।
तृतीयं गानमैन्द्रं स्याच्चतुर्थ पावमानकम् ।
अर्कद्वन्द्वव्रतानीति छान्दसानीति पश्चमम् ॥
ततः परं शुक्रीयं स्यान्महानाम्नी ततः परम् ।
एतानि सप्त गानानि प्रकृतेः कथितानि च ॥
तासामेव केचित्पक्षान्तरमाह ।
आग्नेयं प्रथमन्तु स्यादैन्द्रं स्यात्तु द्वितीयकम् ।
तृतीयं पावमानाख्यं चतुर्थ छान्दसं मतम् ॥
शुक्रीयं पश्चमं प्रोक्नं षष्ठमूहाख्यमेव तु ।
सप्तमन्तु रहस्यं स्यादित्येतत्सामगानकम् ।।
अष्टौ हि ब्रामणा ग्रन्थाः प्रौढब्रामणमादिमम् ।
षड्विंशाख्यं द्वितीयं स्यात्ततः सामविधानकम् ॥
आर्षेयन्तुरीयश्च देवताध्यायश्च पञ्चकम् ।

·सामवेदसर्वानुक्रमणी
छान्दोग्यश्च षष्ठश्च संहितोपनिषत्तथा ॥
सप्तमब्राह्मणो वंशो ग्रंथा अष्टावुदीरिताः ।
द्राह्यायणमनुपदं निदानं कल्पमेव च ॥
उपग्रन्थाश्च क्षुद्राश्च तन्दालक्षणमेव च ।
सूत्रं पञ्चविधं ज्ञेयं कल्पानुपदमेव च ॥
अनुस्तोत्रन्तु विज्ञेया सूत्राणान्दशकं स्मृतम् ।
अथ सप्तदशलक्षणम् ।
गृह्य गायत्र ऋक्तन्त्रं सामतन्त्रश्च पुष्पकम् ।
ततोवग्रहं च हितवाक्य स्तोत्रानुसंहरम्
मात्रार्चिकछलं चैव पाणिनीयञ्च शैक्षकम् ।
नारदीयं गौतौयं लोमशिक्षा ततः परम् ।।
अग्न आयानुदात्तश्च रावणीयन्ततः परम् ।
परिशष्टे लक्षणेमिन् वनसंख्या प्रकीर्तिताः ॥
ऋक्दीपिका तथा ऋच्यध्यूढं सामाङ्कमेव च ।
ऋच्युद्धारस्तथा पद्यो परीऋचनिघातकम् ॥
छन्दोमय्युपनिदानन्तथा पैगलनागकम् ।
नैगाख्यं लघु ऋक्तन्त्रश्चन्द्रिकाख्यं स्वरस्य तु ।।
उदकः प्रतिस्तोत्रीयं विदुरेवं हि सूरिभिः ।
ऋग्लक्षणमिति प्रोक्तं राशिसंख्याविधानतः ॥
सूची चतुर्था नित्यादि नमनं धारि लक्षणम् ।
हस्तलक्षणमित्येव प्रकृतेस्तु लघेस्तथा ।
ऊहस्य तु लघूहस्य चैषां साम्नां प्रकाशिका ।
सामोपर्यङ्कसंज्ञश्च प्रकृत्यूह्यस्य लक्षणम् ॥
सकृतश्च तथैवानुस्वारवैकृतमेव च ।
स्वरभक्तिः कर्षणं प्रग्रथनत्रयमेवच ।।
सपत्य स्तोत्र्यतिहृतं स्तोभोद्धारकमेवच ।

·३
ऋक्तन्त्रम्
बेपणामलक्षणं गीतिकल्पञ्चैव ततः परम् ।।
चरणानां व्यूहमिति लक्षणं पारिभाषिकम् ।
छलाख्यं परिशिष्टर्षि देवानां क्रमकारिका ॥
पञ्चविंशति संख्याथ ब्राह्मणानाश्च मूचिका ।
सूत्रलक्षणसूचिभ्यामाहत्यांकवनं स्मृतम् ।।
सर्वानुक्रमणी नाम इद ग्रन्थस्य निर्मिता ।
श्रौतस्मार्तप्रयोगाणां ग्रन्थाख्या सम्यगीरिता ॥
ज्योतिष्टोमस्य यत्तन्त्र समारभ्य हि विश्वजित् ।
छन्दोगस्य प्रयोगस्य वृत्तिरेषा प्रदीपिका ॥
कृता विद्यवृद्धेन तालवृन्तनिवासिना ।
पुरुषोत्तमभट्टीयं प्रयोगस्येष एव तु ।।
अथातः पौर्णमासो हि आप्तकाम्यप्रयाणकः ।
पुनर्दहनमेतेषु चतुःपूर्वस्तु खादिरः ।।
पञ्चमं षष्ठकश्चैव गौतमीयन्ततोत्तरम् ।
गायत्रस्य विधानन्तु शुंगाचार्यकृतं वरम् ।।
खण्डास्तु तत्र विशेया त्रय एव मनीषिणः ।
तेषामादिस्तु पद्यो हि बहिस्यात्तु द्वितीयकम् ॥
वसोर्मन्दा तृतीयं स्यात्समाप्त वेदमातृकम् ।
ऋचान्तन्तन्त्रव्याकरणे पञ्च संख्या प्रपाठकम् ।।
शाकटायनदेवेन द्वात्रिंशत् खण्डकास्मृता ।
तत्रादिमे प्रपाठके चत्वारः खण्डसम्मताः ॥
द्वितीये रस इत्युक्तस्तृतीये वसुसंज्ञकम् ।
चतुर्थे पञ्चमे चैव मुनिसंख्या समीरिताः ।।
वाचो वृत्तिश्च मासे तु तस्मादुच्चश्रुतीनि च ।
आविरादि तथा कर्ण सूत्रं जालालनं स्मृतम् ॥

·सामवेदसर्वानुक्रमणी
त्रयस्त्रिशञ्च दशकं सूत्रञ्च वसुसंज्ञकम् ।
ऋक्तन्त्रञ्च समाप्तं स्याद्विज्ञेयं सामवित्तमैः ।।
सामतन्त्रं प्रवक्ष्यामि सुखार्थ सामवेदिनाम् ।
औदवजिकृतं सूक्ष्मं सामगानां सुखावहम् ॥
तत्र प्रपाठकाः प्रोक्तास्तिथिसंख्यामुनर्मताः।
खएडाजमाया विज्ञेया छन्दोगाः कटपादयः ।
प्रथमे च तुरीये च पष्ठके सप्तमे तथा ।
त्रयोदशप्रपाठके रुद्रसंख्या मुनर्मताः ॥
द्वितीये च तृतीये च पञ्चमे दशमेपि च ।
अष्टमेकादशे विद्वन् दशसंख्यास्तु खण्डकाः ।।
नवमे द्वादशे चैव नवका मुनिसम्मताः ।
चतुर्दशे प्रपाठके खण्डा आदित्यसंज्ञकाः ।।
खएडास्त्रयोदश प्रोक्नास्तिथिसंख्याप्रपाठके ।
स्वरोनन्त्योऽथ प्रनाया हंहो उब्लि तथैव च ॥
तत्र मात्रमुणोधुश्च दिदुदीर्घान्त्य एव च ।
व्रदान्त्यङ्गि च अंसा च शौदात्ता अनृगाहिता ।।
दशकं तत्र संख्याभिर्विदुरेषाहमायनम् ।
सूत्रसंख्या तु गणयेनजनामायनं बुधाः ॥
सामतन्त्रमिदं प्रोक्तं समाप्तमगमं द्विजाः ।
भाष्यकारं भट्टपूर्वमुपाध्यायमहं सदा ॥
सूत्रकारं वररुचिं वन्दे पाणिश्च वेधसम् ।
फुल्बसूत्रविधानेन खण्डप्रपाठकानि च ।।
तदादीनि यथा ज्ञात्वा वक्ष्ये प्रपाठदीपिकाम् ।
प्रपाठकानां दशसुखएडाश्च धसका इति ॥
आदौ प्रपाठके तेषां सप्तविंशति खण्डकाः ।
एकोनत्रिंशता ज्ञेया द्वितीये तु प्रपाठके ।।
तृतीये च तुरीये च भष्टविंशतिमिस्मृताः ।

·फुलसूत्रम्
रसबाणमुनीनान्तु द्वादश द्वादशेव तु ॥
वसोग्रहस्य विज्ञेया दिकसंख्या मुनिभिस्मृता ।
दश प्रपाठके तत्र खण्डा एकादशैव हि ॥
आहत्य खण्डनवकसप्तत्यतिशतं बुधाः ।
प्रपाठकानामादिस्थसूत्राक्षरमहम्मदा ॥
ब्रवीमि श्लोकरूपेण ज्ञात्यर्थमधुना बुधाः ।
उच्चपन्यश्च तालव्यं कक्षसौभरमेव च ॥
अाकारो वृततो देवे यकारे च विकल्पकः ।
नकारश्च दश प्रोक्ता विज्ञेयास्सूत्रपंक्तिभिः ।।
षोडशे तु प्रकरणे प्रत्येकं खण्डसंज्ञकम् ।
पूर्वसामवशेनैव गायमानन्ततोपरि ।।
सामोपरि तथा ज्ञेया तस्मादादिप्रकारणे ।
सामोपरि तथा खण्डाषद् पञ्चाशत् प्रकीर्तिताः ॥
आइभावमथैकस्यात् प्रकृतेः पञ्च पञ्चाशत् ।
वृद्धा वृद्धन्तु चत्वारः चत्वारश्चागतागता ॥
उच्चनीचं चतुर्थन्तु पदसंधौ चतुर्थकम् ।
अत्वमेकमथार्भावे द्वावेव मुनिसम्मताः ॥
ततः प्रश्लेषविश्लेषतृतीयं परिकीर्तितम् ।
संकृष्टे च विकृष्टे च चतुष्टयमुदीरितम् ॥
अथ व्यजनलुप्ते तु चत्वारः परिकीर्तिताः ।
तदेव स्यादतिहते आभावे षष्ठक स्मृतम् ॥
पञ्चविंशद्विकारे तु प्रस्तावे द्वयमेव हि ।
आहत्य नवका प्रोक्कासप्ततिस्याच्छतात्परम् ।।
उच्चामहि पुनारवजये प्रत्वौशनन्तथा ।
उच्चातेजातमण्डाद्या भाइभावस्ते निदर्शनम् ।।
पुनानस्सोम देवो यौधाजये प्राकृते तथा ।
सौभराभीवर्तजयानां वृद्धन्तुरीयमक्षरम् ।।

·६
सामवेदसर्वानुक्रमणी
पुनानस्सोमधारया सोशब्दश्च निदर्शनम् ।
यत्र स्तोम इकारान्तो गतिसंज्ञो गतोपि सः॥
कथ्यते तत्र दृष्टान्तो होल प्रभृति हाल च ।
गतागतौ तु द्वौ सत्सु हाइहो इतीच निदर्शनम् ।।
द्विविधा गतिरिगतिरुगतिश्चेति मात्रालक्षणवचनात् ।
तर्जनीतस्समुक्षिप्त उद्धातः परिकीर्तितः ॥
तर्जन्याधः पतन्युच्चात्सनिघात इतीरितः।
तयोर्निदर्शनं प्रोक्नमामहीयवसामनि ॥
उद्घातस्येवरुणावरिवोविनिघातकम् ।
पदगीतं विसर्गान्तन्तमाः प्रोक्तनिदर्शनम् ।।
ओकारान्तं संधिगीतम्मदो इति निदर्शनम् ।
पार्थवाराहवासिष्ठप्रकापा शब्दरत्वरम् ॥
वृद्धमृवर्णमार्भावनन्तः कृष्णामपत्वचम् ।
एदोदाभ्यामन्तःसंस्थः यस्वरो लोपमाप्नुयात् ।।
प्रश्लेषः कथितस्सोत्र हृवसेवोग्नये यथा ।
न लुप्यते स्वरो यत्र विशेषस्तत्र कीर्तितः॥
निदर्शनद्वय प्रोक्तमेतदेव रथन्तरे ।
तत्संकृष्टं समुद्दिष्टं व्यञ्जनैर्यवयोर्युतिः ॥
भुज्याददे स्वायुधश्च निदर्शनमिति द्वयोः ।
असंयुतं विकृष्टं हि भूमियाचसुवायुधाः ॥
पूर्वांग तद्भवेत्पूर्व पदे संयुक्तमक्षरम् ।
परांगं तद्विजानीयाद् दृश्यते यत्परे पदे ॥
पुनानस्सोमधारयापोवसावानिदर्शनम् ।
पूर्वागस्य परांगस्य बयाहोवांसि कीर्तितः ॥
अतिहृतं बर्हिषि तर्तुराणाश्च पिशंगकम् ।
वृद्धमन्तपदे तालव्यमा भवति दीधिमः।
पदस्य पुनावृत्तिर्विकल्पःपरिकीर्तितम् ।

·शिक्षा
ऊहे निधनकामे च मदश्शब्दो निदर्शनम् ।।
अथोहगीतिः प्रस्तावभक्तिष्पोडश तु स्मृताः ।
आइभावादिभावानां सामतन्त्रेपि विस्तृतम् ॥
वन्दे वररुचिन्नित्यमूहाब्धैः पारदृश्वनम् ।
पोतो विनिर्मितो येन फुल्लमत्रशतैरलम् ।।
आदाय फुल्लं ह्यपवादसूत्राण्यानादिभावेषु करोति पोतम् ।
इदं फुल्लस्य सूत्रस्य बृहद् भाष्यं हि यत्कृतम् ।।
'नानाभाष्याख्यया रामकृष्णदीक्षितसूरिभिः ।
सामतन्त्रस्य यद्भाष्यमयमेवैव चिन्तितम् ।।
चतुर्दशावगृह्यस्य सूत्राण्यादिपदैरिदम् ।
लक्षणन्तु प्रवक्ष्येहमथावगृह्यतीति च ।।
हितवाक्ये त्रिंशदेव खण्डा आहुर्मनीषिणः ।
धर्मोपप्रकृतौ विद्धि सुचित्तो स्तोम एव च ॥
उत्तरस्यामृचि प्रोक्तो वेदो धर्म इतीरितम् ।
अनुक्तं सर्वमेतेषु पौरुषेणैव या कृता ।।
अथ स्तोभानुसहारे चत्वारिशच्च पाद्यकम् ।
आद्यन्तदर्शनस्तोभस्तत्रादौ तु प्रपठयते ॥
मात्राणां लक्षणं प्रोक्तं खण्डस्त्रिभिरुदाहतम् ।
फुल्लकारेण यत् प्रोक्तं तदुत्कृष्टं श्रुतौ विधिः ॥
आर्चिके लक्षणे प्रोक्तं श्लोकानान्तु त्रयोदश ।
उदात्तश्चानुदानश्च आदितक्रमशस्फुटम् ।।
फुल्लस्य लक्षणे श्लोकाश्चतुस्त्रिंशदुदीरिताः ।
अथ पञ्चविधाष्टौ तु लक्षणारंभ इष्यते ॥
पाणिन्युक्तौ तु शिक्षाया षष्टिश्लोकादाहृतम् ।
अथ शिक्षा प्रवक्ष्यामि सूत्रारंभणमुच्यते ॥

·सामवेदसर्वानुक्रमणी
कर्तृत्वमपि शिक्षाणां नामलिंगाच दृश्यते ।
इदं शिक्षस्ययं भाष्यं पिङ्गलाचार्यचिन्तितम् ॥
प्रपाठको द्वौ शिक्षायां नारदस्य तु शैक्षकम् ।
खएडाश्च षोडष प्रोक्का अष्टावष्टौ प्रपाठयोः॥
श्लोकेन पञ्चत्रिंशन समद्विशतसंख्यकम् ।
अथातःस्वरशास्त्राणां यवकारं समं विदुः ॥
भट्टशोभाकरेणोक्तमिदं ग्रन्थस्य विवृतम् ।
गौतमी शिक्षया प्रानौ पाठकद्वयमेव तु ॥
खण्डाश्च पोडश प्राहुर्मुनयस्सामचिन्तकाः ।
प्रपाठके तु प्रथमे खण्डास्तु वसुसंज्ञकाः ॥
द्वितीये नागसंख्यास्तु मुनीनाम्मतमीरितम् ।
त्रयस्त्रिंशद्व्यजनानि अस्योदन्तु द्वितीयके ।
खण्डास्तु लोमशिक्षायामष्टावाहुर्द्विजोत्तमाः ।
श्लोकानामष्टसप्तत्या पूर्णमाहुर्मुनीश्वराः ॥
लोमशिन्यां प्रवक्ष्यामीत्यादिश्लोकवाचकम् ।
रावणेन प्रणीतन्तु बेएणामलक्षणं बुधाः ॥
त्रयः प्रपाठकाः खण्डा रावणा यत् प्रकीर्तिताः ।
प्रपाठके तु प्रथमे षोडशीतिरुदाहृताः ॥
द्वितीयेथ वनं प्रोक्तं तृतीये मुनिभिःस्मृतम् ।
अग्ने यो प्रथमे विद्वन् आमनवौ द्वितीयके ।।
रथन्तरं स्वासुदिगिदौदुदौ पेढज एवतु ।
इत्येते सप्तदश तु लक्षणानि विदुर्बुधाः ॥
अध्यायास्तु त्रयः प्रोक्का गौतमप्रोक्तधर्मके।
नवविंशतिखण्डास्तु प्रथमे नवकं स्मृतम् ॥
द्वितीये च तृतीये च दशखएडास्समीरिताः ।
वेदो धर्मस्तु तत्रादि द्विजातीनां द्वितीयके ।
चतुष्पष्टिस्तृतीये तु समाप्तं धर्मशासनम् ।
कृतामिताक्षितीचाख्यो हरदत्तेन विस्तृतम् ।।
:

·No text on this page.

·No text on this page.